2007 Cadillac SRX Owner Manual M - Dealer eProcesscdn.dealereprocess.com/cdn/servicemanuals/cadillac/2007...Service and Appearance Care 343 Service 346 Fuel 349 Checking Things Under

Seats and Restraint Systems ....................... 7Front Seats .............................................. 9Rear Seats ............................................. 18Safety Belts ............................................ 22Child Restraints ...................................... 43Airbag System ........................................ 70Restraint System Check ......................... 89

Features and Controls ................................ 91Keys ....................................................... 93Doors and Locks .................................. 100Windows ............................................... 108Theft-Deterrent Systems ....................... 112Starting and Operating Your Vehicle ....... 116Mirrors .................................................. 134OnStar® System ................................... 139

Universal Home Remote System .......... 143Storage Areas ...................................... 153Sunroof ................................................ 156

Instrument Panel ....................................... 161Instrument Panel Overview ................... 164Climate Controls ................................... 189Warning Lights, Gages, and

Indicators .......................................... 197Driver Information Center (DIC) ............ 214Audio System(s) ................................... 240

Driving Your Vehicle ................................. 273Your Driving, the Road, and

Your Vehicle ..................................... 274Towing ................................................. 328

2007 Cadillac SRX Owner Manual M

1Information Provided by:

Service and Appearance Care .................. 343Service ................................................. 346Fuel ...................................................... 349Checking Things Under the Hood ......... 354All-Wheel Drive ..................................... 392Rear Axle ............................................. 394Front Axle ............................................ 395Bulb Replacement ................................ 396Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement .... 397Tires ..................................................... 398Appearance Care .................................. 443

Vehicle Identification ............................. 453Electrical System .................................. 454Capacities and Specifications ................ 464

Maintenance Schedule .............................. 467Maintenance Schedule .......................... 468

Customer Assistance Information ............. 487Customer Assistance and Information ..... 488Reporting Safety Defects ...................... 504

Index .......................................................... 507


GENERAL MOTORS, GM, the GM Emblem,CADILLAC, the CADILLAC Crest and Wreath, andthe name SRX are registered trademarks ofGeneral Motors Corporation.

This manual includes the latest information at thetime it was printed. We reserve the right tomake changes to the product after that timewithout notice. For vehicles first sold in Canada,substitute the name “General Motors of CanadaLimited” for Cadillac Motor Car Division wheneverit appears in this manual.

This manual describes features that may beavailable in this model, but your vehicle may nothave all of them. For example, more than oneentertainment system may be offered or yourvehicle may have been ordered without a frontpassenger or rear seats.

Keep this manual in the vehicle, so it will be thereif it is needed while you are on the road. If thevehicle is sold, leave this manual in the vehicle.

Canadian OwnersA French language copy of this manual can beobtained from your dealer or from:

Helm, IncorporatedP.O. Box 07130Detroit, MI 48207

Litho in U.S.A.Part No. 15861908 A First Printing ©2006 General Motors Corporation. All Rights Reserved.


How to Use This ManualMany people read the owner manual frombeginning to end when they first receive their newvehicle. If this is done, it can help you learnabout the features and controls for the vehicle.Pictures and words work together in theowner manual to explain things.

IndexA good place to quickly locate information aboutthe vehicle is the Index in the back of the manual.It is an alphabetical list of what is in the manualand the page number where it can be found.

Safety Warnings and SymbolsThere are a number of safety cautions in thisbook. We use a box and the word CAUTION totell about things that could hurt you if you were toignore the warning.

{CAUTION:

These mean there is something that couldhurt you or other people.

In the caution area, we tell you what the hazard is.Then we tell you what to do to help avoid orreduce the hazard. Please read these cautions. Ifyou do not, you or others could be hurt.

You will also find acircle with a slashthrough it in this book.This safety symbolmeans “Do Not,” “DoNot do this” or “Do Notlet this happen.”


Vehicle Damage WarningsAlso, in this manual you will find these notices:

Notice: These mean there is somethingthat could damage your vehicle.

A notice tells about something that can damagethe vehicle. Many times, this damage would not becovered by your vehicle’s warranty, and it couldbe costly. But the notice will tell what to do to helpavoid the damage.

When you read other manuals, you might seeCAUTION and NOTICE warnings in different colorsor in different words.

There are also warning labels on the vehicle. Theyuse the same words, CAUTION or NOTICE.

Vehicle SymbolsThe vehicle has components and labels that usesymbols instead of text. Symbols are shown alongwith the text describing the operation or informationrelating to a specific component, control, message,gage, or indicator.

If you need help figuring out a specific name of acomponent, gage, or indicator, reference thefollowing topics:

• Seats and Restraint Systems in Section 1

• Features and Controls in Section 2

• Instrument Panel Overview in Section 3

• Climate Controls in Section 3

• Warning Lights, Gages, and Indicators inSection 3

• Audio System(s) in Section 3

• Engine Compartment Overview in Section 5


These are some examples of symbols that may be found on the vehicle:


Front Seats ..................................................... 9Manual Seats ................................................ 9Power Seats ............................................... 10Power Lumbar ............................................. 10Heated Seats .............................................. 11Memory Seat and Mirrors ............................ 12Reclining Seatbacks .................................... 14Head Restraints .......................................... 17

Rear Seats .................................................... 18Rear Seat Operation ................................... 18Stowable Seat ............................................. 20

Safety Belts .................................................. 22Safety Belts: They Are for Everyone ........... 22Questions and Answers About Safety

Belts ........................................................ 26How to Wear Safety Belts Properly ............. 27Driver Position ............................................. 27

Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy .............. 35Right Front Passenger Position ................... 36Rear Seat Passengers ................................ 36Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides ................ 39Safety Belt Pretensioners ............................ 42Safety Belt Extender ................................... 42

Child Restraints ............................................ 43Older Children ............................................. 43Infants and Young Children ......................... 46Child Restraint Systems .............................. 49Where to Put the Restraint .......................... 53Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children

(LATCH) .................................................. 55Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear

Seat Position ........................................... 62Securing a Child Restraint in the Right

Front Seat Position .................................. 65

Section 1 Seats and Restraint Systems


Airbag System .............................................. 70Where Are the Airbags? .............................. 73When Should an Airbag Inflate? .................. 77What Makes an Airbag Inflate? ................... 79How Does an Airbag Restrain? ................... 79What Will You See After an Airbag

Inflates? ................................................... 80Passenger Sensing System ......................... 81

Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle ...... 87Adding Equipment to Your

Airbag-Equipped Vehicle .......................... 88Restraint System Check ............................... 89

Checking the Restraint Systems .................. 89Replacing Restraint System Parts After

a Crash ................................................... 90

Section 1 Seats and Restraint Systems


Front Seats

Manual Seats

{CAUTION:

If the seatback is not locked, it couldmove forward in a sudden stop or crash.That could cause injury to the personsitting there. Always push and pull onthe seatback to be sure it is locked.

Your vehicle may have manual seats. To adjust theseat, lift the bar under the front of the seat to unlockit. Slide the seat to where you want it and releasethe bar. Try to move the seat back and forth withyour body to be sure the seat is locked in place.


Power Seats

If the vehicle has power seats, the controls usedto operate them are located on the outboardside of the seats.

• Move the seat forward or rearward by slidingthe horizontal control forward or rearward.

• Raise or lower the front part of the seatcushion by moving the front of the horizontalcontrol up or down.

• Raise or lower the rear part of the seatcushion by moving the rear of the horizontalcontrol up or down.

• Raise or lower the entire seat by moving theentire horizontal control up or down.

The vertical control is used for reclining yourseatback. See “Power Reclining Seatbacks” underReclining Seatbacks on page 14 for moreinformation.

Power Lumbar

Your vehicle may havethis feature. The driver’sand passenger’sseatback lumbar supportcan be adjusted bymoving the controllocated on the outboardside of the seatcushions.


To increase or decrease support, hold the controlforward or rearward. Keep in mind that as yourseating position changes, as it may duringlong trips, so should the position of your lumbarsupport. Adjust the seat as needed.

Heated Seats

Your vehicle may haveheated front seats. Thecontrols are locatedon the driver’s andpassenger’s doors,near the door handle.

I (Heated Seatback): Press this button to turnon the heated seatback.

The light on the button will come on to indicatethat the feature is working. Press the buttonto cycle through the temperature settings of high,medium, and low and to turn the heat to theseatback off. Indicator lights next to the buttonshow the level of heat selected: three for high,two for medium, and one for low.

J (Heated Seat and Seatback): Press thisbutton to turn on the heated seat and seatback.

The light on the button will come on to indicate thatthe feature is working. Press the button to cyclethrough the temperature settings of high, medium,and low and to turn the heat to the seat off.Indicator lights next to the button will show thelevel of heat selected: three for high, two formedium, and one for low.

The heated seats will be canceled ten secondsafter the ignition is turned off. If you want touse the heated seat feature after you restart yourvehicle, you will need to press the appropriateheated seat or seatback button again.


Memory Seat and MirrorsIf your vehicle has the memory feature, you canprogram and recall memory settings for the driver’sseating and outside rearview mirror drivingpositions for up to two drivers. If your vehicle hasthe adjustable throttle and brake pedal feature,you can also program and recall memory settingsfor the throttle and brake pedal driving positions.

The buttons for this feature are located on thedriver’s door armrest.

Use the following steps to program the buttons:

1. Adjust the driver’s seat including the seatbackrecliner, both outside mirrors, and the throttleand brake pedals. See Outside PowerHeated Mirrors on page 137 and AdjustableThrottle and Brake Pedal on page 120for more information.

2. Press and hold button 1 for at leastthree seconds.Two beeps will sound to confirm that the seatand mirror positions have been saved.

3. Repeat the procedure for a second driverusing button 2.

The vehicle must be in PARK (P) to recall thestored driving positions.

Press one of the numbered memory buttons torecall the stored setting. Each time a memorybutton is pressed, a single beep will sound.

A chime will sound and the setting will not berecalled if you press button 1 or 2 when the vehicleis not in PARK (P).

If you would like the stored driving positions to berecalled when unlocking your vehicle with theremote keyless entry transmitter or when you placethe key in the ignition, see DIC VehicleCustomization on page 231.

To stop recall movement of the memory feature atany time, press one of the power seat or mirrorcontrols.


Two personalized exit positions can also beprogrammed. Use the following steps to programexit positions:

1. Press memory seat button 1 or the button withthe unlock symbol on the remote keylessentry transmitter with the number 1 onthe back to recall the driving position.

2. Adjust the driver’s seat to the desired exitposition.

3. Press and hold the exit button located abovebuttons 1 and 2 on the driver’s door armrestfor at least three seconds.Two beeps will sound to confirm that the exitposition has been saved.

4. Repeat the procedure for a second driverusing memory seat button 2 or the remotekeyless entry transmitter with the number 2 onthe back.

To recall the stored exit positions, press andrelease the exit button. One beep will sound, andthe seat will move to the previously stored exitposition for the currently identified driver. If an exitposition has not been stored for this driver, theseat will move all the way back. The position of theoutside mirrors is not stored or recalled for theexit position.

The vehicle must be in PARK (P) to recall the exitpositions.

A chime will sound and the exit setting will not berecalled if you press the exit button when thevehicle is not in PARK (P).

If you would like your stored exit position to berecalled when unlocking the vehicle with theremote keyless entry transmitter or when theignition is turned off and the driver’s door isopened, see DIC Vehicle Customization onpage 231.


Reclining Seatbacks

Manual Reclining Seatbacks

{CAUTION:

You can lose control of the vehicle if youtry to adjust a manual driver’s seat whilethe vehicle is moving. The suddenmovement could startle and confuse you,or make you push a pedal when you donot want to. Adjust the driver’s seat onlywhen the vehicle is not moving.

{CAUTION:

If the seatback is not locked, it couldmove forward in a sudden stop or crash.That could cause injury to the personsitting there. Always push and pull onthe seatback to be sure it is locked.

If your front passenger’s seat has a manualreclining seatback, the lever used to operate it islocated on the outboard side of the seat.

To recline the seatback, do the following:

1. Lift the recline lever.

2. Move the seatback to the desired position,then release the lever to lock the seatbackin place.

3. Push and pull on the seatback to make sure itis locked.


To return the seatback to an upright position, dothe following:

1. Lift the lever fully without applying pressure tothe seatback and the seatback will return tothe upright position.

2. Push and pull on the seatback to make sure itis locked.

Power Reclining Seatbacks

If your seats have power reclining seatbacks, usethe vertical power seat control located on theoutboard side of each seat.

• To recline the seatback, press the controltoward the rear of the vehicle.

• To raise the seatback, press the controltoward the front of the vehicle.


{CAUTION:

Sitting in a reclined position when yourvehicle is in motion can be dangerous.Even if you buckle up, your safety beltscannot do their job when you are reclinedlike this.

The shoulder belt cannot do its job. In acrash, you could go into it, receiving neckor other injuries.

The lap belt cannot do its job either. In acrash the belt could go up over yourabdomen. The belt forces would be there,not at your pelvic bones. This could causeserious internal injuries.

For proper protection when the vehicle isin motion, have the seatback upright.Then sit well back in the seat and wearyour safety belt properly.

Do not have a seatback reclined if your vehicle ismoving.


Head Restraints

Adjust the head restraint so that the top of therestraint is at the same height as the top ofthe occupant’s head. This position reduces thechance of a neck injury in a crash.

The height of the frontseat head restraints canbe adjusted. Pull therestraint up to raise it.To lower it, pressthe button, located onthe top of the seatback,and push the headrestraint down.

The front seat head restraints can also tilt forwardand rearward. The second row seat head restsdo not tilt.

The height of the second row seat outboard headrests and the third row seat head rests, if thevehicle has them, can be adjusted. Pull these headrests up or push them down for adjustment.

The second row seat may have a head rest in thecenter position.


If the vehicle has third row seats, the head restsadjust like the front seat head restraints.

The third row seat head rests can be removedfrom the seatback. To do this, press the button,located on the top of the seatback, and pull themout from the seatback. Store the head rest,front side facing up, in the compartment behindthe third row, by inserting the head rest posts intothe slots in the storage area.

Rear Seats

Rear Seat Operation

Adjusting the Second Row SeatThe second row seat can be adjusted forward orrearward. Pull up on the lever under the seatcushion and slide the seat with your body. Releasethe lever and try to move the seat forward andrearward to be sure it is locked into place.


Entering or Exiting the Third Row Seat

{CAUTION:

Be sure to return the seat to the passengerseating position when finished. Push andpull on the seat to make sure it is lockedinto place. Never use the third row seatingposition while the second row is folded, orfolded and tumbled. This could causeinjury in a sudden stop or crash.

The passenger’s side of the second row seat hasan easy entry feature. This makes it easy toget in and out of the third row seat, if your vehiclehas one.

Notice: Folding a rear seat with the safetybelts still fastened may cause damage to theseat or the safety belts. Always unbucklethe safety belts and return them to their normalstowed position before folding a rear seat.

To operate the seat, pull the release handlelocated on the top of the seatback. Fold theseatback forward, then pull the release handle onthe top of the seatback to release the seat totumble forward.


Stowable SeatIf your vehicle has a third row seat, it is a powerfolding seat.

The head rests need to be removed before foldingthe third row seat. See Head Restraints onpage 17 for instructions for removing the third rowseat head rests. The seatback will not fold allof the way down if the head rests are not removed.

The buttons that are used to operate the powerfolding third row seat are located inside of theliftgate and behind the second row seat on thepassenger’s side of the vehicle.

Two buttons are located inside the liftgate.One button is to tilt the seatback forward for addedstorage space or when storing a flat tire. Theother button is the power folding seat button. Thebutton behind the second row seat is also apower folding seat button. Press and hold eitherone of the two power folding seat buttons tofold the seat.

Notice: Folding a rear seat with the safetybelts still fastened may cause damage to theseat or the safety belts. Always unbucklethe safety belts and return them to their normalstowed position before folding a rear seat.

Inside Liftgate


Before folding or unfolding the third row seat, all ofthe following conditions must be met:

• The liftgate or passenger’s side rear doormust be open.

• The unlock button on either the remotekeyless entry transmitter or the door must bepressed three times to enable the rearseat for two minutes, or the ignition must be inON or ACCESSORY.

• The vehicle must be in PARK (P).

• The vehicle cannot have a low battery.

After the seat has folded, the panel on the seatmust be folded forward to create the flat floor.

If the seat’s path is blocked it will stop and backaway. Press the button again to return the seat toits previous position.

Before returning the third row seat to thepassenger seating position, the panel must befolded back upon itself. Press and hold one of thepower folding seat buttons and the seat willunfold into the seating position. If the seat is notunfolded fully into the seating position, a chime willsound when the vehicle is shifted out of PARK (P).This indicates that the seat is not ready for apassenger.

Replace the head rests.


Safety Belts

Safety Belts: They Are for EveryoneThis part of the manual tells you how to usesafety belts properly. It also tells you some thingsyou should not do with safety belts.

{CAUTION:

Do not let anyone ride where he or shecannot wear a safety belt properly. If youare in a crash and you are not wearing asafety belt, your injuries can be muchworse. You can hit things inside thevehicle or be ejected from it. You can beseriously injured or killed. In the samecrash, you might not be, if you arebuckled up. Always fasten your safetybelt, and check that your passengers’belts are fastened properly too.

{CAUTION:

It is extremely dangerous to ride in acargo area, inside or outside of a vehicle.In a collision, people riding in these areasare more likely to be seriously injured orkilled. Do not allow people to ride in anyarea of your vehicle that is not equippedwith seats and safety belts. Be sureeveryone in your vehicle is in a seat andusing a safety belt properly.

Your vehicle has a lightthat comes on as areminder to buckle up.See Safety BeltReminder Light onpage 200.


In most states and in all Canadian provinces, thelaw says to wear safety belts. Here is why:They work.

You never know if you will be in a crash. If you dohave a crash, you do not know if it will be abad one.

A few crashes are mild, and some crashes can beso serious that even buckled up, a personwould not survive. But most crashes are inbetween. In many of them, people who buckle upcan survive and sometimes walk away. Withoutbelts they could have been badly hurt or killed.

After more than 40 years of safety belts invehicles, the facts are clear. In most crashesbuckling up does matter... a lot!

Why Safety Belts WorkWhen you ride in or on anything, you go as fastas it goes.

Take the simplest vehicle. Suppose it is just aseat on wheels.


Put someone on it. Get it up to speed. Then stop the vehicle. Therider does not stop.


The person keeps going until stopped bysomething. In a real vehicle, it could be thewindshield...

or the instrument panel...


or the safety belts!

With safety belts, you slow down as the vehicledoes. You get more time to stop. You stopover more distance, and your strongest bonestake the forces. That is why safety beltsmake such good sense.

Questions and Answers AboutSafety Belts

Q: Will I be trapped in the vehicle after anaccident if I am wearing a safety belt?

A: You could be — whether you are wearing asafety belt or not. But you can unbuckle asafety belt, even if you are upside down. Andyour chance of being conscious during andafter an accident, so you can unbuckle and getout, is much greater if you are belted.

Q: If my vehicle has airbags, why should Ihave to wear safety belts?

A: Airbags are supplemental systems only; sothey work with safety belts — not instead ofthem. Every airbag system ever offeredfor sale has required the use of safety belts.Even if you are in a vehicle that has airbags,you still have to buckle up to get the mostprotection. That is true not only in frontalcollisions, but especially in side and othercollisions.


Q: If I am a good driver, and I never drive farfrom home, why should I wear safety belts?

A: You may be an excellent driver, but if you arein an accident — even one that is not yourfault — you and your passengers can be hurt.Being a good driver does not protect youfrom things beyond your control, such as baddrivers.

Most accidents occur within 25 miles (40 km)of home. And the greatest number ofserious injuries and deaths occur at speedsof less than 40 mph (65 km/h).

Safety belts are for everyone.

How to Wear Safety Belts ProperlyThis part is only for people of adult size.

Be aware that there are special things to knowabout safety belts and children. And thereare different rules for smaller children and babies.If a child will be riding in your vehicle, seeOlder Children on page 43 or Infants and YoungChildren on page 46. Follow those rules foreveryone’s protection.

First, you will want to know which restraintsystems your vehicle has.

We will start with the driver position.

Driver Position

Lap-Shoulder BeltThe driver has a lap-shoulder belt. Here is how towear it properly.

1. Close and lock the door.

2. Adjust the seat so you can sit up straight. Tosee how, see “Seats” in the Index.


3. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt acrossyou. Do not let it get twisted.The lap-shoulder belt may lock if you pull thebelt across you very quickly. If this happens,let the belt go back slightly to unlock it.Then pull the belt across you more slowly.

4. Push the latch plate into the buckle untilit clicks.Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it issecure.

If the belt is not long enough, see Safety BeltExtender on page 42.Make sure the release button on the buckle ispositioned so you would be able to unbucklethe safety belt quickly if you ever had to.

5. To make the lap part tight, pull up on theshoulder belt.It may be necessary to pull stitching on thesafety belt through the latch plate to fullytighten the lap belt on smaller occupants.


The lap part of the belt should be worn low andsnug on the hips, just touching the thighs. Ina crash, this applies force to the strong pelvicbones. And you would be less likely to slide underthe lap belt. If you slid under it, the belt wouldapply force at your abdomen. This could causeserious or even fatal injuries. The shoulderbelt should go over the shoulder and across thechest. These parts of the body are best ableto take belt restraining forces.

The safety belt locks if there is a sudden stopor crash.


Q: What is wrong with this?

A: The shoulder belt is too loose. It will not givenearly as much protection this way.

{CAUTION:

You can be seriously hurt if your shoulderbelt is too loose. In a crash, you wouldmove forward too much, which couldincrease injury. The shoulder belt shouldfit against your body.



A: The lap belt is too loose. It will not give nearlyas much protection this way.

{CAUTION:

You can be seriously hurt if your lap beltis too loose. In a crash, you could slideunder the lap belt and apply force at yourabdomen. This could cause serious oreven fatal injuries. The lap belt should beworn low and snug on the hips, justtouching the thighs.



A: The belt is buckled in the wrong place.

{CAUTION:

You can be seriously injured if your belt isbuckled in the wrong place like this. In acrash, the belt would go up over yourabdomen. The belt forces would be there,not at the pelvic bones. This could causeserious internal injuries. Always buckleyour belt into the buckle nearest you.



A: The shoulder belt is worn under the arm. Itshould be worn over the shoulder at all times.

{CAUTION:

You can be seriously injured if you wearthe shoulder belt under your arm. In acrash, your body would move too farforward, which would increase the chanceof head and neck injury. Also, the beltwould apply too much force to the ribs,which are not as strong as shoulderbones. You could also severely injureinternal organs like your liver or spleen.



A: The belt is twisted across the body.

{CAUTION:

You can be seriously injured by a twistedbelt. In a crash, you would not have thefull width of the belt to spread impactforces. If a belt is twisted, make it straightso it can work properly, or ask your dealerto fix it.


To unlatch the belt, push the button on the buckle.The belt should go back out of the way.

Before you close the door, be sure the belt is outof the way. If you slam the door on it, you candamage both the belt and your vehicle.

Safety Belt Use During PregnancySafety belts work for everyone, including pregnantwomen. Like all occupants, they are more likelyto be seriously injured if they do not wearsafety belts.

A pregnant woman should wear a lap-shoulderbelt, and the lap portion should be worn as low aspossible, below the rounding, throughout thepregnancy.


The best way to protect the fetus is to protect themother. When a safety belt is worn properly, itis more likely that the fetus will not be hurtin a crash. For pregnant women, as for anyone,the key to making safety belts effective is wearingthem properly.

Right Front Passenger PositionTo learn how to wear the right front passenger’ssafety belt properly, see Driver Position onpage 27.

The right front passenger’s safety belt works thesame way as the driver’s safety belt — exceptfor one thing. If the belt stops before it reaches the buckle, tilt

the latch plate and keep pulling until you canbuckle the belt.

Rear Seat PassengersIt is very important for rear seat passengers tobuckle up! Accident statistics show that unbeltedpeople in the rear seat are hurt more often incrashes than those who are wearing safety belts.


Rear passengers who are not safety belted can bethrown out of the vehicle in a crash. And they canstrike others in the vehicle who are wearing safetybelts.

Lap-Shoulder BeltAll rear seat positions have lap-shoulder belts.Here is how to wear one properly.

1. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt acrossyou. Do not let it get twisted.

The shoulder belt may lock if you pull the beltacross you very quickly. If this happens, letthe belt go back slightly to unlock it. Then pullthe belt across you more slowly.

2. Push the latch plate into the buckle untilit clicks.Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it issecure.When the shoulder belt is pulled out all theway, it will lock. If it does, let it go back all theway and start again.If the belt is not long enough, see Safety BeltExtender on page 42.Make sure the release button on the buckle ispositioned so you would be able to unbucklethe safety belt quickly if you ever had to.


3. To make the lap part tight, pull up on theshoulder part.

The lap part of the belt should be worn low andsnug on the hips, just touching the thighs. In acrash, this applies force to the strong pelvic bones.And you would be less likely to slide under the lapbelt. If you slid under it, the belt would apply force atyour abdomen. This could cause serious or evenfatal injuries. The shoulder belt should go over theshoulder and across the chest. These parts of thebody are best able to take belt restraining forces.The safety belt locks if there is a sudden stop ora crash.


{CAUTION:

You can be seriously hurt if your shoulderbelt is too loose. In a crash, you wouldmove forward too much, which couldincrease injury. The shoulder belt shouldfit against your body.

To unlatch the belt, push the button on the buckle.

Rear Safety Belt Comfort GuidesRear shoulder belt comfort guides may provideadded safety belt comfort for older childrenwho have outgrown booster seats and for smalladults. When installed on a shoulder belt, thecomfort guide better positions the belt away fromthe neck and head.

There is one guide available for each of the rearoutside passenger positions in the second row.


Here is how to install the comfort guide to theshoulder belt.

1. Slide the guide off of its storage clip locatedon the seatback.

2. Slide the guide under and past the belt. Theelastic cord must be under the belt. Then,place the guide over the belt and insertthe two edges of the belt into the slots ofthe guide.

3. Be sure that the belt is not twisted and it liesflat. The elastic cord must be under the beltand the guide on top.


{CAUTION:

A safety belt that is not properly worn maynot provide the protection needed in acrash. The person wearing the belt couldbe seriously injured. The shoulder beltshould go over the shoulder and acrossthe chest. These parts of the body are bestable to take belt restraining forces.

4. Buckle, position, and release the safety beltas described in Rear Seat Passengers onpage 36. Make sure that the shoulderbelt crosses the shoulder.

To remove and store the comfort guide, squeezethe belt edges together so that you can takethem out of the guide. Slide the guide back on itsstorage clip located on the seatback.


Safety Belt PretensionersYour vehicle has safety belt pretensioners for thedriver and right front passenger. Although youcannot see them, they are part of the safety beltassembly. They help tighten the safety belts duringthe early stages of a moderate to severe frontalor near frontal crash if the threshold conditions forpretensioner activation are met. And, if yourvehicle has side impact rollover airbags, safetybelt pretensioners can help tighten the safety beltsin a side crash or a rollover event.

Pretensioners work only once. If they activate in acrash, you will need to get new ones, andprobably other new parts for your safety beltsystem. See Replacing Restraint System PartsAfter a Crash on page 90.

Safety Belt ExtenderIf the vehicle’s safety belt will fasten around you,you should use it.

But if a safety belt is not long enough, your dealerwill order you an extender. When you go in toorder it, take the heaviest coat you will wear, sothe extender will be long enough for you. Tohelp avoid personal injury, do not let someone elseuse it, and use it only for the seat it is made tofit. The extender has been designed for adults.Never use it for securing child seats. To wear it,just attach it to the regular safety belt. Formore information see the instruction sheet thatcomes with the extender.


Child Restraints

Older Children

Older children who have outgrown booster seatsshould wear the vehicle’s safety belts.

Q: What is the proper way to wear safetybelts?

A: An older child should wear a lap-shoulder beltand get the additional restraint a shoulder beltcan provide. The shoulder belt should notcross the face or neck. The lap belt should fitsnugly below the hips, just touching thetop of the thighs. It should never be worn overthe abdomen, which could cause severe oreven fatal internal injuries in a crash.

According to accident statistics, children are saferwhen properly restrained in the rear seatingpositions than in the front seating positions.

In a crash, children who are not buckled up canstrike other people who are buckled up, or can bethrown out of the vehicle. Older children needto use safety belts properly.


{CAUTION:

Never do this.

Here two children are wearing the samebelt. The belt cannot properly spread theimpact forces. In a crash, the two childrencan be crushed together and seriouslyinjured. A belt must be used by onlyone person at a time.

Q: What if a child is wearing a lap-shoulderbelt, but the child is so small that theshoulder belt is very close to the child’sface or neck?

A: If the child is sitting in a seat next to awindow, move the child toward the center ofthe vehicle. Also see Rear Safety BeltComfort Guides on page 39. If the child issitting in the center rear seat passengerposition, move the child toward the safety beltbuckle. In either case, be sure that theshoulder belt still is on the child’s shoulder, sothat in a crash the child’s upper body wouldhave the restraint that belts provide.


{CAUTION:

Never do this.

Here a child is sitting in a seat that has alap-shoulder belt, but the shoulder part isbehind the child. If the child wears thebelt in this way, in a crash the child mightslide under the belt. The belt’s forcewould then be applied right on the child’sabdomen. That could cause serious orfatal injuries.

Wherever the child sits, the lap portion of the beltshould be worn low and snug on the hips, justtouching the child’s thighs. This applies belt forceto the child’s pelvic bones in a crash.


Infants and Young ChildrenEveryone in a vehicle needs protection! Thisincludes infants and all other children. Neither thedistance traveled nor the age and size of thetraveler changes the need, for everyone, to usesafety restraints. In fact, the law in every statein the United States and in every Canadianprovince says children up to some age must berestrained while in a vehicle.

{CAUTION:

Children can be seriously injured orstrangled if a shoulder belt is wrappedaround their neck and the safety beltcontinues to tighten. Never leave childrenunattended in a vehicle and never allowchildren to play with the safety belts.

Every time infants and young children ride invehicles, they should have the protection providedby appropriate restraints.

Young children should not use the vehicle’s adultsafety belts alone, unless there is no other choice.Instead, they need to use a child restraint.

{CAUTION:

People should never hold a baby in theirarms while riding in a vehicle. A babydoes not weigh much — until a crash.During a crash a baby will become soheavy it is not possible to hold it. Forexample, in a crash at only 25 mph(40 km/h), a 12 lb (5.5 kg) baby willsuddenly become a 240 lb (110 kg) forceon a person’s arms. A baby should besecured in an appropriate restraint.


{CAUTION:

Children who are up against, or very closeto, any airbag when it inflates can beseriously injured or killed. Airbags pluslap-shoulder belts offer protection foradults and older children, but not for

CAUTION: (Continued)


young children and infants. Neither thevehicle’s safety belt system nor its airbagsystem is designed for them. Youngchildren and infants need the protectionthat a child restraint system can provide.


Q: What are the different types of add-onchild restraints?

A: Add-on child restraints, which are purchased bythe vehicle’s owner, are available in four basictypes. Selection of a particular restraint shouldtake into consideration not only the child’sweight, height, and age but also whether or notthe restraint will be compatible with the motorvehicle in which it will be used.

For most basic types of child restraints, thereare many different models available. Whenpurchasing a child restraint, be sure it isdesigned to be used in a motor vehicle. If it is,the restraint will have a label saying that itmeets federal motor vehicle safety standards.

The restraint manufacturer’s instructions thatcome with the restraint state the weight andheight limitations for a particular child restraint.In addition, there are many kinds of restraintsavailable for children with special needs.

{CAUTION:

Newborn infants need complete support,including support for the head and neck.This is necessary because a newborninfant’s neck is weak and its head weighsso much compared with the rest of itsbody. In a crash, an infant in a rear-facingseat settles into the restraint, so the crashforces can be distributed across thestrongest part of an infant’s body, theback and shoulders. Infants alwaysshould be secured in appropriate infantrestraints.


{CAUTION:

The body structure of a young child isquite unlike that of an adult or older child,for whom the safety belts are designed. Ayoung child’s hip bones are still so smallthat the vehicle’s regular safety belt maynot remain low on the hip bones, as itshould. Instead, it may settle up aroundthe child’s abdomen. In a crash, the beltwould apply force on a body area that isunprotected by any bony structure. Thisalone could cause serious or fatal injuries.Young children always should be securedin appropriate child restraints.

Child Restraint Systems

An infant car bed (A), a special bed made for usein a motor vehicle, is an infant restraint systemdesigned to restrain or position a child on acontinuous flat surface. Make sure that the infant’shead rests toward the center of the vehicle.


A rear-facing infant seat (B) provides restraintwith the seating surface against the back of theinfant. The harness system holds the infantin place and, in a crash, acts to keep the infantpositioned in the restraint.

A forward-facing child seat (C-E) provides restraintfor the child’s body with the harness and alsosometimes with surfaces such as T-shapedor shelf-like shields.


A booster seat (F-G) is a child restraint designedto improve the fit of the vehicle’s safety beltsystem. Some booster seats have a shoulder beltpositioner, and some high-back booster seatshave a five-point harness. A booster seat can alsohelp a child to see out the window.

Q: How Should I Use a Child Restraint?

A: A child restraint system is any device designedfor use in a motor vehicle to restrain, seat, orposition children. A built-in child restraintsystem is a permanent part of the motorvehicle. An add-on child restraint system is aportable one, which is purchased by thevehicle’s owner. To help reduce injuries, anadd-on child restraint must be secured inthe vehicle. With built-in or add-on childrestraints, the child has to be secured withinthe child restraint.

When choosing an add-on child restraint, besure the child restraint is designed to beused in a vehicle. If it is, it will have a labelsaying that it meets federal motor vehiclesafety standards. Then follow the instructionsfor the restraint. You may find theseinstructions on the restraint itself or in abooklet, or both.


Securing an Add-on Child Restraint inthe Vehicle

{CAUTION:

A child can be seriously injured or killedin a crash if the child restraint is notproperly secured in the vehicle. Make surethe child restraint is properly installed inthe vehicle using the vehicle’s safety beltor LATCH system, following theinstructions that came with that restraint,and also the instructions in this manual.

To help reduce the chance of injury, the childrestraint must be secured in the vehicle. Childrestraint systems must be secured in vehicle seatsby lap belts or the lap belt portion of a lap-shoulderbelt, or by the LATCH system.

See Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children(LATCH) on page 55 for more information. A childcan be endangered in a crash if the childrestraint is not properly secured in the vehicle.

When securing an add-on child restraint, refer tothe instructions that come with the restraintwhich may be on the restraint itself or in a booklet,or both, and to this manual. The child restraintinstructions are important, so if they are notavailable, obtain a replacement copy from themanufacturer.

Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint canmove around in a collision or sudden stop andinjure people in the vehicle. Be sure to properlysecure any child restraint in your vehicle — evenwhen no child is in it.


Securing the Child Within the ChildRestraintThere are several systems for securing the childwithin the child restraint. One system, thethree-point harness, has straps that come downover each of the infant’s shoulders and buckletogether at the crotch. The five-point harnesssystem has two shoulder straps, two hip straps, anda crotch strap. A shield may take the place of hipstraps. A T-shaped shield has shoulder straps thatare attached to a flat pad which rests low againstthe child’s body. A shelf- or armrest-type shield hasstraps that are attached to a wide, shelf-like shieldthat swings up or to the side.

{CAUTION:

A child can be seriously injured or killedin a crash if the child is not properlysecured in the child restraint. Make surethe child is properly secured, followingthe instructions that came with thatrestraint.

Because there are different systems, it is importantto refer to the instructions that come with therestraint. A child can be endangered in a crash ifthe child is not properly secured in the childrestraint.

Where to Put the RestraintAccident statistics show that children are safer ifthey are restrained in the rear rather than the frontseat. We recommend that child restraints besecured in a rear seat, including an infant riding ina rear-facing infant seat, a child riding in aforward-facing child seat and an older child ridingin a booster seat.


Your vehicle has a rear seat that will accommodatea rear-facing child restraint. A label on your sunvisor says, “Never put a rear-facing child seatin the front.” This is because the risk to therear-facing child is so great, if the airbag deploys.

{CAUTION:

A child in a rear-facing child restraint canbe seriously injured or killed if the rightfront passenger’s airbag inflates. This isbecause the back of the rear-facing childrestraint would be very close to theinflating airbag.

Even though the passenger sensingsystem is designed to turn off thepassenger’s frontal airbag if the systemdetects a rear-facing child restraint, nosystem is fail-safe, and no one can



guarantee that an airbag will not deployunder some unusual circumstance, eventhough it is turned off. We recommendthat rear-facing child restraints be securedin the rear seat, even if the airbag is off.

If you need to secure a forward-facingchild restraint in the right front seat,always move the front passenger seat asfar back as it will go. It is better to securethe child restraint in a rear seat.

Wherever you install a child restraint, be sure tosecure the child restraint properly.

Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint canmove around in a collision or sudden stop andinjure people in the vehicle. Be sure to properlysecure any child restraint in your vehicle — evenwhen no child is in it.


Lower Anchors and Tethers forChildren (LATCH)The LATCH system holds a child restraint duringdriving or in a crash. This system is designedto make installation of a child restraint easier. TheLATCH system uses anchors in the vehicle andattachments on the child restraint that are made foruse with the LATCH system.

Make sure that a LATCH-compatible child restraintis properly installed using the anchors, or usethe vehicle’s safety belts to secure the restraint,following the instructions that came with thatrestraint, and also the instructions in this manual.When installing a child restraint with a toptether, you must also use either the lower anchorsor the safety belts to properly secure the childrestraint. A child restraint must never be installedusing only the top tether and anchor.

In order to use the LATCH system in your vehicle,you need a child restraint that has LATCHattachments. The child restraint manufacturer willprovide you with instructions on how to usethe child restraint and its attachments. Thefollowing explains how to attach a child restraintwith these attachments in your vehicle.

Not all vehicle seating positions or child restraintshave lower anchors and attachments or toptether anchors and attachments.

Lower Anchors

Lower anchors (A) are metal bars built into thevehicle. There are two lower anchors for eachLATCH seating position that will accommodate achild restraint with lower attachments (B).


Top Tether Anchor

A top tether (A, C) anchors the top of the childrestraint to the vehicle. A top tether anchor is builtinto the vehicle. The top tether attachment (B)on the child restraint connects to the top tetheranchor in the vehicle in order to reduce the forwardmovement and rotation of the child restraintduring driving or in a crash.

Your child restraint may have a single tether (A)or a dual tether (C). Either will have a singleattachment (B) to secure the top tether tothe anchor.

Some child restraints that have a top tether aredesigned for use with or without the top tetherbeing attached. Others require the top tetheralways to be attached. In Canada, the law requiresthat forward-facing child restraints have a toptether, and that the tether be attached. Inthe United States, some child restraints also havea top tether. Be sure to read and follow theinstructions for your child restraint.

If the child restraint does not have a top tether,one can be obtained, in kit form, for manychild restraints. Ask the child restraintmanufacturer whether or not a kit is available.


Lower Anchor and Top Tether AnchorLocations

i (Top Tether Anchor):Seating positions withtop tether anchors.

j (Lower Anchor):Seating positions withtwo lower anchors.

Each outboard seating position in the second rowhas exposed metal lower anchors in the creasebetween the seatback and the seat cushion.

To assist you in locatingthe top tether anchors,the top tether anchorsymbol is locatednear the top tetheranchors.

Second Row


There are two top tether anchors located on theside of the wheel well in the rear cargo area. Thereis another top tether anchor in the center of therear cargo area. Be sure to use an anchor locatedon the same side of the vehicle as the seatingposition where the child restraint will be placed.

Do not secure a child restraint in the right frontpassenger’s position or any third row position if anational or local law requires that the top tetherbe attached, or if the instructions that comewith the child restraint say that the top tether mustbe attached. There is no place to attach the toptether in this position.

Accident statistics show that children are safer ifthey are restrained in the rear rather than the frontseat. See Where to Put the Restraint on page 53for additional information.


Securing a Child Restraint Designed forthe LATCH System

{CAUTION:

If a LATCH-type child restraint is notattached to anchors, the restraint will notbe able to protect the child correctly. In acrash, the child could be seriously injuredor killed. Make sure that a LATCH-typechild restraint is properly installed usingthe anchors, or use the vehicle’s safetybelts to secure the restraint, following theinstructions that came with that restraint,and also the instructions in this manual.

{CAUTION:

Each top tether anchor and lower anchorin the vehicle is designed to hold onlyone child restraint. Attaching more thanone child restraint to a single anchorcould cause the anchor or attachment tocome loose or even break during a crash.A child or others could be injured if thishappens. To help prevent injury to peopleand damage to your vehicle, attach onlyone child restraint per anchor.


{CAUTION:

Children can be seriously injured orstrangled if a shoulder belt is wrappedaround their neck and the safety beltcontinues to tighten. Secure any unusedsafety belts behind the child restraint sochildren cannot reach them. Pull theshoulder belt all the way out of theretractor to set the lock, if your vehiclehas one, after the child restraint has beeninstalled. Be sure to follow theinstructions of the child restraintmanufacturer.

Notice: Contact between the child restraint orthe LATCH attachment parts and the vehicle’ssafety belt assembly may cause damage tothese parts. Make sure when securing unusedsafety belts behind the child restraint thatthere is no contact between the child restraintor the LATCH attachment parts and thevehicle’s safety belt assembly.

Folding an empty rear seat with the safetybelts secured may cause damage to the safetybelt or the seat. When removing the childrestraint, always remember to return the safetybelts to their normal, stowed position beforefolding the rear seat.

1. Attach and tighten the lower attachments tothe lower anchors. If the child restraint doesnot have lower attachments or the desiredseating position does not have lower anchors,secure the child restraint with the top tetherand the safety belts. Refer to your childrestraint manufacturer instructions and theinstructions in this manual.

1.1. Find the lower anchors for the desiredseating position.

1.2. Put the child restraint on the seat.1.3. Attach and tighten the lower attachments

on the child restraint to the loweranchors.


2. If the child restraint manufacturer recommendsthat the top tether be attached, attach andtighten the top tether to the top tether anchor,if equipped. Refer to the child restraintinstructions and the following steps:

2.1. Find the top tether anchor.2.2. If you have an adjustable head restraint,

raise the head restraint.2.3. Route, attach and tighten the top tether

according to your child restraintinstructions and the followinginstructions:

If the position you areusing does not have ahead restraint andyou are using a singletether, route thetether over theseatback.

If the position you areusing does not have ahead restraint andyou are using a dualtether, route thetether over theseatback.

If the position you areusing has an adjustablehead restraint and youare using a dual tether,route the tether underthe head restraint and inbetween the headrestraint posts.


If the position you areusing has an adjustablehead restraint and youare using a single tether,route the tether underthe head restraint and inbetween the headrestraint posts.

3. Push and pull the child restraint in differentdirections to be sure it is secure.

Securing a Child Restraint in aRear Seat PositionIf your child restraint has the LATCH system, seeLower Anchors and Tethers for Children(LATCH) on page 55.

There are no top tether anchors in the third rowseating positions. Do not secure a child restraint inthe third row if a national or local law requiresthat a top tether be anchored or if the instructionsthat come with the restraint say that the toptether must be anchored.

If your child restraint does not have the LATCHsystem, you will be using the lap-shoulderbelt to secure the child restraint in this position. Besure to follow the instructions that came with thechild restraint. Secure the child in the child restraintwhen and as the instructions say.


{CAUTION:

In a crash, a child secured in a rear-facingchild restraint in the center rear seatingposition could be injured by the vehicle’sarmrest. To reduce this risk, the armrestshould first be secured with a specialarmrest retention strap. You can get thisfrom your dealer.

If you are using a rear-facing child restraint in thesecond row center position, install the armrestretention strap.

1. Put the child restraint on the seat.

2. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap andshoulder portions of the vehicle’s safety beltthrough or around the restraint. The childrestraint instructions will show you how.

3. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release buttonis positioned so you would be able to unbucklethe safety belt quickly if you ever had to.


4. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the wayout of the retractor to set the lock.

5. To tighten the belt, push down on the childrestraint, pull the shoulder portion of the beltto tighten the lap portion of the belt andfeed the shoulder belt back into the retractor.If you are using a forward-facing childrestraint, you may find it helpful to use yourknee to push down on the child restraintas you tighten the belt.


6. If your child restraint has a top tether, and theposition that you are using has a top tetheranchor, attach and tighten the top tether to thetop tether anchor. Refer to the instructionsthat came with the child restraint and to LowerAnchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH)on page 55.


To remove the child restraint, just unbuckle thevehicle’s safety belt and let it go back all the way.The safety belt will move freely again and beready to work for an adult or larger childpassenger.

Securing a Child Restraint in theRight Front Seat PositionYour vehicle has a right front passenger airbag.A rear seat is a safer place to secure aforward-facing child restraint. See Where toPut the Restraint on page 53.

In addition, your vehicle has a passenger sensingsystem. The passenger sensing system isdesigned to turn off the right front passenger’sfrontal airbag when an infant in a rear-facing infantseat or a small child in a forward-facing childrestraint or booster seat is detected. SeePassenger Sensing System on page 81 andPassenger Airbag Status Indicator on page 202 formore information on this including importantsafety information.


A label on your sun visor says, “Never put arear-facing child seat in the front.” This is becausethe risk to the rear-facing child is so great, if theairbag deploys.

{CAUTION:


Even though the passenger sensingsystem is designed to turn off the rightfront passenger’s frontal airbag if thesystem detects a rear-facing childrestraint, no system is fail-safe, and no



one can guarantee that an airbag will notdeploy under some unusual circumstance,even though it is turned off. Werecommend that rear-facing childrestraints be secured in the rear seat,even if the airbag is off.



If you need to secure a forward-facing childrestraint in the right front seat position, move theseat as far back as it will go before securingthe forward-facing child restraint. See ManualSeats on page 9 or Power Seats on page 10.

If your child restraint has the LATCH system,see Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children(LATCH) on page 55.

There is no top tether anchor in the right frontpassenger’s position. Do not secure a child seat inthis position if a national or local law requires thatthe top tether be anchored, or if the instructions thatcome with the child restraint say that the top tethermust be anchored. See Lower Anchors and Tethersfor Children (LATCH) on page 55 if your childrestraint has a top tether.

You will be using the lap-shoulder belt to securethe child restraint in this position. Be sure to followthe instructions that came with the child restraint.Secure the child in the child restraint when and asthe instructions say.

1. Your vehicle has a right front passenger’sfrontal airbag. See Passenger SensingSystem on page 81. We recommend thatrear-facing child restraints be secured in a rearseat, even if the airbag is off. If your childrestraint is forward-facing, move the seat asfar back as it will go before securing thechild restraint in this seat. See Manual Seatson page 9 or Power Seats on page 10.When the passenger sensing system hasturned off the right front passenger’s frontalairbag, the off indicator in the passengerairbag status indicator should light and stay litwhen you turn the ignition to ON or START.See Passenger Airbag Status Indicatoron page 202.

2. Put the child restraint on the seat.


3. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap andshoulder portions of the vehicle’s safety beltthrough or around the restraint. The childrestraint instructions will show you how.

Tilt the latch plate to adjust the belt if needed.

4. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release buttonis positioned so you would be able to unbucklethe safety belt quickly if you ever had to.


5. To tighten the belt, pull up on the shoulderbelt while you push down on the childrestraint. You may find it helpful to use yourknee to push down on the child restraintas you tighten the belt.


7. If the airbag is off, the off indicator in theinstrument panel will be lit and stay litwhen the key is turned to ON or START.

If a child restraint has been installed and the onindicator is lit, turn the vehicle off. Removethe child restraint from the vehicle and reinstall thechild restraint.

If, after reinstalling the child restraint and restartingthe vehicle, the on indicator is still lit, check tomake sure that the vehicle’s seatback is notpressing the child restraint into the seat cushion. Ifthis happens, slightly recline the vehicle’sseatback and adjust the seat cushion if possible.Also make sure the child restraint is not trappedunder the vehicle head restraint. If this happens,adjust the head restraint.

If the on indicator is still lit, secure the child in thechild restraint in a rear seat position in thevehicle and check with your dealer.

To remove the child restraint, unbuckle thevehicle’s safety belt and let it go back all the way.The safety belt will move freely again and beready to work for an adult or larger childpassenger.


Airbag SystemYour vehicle has the following airbags:

• A frontal airbag for the driver.

• A frontal airbag for the right front passenger.

• A seat-mounted side impact airbag for thedriver.

• A seat-mounted side impact airbag for theright front passenger.

• A roof-mounted airbag for the driver, rightfront passenger, and second row outboardpassenger positions.

Airbags are designed to supplement the protectionprovided by safety belts. Even though today’sairbags are also designed to help reduce the riskof injury from the force of an inflating bag, allairbags must inflate very quickly to do their job.

Here are the most important things to know aboutthe airbag system:

{CAUTION:

You can be severely injured or killed in acrash if you are not wearing your safetybelt — even if you have airbags. Wearingyour safety belt during a crash helpsreduce your chance of hitting thingsinside the vehicle or being ejected from it.Airbags are “supplemental restraints” tothe safety belts. All airbags are designedto work with safety belts, but do notreplace them.


{CAUTION:

Frontal airbags for the driver and rightfront passenger are designed to deploy inmoderate to severe frontal and nearfrontal crashes. They are not designed toinflate in rollover, rear crashes, or in manyside crashes. And, for some unrestrainedoccupants, frontal airbags may provideless protection in frontal crashes thanmore forceful airbags have provided inthe past.

Seat-mounted side impact airbags aredesigned to inflate in moderate to severecrashes where something hits the side ofyour vehicle. They are not designed toinflate in frontal, in rollover, or in rearcrashes.



Roof-mounted side impact airbags aredesigned to inflate in moderate to severecrashes where something hits the side ofyour vehicle. They may inflate in somefrontal crashes. They are not designed toinflate in rear crashes. The vehicle isdesigned to deploy the roof-mounted sideimpact airbags in the event of a vehiclerollover.

Everyone in your vehicle should wear asafety belt properly — whether or notthere is an airbag for that person.


{CAUTION:

Both frontal and side impact airbagsinflate with great force, faster than theblink of an eye. If you are too close to aninflating airbag, as you would be if youwere leaning forward, it could seriouslyinjure you. Safety belts help keep you inposition for airbag inflation before andduring a crash. Always wear your safetybelt even with frontal airbags. The drivershould sit as far back as possible whilestill maintaining control of the vehicle.Occupants should not lean on or sleepagainst the door.

{CAUTION:

Anyone who is up against, or very closeto, any airbag when it inflates can beseriously injured or killed. Airbags pluslap-shoulder belts offer the bestprotection for adults, but not for youngchildren and infants. Neither the vehicle’ssafety belt system nor its airbag system isdesigned for them. Young children andinfants need the protection that a childrestraint system can provide. Alwayssecure children properly in your vehicle.To read how, see Older Children onpage 43 or Infants and Young Children onpage 46.


There is an airbagreadiness light on theinstrument panel cluster,which shows theairbag symbol.

The system checks the airbag electrical system formalfunctions. The light tells you if there is anelectrical problem. See Airbag Readiness Light onpage 201 for more information.

Where Are the Airbags?

The driver’s frontal airbag is in the middle of thesteering wheel.


The right front passenger’s frontal airbag is in theinstrument panel on the passenger’s side.

The driver’s seat-mounted side impact airbag is inthe side of the driver’s seatback closest to the door.


The right front passenger’s seat-mounted sideimpact airbag is in the side of the passenger’sseatback closest to the door.

The roof-mounted side impact airbag for the driverand the passenger directly behind the driver isin the ceiling above the side windows.


The roof-mounted side impact airbag for the frontpassenger and the passenger directly behindthe front passenger is in the ceiling above the sidewindows.

{CAUTION:

If something is between an occupant andan airbag, the airbag might not inflateproperly or it might force the object intothat person causing severe injury or evendeath. The path of an inflating airbag mustbe kept clear. Do not put anythingbetween an occupant and an airbag, anddo not attach or put anything on thesteering wheel hub or on or near anyother airbag covering. Never secureanything to the roof of your vehicle byrouting the rope or tie-down through anydoor or window opening. If you do, thepath of an inflating airbag will be blocked.Do not let seat covers block the inflationpath of a side impact airbag. The path ofan inflating airbag must be kept clear.


When Should an Airbag Inflate?The driver’s and right front passenger’s frontalairbags are designed to inflate in moderate tosevere frontal or near-frontal crashes. But they aredesigned to inflate only if the impact exceeds apredetermined deployment threshold. Deploymentthresholds take into account a variety of desireddeployment and non-deployment events and areused to predict how severe a crash is likely to be intime for the airbags to inflate and help restrain theoccupants. Whether your frontal airbags will orshould deploy is not based on how fast your vehicleis traveling. It depends largely on what you hit, thedirection of the impact, and how quickly yourvehicle slows down.

Your vehicle has a dual-stage driver airbag, whichadjusts the restraint according to crash severityusing electronic frontal sensor(s), which helpthe sensing system distinguish between amoderate frontal impact and a more severe frontalimpact. The dual-stage driver airbag inflates toa level less than full deployment for moderatefrontal impacts and to a full deployment for moresevere frontal impacts.

Your vehicle has a dual-depth passenger airbagthat adjusts the restraint according to crashseverity and seat location using electronic frontalsensor(s) and other special sensors whichenable the sensing system to monitor the status ofthe position of the front passenger seat. Thepassenger airbag inflates to a reduced depth whenthe passenger seat is in a forward position. Formore rearward front seating positions, thepassenger airbag may inflate to an increaseddepth (a full deployment), based on the crashseverity measured early in the event. Always wearyour safety belt, even with frontal airbags.

If the front of your vehicle goes straight into a wallthat does not move or deform, the thresholdlevel for the reduced deployment is about12 to 16 mph (19 to 26 km/h), and the thresholdlevel for a full deployment is about 18 to 24 mph(29 to 38.5 km/h). The threshold level canvary, however, with specific vehicle design, so thatit can be somewhat above or below this range.


Frontal airbags may inflate at different crashspeeds. For example:

• If the vehicle hits a stationary object, theairbags could inflate at a different crash speedthan if the vehicle hits a moving object.

• If the vehicle hits an object that deforms, theairbags could inflate at a different crashspeed than if the vehicle hits an object doesnot deform.

• If the vehicle hits a narrow object (like a pole),the airbags could inflate at a different crashspeed than if the vehicle hits a wide object(like a wall).

• If the vehicle goes into an object at an angle,the airbags could inflate at a different crashspeed than if the vehicle goes straight intothe object.

Frontal airbags (driver and right front passenger)are not intended to inflate during vehiclerollovers, rear impacts, or in many side impacts.

Seat-mounted side impact and roof-mountedairbags are intended to inflate in moderateto severe side crashes. Seat-mounted side impactairbags are not intended to inflate in frontal ornear-frontal impacts, rollovers, or rear impacts. Inaddition, roof-mounted side impact airbags areintended to inflate during a rollover or in a severefrontal impact. Roof-mounted side impactairbags are not intended to inflate in rear impacts.Seat-mounted side impact and roof-mountedairbags will inflate if the crash severity is abovethe system’s designed “threshold level.” Thethreshold level can vary with specific vehicledesign. A seat-mounted side impact airbagis intended to deploy on the side of the vehiclethat is struck. Both roof-mounted airbags areintended to deploy when either side of the vehicleis struck or during a rollover.

In any particular crash, no one can say whetheran airbag should have inflated simply becauseof the damage to a vehicle or because of what therepair costs were. For frontal airbags, inflation isdetermined by what the vehicle hits, the angleof the impact, and how quickly the vehicle slowsdown in frontal and near-frontal impacts. Forside impact airbags, inflation is determined by thelocation and severity of the impact.


What Makes an Airbag Inflate?In an impact of sufficient severity, the airbagsensing system detects that the vehicle isin a crash. In the case of a “rollover capable”roof-mounted side impact airbag, the sensingsystem detects that the vehicle is about toroll over. The sensing system triggers a release ofgas from the inflator, which inflates the airbag.The inflator, airbag and related hardware are allpart of the airbag modules inside the steeringwheel, instrument panel, the side of the frontseatbacks closest to the door and the ceiling ofthe vehicle, near the side windows.

How Does an Airbag Restrain?In moderate to severe frontal or near frontalcollisions, even belted occupants can contact thesteering wheel or the instrument panel. Inmoderate to severe side collisions, even beltedoccupants can contact the inside of the vehicle.Airbags supplement the protection providedby safety belts. Airbags distribute the force of theimpact more evenly over the occupant’s upperbody, stopping the occupant more gradually. Butthe frontal airbags would not help you in manytypes of collisions, including rollovers, rearimpacts, and many side impacts, primarily becausean occupant’s motion is not toward the airbag.Side impact airbags would not help you in manytypes of collisions, including many frontal ornear frontal collisions, and rear impacts.

Airbags should never be regarded as anythingmore than a supplement to safety belts, and thenonly in moderate to severe frontal or near-frontalcollisions for the driver’s and right frontpassenger’s frontal airbags, and only in moderateto severe side collisions for vehicles with sideimpact airbags.


What Will You See After an AirbagInflates?After frontal airbags and seat-mounted side impactairbags inflate, they quickly deflate, so quicklythat some people may not even realize an airbaginflated. Roof-mounted side impact airbagsmay still be at least partially inflated minutes afterthe vehicle comes to rest. Some componentsof the airbag module — the steering wheel hub forthe driver’s airbag, the instrument panel for theright front passenger’s bag, the side of theseatback closest to the door for the seat-mountedside impact airbags, and the area along theceiling of your vehicle near the side windows forroof-mounted side impact airbags — may behot for a short time. The parts of the airbag thatcome into contact with you may be warm, but nottoo hot to touch. There may be some smokeand dust coming from the vents in the deflatedairbags. Airbag inflation does not prevent the driverfrom seeing out of the windshield or being ableto steer the vehicle, nor does it prevent peoplefrom leaving the vehicle.

{CAUTION:

When an airbag inflates, there may bedust in the air. This dust could causebreathing problems for people with ahistory of asthma or other breathingtrouble. To avoid this, everyone in thevehicle should get out as soon as it issafe to do so. If you have breathingproblems but cannot get out of the vehicleafter an airbag inflates, then get fresh airby opening a window or a door. If youexperience breathing problems followingan airbag deployment, you should seekmedical attention.

Your vehicle has a feature that may automaticallyunlock the doors, turn the interior lamps on,and turn the hazard warning flashers on when theairbags inflate. You can lock the doors, turn theinterior lamps off, and turn the hazard warningflashers off by using the controls for thosefeatures.


In many crashes severe enough to inflate theairbag, windshields are broken by vehicledeformation. Additional windshield breakage mayalso occur from the right front passengerairbag.

• Airbags are designed to inflate only once.After an airbag inflates, you will needsome new parts for the airbag system. If youdo not get them, the airbag system willnot be there to help protect you in anothercrash. A new system will include airbagmodules and possibly other parts. The servicemanual for your vehicle covers the need toreplace other parts.

• Your vehicle has a crash sensing anddiagnostic module which records informationafter a crash. See Vehicle Data Collection andEvent Data Recorders on page 498.

• Let only qualified technicians work on theairbag systems. Improper service canmean that an airbag system will not workproperly. See your dealer for service.

Passenger Sensing SystemYour vehicle has a passenger sensing system.The passenger airbag status indicator on theinstrument panel will be visible when you turn yourignition key to ON or START.

The words ON and OFF or the symbol for on andoff, will be visible during the system check.When the system check is complete, either theword ON or the word OFF, or the symbol for on orthe symbol for off, will be visible. See PassengerAirbag Status Indicator on page 202.

United States Canada


The passenger sensing system will turn off theright front passenger’s frontal airbag under certainconditions. The driver’s airbags are not part ofthe passenger sensing system.

The passenger sensing system works withsensors that are part of the right front passenger’sseat. The sensors are designed to detect thepresence of a properly-seated occupant anddetermine if the passenger’s frontal airbag shouldbe enabled (may inflate) or not.

Accident statistics show that children are safer ifthey are restrained in the rear rather than the frontseat. We recommend that child restraints besecured in a rear seat, including an infant riding ina rear-facing infant seat, a child riding in aforward-facing child seat, and an older child ridingin a booster seat.


{CAUTION:


Even though the passenger sensingsystem is designed to turn off thepassenger’s frontal airbag if the systemdetects a rear-facing child restraint, nosystem is fail-safe, and no one can




guarantee that an airbag will not deployunder some unusual circumstance, eventhough it is turned off. We recommendthat rear-facing child restraints be securedin the rear seat, even if the airbag is off.


The passenger sensing system is designed to turnoff the right front passenger’s frontal airbag if:

• The right front passenger seat is unoccupied.

• The system determines that an infant ispresent in a rear-facing infant seat.

• The system determines that a small child ispresent in a forward-facing child restraint.

• The system determines that a small child ispresent in a booster seat.

• A right front passenger takes his/her weight offof the seat for a period of time.

• The right front passenger seat is occupied bya smaller person, such as a child who hasoutgrown child restraints.

• Or, if there is a critical problem with the airbagsystem or the passenger sensing system.


When the passenger sensing system has turnedoff the right front passenger’s frontal airbag, the offindicator will light and stay lit to remind you thatthe airbag is off.

If a child restraint has been installed and the onindicator is lit, turn the vehicle off. Removethe child restraint from the vehicle and reinstall thechild restraint following the child restraintmanufacturer’s directions and refer to Securing aChild Restraint in the Right Front Seat Positionon page 65.

If, after reinstalling the child restraint and restartingthe vehicle, the on indicator is still lit, check tomake sure that the vehicle’s seatback is notpressing the child restraint into the seat cushion.If this happens, slightly recline the vehicle’sseatback and adjust the seat cushion if possible.Also make sure the child restraint is not trappedunder the vehicle head restraint. If this happens,adjust the head restraint.

If the on indicator is still lit, secure the child in thechild restraint in a rear seat position in thevehicle and check with your dealer.

The passenger sensing system is designed toenable (may inflate) the right front passenger’sfrontal airbag anytime the system sensesthat a person of adult size is sitting properly in theright front passenger’s seat. When the passengersensing system has allowed the airbag to beenabled, the on indicator will light and stay lit toremind you that the airbag is active.

For some children who have outgrown childrestraints and for very small adults, the passengersensing system may or may not turn off theright front passenger’s frontal airbag, dependingupon the person’s seating posture and body build.Everyone in your vehicle who has outgrownchild restraints should wear a safety beltproperly — whether or not there is an airbagfor that person.

If a person of adult-size is sitting in the right frontpassenger’s seat, but the off indicator is lit, itcould be because that person is not sitting properlyin the seat. If this happens, turn the vehicle offand ask the person to place the seatback inthe fully upright position, then sit upright in theseat, centered on the seat cushion, with theperson’s legs comfortably extended.


Restart the vehicle and have the person remain inthis position for about two minutes. This willallow the system to detect that person and thenenable the passenger’s airbag.

{CAUTION:

If the airbag readiness light in theinstrument panel cluster ever comes onand stays on, it means that somethingmay be wrong with the airbag system.If this ever happens, have the vehicleserviced promptly, because an adult-sizeperson sitting in the right frontpassenger’s seat may not have theprotection of the frontal airbag. SeeAirbag Readiness Light on page 201 formore on this, including important safetyinformation.


A thick layer of additional material, such as ablanket, or aftermarket equipment such as seatcovers, seat heaters, and seat massagers,can affect how well the passenger sensing systemoperates. Remove any additional material fromthe seat cushion before reinstalling or securing thechild restraint and before a small occupant,including a small adult, sits in the right frontpassenger’s seat. You may want to consider notusing seat covers or other aftermarket equipment.

See Adding Equipment to Your Airbag-EquippedVehicle on page 88 for more information aboutmodifications that can affect how the systemoperates.

{CAUTION:

Stowing of articles under the passenger’sseat or between the passenger’s seatcushion and seatback may interfere withthe proper operation of the passengersensing system.


Servicing Your Airbag-EquippedVehicleAirbags affect how your vehicle should beserviced. There are parts of the airbag system inseveral places around your vehicle. You donot want the system to inflate while someone isworking on your vehicle. Your dealer and theservice manual have information about servicingyour vehicle and the airbag system. To purchase aservice manual, see Service PublicationsOrdering Information on page 505.

{CAUTION:

For up to 10 seconds, after the ignition isturned off and the battery is disconnected,an airbag can still inflate during improperservice. You can be injured if you areclose to an airbag when it inflates. Avoidyellow connectors. They are probably partof the airbag system. Be sure to followproper service procedures, and make surethe person performing work for you isqualified to do so.

The airbag system does not need regularmaintenance.


Adding Equipment to YourAirbag-Equipped Vehicle

Q: Is there anything I might add to the frontor sides of the vehicle that could keep theairbags from working properly?

A: Yes. If you add things that change yourvehicle’s frame, bumper system, height,front end or side sheet metal, they may keepthe airbag system from working properly.Also, the airbag system may not work properlyif you relocate any of the airbag sensors. Ifyou have any questions about this, you shouldcontact Customer Assistance before youmodify your vehicle. The phone numbers andaddresses for Customer Assistance are inStep Two of the Customer SatisfactionProcedure in this manual. See CustomerSatisfaction Procedure on page 488.

Q: Because I have a disability, I have to getmy vehicle modified. How can I find outwhether this will affect my airbag system?

A: Changing or moving any parts of thefront seats, safety belts, the airbag sensingand diagnostic module, steering wheel,instrument panel, ceiling headliner, ceiling andpillar garnish trim, roof-mounted airbagmodules, or airbag wiring can affect theoperation of the airbag system. If you havequestions, call Customer Assistance. Thephone numbers and addresses for CustomerAssistance are in Step Two of the CustomerSatisfaction Procedure in this manual.See Customer Satisfaction Procedure onpage 488.


Restraint System Check

Checking the Restraint SystemsNow and then, make sure the safety belt reminderlight and all your belts, buckles, latch plates,retractors and anchorages are working properly.Look for any other loose or damaged safetybelt system parts. If you see anything that mightkeep a safety belt system from doing its job, haveit repaired. Keep safety belts clean and dry.See Care of Safety Belts on page 447 for moreinformation.

Torn or frayed safety belts may not protect you ina crash. They can rip apart under impact forces.If a belt is torn or frayed, get a new one right away.

Also look for any opened or broken airbagcovers, and have them repaired or replaced. Theairbag system does not need regular maintenance.

Notice: If you damage the covering for thedriver’s or the right front passenger’s airbag,or the airbag covering on the driver’s andright front passenger’s seatback, or the sideimpact airbag covering on the ceiling near theside windows, the bag may not work properly.You may have to replace the airbag modulein the steering wheel, both the airbag moduleand the instrument panel for the right frontpassenger’s airbag, the airbag moduleand seatback for the driver’s and right frontpassenger’s seat-mounted side impact airbags,or side impact airbag module and ceilingcovering for the roof-mounted side impactairbag. Do not open or break the airbagcoverings.


Replacing Restraint System PartsAfter a Crash

{CAUTION:

A crash can damage the restraint systemsin your vehicle. A damaged restraintsystem may not properly protect theperson using it, resulting in serious injuryor even death in a crash. To help makesure your restraint systems are workingproperly after a crash, have theminspected and any necessaryreplacements made as soon as possible.

If you have had a crash, do you need new belts orLATCH system parts?After a very minor collision, nothing may benecessary. But if the belts were stretched, as theywould be if worn during a more severe crash,then you need new parts.If the LATCH system was being used during amore severe crash, you may need new LATCHsystem parts.

If belts are cut or damaged, replace them.Collision damage also may mean you will need tohave LATCH system, safety belt, or seat partsrepaired or replaced. New parts and repairs maybe necessary even if the belt or LATCH systemwas not being used at the time of the collision.

If an airbag inflates, you will need to replace airbagsystem parts. See the part on the airbag systemearlier in this section.

If the frontal or side impact airbags inflate, you willalso need to replace the driver’s and right frontpassenger’s safety belt buckle assembly. Be sureto do so. Then the new buckle assembly willbe there to help protect you in a collision.

After a crash, you may need to replace the driverand front passenger’s safety belt buckleassemblies, even if the airbags have not deployed.The driver and front passenger’s safety beltbuckle assemblies contain the safety beltpretensioners. Have your safety belt pretensionerschecked if your vehicle has been in a collision,or if your airbag readiness light stays on after youstart your vehicle or while you are driving. SeeAirbag Readiness Light on page 201.


Keys .............................................................. 93Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System .......... 94Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System

Operation ................................................. 96Doors and Locks ........................................ 100

Door Locks ................................................ 100Central Door Unlocking System ................. 101Power Door Locks ..................................... 101Delayed Locking ........................................ 102Programmable Automatic Door Locks ........ 102Rear Door Security Locks ......................... 103Lockout Protection ..................................... 104Power Liftgate ........................................... 104

Windows ...................................................... 108Power Windows ........................................ 109Sun Visors ................................................ 112

Theft-Deterrent Systems ............................. 112Theft-Deterrent System .............................. 112PASS-Key® III+ ......................................... 114PASS-Key® III+ Operation ......................... 114

Starting and Operating Your Vehicle ......... 116New Vehicle Break-In ................................ 116Ignition Positions ....................................... 117Retained Accessory Power (RAP) ............. 118Starting the Engine .................................... 119Adjustable Throttle and Brake Pedal .......... 120Engine Coolant Heater .............................. 121Automatic Transmission Operation ............. 122Tow/Haul Mode ......................................... 126Parking Brake ........................................... 127Shifting Into Park (P) ................................. 129Shifting Out of Park (P) ............................. 131Parking Over Things That Burn ................. 131Engine Exhaust ......................................... 132Running the Engine While Parked ............. 133

Section 2 Features and Controls


Mirrors ......................................................... 134Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror

with OnStar® .......................................... 134Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror

with OnStar® and Compass ................... 134Outside Power Heated Mirrors ................... 137Outside Automatic Dimming Mirror ............. 138Outside Curb View Assist Mirror ................ 138Outside Convex Mirror ............................... 139

OnStar® System .......................................... 139Universal Home Remote System ................ 143

Universal Home Remote System(With Three Round LED) ....................... 143

Universal Home Remote System(With One Triangular LED) ..................... 143

Universal Home Remote SystemOperation (With Three Round LED) ....... 144

Universal Home Remote SystemOperation (With One Triangular LED) ....... 150

Storage Areas ............................................. 153Glove Box ................................................. 153Cupholder(s) .............................................. 154Cell Phone Storage Area ........................... 154Center Console Storage Area .................... 154Luggage Carrier ........................................ 154Cargo Cover ............................................. 155Cargo Management System ...................... 155

Sunroof ....................................................... 156Sunroof (Ultra View®) ................................ 156Sunroof (Ultra View® Plus) ........................ 158

Section 2 Features and Controls


Keys

{CAUTION:

Leaving children in a vehicle with theignition key is dangerous for manyreasons, children or others could be badlyinjured or even killed. They could operatethe power windows or other controls oreven make the vehicle move. The windowswill function with the keys in the ignitionand they could be seriously injured orkilled if caught in the path of a closingwindow. Do not leave the keys in a vehiclewith children.


Your vehicle has adouble-sided key thatcan be used forthe ignition anddoor locks.

If you ever lose your keys, your dealer will be ableto assist you with obtaining replacements.

In an emergency contact Cadillac RoadsideService®. See Roadside Service on page 493 formore information.

Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)SystemYour Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) systemoperates on a radio frequency subject to FederalCommunications Commission (FCC) Rulesand with Industry Canada.

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCCRules. Operation is subject to the followingtwo conditions:

1. This device may not cause interference.

2. This device must accept any interferencereceived, including interference that maycause undesired operation of the device.


This device complies with RSS-210 of IndustryCanada. Operation is subject to the followingtwo conditions:



Changes or modifications to this system by otherthan an authorized service facility could voidauthorization to use this equipment.

At times you may notice a decrease in operatingrange. This is normal for any RKE system. Ifthe transmitter does not work or if you have tostand closer to your vehicle for the transmitter towork, try this:

• Check the distance. You may be too far fromyour vehicle. You may need to stand closerduring rainy or snowy weather.

• Check the location. Other vehicles or objectsmay be blocking the signal. Take a few stepsto the left or right, hold the transmitterhigher, and try again.

• Check to determine if battery replacement isnecessary. See “Battery Replacement”under Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) SystemOperation on page 96.

• If you are still having trouble, see your dealeror a qualified technician for service.


Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System OperationWith this feature, you can lock and unlock thedoors and liftgate, open and close the liftgate, andturn on your vehicle’s interior lamps from up to65 feet (20 m) away using the Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) transmitter supplied with your vehicle.

You will have one of the RKE transmittersbelow.

Q (Lock): Press this symbol on the RKEtransmitter to lock the doors. This also arms thetheft-deterrent system. See Theft-DeterrentSystem on page 112 for additional information.

You can program your vehicle so that the exteriorlamps will flash and/or the horn will soundwhen you lock the doors with the RKE transmitter.See DIC Vehicle Customization on page 231 formore information on programming this feature.

" (Unlock): Press this symbol on the RKEtransmitter to unlock the driver’s door. This alsodisarms the theft-deterrent system. Press thebutton again, within five seconds, to unlock the restof the doors.

You can program your vehicle so that the exteriorlamps will flash when you unlock the doorswith the RKE transmitter. See DIC VehicleCustomization on page 231 for more informationon programming this feature.

If your vehicle is programmed for remoteconfirmation, the doors must be closed for thisfeature to work. If a door is open, remoteconfirmation will be canceled.


L (Panic Alarm): Press and release this buttonto locate your vehicle. The turn signal lampswill flash and the horn will sound three times.Press and hold this button for more thantwo seconds to activate the panic alarm. Theturn signal lamps will flash and the horn will soundrepeatedly for 30 seconds. The alarm will turnoff when the ignition is turned to ON or the alarmbutton is pressed again. The ignition must bein OFF for the panic alarm to work.

& (Power Liftgate): Press and hold this buttonon the RKE transmitter to open and close theliftgate. The taillamps will flash and a chime willsound to indicate when the liftgate is opening andclosing.

Matching Transmitter(s) to YourVehicleEach RKE transmitter is coded to prevent anothertransmitter from unlocking your vehicle. If atransmitter is lost or stolen, a replacement can bepurchased through your dealer. Remember tobring any additional transmitters with you so thatall of them can be re-coded to match the newtransmitter. Once your dealer has coded the newtransmitter, the lost transmitter will not unlockyour vehicle. Each vehicle can have a maximumof eight transmitters matched to it.

Battery ReplacementUnder normal use, the battery in your RKEtransmitter should last about four years.

The battery is weak if the transmitter will not workat the normal range in any location. If you haveto get close to your vehicle before the transmitterworks, it is probably time to change the battery.

Notice: When replacing the battery, usecare not to touch any of the circuitry. Staticfrom your body transferred to these surfacesmay damage the transmitter.


To replace the battery in the RKE transmitter dothe following:

1. Use a flat object with a thin edge into thenotch, located below the trunk releasebutton, and separate the bottom half from thetop half of the transmitter.

2. Remove the old battery, but do not use ametal object to do this.

3. Slide the new battery into the transmitter withthe positive side of the battery facing down.Use a type CR2032 battery, or equivalenttype. Make sure the cover is on tightly,so water will not get in.

4. Snap the front and the back of the transmittertogether.

5. Test the operation of the transmitter with thevehicle.


To replace the battery in the RKE transmitter dothe following:

1. Use a flat object with a thin edge into thenotch, located above the metal base, andseparate the bottom half from the top half ofthe transmitter.

2. Remove the old battery, but do not use ametal object to do this.

3. Slide the new battery into the transmitter withthe positive side of the battery facing up. Usea type CR2032 battery, or equivalent type.Make sure the cover is on tightly, so water willnot get in.

4. Snap the front and the back of the transmittertogether.

5. Test the operation of the transmitter with thevehicle.


Doors and Locks

Door Locks

{CAUTION:

Unlocked doors can be dangerous.• Passengers, especially children, can

easily open the doors and fall out of amoving vehicle. When a door islocked, the handle will not open it.You increase the chance of beingthrown out of the vehicle in a crash ifthe doors are not locked. So, wearsafety belts properly and lock thedoors whenever you drive.



• Young children who get into unlockedvehicles may be unable to get out. Achild can be overcome by extremeheat and can suffer permanent injuriesor even death from heat stroke.Always lock your vehicle wheneveryou leave it.

• Outsiders can easily enter through anunlocked door when you slow downor stop your vehicle. Locking yourdoors can help prevent this fromhappening.


There are several ways to lock and unlock yourvehicle.

Because your vehicle has the theft-deterrentsystem, you must unlock the doors from theoutside with the key or Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) transmitter to avoid setting off the alarm.If the windows are down and the doors are locked,do not reach in to manually unlock the vehiclebecause you will set off the alarm.

From the inside, usethe manual lock leverslocated on the doorpanels near thewindows.

Push down on the manual lock lever to lock thedoor. To unlock the door, pull up on the lever.

Central Door Unlocking SystemYour vehicle has a central door unlocking feature.When unlocking the driver’s door, you canunlock the other doors by holding the key in theturned position for a few seconds or by quicklyturning the key twice in the lock cylinder.

Power Door LocksThe power door lock switches are located on thearmrest on the front doors.

K (Unlock): Press the side of the switch with theunlock symbol to unlock the doors.

Q (Lock): Press the side of the switch with thelock symbol to lock the doors.


Delayed LockingWith this feature, you can delay the actual lockingof the doors.

When the power door lock switch or the lockbutton on the remote keyless entry transmitter ispressed when the key is not in the ignition and thedriver’s door is opened, a chime will soundthree times indicating that delayed locking isactive.

When all the doors are closed, the doors will lockautomatically after five seconds. If a door isreopened before five seconds have elapsed, thefive second timer will reset itself once all the doorsare closed again.

You can press the door lock switch or the lockbutton on the remote keyless entry transmitteragain to override this feature and lock the doorsimmediately.

You can turn this feature off using the DriverInformation Center (DIC). When delayed locking isoff, the doors will lock immediately when youpress the power door lock switch or the lock buttonon the remote keyless entry transmitter. SeeDIC Vehicle Customization on page 231 for moreinformation.

Programmable AutomaticDoor LocksYour vehicle is programmed so that when thedoors are closed, the ignition is on and the shiftlever is moved out of PARK (P), all the doorswill lock. The front door inside handles will remainactive. The doors will unlock every time youstop the vehicle and move the shift lever back intoPARK (P).

If someone needs to exit the vehicle once the doorsare locked, have that person use the manual leveror power door lock switch for the rear doors. Thefront doors will remain unlocked from inside thevehicle. When the door is closed again, it will notlock automatically. Use the manual lever or thepower door lock switch to lock the door.

The power door locks can be programmedthrough prompts displayed on the DriverInformation Center (DIC). These prompts allowyou to choose various lock and unlock settings.For more information on programming, seeDIC Vehicle Customization on page 231.


Rear Door Security LocksYour vehicle has rear door security locks thatprevent passengers from opening the rear doorson your vehicle from the inside.

The rear door securitylocks are located onthe inside edge of eachrear door. You mustopen the rear doors toaccess them.

To use these locks, do the following:

1. Insert your key into the slot next to the reardoor security lock label and turn it to engagethe lock.

2. Close the door.

3. Repeat the steps for the other rear door.

The rear doors on your vehicle cannot be openedfrom the inside when this feature is in use.

When you want to open a rear door when thesecurity lock is on, do the following:

1. Unlock the door using the Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) transmitter, the front door powerlock switch or by lifting the rear doormanual lock.

2. Then open the door from the outside.

To cancel the rear door security lock, do thefollowing:

1. Unlock the door and open it from the outside.

2. Insert your key into the slot next to therear door security lock label and turn itto disengage the lock.

3. Repeat the steps for the other lock.

The rear door locks will now work normally.


Lockout ProtectionIf you press the power door lock switch when thekey is in the ignition and any door is open, allthe doors will lock and only the driver’s door willunlock. If you close the doors, you can lockthem using the remote keyless entry transmitter.Be sure to remove the key from the ignitionwhen locking your vehicle.

This feature can be overridden by pressing the lockbutton on the remote keyless entry transmitter or bypressing the power lock switch a second time.

Power Liftgate

Power Liftgate OperationYour vehicle has a power liftgate. The vehiclemust be in PARK (P) to power open or close theliftgate.

The liftgate must be completely closed to poweropen or the liftgate must be completely opento power close.

The taillamps will flash and a chime will sound atthe beginning of each power operation cycle.

{CAUTION:

You or others could be injured if caught inthe path of the power liftgate. Make surethere is no one in the way of the liftgateas it is opening and closing.


Notice: If you open the liftgate withoutchecking for overhead obstructions such as agarage door, you could break the liftgate orthe liftgate glass. Always check to make surethe area above the liftgate is clear beforeopening it.

To open and close the liftgate, press and holdthe power liftgate button on the remote keylessentry transmitter (RKE) until the liftgate startsmoving. Press the RKE button a secondtime during liftgate operations to reverse thatoperation. See Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System Operation on page 96 for moreinformation.

The liftgate can also be power closed by pressingthe power liftgate button next to the liftgatelatch. Press the button a second time duringliftgate operation to reverse that operation. Thepower liftgate may be temporarily disabledunder extreme temperatures or low batterycondition. If this occurs, the liftgate can still beoperated manually.


If you shift the transmission out of PARK (P) whilethe power function is in progress, the liftgatepower function will continue to completion. If youshift the transmission out of PARK (P) andaccelerate before the power liftgate latches closed,the liftgate may reverse to the open position.Cargo could fall out of the vehicle. Always makesure the power liftgate is closed and latched beforeyou drive away.

If you power open the liftgate and the liftgatesupport struts have lost pressure, the lights willflash and a chime will sound. The liftgate will holdopen temporarily, then slowly close. See yourdealer for service before using the liftgate.

Obstacle Detection FeaturesIf the liftgate encounters an obstacle during apower open or close cycle, a warning chime willsound and the liftgate will automatically reversedirection to the fully closed or open position. Afterremoving the obstruction, the liftgate may bepower opened or closed normally.

If the liftgate encounters multiple obstacles on thesame power cycle, the power function willdeactivate, and the liftgate will switch to manualoperation. The REAR ACCESS OPEN warningmessage in the Driver Information Center (DIC) willindicate that the liftgate is open. After removingthe obstructions, manually open the liftgate to thefully open position or close the liftgate to thefully closed and latched position. The liftgate willnow resume normal power operation.

Your vehicle has an obstacle detection sensorlocated on the rear edge of the rear quarter panelwindows. If an object is caught between theliftgate and the window and presses against thissensor, the liftgate will reverse direction andopen fully. The liftgate will remain open until it isactivated again or closed manually.


Manual Liftgate OperationWith the doors unlocked, the power liftgate canalways be manually opened and closed.

To open the liftgate, pull up on the handle on theoutside of the liftgate. To close the liftgate,use the pull cup to lower the liftgate and close.The liftgate latch will power cinch to closedposition. Do not force the liftgate during apower cycle.

Always close the liftgate before driving.

{CAUTION:

It can be dangerous to drive with theliftgate open because carbon monoxide(CO) gas can come into your vehicle. Youcan not see or smell CO. It can causeunconsciousness and even death. If youmust drive with the liftgate open or ifelectrical wiring or other cableconnections must pass through the sealbetween the body and the liftgate:

• Make sure all other windows are shut.• Turn the fan on your heating or

cooling system to its highest speedand select the control setting that willforce outside air into your vehicle. SeeDual Climate Control System onpage 189.

• If you have air outlets on or under theinstrument panel, open them all theway. See Engine Exhaust on page 132.


Windows

{CAUTION:

Leaving children, helpless adults, or petsin a vehicle with the windows closed isdangerous. They can be overcome by theextreme heat and suffer permanentinjuries or even death from heat stroke.Never leave a child, a helpless adult, or apet alone in a vehicle, especially with thewindows closed in warm or hot weather.


Power Windows

{CAUTION:

Leaving children, helpless adults, or petsin a vehicle with the windows closed isdangerous. They can be overcome fromextreme heat in warm or hot weather andsuffer permanent injuries or even deathfrom heat stroke.Leaving children in a vehicle with theignition key is dangerous for manyreasons, children or others could be badlyinjured or even killed. They could operatethe power windows or other controls oreven make the vehicle move. Thewindows will function with the keys in theignition and they could be seriouslyinjured or killed if caught in the path of aclosing window. Do not leave keys in avehicle with children.When there are children in the rear seatuse the window lockout button to preventunintentional operation of the windows.

The power windowswitches are located onthe armrest neareach window.

Press the switch to the first position to lower thewindow to the desired level. Pull the switchup to raise the window.

Your vehicle has Retained Accessory Power (RAP)that allows you to use the power windows once theignition has been turned off. For more information,see Retained Accessory Power (RAP) onpage 118.


Express-Down WindowThis feature is on all windows. Press the switchto the second position and release the switchto activate the express-down feature. To stop thewindow as it is lowering, press down or pull upbriefly on the switch again.

Express-Up WindowThis feature is on all windows. Pull the switch upto the second position and release the switchto activate the express-up feature. To stop thewindow as it is raising, pull up or press downbriefly on the switch again.

Programming the Power WindowsIf the battery on your vehicle has been recharged,disconnected, or is not working, you will needto reprogram each power window for theexpress-up feature to work. Before reprogramming,you will need to replace or recharge yourvehicle’s battery.

To program each window, follow these steps:

1. With the ignition in ACCESSORY, ON,or when Retained Accessory Power (RAP)is active, close all doors.

2. Press and hold the power window switch untilthe window is fully open.

3. Pull the power window switch up until thewindow is fully closed.

4. Continue pulling the switch up forapproximately two seconds after the windowis completely closed.

The window is now reprogrammed. Repeat theprocess for the other windows.

Express Window Anti-Pinch FeatureIf any object is in the path of the window when theexpress-up is active, the window will stop at theobstruction and auto-reverse to a presetfactory position. Weather conditions such assevere icing may also cause the window toauto-reverse. The window will return to normaloperation once the obstruction or conditionis removed.


Express Window Anti-Pinch Override

{CAUTION:

If express override is activated, thewindow will not reverse automatically.You or others could be injured and thewindow could be damaged. Before youuse express override, make sure that allpeople and obstructions are clear of thewindow path.

In an emergency, the anti-pinch feature can beoverridden in a supervised mode. Pull the windowswitch all the way up to the second position.The window will rise for as long as the switch isheld. Once the switch is released, the expressmode is re-activated.

In this mode, the window can still close on anobject in its path. Use care when using theoverride mode.

Window Lockout

o (Window Lockout): The rear window lockoutbutton is located on the driver’s door armrestnear the window switches.

Press the right side of the button to disable therear window controls. The light on the buttonwill illuminate, indicating the feature is in use.The rear windows still can be raised or loweredusing the driver’s window switches when thelockout feature is active.

To restore power to the rear windows, press thebutton again. The light on the button will go out.


Sun VisorsSwing down the primary visor to block out glare.It can also be detached from the center mount andmoved to the side to block glare from thatdirection.

The driver’s sunshade may also have buttons fora built-in garage door opener. See UniversalHome Remote System (With Three Round LED)on page 143 or Universal Home RemoteSystem (With One Triangular LED) on page 143for more information.

Lighted Visor Vanity MirrorPull the visor down and lift the cover. The light willautomatically come on. The light will go out whenyou close the cover.

Theft-Deterrent SystemsVehicle theft is big business, especially in somecities. Although your vehicle has a number oftheft-deterrent features, we know that nothing weput on it can make it impossible to steal.

Theft-Deterrent System

The security light islocated on theinstrument panel cluster.

If the ignition is off and a door is open, thesecurity light will flash, reminding you to arm thetheft-deterrent system.

To arm the system, do the following:

1. Lock the door using the Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) transmitter or the power doorlock switch.

2. Close all the doors. The security light willilluminate. It should go off within approximately30 seconds.

If a door or a liftgate is opened without a key or aRKE transmitter, the horn will sound and thelamps will flash for up to 30 seconds.


The theft-deterrent system will not arm if you lockthe doors with a key, use the manual door lockor if the liftgate is ajar. It activates only if you usethe RKE transmitter or the power door lock.

To avoid activating the alarm by accident do thefollowing:

• The vehicle should be locked with the doorkey or the manual door lock after the doorsare closed if you don’t want to arm thetheft-deterrent system.

• Always unlock a door with a key or use theRKE transmitter. Pressing the unlock buttonon the RKE transmitter disarms thetheft-deterrent system. Unlocking a door anyother way while the system is armed willactivate the alarm when a door or the liftgateis opened.

If you activate the alarm by accident, unlock thedriver’s door with your key. You can also turnoff the alarm by using the unlock button onthe RKE transmitter, or by starting the vehicle witha valid key.

Testing the Alarm1. From inside the vehicle, roll down the window,

then get out of the vehicle, keeping thedoor open.

2. From outside of the vehicle, with the dooropen, lock the vehicle using the power doorlock switch or the RKE transmitter andclose the door. Wait approximately 30 secondsuntil the security light goes off.

3. Reach in and unlock the door using themanual lock and open the door. The hornwill sound and the exterior lamps will flash.

You can turn off the alarm by unlocking the driver’sdoor with your key, using the unlock button onthe RKE transmitter or by starting the car with avalid key.

If the alarm does not sound when it should, checkto see if the horn works. The horn fuse may beblown. To replace the fuse, see Fuses and CircuitBreakers on page 455. If the fuse does notneed to be replaced, you may need to have yourvehicle serviced.

To reduce the possibility of theft, always arm thetheft-deterrent system when leaving your vehicle.


PASS-Key® III+The PASS-Key® III+ system operates on a radiofrequency subject to Federal CommunicationsCommission (FCC) Rules and with IndustryCanada.


1. This device may not cause harmfulinterference.

2. This device must accept any interferencereceived, including interference that maycause undesired operation.





PASS-Key® III+ uses a radio frequencytransponder in the key that matches a decoderin your vehicle.

PASS-Key® III+ OperationYour vehicle has PASS-Key® III+ (PersonalizedAutomotive Security System) theft-deterrentsystem. PASS-Key® III+ is a passivetheft-deterrent system. This means you do nothave to do anything special to arm or disarm thesystem. It works when you transition the keyto ON, ACCESSORY or START from the OFFposition.

When the PASS-Key® III+ system senses thatsomeone is using the wrong key, it prevents thevehicle from starting. Anyone using atrial-and-error method to start the vehicle will bediscouraged because of the high number ofelectrical key codes.

If the engine does not start and the security lighton the instrument panel cluster comes onwhen trying to start the vehicle, the key may havea damaged transponder. Turn the ignition offand try again.


If the engine still does not start, and the keyappears to be undamaged, try another ignitionkey. At this time, you may also want to check thefuse, see Fuses and Circuit Breakers onpage 455. If the engine still does not start with theother key, your vehicle needs service. If yourvehicle does start, the first key may be faulty. Seeyour dealer who can service the PASS-Key® III+to have a new key made. In an emergency,contact Roadside Assistance.

It is possible for the PASS-Key® III+ decoder tolearn the transponder value of a new orreplacement key. Up to nine additional keys maybe programmed for the vehicle. The followingprocedure is for programming additional keys only.If all the currently programmed keys are lost ordo not operate, you must see your dealer ora locksmith who can service PASS-Key® III+ tohave keys made and programmed to the system.

See your dealer or a locksmith who can servicePASS-Key® III+ to get a new key blank that is cutexactly as the ignition key that operates the system.

To program the new additional key do thefollowing:

1. Verify that the new key has a 1 stamped on it.

2. Insert the original, already programmed, key inthe ignition and start the engine. If the enginewill not start, see your dealer for service.

3. After the engine has started, turn the key toOFF, and remove the key.

4. Insert the new key to be programmed andturn it to the ON position within five secondsof the original key being turned to theOFF position.

5. The security light will turn off once the keyhas been programmed.

6. Repeat Steps 1 through 5 if additional keysare to be programmed.

If you are driving and the security light comes onand stays on, you may be able to restart yourengine. Your PASS-Key® III+ system, however,may not be working properly and must be servicedby your dealer.

If you lose or damage your PASS-Key® III+ key,see your dealer or a locksmith who can servicePASS-Key® III+ to have a new key made.


Starting and Operating YourVehicle

New Vehicle Break-In

Notice: Your vehicle does not need anelaborate break-in. But it will perform better inthe long run if you follow these guidelinesfor the first 500 miles (805 km):• Do not drive at any one constant speed,

fast or slow.• Do not exceed 70 mph (113 km/h).

• Do not make full-throttle starts; also refrainfrom using the full throttle while driving.Avoid downshifting to brake, or slow,the vehicle.

If these procedures are not followed, yourengine, axle, or other parts could be damaged.

Avoid making hard stops for the first 200 miles(322 km) or so. During this time your newbrake linings are not yet broken in. Hard stopswith new linings can mean premature wearand earlier replacement. Follow this break-inguideline every time you get new linings.

Do not tow a trailer during break-in. SeeTowing a Trailer on page 331 for the trailertowing capabilities of your vehicle and moreinformation.

Following break-in, engine speed and load canbe gradually increased.


Ignition PositionsWith the key in the ignition switch, you can turnthe key to four different positions.

Notice: If your key seems stuck in OFF andyou can’t turn it, be sure you are usingthe correct key; if so, is it all the way in? If itis, then turn the steering wheel left andright while you turn the key hard. Turn the keyonly with your hand. Using a tool to force itcould break the key or the ignition switch.If none of these works, then your vehicle needsservice.

A (OFF): This is the only position in which youcan insert or remove the key. This positionlocks the ignition, steering wheel and transmission.It is a theft-deterrent feature.

B (ACCESSORY): This position allows you to usethings like the radio and the windshield wipers whenthe engine is off. This position will allow you to turnoff the engine, but still turn the steering wheel.

C (ON): This position is for driving. When you turnoff the engine, the transmission will lock. If youneed to shift the transmission out of PARK (P), theignition key has to be in ON.

The battery could be drained if you leave the keyin the ACCESSORY or ON position with theengine off. You may not be able to start yourvehicle if the battery is allowed to drain foran extended period of time.

D (START): This position starts the engine.


Key In the IgnitionNever leave your vehicle with the keys inside, as itis an easy target for joy riders or thieves. If youleave the key in the ignition and park your vehicle,a chime will sound, when you open the driver’sdoor. Always remember to remove your key fromthe ignition and take it with you. This will lockyour ignition and transaxle. Also, always rememberto lock the doors.

The battery could be drained if you leave the key inthe ignition while your vehicle is parked. You maynot be able to start your vehicle after it has beenparked for an extended period of time.

Retained Accessory Power (RAP)The following accessories on your vehicle may beused for up to 10 minutes after the ignition keyis turned from ON to OFF:

• Radio

• Power Windows

• Audio Steering Wheel Controls

• Sunroof

Power to these accessories stops after 10 minutesor if a door is opened. If you want power foranother 10 minutes, close all the doors and turnthe ignition key to ON and then back to OFF.


Starting the EnginePlace the transmission in the proper gear.

Move your shift lever to PARK (P) orNEUTRAL (N). Your engine will not start in anyother position -- this is a safety feature. Torestart when you are already moving, useNEUTRAL (N) only.

Notice: Do not try to shift to PARK (P) if yourvehicle is moving. If you do, you coulddamage the transmission. Shift to PARK (P)only when your vehicle is stopped.

Starting Procedure1. With your foot off the accelerator pedal, turn

the ignition key to START. When the enginestarts, let go of the key. The idle speed will godown as your engine gets warm. Do notrace the engine immediately after starting it.Operate the engine and transmission gently toallow the oil to warm up and lubricate allmoving parts.

Your vehicle has a Computer-ControlledCranking System. This feature assistsin starting the engine and protectscomponents. If the ignition key is turned to theSTART position, and then released whenthe engine begins cranking, the enginewill continue cranking for a few seconds oruntil the vehicle starts. If the engine does notstart and the key is held in START formany seconds, cranking will be stopped after15 seconds to prevent cranking motordamage. To prevent gear damage, this systemalso prevents cranking if the engine isalready running. Engine cranking can bestopped by turning the ignition switch to theACCESSORY or OFF position.

Notice: Cranking the engine for long periodsof time, by returning the key to the STARTposition immediately after cranking has ended,can overheat and damage the crankingmotor, and drain the battery. Wait at least15 seconds between each try, to allowthe cranking motor to cool down.


2. If the engine does not start after 5-10 seconds,especially in very cold weather (below 0°For −18°C), it could be flooded with too muchgasoline. Try pushing the acceleratorpedal all the way to the floor and holding itthere as you hold the key in START for up toa maximum of 15 seconds. Wait at least15 seconds between each try, to allow thecranking motor to cool down. When the enginestarts, let go of the key and accelerator. Ifthe vehicle starts briefly but then stops again,do the same thing. This clears the extragasoline from the engine. Do not race theengine immediately after starting it. Operatethe engine and transmission gently until the oilwarms up and lubricates all moving parts.

Notice: Your engine is designed to work withthe electronics in your vehicle. If you addelectrical parts or accessories, you couldchange the way the engine operates. Beforeadding electrical equipment, check withyour dealer. If you do not, your engine mightnot perform properly. Any resulting damagewould not be covered by your vehicle’swarranty.

Adjustable Throttle and Brake PedalIf your vehicle has this feature, you can changethe position of the throttle and brake pedals.

No adjustment to the pedals can be made whenthe vehicle is in REVERSE (R) or while usingthe cruise control.

The switch used toadjust the pedals islocated on theinstrument panel.

Move the switch rearward to move the pedalscloser to your body. Move the switch forward tomove the pedals away from your body.


Engine Coolant HeaterYour vehicle may have an engine coolant heater.

In very cold weather, 0°F (−18°C) or colder,the engine coolant heater can help. You will geteasier starting and better fuel economy duringengine warm-up.

Usually, the coolant heater should be plugged in aminimum of four hours prior to starting yourvehicle. At temperatures above 32°F (0°C), use ofthe coolant heater is not required. Your vehiclemay also have an internal thermostat in theplug end of the cord. This will prevent operation ofthe engine coolant heater when the temperatureis at or above 0°F (−18°C) as noted on the cord.

To Use the Engine Coolant Heater1. Turn off the engine.

2. Open the hood and unwrap the electricalcord. For the 3.6L V6 engines, the cord islocated in the engine compartment onthe passenger’s side of the vehicle in front ofthe fuse block.

For the 4.6L V8 engine, the cord is on thefront center of the vehicle above the radiator.You must remove the plastic cap to accessthe plug.

3. Plug it into a normal, grounded 110-volt ACoutlet.

{CAUTION:

Plugging the cord into an ungroundedoutlet could cause an electrical shock.Also, the wrong kind of extension cordcould overheat and cause a fire. Youcould be seriously injured. Plug the cordinto a properly grounded three-prong110-volt AC outlet. If the cord will notreach, use a heavy-duty three-prongextension cord rated for at least 15 amps.

4. Before starting the engine, be sure to unplugand store the cord as it was before to keep itaway from moving engine parts. If you donot, it could be damaged.


How long should you keep the coolant heaterplugged in? The answer depends on the outsidetemperature, the kind of oil you have, andsome other things. Instead of trying to listeverything here, we ask that you contact yourdealer in the area where you will be parking yourvehicle. The dealer can give you the bestadvice for that particular area.

Automatic Transmission OperationThe shift lever is located on the center consolebetween the front seats.

There are severaldifferent positions forthe shift lever.

PARK (P): This position locks the rear wheels. Itis the best position to use when you start theengine because your vehicle cannot move easily.

{CAUTION:

It is dangerous to get out of your vehicleif the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P)with the parking brake firmly set. Yourvehicle can roll.

Do not leave your vehicle when the engineis running unless you have to. If you haveleft the engine running, the vehicle canmove suddenly. You or others could beinjured. To be sure your vehicle will notmove, even when you are on fairly levelground, always set your parking brakeand move the shift lever to PARK (P). SeeShifting Into Park (P) on page 129. If youare pulling a trailer, see Towing a Traileron page 331.


Make sure the shift lever is fully in PARK (P)before starting the engine. Your vehicle has anautomatic transmission shift lock control system.You must fully apply your regular brakes firstand then press the shift lever button before youcan shift from PARK (P) when the ignition key is inON. If you cannot shift out of PARK (P), easepressure on the shift lever and push the shift leverall the way into PARK (P) as you maintainbrake application. Then press the shift lever buttonand move the shift lever into another gear. SeeShifting Out of Park (P) on page 131.

Notice: Shifting to REVERSE (R) while yourvehicle is moving forward could damagethe transmission. The repairs would not becovered by your warranty. Shift toREVERSE (R) only after your vehicle isstopped.

REVERSE (R): Use this gear to back up.

At low vehicle speeds, you can also useREVERSE (R) to rock your vehicle back and forthto get out of snow, ice, or sand without damagingyour transmission. See If Your Vehicle is Stuckin Sand, Mud, Ice, or Snow on page 321 foradditional information.

NEUTRAL (N): In this position, the engine doesnot connect with the wheels. To restart whenyou are already moving, use NEUTRAL (N) only.You can also use NEUTRAL (N) when yourvehicle is being towed.

{CAUTION:

Shifting into a drive gear while yourengine is running at high speed isdangerous. Unless your foot is firmly onthe brake pedal, your vehicle could movevery rapidly. You could lose control andhit people or objects. Do not shift into adrive gear while your engine is running athigh speed.

Notice: Shifting out of PARK (P) orNEUTRAL (N) with the engine running at highspeed may damage the transmission. Therepairs would not be covered by your warranty.Be sure the engine is not running at highspeed when shifting your vehicle.


DRIVE (D): This position is for normal driving. Itprovides the best fuel economy for your vehicle. Ifyou need more power for passing, and you are:

• Going less than 35 mph (55 km/h), pushthe accelerator pedal about halfway down.

• Going about 35 mph (55 km/h) or more, pushthe accelerator all the way down. Thetransmission will shift down to a lower gearand have more power.Downshifting the transmission in slippery roadconditions could result in skidding, see“Skidding” under Loss of Control on page 289.

Notice: Spinning the tires or holding thevehicle in one place on a hill using only theaccelerator pedal may damage thetransmission. If you are stuck, do not spin thetires. When stopping on a hill, use thebrakes to hold the vehicle in place.

Driver Shift Control (DSC)

Notice: If you drive your vehicle at high RPMswithout upshifting while using Driver ShiftControl (DSC), you could damage yourvehicle. Always upshift when necessary whileusing DSC.

Your automatic transmission has a Driver ShiftControl (DSC) feature that allows you to changegears similar to a manual transmission. To use theDSC feature:

1. Slide the shift lever over from DRIVE (D) tothe right into the DSC area.

When the transmissionis in DSC mode thesport symbol inthe Driver InformationCenter (DIC) willcome on.

If you do not move the shift lever forward orrearward, the vehicle will be in sport mode.When you are in the sport mode the vehiclewill still shift automatically. While drivingin sport mode, the transmission may remain ina gear longer than it would in the normaldriving mode based on braking, throttle input,and vehicle lateral acceleration.


2. To enter the DSC mode, press the shift leverforward to upshift or rearward to downshift.

The DIC will show therequested gear rangewhen moving theshift lever forward orrearward. SeeDriver InformationCenter (DIC) onpage 214

While using the DSC feature, the vehicle will havefirmer shifting and increased performance. Youcan use this for sport driving or when climbing ordescending hills, to stay in gear longer, or todown shift for more power or engine braking.

The transmission will only allow you to shift intogears appropriate for the vehicle speed and engineRevolutions Per Minute (RPM). The transmissionwill not automatically shift to the next highergear if the engine RPM is too high.

If shifting is prevented for any reason, the currentlyselected gear will flash multiple times, indicatingthat the transmission has not shifted gears.

While in the DSC mode, the transmission willautomatically downshift when the vehicle comes toa stop and while quickly applying the acceleratorto increase speed. This will allow for morepower during take-off.

When accelerating your vehicle from a stop insnowy and icy conditions, you may want to shiftinto second gear. A higher gear ratio allows you togain more traction on slippery surfaces.


Tow/Haul Mode

Your vehicle may be equipped with a Tow/Haulmode. The button is located on instrumentpanel under the climate controls. You should usethis feature to assist when towing or hauling aheavy load.

When Tow/Haul is activated the Tow/Haul symbolwill illuminate on the instrument panel cluster.See Tow/Haul Mode under Towing a Traileron page 331 for more information.


Grade BrakingGrade Braking assists when driving on a downhillgrade. It maintains the vehicle’s speed byautomatically implementing a shift schedule thatuses the engine and the transmission to slowthe vehicle. This reduces wear on the brakessystem and increases control of the vehicle. Thesystem constantly monitors the vehicle’s speed,acceleration, throttle position, and whetherthe brake pedal is being pressed, and determineswhen to keep the current vehicle speed or toslow down. The system will then automaticallycommand downshifts that reduces the vehiclesspeed, until the brake pedal is no longerbeing pressed. This indicates the desired vehiclespeed has been reached.

The tow/haul mode and grade braking shift modescan be activated by pressing the button on theinstrument panel console. While in the DSC mode,grade braking is deactivated, allowing the driverto select a gear.

See Automatic Transmission Operation onpage 122.

Parking Brake

The parking brake pedalis located on the lowerportion of the instrumentpanel to the left of thesteering wheel.

To set the parking brake, hold the regular brakepedal down with your right foot and push theparking brake pedal down with your left foot.

If the ignition is on, the brake system warning lighton the instrument panel cluster should comeon. If it does not, you need to have your vehicleserviced. See Brake System Warning Lighton page 204 for more information.


To release the parking brake, pull the releaselever located to the left of the steering wheel onthe instrument panel.

Notice: Driving with the parking brake oncan overheat the brake system and causepremature wear or damage to brake systemparts. Verify that the parking brake is fullyreleased and the brake warning light isoff before driving.

A warning chime will sound if the parking brake isset, the ignition is on, and the vehicle begins tomove. To stop the chime, fully release theparking brake.

If you are towing a trailer and parking on a hill,see Towing a Trailer on page 331 for moreinformation.


Shifting Into Park (P)

{CAUTION:

It can be dangerous to get out of yourvehicle if the shift lever is not fully inPARK (P) with the parking brake firmlyset. Your vehicle can roll. If you have leftthe engine running, the vehicle can movesuddenly. You or others could be injured.To be sure your vehicle will not move,even when you are on fairly level ground,use the steps that follow. If you arepulling a trailer, see Towing a Trailer onpage 331.

To shift into PARK (P), use the following steps:

1. Hold the brake pedal down with your right foot.

2. Move the shift lever into PARK (P) bypressing the button on the front of theshift lever while pushing the lever all the waytoward the front of the vehicle. Releasethe button.

3. With your right foot still holding the brakepedal down, set the parking brake withyour left foot. See Parking Brake on page 127for more information.

4. Turn the key to OFF.

5. Remove the key from the ignition switch andtake it with you. If you can leave your vehiclewith the key in your hand, the vehicle is inPARK (P).


Leaving Your Vehicle With theEngine Running

{CAUTION:

It can be dangerous to leave your vehiclewith the engine running. Your vehiclecould move suddenly if the shift lever isnot fully in PARK (P) with the parkingbrake firmly set. And, if you leave thevehicle with the engine running, it couldoverheat and even catch fire. You orothers could be injured. Do not leave yourvehicle with the engine running.

If you have to leave your vehicle with the enginerunning, be sure your vehicle is in PARK (P)and your parking brake is firmly set before youleave it. After you have moved the shift lever intoPARK (P), hold the regular brake pedal down.Then, see if you can move the shift leveraway from PARK (P) without first pushing thebutton on the shift lever. If you can, it means thatthe shift lever was not fully locked into PARK (P).

Torque LockIf you are parking on a hill and you do not shiftyour transmission into PARK (P) properly,the weight of the vehicle may put too much forceon the parking pawl in the transmission. Youmay find it difficult to pull the shift lever outof PARK (P). This is called “torque lock.” Toprevent torque lock, set the parking brake and thenshift into PARK (P) properly before you leavethe driver’s seat. To find out how, see “Shifting IntoPARK (P)” listed previously.

If torque lock does occur, you may need to haveanother vehicle push yours a little uphill totake some of the pressure from the parking pawlin the transmission, so you can pull the shiftlever out of PARK (P).


Shifting Out of Park (P)Your vehicle has an automatic transmission shiftlock control system.

To shift out of PARK (P):

1. Apply the regular brake pedal.

2. Then press the shift lever button.

3. Move the shift lever to the desired gear.

If you are still unable to shift out of PARK (P):

1. Fully release the shift lever button.

2. While holding down the brake pedal, pressthe shift lever button again.

3. Move the shift lever to the desired gear.

If you still cannot move the shift lever fromPARK (P), consult your dealer.

Parking Over Things That Burn

{CAUTION:

Things that can burn could touch hotexhaust parts under your vehicle andignite. Do not park over papers, leaves,dry grass, or other things that can burn.


Engine Exhaust

{CAUTION:

Engine exhaust can kill. It contains thegas carbon monoxide (CO), which youcannot see or smell. It can causeunconsciousness and death.

You might have exhaust coming in if:• The exhaust system sounds strange

or different.• Your vehicle gets rusty underneath.• Your vehicle was damaged in a

collision.• Your vehicle was damaged when

driving over high points on the roador over road debris.



• Repairs were not done correctly.• Your vehicle or the exhaust system

has been modified improperly.

If you ever suspect exhaust is coming intoyour vehicle:

• Drive it only with all the windowsdown to blow out any CO; and

• Have your vehicle fixed immediately.


Running the Engine While ParkedIt is better not to park with the engine running. But ifyou ever have to, here are some things to know.

{CAUTION:

Idling the engine with the climate controlsystem off could allow dangerous exhaustinto your vehicle. See the earlier cautionunder Engine Exhaust on page 132.

Also, idling in a closed-in place can letdeadly carbon monoxide (CO) into yourvehicle even if the climate control fan is atthe highest setting. One place this canhappen is a garage. Exhaust — withCO — can come in easily. NEVER park ina garage with the engine running.

Another closed-in place can be a blizzard.See Winter Driving on page 317.

{CAUTION:

It can be dangerous to get out of yourvehicle if the shift lever is not fully inPARK (P) with the parking brake firmlyset. Your vehicle can roll. Do not leaveyour vehicle when the engine is runningunless you have to. If you have left theengine running, the vehicle can movesuddenly. You or others could be injured.To be sure your vehicle will not move,even when you are on fairly level ground,always set your parking brake and movethe shift lever to PARK (P).

Follow the proper steps to be sure your vehiclewill not move. See Shifting Into Park (P) onpage 129.

If you are pulling a trailer, see Towing a Trailer onpage 331.


Mirrors

Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirrorwith OnStar®

The vehicle may have an automatic dimminginside rearview mirror with OnStar® controls. Formore information about OnStar®, see OnStar®

System on page 139.

O (On/Off): The on/off button, located on thelower left side of the mirror, is used for theautomatic dimming functions of the rearview mirror.

Mirror OperationThe automatic dimming feature comes on eachtime the vehicle is started. Automatic dimmingreduces the glare of lights from behind the vehicle.

To turn the automatic dimming feature on or off,press and release the on/off button. The indicatorlight will illuminate when this feature is on.

Cleaning the MirrorWhen cleaning the mirror, use a paper towel orsimilar material dampened with glass cleaner.Do not spray glass cleaner directly on the mirroras that may cause the liquid cleaner to enterthe mirror housing.

Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirrorwith OnStar® and CompassThe vehicle may have an automatic dimminginside rearview mirror with a compass andOnStar® controls. For more information aboutOnStar®, see OnStar® System on page 139.

The mirror has an eight-point compass display inthe upper right corner of the mirror. When on,the compass automatically calibrates, or sets thedriving direction, as the vehicle is driven. If thevehicle has the navigation option, the direction thevehicle is facing will be displayed on thenavigation screen.

O (On/Off): The on/off button is located on thelower left side of the mirror and is used forthe automatic dimming and compass functions ofthe rearview mirror.


Mirror OperationThe automatic dimming feature comes on eachtime the vehicle is started.

To turn the automatic dimming feature on or off,press the on/off or AUTO button. The indicator lightwill illuminate when this feature is on.

Compass OperationPress the on/off button once to turn the compasson or off.

When the ignition and the compass feature areon, the compass will show two character boxes forapproximately two seconds. After two seconds,the mirror will display the current compassdirection.

Compass CalibrationIf after two seconds the display does not show acompass direction, (N for North for example), theremay be a strong magnetic field interfering withthe compass. Such interference may be caused bya magnetic antenna mount, note pad holder, orsimilar object. If the letter C appears in thecompass window, the compass may need to bereset or calibrated.

The mirror can be calibrated by driving the vehiclein circles at 5 mph (8 km/h) or less until thedisplay reads a direction.

The compass can be calibrated by pressing andholding the on/off button until a C is shown inthe compass display.

Compass VarianceCompass variance is the difference betweenearth’s magnetic north and true geographic north.If the mirror is not adjusted for compassvariance, the compass could give false readings.

The mirror is set in zone eight upon leavingthe factory. It will be necessary to adjust thecompass to compensate for compass variance ifthe vehicle is driven outside zone eight. Undercertain circumstances, such as a long distance,cross-country trip, it will be necessary to adjust thecompass variance.


To adjust for compass variance, do the following:

1. Find your current location and variancezone number on the zone map that follows.

2. Press and hold the on/off button until a zonenumber appears on the display.

3. Once the zone number appears on thedisplay, press the on/off button quicklyuntil you reach the correct zone number.If C appears in the compass window,the compass may need calibration. See“Compass Calibration” listed previously.

Cleaning the MirrorWhen cleaning the mirror, use a paper towel orsimilar material dampened with glass cleaner. Donot spray glass cleaner directly on the mirroras that may cause the liquid cleaner to enter themirror housing.


Outside Power Heated Mirrors

The power mirrorcontrols are located onthe driver’s doorarmrest and operateboth outside rearviewmirrors.

• Press (A) to select the driver’s side mirror.The LED indicator will turn on to indicatethat this mirror is selected. Then pressthe arrows located on the four-way control padto adjust the mirror. Press (A) again todeselect the mirror. The LED indicator will turnoff to indicate that this mirror is de-selected.

• Press (B) to select the passenger’s sidemirror. The LED indicator will turn on toindicate that this mirror is selected. Then pressthe arrows located on the four-way controlpad to adjust the mirror. Press (B) againto deselect the mirror. The LED indicator willturn off to indicate that this mirror isde-selected.

If your vehicle has the power fold function, use thefollowing buttons:

• Press (C), to fold the mirrors out to the drivingposition.

• Press (D) to fold the mirrors in to the foldedposition.

If the mirrors are accidentally folded/unfoldedmanually, they may shake or flutter at normaldriving speeds and may not stay in the unfoldedposition. If this happens, you will need to reset themirrors. See “Resetting the Power FoldawayMirrors” next.


Resetting the Power Foldaway MirrorsYou will need to reset the power foldaway mirrorsif the following occurs:

• The mirrors are accidentally obstructed whilefolding.

• They are accidentally manuallyfolded/unfolded.

• The mirrors will not stay in the unfoldedposition.

• The mirrors shake and flutter at normal drivingspeeds.

To reset the power foldaway mirrors, fold andunfold them one time using the mirror controls.This will reset them to their normal position.

The mirrors can be manually folded inward toprevent damage when going through an automaticcar wash or a confined space. To fold, push themirror toward the vehicle. To return the mirror to itsoriginal position, push outward. Be sure toreturn both mirrors to their original unfoldedposition before driving.

The preferred position can be stored in memory ifthe vehicle has the memory option. See MemorySeat and Mirrors on page 12 for more information.

When the rear window defogger is turned on, bothoutside rearview mirrors are heated to helpclear them of ice, snow, and condensation. See“Rear Window Defogger” under Dual ClimateControl System on page 189 for more information.

Outside Automatic DimmingMirrorThe driver’s outside mirror may have an automaticdimming feature that helps to reduce glare fromother vehicles headlamps. This feature iscontrolled by the on and off settings on theautomatic dimming rearview mirror. See AutomaticDimming Rearview Mirror with OnStar® onpage 134.

Outside Curb View Assist MirrorIf the vehicle has memory seat and mirrors, thedriver’s or passenger’s mirror can tilt to apreselected position when the vehicle is shiftedinto REVERSE (R). Use this feature to viewthe curb when parallel parking.

When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (R)and after a five-second delay, both mirrorsreturn to their original position.


The driver can select either mirror, or both mirrorsto be activated with this feature. Deselect bothmirrors to turn off the automatic tilt feature.

If further adjustment is needed after the mirror istilted, the mirror controls can be used. See OutsidePower Heated Mirrors on page 137 for moreinformation.

Outside Convex Mirror

{CAUTION:

A convex mirror can make things (likeother vehicles) look farther away thanthey really are. If you cut too sharply intothe right lane, you could hit a vehicle onyour right. Check your inside mirror orglance over your shoulder beforechanging lanes.

The passenger’s side mirror is convex. A convexmirror’s surface is curved so that more can beseen from the driver’s seat. The mirror does nothave a dimming feature.

OnStar® System

OnStar® uses several innovative technologies andlive advisors to provide you with a wide rangeof safety, security, information, and convenienceservices. If your airbags deploy, the system isdesigned to make an automatic call to OnStar®

Emergency advisors who can request emergencyservices be sent to your location. If you lockyour keys in the vehicle, call OnStar® at1-888-4-ONSTAR and they can send a signal tounlock your doors. If you need roadsideassistance, press the OnStar® button and theycan contact Roadside Service for you.


OnStar® service is provided to you subject to theOnStar® Terms and Conditions. You maycancel your OnStar® service at any time bycontacting OnStar® as provided below. A completeOnStar® Owners Guide and the OnStar® Termsand Conditions are included in the vehicle’sOnStar® Subscriber glove box literature. For moreinformation, visit onstar.com or onstar.ca,contact OnStar® at 1-888-4-ONSTAR(1-888-466-7827) or TTY 1-877-248-2080, orpress the OnStar® button to speak with anOnStar® advisor 24 hours a day, 7 days a week.

Not all OnStar® features are available on allvehicles. To check if your vehicle is equipped toprovide the services described below, or for afull description of OnStar® services and systemlimitations, see the OnStar® Owner’s Guide in yourglove box or visit onstar.com.

OnStar® ServicesFor new vehicles with OnStar®, the Safe & SoundPlan, or the Directions & Connections® Plan isincluded for one year from the date of purchase.You can extend this plan beyond the first year,or upgrade to the Directions & Connections® Plan.For more information, press the OnStar® buttonto speak with an advisor.

Some OnStar® services (such as Remote DoorUnlock or Stolen Vehicle Location Assistance) maynot be available until you register with OnStar®.

Available Services with Safe & Sound® Plan• Automatic Notification of Airbag Deployment

• Advanced Automatic Crash Notification (AACN)(If equipped)

• Link to Emergency Services

• Roadside Assistance

• Stolen Vehicle Location Assistance

• AccidentAssist

• Remote Door Unlock/Vehicle Alert

• OnStar® Vehicle Diagnostics

• GM Goodwrench® On Demand Diagnostics

• OnStar® Hands-Free Calling with30 complimentary minutes

• OnStar® Virtual Advisor (U.S. Only)


Available Services included with Directions& Connections® Plan• All Safe and Sound Plan Services

• Driving Directions - Advisor delivered orOnStar® Turn-by-Turn Navigation (If equipped)

• RideAssist

• Information and Convenience Services

OnStar® Hands-Free CallingOnStar® Hands-Free Calling allows eligibleOnStar® subscribers to make and receive callsusing voice commands. Hands-Free Calling is fullyintegrated into the vehicle, and can be usedwith OnStar® Pre-Paid Minute Packages.Hands-Free Calling may also be linked to aVerizon Wireless service plan in the U.S. or a BellMobility service plan in Canada, depending oneligibility. To find out more, refer to the OnStar®

Owners Guide in the vehicle’s glove box, visitwww.onstar.com or www.onstar.ca, or speak withan OnStar® advisor by pressing the OnStar®

button or calling 1-888-4-ONSTAR(1-888-466-7827).

OnStar® Virtual AdvisorOnStar® Virtual Advisor is a feature of OnStar®

Hands-Free Calling that uses your minutes toaccess location-based weather, local traffic reports,and stock quotes. By pressing the phone buttonand giving a few simple voice commands, you canbrowse through the various topics. See the OnStar®

Owners Guide for more information (Only availablein the continental U.S.).

OnStar® Steering Wheel ControlsYour vehicle may have a Talk/Mute button thatcan be used to interact with OnStar® Hands-FreeCalling. See Audio Steering Wheel Controls onpage 269 for more information.

On some vehicles, you may have to hold thebutton for a few seconds and give the command“ONSTAR” in order to activate the OnStar®

Hands-Free Calling feature.

On some vehicles, the mute button can be used todial numbers into voicemail systems, or to dialphone extensions. See the OnStar® Owner’sGuide for more information.


How OnStar® Service WorksIn order to provide you with OnStar® services,your vehicle’s OnStar® system has the capabilityof recording and transmitting vehicle information.This information is automatically sent to anOnStar® Call Center at the time of an OnStar®

button press, Emergency button press or ifyour airbags or AACN system deploys. The vehicleinformation usually includes your GPS locationand, in the event of a crash, additional informationregarding the accident that your vehicle hasbeen involved in (e.g. the direction from whichyour vehicle was hit). When you use the VirtualAdvisor feature of OnStar® Hands-Free Calling,your vehicle also sends OnStar® your GPSlocation so that we can provide you withlocation-based services.

OnStar® service cannot work unless your vehicleis in a place where OnStar® has an agreementwith a wireless service provider for service in thatarea. OnStar® service also cannot work unlessyou are in a place where the wireless serviceprovider OnStar® has hired for that areahas coverage, network capacity and receptionwhen the service is needed, and technology that

is compatible with the OnStar® service. Not allservices are available everywhere, particularly inremote or enclosed areas, or at all times.

OnStar® service that involves location informationabout your vehicle cannot work unless GPSsatellite signals are unobstructed and available inthat place as well.

Your vehicle must have a working electricalsystem (including adequate battery power) for theOnStar® equipment to operate. There are otherproblems OnStar® cannot control that may preventOnStar® from providing OnStar® service to youat any particular time or place. Some examples aredamage to important parts of your vehicle in anaccident, hills, tall buildings, tunnels, weatheror wireless phone network congestion.

Your ResponsibilityYou may need to increase the volume of your radioto hear the OnStar® advisor. If the light next to theOnStar® buttons is red, this means that your systemis not functioning properly and should be checkedby a dealer. If the light appears clear (no light isappearing), your OnStar® subscription has expired.You can always press the OnStar® button toconfirm that your OnStar® equipment is active.


Universal Home RemoteSystem

Universal Home Remote System(With Three Round LED)The Universal Home Remote System provides away to replace up to three hand-heldradio-frequency (RF) transmitters used to activatedevices such as garage door openers, securitysystems, and home lighting.




The FCC Grant of Equipment AuthorizationCertificate number is KOBGTV06A.




The Canadian Registration ID number is3521A-GTV06A.


Universal Home Remote System(With One Triangular LED)The Universal Home Remote System provides away to replace up to three hand-heldradio-frequency (RF) transmitters used to activatedevices such as garage door openers, securitysystems, and home lighting.





The FCC Grant of Equipment AuthorizationCertificate number is CB2SAHL3.




The Canadian Registration ID number is2791021849A.


Universal Home Remote SystemOperation (With Three Round LED)

Your vehicle may have the Universal Home RemoteSystem. If there are three round Light EmittingDiode (LED) above the Universal Home RemoteSystem buttons, follow the instructions below. Ifthere is one triangular LED above the UniversalHome Remote System buttons, follow theinstructions under Universal Home Remote SystemOperation (with one triangular LED).

This system provides a way to replace up tothree remote control transmitters used to activatedevices such as garage door openers, securitysystems, and home lighting.

Do not use this system with any garage dooropener that does not have the stop and reversefeature. This includes any garage door openermodel manufactured before April 1, 1982.


Read the instructions completely before attemptingto program the transmitter. Because of the stepsinvolved, it may be helpful to have anotherperson available to assist you in programming thetransmitter.

Be sure to keep the original remote controltransmitter for use in other vehicles, as well as, forfuture programming. You only need the originalremote control transmitter for fixed codeprogramming. It is also recommended that uponthe sale or lease termination of the vehicle,the programmed buttons should be erased forsecurity purposes. See “Erasing your UniversalHome Remote Buttons” later in this section.

Be sure that people and objects are clear of thegarage door or security device you areprogramming. When programming a garage door,it is advised to park outside of the garage.

If you do not know if your garage door opener is afixed code or rolling code device, open yourgarage door opener’s remote control battery cover.Your garage door opener is a fixed code deviceif there is a panel of switches. If not, yourgarage door opener is a rolling code device.


Programming Universal HomeRemote — Fixed CodeFixed Code garage door openers are used forgarage doors produced prior to 1996. Fixed codeuses the same coded signal every time, whichis manually programmed by setting DIP switchesfor a unique personal code.

To program up to three channels,

1. Remove the battery cover of the hand-heldtransmitter.

2. Write down the eight to 12 coding switchsettings from left to right. When the switchis in the up position, write “on,” and when aswitch is in the down position, write “off”.If a switch is set between the up and downposition, write “middle”.

3. Enter these positions into the Universal HomeRemote System as follows.Press and release all three buttons atthe same time to put the device intoprogramming mode.

Example of Switch Settings


4. The indicator light will blink slowly. In orderfrom left to right, and within two andone-half minutes, enter each switch settinginto the Universal Home Remote System.Push one button for each switch as follows:

• Left button = “on” switch position.

• Right button = “off” switch position.

• Middle button = “middle” switch position.

5. After entering the switch settings, press andrelease all three buttons at the same time.The indicator lights will turn on.

6. Press and hold the button you would like touse to control the garage door until thegarage door moves. The indicator light abovethe selected button should slowly blink.You may need to hold the button fromfive to 55 seconds.

7. Immediately release the button when thegarage door moves. The indicator light willblink rapidly until programming is complete.

8. Press and release the button again. Thegarage door should move, confirming thatprogramming is successful and complete.

To program another device such as an additionalgarage door opener, a security device, orhome lighting, repeat Steps 1–8, choosing adifferent function button in Step 6 than what youused for the garage door opener.


Programming Universal HomeRemote — Rolling CodeRolling code garage door openers are used forgarage doors produced after 1996 and arecode protected. Rolling code means the codedsignal is changed every time your remote controlgarage door opener is used.

Programming a rolling code garage door openerinvolves time-sensitive actions, so read theentire procedure before you begin. If you do notfollow these actions, the device will time outand you will have to repeat the procedure.

Follow these steps to program up tothree channels:

1. Press the two outside buttons at the sametime for one to two seconds, and immediatelyrelease them.

2. Go to the garage. Locate the garage doormotor head and press and release the“learn” button.After pressing the “learn” button, you have10 to 30 seconds to complete Step 4depending on your garage control unit. If youcannot locate the “learn” button, refer tothe owners guide for your garage door opener.


3. Press and hold the button you would like touse to control the garage door until thegarage door moves. The indicator light, abovethe selected button, should slowly blink.You may need to hold the button fromfive to 20 seconds.

4. Immediately release the button when thegarage door moves. The indicator light willblink rapidly until programming is complete.

5. Press and release the button again. Thegarage door should move, confirming thatprogramming is successful and complete.

To program another device such as an additionalgarage door opener, a security device, orhome lighting, repeat Steps 1–5, choosing adifferent function button in Step 3 than what youused for the garage door opener.

Using Universal Home RemotePress and hold the appropriate button for at leasthalf of a second. The indicator light will comeon while the signal is being transmitted.

Reprogramming Universal HomeRemote ButtonsYou can reprogram any of the three buttons byrepeating the instructions.

Erasing Universal Home RemoteButtonsYou should erase the programmed buttons whenyou sell the vehicle or terminate your lease.

To erase either rolling code or fixed code on theUniversal Home Remote device, do the following:

1. Press and hold the two outside buttons atthe same time for approximately 20 seconds,until the indicator lights, located directlyabove the buttons, begin to blink rapidly.

2. Once the indicator lights begin to blink,release both buttons. The codes from allbuttons will be erased.

For additional information on Universal HomeRemote, see Customer Assistance Officeson page 491.


Universal Home Remote SystemOperation (With One Triangular LED)

Your vehicle may have the Universal HomeRemote System. If there is one triangular LightEmitting Diode (LED) above the UniversalHome Remote buttons, follow the instructionsbelow. If your vehicle has three round LED abovethe Universal Home Remote buttons, follow theinstructions under Universal Home Remote SystemOperation (With three round LED).

Do not use the Universal Home Remote with anygarage door opener that does not have thestop and reverse feature. This includes any garagedoor opener model manufactured before April 1,1982. If you have a newer garage door openerwith rolling codes, please be sure to follow Steps6 through 8 to complete the programming ofyour Universal Home Remote Transmitter.

Read the instructions completely before attemptingto program the Universal Home Remote.Because of the steps involved, it may be helpful tohave another person available to assist you inthe programming steps.

Keep the original hand-held transmitter for use inother vehicles as well as for future UniversalHome Remote programming. It is alsorecommended that upon the sale of the vehicle,the programmed Universal Home Remote buttonsshould be erased for security purposes. See“Erasing Universal Home Remote Buttons” later inthis section or, for assistance, see CustomerAssistance Offices on page 491.

Be sure that people and objects are clear of thegarage door or gate operator you areprogramming. When programming a garage door,it is advised to park outside of the garage.

It is recommended that a new battery be installedin your hand-held transmitter for quicker andmore accurate transmission of the radio-frequencysignal.


Programming Universal Home RemoteFollow these steps to program up tothree channels:

1. Press and hold down the two outsideUniversal Home Remote buttons, releasingonly when the Universal Home Remoteindicator light begins to flash, after20 seconds. Do not hold down the buttons forlonger than 30 seconds and do not repeatthis step to program a second and/orthird hand-held transmitter to the remainingtwo Universal Home Remote buttons.

2. Position the end of your hand-held transmitterabout 1 to 3 inches (3 to 8 cm) away from theUniversal Home Remote buttons whilekeeping the indicator light in view.

3. Simultaneously press and hold both thedesired Universal Home Remote buttonand the hand-held transmitter button. Do notrelease the buttons until Step 4 has beencompleted.Some entry gates and garage door openersmay require you to substitute Step 3 withthe procedure noted in “Gate Operator andCanadian Programming” later in this section.

4. The indicator light will flash slowly at first andthen rapidly after Universal Home Remotesuccessfully receives the frequency signalfrom the hand-held transmitter. Release bothbuttons.

5. Press and hold the newly-trained UniversalHome Remote button and observe theindicator light.If the indicator light stays on continuously,programming is complete and your deviceshould activate when the Universal HomeRemote button is pressed and released.To program the remaining two Universal HomeRemote buttons, begin with Step 2 under“Programming Universal Home Remote.” Donot repeat Step 1 as this will erase all ofthe programmed channels.If the indicator light blinks rapidly fortwo seconds and then turns to a constantlight, continue with Steps 6 through 8 followingto complete the programming of a rolling-codeequipped device, most commonly, a garagedoor opener.


6. Locate in the garage, the garage door openerreceiver (motor-head unit). Locate the “Learn”or “Smart” button. This can usually befound where the hanging antenna wire isattached to the motor-head unit.

7. Firmly press and release the “Learn” or“Smart” button. The name and color ofthe button may vary by manufacturer.You will have 30 seconds to start Step 8.

8. Return to the vehicle. Firmly press and holdthe programmed Universal Home Remotebutton for two seconds, then release it.Immediately press and hold the same buttona second time for two seconds, thenrelease it. Immediately, press and hold thesame button a third time for two seconds, thenrelease.The Universal Home Remote should nowactivate your rolling-code equipped device.

To program the remaining two Universal HomeRemote buttons, begin with Step 2 of“Programming Universal Home Remote.” You donot want to repeat Step 1, as this will eraseall previous programming from the Universal HomeRemote buttons.

Gate Operator and CanadianProgrammingCanadian radio-frequency laws require transmittersignals to time out or quit after several secondsof transmission. This may not be long enoughfor Universal Home Remote to pick up the signalduring programming. Similarly, some U.S. gateoperators are manufactured to time out inthe same manner.

If you live in Canada, or you are having difficultyprogramming a gate operator or garage dooropener by using the “Programming UniversalHome Remote” procedures, regardless of whereyou live, replace Step 3 under “ProgrammingUniversal Home Remote” with the following:

Continue to press and hold the Universal HomeRemote button while you press and release everytwo seconds (cycle) the hand-held transmitterbutton until the frequency signal has beensuccessfully accepted by the Universal HomeRemote. The Universal Home Remote indicatorlight will flash slowly at first and then rapidly.Proceed with Step 4 under “ProgrammingUniversal Home Remote” to complete.


Using Universal Home RemotePress and hold the appropriate Universal HomeRemote button for at least half of a second.The indicator light will come on while the signal isbeing transmitted.

Erasing Universal Home RemoteButtonsTo erase programming from the three UniversalHome Remote buttons do the following:

1. Press and hold down the two outside buttonsuntil the indicator light begins to flash, after20 seconds. Do not hold the two outsidebuttons for longer than 30 seconds.

2. Release both buttons.

The Universal Home Remote is now in the training(learning) mode and can be programmed at anytime beginning with Step 2 under “ProgrammingUniversal Home Remote” shown earlier inthis section.

Individual buttons cannot be erased, but they canbe reprogrammed. See “Reprogramming aSingle Universal Home Remote Button” followingthis section.

Reprogramming a Single UniversalHome Remote ButtonTo program a device to Universal Home Remoteusing a Universal Home Remote buttonpreviously trained, follow these steps:

1. Press and hold the desired Universal HomeRemote button. Do not release the button.

2. The indicator light will begin to flash after20 seconds. While still holding the UniversalHome Remote button, proceed with Step2 under “Programming Universal HomeRemote” shown earlier in this section.

For additional information on Universal HomeRemote, see Customer Assistance Officeson page 491.

Storage Areas

Glove BoxTo open the glove box, lift up on the lever. Useyour door key to lock or unlock it.


Cupholder(s)Your vehicle has cupholders located between thefront seats. Slide the cover back to exposethem. There are also cupholders in the armrest ofthe second row seat. Press the panel on thefront of the armrest to expose the cupholders. Onthe outboard sides of the third row there mayalso be cupholders.

Cell Phone Storage AreaYour vehicle has a closeable cell phone/sunglasses storage area inside both of the frontdoors. Press the button to open the door.

Center Console Storage AreaYour vehicle has a center console storage arealocated between the front seats. It includes storageareas, and accessory power outlet(s) on therear of the console.

Luggage Carrier

{CAUTION:

If you try to carry something on top ofyour vehicle that is longer or wider thanthe luggage carrier — like paneling,plywood, a mattress and so forth — thewind can catch it as you drive along. Thiscan cause you to lose control. What youare carrying could be violently torn off,and this could cause you or other driversto have a collision, and of course damageyour vehicle. You may be able to carrysomething like this inside. But, nevercarry something longer or wider than theluggage carrier on top of your vehicle.


If your vehicle has a luggage carrier, you can loadthings on top of your vehicle. The luggage carrierhas side rails attached to the roof. You can getsliding crossrails through your dealer to use fortying things down. These let you load some thingson top of your vehicle, as long as they are not wideror longer than the luggage carrier.Notice: Loading cargo on the luggage carrierthat weighs more than 100 lbs (45 kg) orhangs over the rear or sides of the vehiclemay damage your vehicle. Load cargo so thatit rests on the slats as far forward aspossible and against the side rails, makingsure to fasten it securely.

Cargo CoverIf your vehicle has a cargo cover, you can use itto cover items in the rear of the vehicle. Pullthe cover from the passenger’s side to the driver’sside and slide the ends into the slots to secureit. When it is not in use, take the ends out of theslots and allow the cover to roll back up.

Cargo Management SystemYour vehicle may have a cargo managementsystem. It provides extra storage space for the rearof the vehicle.

The cargo management system has threecompartments. The one closest to the front of thevehicle opens from behind the second row.The center compartment has a divider. Thecompartment closest to the rear of the vehicle hasa removable storage bin.


Sunroof

Sunroof (Ultra View®)

{CAUTION:

People who are in a crash and notwearing a safety belt properly can suffermuch worse injuries. They can hit thingsinside the vehicle or be ejected from it,and be seriously injured or killed. This istrue for any vehicle occupant, in anymotor vehicle. In a rollover or other crash,the Ultra View® roof can be damaged ordestroyed. People who are unbelted wouldbe at risk of being ejected from thevehicle. Always fasten your safety belt,and check that your passengers’ belts arefastened properly too.

The vehicle may have an Ultra View® sunroof overthe first two rows of seats. The ignition must beturned to ON, or ACCESSORY, or the RetainedAccessory Power (RAP) must be active to operateit. See Retained Accessory Power (RAP) onpage 118.

The sunroof/sunshadeswitches are located inthe headliner betweenthe driver and frontpassenger.

One switch operates the sunroof and the otherswitch operates the sunshade.


Press the back of the sunroof switch to open thesunroof. When the switch is pressed to thefirst stop the sunroof will open to a desiredposition. Press the switch to the second stop toexpress open the sunroof to a preset comfortposition. Press the second stop again tofully express open the sunroof. Press the front ofthe switch to close the sunroof. The first stopwill close the sunroof at a desired positionat normal speed, and the second stop will expressclose the roof.

Press the back of the sunshade switch to openthe sunshade. Press the front of the switch to thefirst stop to close the sunshade to a desiredposition at a normal speed. Press the switchforward to the second stop to express close thesunshade.

Anti-Pinch FeatureIf an object is in the path of the sunroof when it isclosing, the anti-pinch feature will detect theobject and stop the sunroof from closing at thepoint of the obstruction. The sunroof will thenreverse. To close the sunroof once it hasre-opened, remove the obstruction and press thefront of the sunroof switch.

ResynchronizationTo resynchronize the sunroof and sunshade, dothe following.

1. With the engine running, press and hold boththe sunroof switch in the open position andthe sunshade switch in the closed position forsix seconds.

2. Release both buttons.

3. When the sunroof reaches the fully closedposition, the sunshade will close.

4. After the sunroof and sunshade have fullyclosed, continue to hold the sunroof switchin the closed position for an additional three orfour seconds to complete theresynchronization process.


Sunroof (Ultra View® Plus)

{CAUTION:

People who are in a crash and notwearing a safety belt properly can suffermuch worse injuries. They can hit thingsinside the vehicle or be ejected from it,and be seriously injured or killed. This istrue for any vehicle occupant, in anymotor vehicle. In a rollover or other crash,the Ultra View® roof can be damaged ordestroyed. People who are unbelted wouldbe at risk of being ejected from thevehicle. Always fasten your safety belt,and check that your passengers’ belts arefastened properly too.

The vehicle may have an Ultra View® sunroof overthe first two rows of seats and a smaller sunroofover the third row seat. Both have sunshades, butthe back sunroof does not open. The ignitionmust be turned to ON, or ACCESSORY, or theRetained Accessory Power (RAP) must be activeto operate it. See Retained Accessory Power(RAP) on page 118

The sunroof/sunshadeswitches are located inthe headliner betweenthe driver and frontpassenger.


One switch operates the front sunroof and anotherswitch operates the front sunshade. The thirdswitch is for the rear sunshade.

Press the back of the sunroof switch to open thesunroof. Press the switch to the first stop toopen the sunroof to a desired position. Press theswitch to the second stop to express open thesunroof to a preset comfort stop. Press the switchat the second stop again to express open thesunroof completely. Press the front of the sunroofswitch to close the sunroof. Press the switch tothe first stop to close the sunroof to a desiredposition. Press the front of the switch to thesecond stop to express close the sunroof.

Press the back of the front sunshade switch toopen it. Press it to the first stop to open the frontsunshade to a desired position. Press it againto express open the sunshade. Press the front ofthe front sunshade switch to close it. Press tothe first stop to close it to a desired position. Pressthe switch to the second stop to express closethe front sunshade

Press the back of the rear sunshade switch toopen the rear sunshade. Press the front ofthe switch to close the rear sunshade.

Anti-Pinch FeatureIf an object is in the path of the sunroof when it isclosing, the anti-pinch feature will detect theobject and stop the sunroof from closing at thepoint of the obstruction. The sunroof will thenreverse. To close the sunroof once it hasre-opened, remove the obstruction and press thefront of the sunroof switch.


ResynchronizationTo resynchronize the front sunroof and front andrear sunshades, do the following.

1. With the engine running, press and hold therear sunshade switch in the closed positionfor about 15 seconds – the shade will move tothe stop position.

2. Briefly release the button, and press the rearsunshade switch in the closed position again.The shade will now move to the fully openposition and then return to the fully closedposition. Keep the switch pushed in the closedposition for the entire open/close cycle ofthe shade.

3. At the same time, press and hold the frontsunroof switch in the open position and thefront sunshade switch in the closed positionfor about six seconds.When the front sunroof reaches the fullyclosed position, the front sunshade will close.

4. After the sunroof and sunshade havefully closed, continue to hold the sunroofswitch in the closed position for an additionalthree or four seconds to complete theresynchronization process.


Instrument Panel Overview ........................ 164Hazard Warning Flashers .......................... 166Other Warning Devices ............................. 166Horn .......................................................... 166Tilt Wheel .................................................. 166Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever .................. 167Turn and Lane-Change Signals ................. 168Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer .......... 169Flash-to-Pass ............................................ 169Windshield Wipers ..................................... 170Windshield Washer .................................... 171Rear Window Wiper/Washer ...................... 172Headlamp Washer ..................................... 173Cruise Control ........................................... 174Headlamps ................................................ 178Wiper Activated Headlamps ....................... 178Headlamps on Reminder ........................... 179Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) ................. 179Fog Lamps ................................................ 181Exterior Lighting Battery Saver .................. 181Instrument Panel Brightness ...................... 181Entry Lighting ............................................ 182

Parade Dimming ........................................ 182Reading Lamps ......................................... 182Electric Power Management ...................... 183Ultrasonic Rear Parking

Assist (URPA) ........................................ 184Accessory Power Outlet(s) ........................ 186Ashtray(s) and Cigarette Lighter ................ 187Analog Clock ............................................. 188

Climate Controls ......................................... 189Dual Climate Control System ..................... 189Outlet Adjustment ...................................... 194Rear Air Conditioning System .................... 195Passenger Compartment Air Filter ............. 195

Warning Lights, Gages, and Indicators ..... 197Instrument Panel Cluster ........................... 198Speedometer and Odometer ...................... 199Tachometer ............................................... 199Engine Speed Limiter ................................ 199Safety Belt Reminder Light ........................ 200Passenger Safety Belt Reminder Light ....... 200Airbag Readiness Light ............................. 201

Section 3 Instrument Panel


Passenger Airbag Status Indicator ............. 202Charging System Light .............................. 204Brake System Warning Light ..................... 204Anti-Lock Brake System Warning Light ...... 205Traction Control System (TCS) Warning

Light ...................................................... 206Engine Coolant Temperature Warning

Light ...................................................... 206Engine Coolant Temperature Gage ............ 207Tire Pressure Light .................................... 207Malfunction Indicator Lamp ........................ 208Oil Pressure Light ..................................... 211Security Light ............................................ 212Fog Lamp Light ......................................... 212Lights On Reminder .................................. 212Cruise Control Light .................................. 212Highbeam On Light ................................... 213Tow/Haul Mode Light ................................ 213Fuel Gage ................................................. 213

Driver Information Center (DIC) .................. 214DIC Controls and Displays ........................ 215DIC Warnings and Messages .................... 220DIC Vehicle Customization ........................ 231

Audio System(s) ......................................... 240Setting the Time (Radio with Single

CD Player) ............................................. 242Setting the Time (Radio with Six-Disc

CD Player) ............................................. 244Radio with CD ........................................... 246Using an MP3 ........................................... 257XM Radio Messages ................................. 264Navigation/Radio System ........................... 266Rear Seat Entertainment System ............... 266Rear Seat Audio (RSA) ............................. 266Theft-Deterrent Feature ............................. 268Audio Steering Wheel Controls .................. 269Radio Reception ........................................ 270Care of Your CDs ..................................... 271Care of the CD Player .............................. 271Diversity Antenna System .......................... 272XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna System ....... 272

Section 3 Instrument Panel


✍ NOTES


Instrument Panel Overview


The main components of the instrument panel are the following:

A. Air Outlets. See Outlet Adjustment on page 194.B. Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever. See Turn

Signal/Multifunction Lever on page 167.C. Instrument Panel Cluster. See Instrument Panel

Cluster on page 198.D. Windshield Wiper Lever. See Windshield

Wipers on page 170.E. Analog Clock. See Analog Clock on page 188.F. Driver Information Center Controls (DIC).

See DIC Controls and Displays on page 215.G. Hood Release. See Hood Release on

page 355. Parking Brake Release. See ParkingBrake on page 127.

H. Instrument Panel Brightness Control. SeeInstrument Panel Brightness on page 181.

I. Tilt Wheel Lever. See Tilt Wheel on page 166.

J. Adjustable Pedal Button (If Equipped). SeeAdjustable Throttle and Brake Pedal onpage 120.

K. Horn. See Horn on page 166.L. Ashtray (If Equipped). See Ashtray(s) and

Cigarette Lighter on page 187.M. Traction Control Button. See Traction Control

System (TCS) on page 281.N. Tow/Haul Selector Button (If Equipped). See

Tow/Haul Mode on page 126.O. Hazard Warning Flasher Button. See Hazard

Warning Flashers on page 166.P. Dual Climate Control System. See Dual

Climate Control System on page 189.Q. Audio System. See Audio System(s) on

page 240.R. Glove Box. See Glove Box on page 153.


Hazard Warning FlashersThe hazard warning flashers let you warn thepolice and others that you have a problem. Thefront and rear turn signal lamps will flash onand off.

The hazard warningflasher button is locatedon the instrumentpanel below the climatecontrol system.

The hazard warning flashers work no matter whatposition the key is in, and even if the key is notin the ignition switch.

Press the button to make the front and rear turnsignal lamps flash on and off. Press the buttonagain to turn the flashers off.

While the hazard warning flashers are on, the turnsignals do not work.

Other Warning DevicesIf you carry reflective triangles, you can set themup at the side of the road about 300 feet(100 m) behind your vehicle.

HornPress near or on the horn symbols on your steeringwheel pad to sound the horn.

Tilt WheelA tilt wheel allows you to adjust the steering wheelbefore you drive. You can raise it to the highestlevel to give your legs more room when youexit and enter the vehicle.


The lever that allows you to tilt the steering wheelis located on the left side of the steering column.

To tilt the wheel, hold the steering wheel andpull the lever. Then move the steering wheel to acomfortable position and release the lever tolock the wheel in place.

Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever

The lever on the left side of the steering columnincludes the following:

• G Turn and Lane-Change Signals. SeeTurn and Lane-Change Signals on page 168.

• P Exterior Lamp Control. See Headlamps onpage 178.

• 23 Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer.See Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer onpage 169.

• Flash-To-Pass Feature. See Flash-to-Pass onpage 169.

• - Fog Lamps. See Fog Lamps on page 181.

• I Cruise Control. See Cruise Control onpage 174.


Turn and Lane-Change SignalsTo signal a turn, move the lever all the way up ordown. The lever returns automatically whenthe turn is complete.

An arrow on theinstrument panel clusterwill flash in thedirection of the turn orlane change.

Raise or lower the lever until the arrow starts toflash to signal a lane change. Hold it there until thelane change is complete. The lever returns to itsoriginal position when it is released.

Rapid flashing of arrows when signaling for a turnor lane change may be caused by a burned-outsignal bulb. Other driver’s will not see the signal.

Replace burned-out bulbs to help avoid possibleaccidents. Check the fuse and for burned-out bulbsif the arrow fails to work when signaling a turn.See Fuses and Circuit Breakers on page 455 formore information.

Turn Signal On ChimeIf the turn signal is left on for about 3⁄4 mile(1.2 km), a warning chime will sound and theTURN SIGNAL ON message will appear on theDriver Information Center (DIC) display. See “TurnSignal On” under DIC Warnings and Messageson page 220 for more information.


Headlamp High/Low-Beam ChangerPush forward on the turn signal/multifunctionlever to change the headlamps from low to highbeam. Pull the lever back and then release itto change from high to low beam.

If you turn the vehicle off with the high beams on,the high beams will be on the next time youstart your vehicle.

This light on theinstrument panel clusterwill be on, indicatinghigh-beam usage.

Flash-to-PassThis feature allows you to use the high-beamheadlamps to signal the driver in front of you thatyou want to pass.

Pull and hold the turn signal/multifunction levertoward you to use this feature. When you do this,the following will occur:

• If the headlamps are off, in low-beam or inDaytime Running Lamps (DRL) mode, thehigh-beam headlamps will turn on. They willstay on as long as you hold the leverthere. Release the lever to turn them off.

• If the headlamps are in high-beam mode, theywill switch to low beam. To return tohigh-beam, push the lever away from you.


Windshield Wipers

The lever on the right side of the steering columnoperates the windshield wipers.

7 (Mist): Pull the lever down and release it fora single wiping cycle. The lever will return to itsoriginal position. For more cycles, hold thelever down before releasing it.

9 (Off): Put the lever in this position to turn offthe wipers.

& (Delay): Put the lever in this position to set adelay between wipes. Turn the delay adjustmentband to set the length of the delay.

6 (Delay Adjustment): Use this band to set thelength of the delay between wipes when using thedelay feature.

The closer you move the band toward mist, thelonger the delay. The windshield wiper lever mustbe in delay for this feature to work.

6 (Low Speed): Put the lever in this positionfor slow, steady wiping cycles.

1 (High Speed): Put the lever in this positionfor rapid wiping cycles.

If the windshield wipers are in use for aboutsix seconds while you are driving, the exteriorlamps will come on automatically if the exteriorlamp control is in AUTO. See Wiper ActivatedHeadlamps on page 178 for more information.

Be sure to clear ice and snow from the wiperblades before using them. If they are frozen to thewindshield, gently loosen or thaw them. If theblades do become damaged, install new blades.For more information, see Windshield Wiper BladeReplacement on page 397.

Heavy snow or ice can overload the wiper motor.A circuit breaker will stop the motor until itcools down. Clear away snow or ice to prevent anoverload.


Windshield Washer

{CAUTION:

In freezing weather, do not use yourwasher until the windshield is warmed.Otherwise the washer fluid can form iceon the windshield, blocking your vision.

The windshield washer button is located at theend of the windshield wiper lever.

K (Washer Fluid): Press this button to washthe windshield. Washer fluid will squirt ontothe windshield and the wipers will run for a fewcycles to clear the windshield. For more washcycles, press and hold the button.

If your vehicle is low on washer fluid, the WASHERFLUID LOW ADD FLUID message will appearon the Driver Information Center (DIC) display.See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 220 formore information.

If the headlamps are on when you wash thewindshield, the headlamp washer will turn on, ifyour vehicle has them. Both the windshield and theheadlamps will be washed. See HeadlampWasher on page 173.


Rear Window Wiper/Washer

{CAUTION:

In freezing weather, do not use yourwasher until the windshield is warmed.Otherwise the washer fluid can form iceon the windshield, blocking your vision.

The switch for the rearwasher/wiper is locatedin the overheadconsole.

Z (Rear Wiper): Press this side of the button toturn the rear wiper on.

Y (Washer Fluid): Press this button to washand wipe the window.

The rear window washer uses the same fluidbottle as the windshield washer. However, the rearwindow washer will run out of fluid before thewindshield washer. If you can wash yourwindshield but not your rear windows, check thefluid level.

5 (Delay): Press this side of the button to turnon delayed wiping.

To turn either the delay or rear wiper setting off,press the opposite side of the button to turn itto the off position. Pressing the button all the waydown on either side will activate a wiper setting.


Headlamp WasherYour vehicle may have headlamp washers. Theheadlamp washers clear debris from the headlamplenses.

The headlamp washers are located to the insideof the headlamps.

To wash the headlamps, press the washer buttonlocated at the end of the windshield wiper lever.Both the headlamps and the windshield will bewashed. After the first wash, the headlamps will bewashed after the fifth press of the windshieldwasher button.

The headlamps must be on to be washed. If theheadlamps are off, only the windshield will bewashed when the washer button is pressed. If thewasher fluid is low, the headlamp washers willnot work.

See Windshield Washer on page 171 for additionalinformation.


Cruise Control

These controls arelocated on the end ofthe multifunction lever.

9 (Off): Move to this position to turn thesystem off.

R (On): Move to this position to turn on thesystem.

+ (Resume/Accelerate): Move to this position tomake the vehicle resume a previously setspeed or to accelerate when cruise is alreadyactive.

T (Set/Decrease): Press this button to set thespeed or to decrease the speed when cruiseis already active.

With cruise control, a speed of about 25 mph(40 km/h) or more can be maintained withoutkeeping your foot on the accelerator. Thiscan really help on long trips. Cruise control doesnot work at speeds below about 25 mph (40 km/h).

If you apply your brakes, the cruise control willshut off.

{CAUTION:

Cruise control can be dangerous whereyou cannot drive safely at a steady speed.So, do not use your cruise control onwinding roads or in heavy traffic.

Cruise control can be dangerous onslippery roads. On such roads, fastchanges in tire traction can causeexcessive wheel slip, and you could losecontrol. Do not use cruise control onslippery roads.


If your vehicle is in cruise control when theTraction Control System (TCS) begins to limitwheel spin, the cruise control will automaticallydisengage. See Traction Control System (TCS) onpage 281 and StabiliTrak® System on page 283.When road conditions allow you to safely useit again, you may turn the cruise control back on.

Setting Cruise Control

{CAUTION:

If you leave your cruise control on whenyou are not using cruise, you might hit abutton and go into cruise when you donot want to. You could be startled andeven lose control. Keep the cruise controlswitch off until you want to use cruisecontrol.

1. Move the cruise control switch to on.

2. Get up to the speed desired.

3. Press in the set button at the end of the leverand release it.

4. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal.

This light on theinstrument panel clusterwill come on whilecruise control is on.


Resuming a Set SpeedSuppose you set the cruise control at a desiredspeed and then you apply the brake. This, ofcourse, disengages the cruise control. But it doesnot need to be reset.

Once you are going about 25 mph (40 km/h) ormore, you can move the cruise control switchbriefly from on to resume/accelerate.

You will go right back up to your chosen speedand stay there.

If you hold the switch at resume/accelerate thevehicle will keep going faster until you release theswitch or apply the brake. Do not hold theswitch at resume/accelerate, unless you want thevehicle to go faster.

Increasing Speed While Using CruiseControlThere are two ways to go to a higher speed:

• Use the accelerator pedal to get to the higherspeed. Press the set button at the end of thelever, then release the button and theaccelerator pedal. You will now cruise at thehigher speed.

• Move the cruise switch from on to resume/accelerate. Hold it there until you get up to thedesired speed, and then release the switch. Toincrease your speed in very small amounts,move the switch briefly to resume/accelerate.Each time you do this, your vehicle will goabout 1 mph (1.6 km/h) faster.

If using the accelerator pedal and the set button atend of the lever to increase cruise set speed,your new set speed must be at least 5 mph higherthan current speed for this method to work. If itis not 5 mph higher, switch cruise switch off, thenon, and then reset your speed using the setbutton.


Reducing Speed While Using CruiseControlThere are two ways to reduce your speed whileusing cruise control:

• Press in the button at the end of the lever untilyou reach the lower speed desired, thenrelease it.

• To slow down in very small amounts, brieflypress the set button. Each time you do this,you will go about 1 mph (1.6 km/h) slower.

Passing Another Vehicle While UsingCruise ControlUse the accelerator pedal to increase your speed.When you take your foot off the pedal, thevehicle will slow down to the cruise control speedyou set earlier.

Using Cruise Control on HillsHow well the cruise control works on hills dependsupon the vehicle speed, load, and the steepness ofthe hills. When going up steep hills, you might haveto step on the accelerator pedal to maintain thevehicle’s speed. When going downhill, you mighthave to brake to keep the vehicle’s speed down.Applying the brake will turn off the cruise control. Ifyou need to apply the brake due to the grade of thedownhill slope, you might not want to attempt to useyour cruise control feature.

Ending Cruise ControlTo end a cruise control session, step lightly on thebrake pedal.Stepping on the brake pedal will end the currentcruise control session only. Move the cruise controlswitch to off to turn off the system completely.

Erasing Speed MemoryWhen you turn off the cruise control or the ignition,the cruise control set speed memory is erased.


HeadlampsThe exterior lamp control is located in the middleof the turn signal/multifunction lever.

O (Exterior Lamp Control): Turn the controlwith this symbol on it to operate the exterior lamps.

The exterior lamp control has four positions:

O (On/Off): Turn the control to this position toturn off all lamps except the Daytime RunningLamps (DRL).

AUTO (Automatic): Turn the control to thisposition to put the headlamps in automatic mode.AUTO mode will turn the exterior lamps onand off depending upon how much light isavailable outside of the vehicle.

; (Parking Lamps): Turn the control to thisposition to turn on the parking lamps together withthe following:

• Sidemarker Lamps

• Taillamps

• License Plate Lamps

• Instrument Panel Lights

5 (Headlamps): Turn the control to this positionto turn on the headlamps, together with thepreviously listed lamps and lights.

Wiper Activated HeadlampsThis feature activates the headlamps and parkinglamps after the windshield wipers have been inuse for about six seconds. For this feature to work,the exterior lamp control must be in AUTO.

When the exterior lamp control is off or in theparking lamp position and the windshield wipercontrol is in any position except off, the HeadlampsSuggested message will appear on the DICdisplay. See “Headlamps Suggested Message”under DIC Warnings and Messages on page 220for more information.

When the ignition is turned to OFF, thewiper-activated headlamps will immediately turnoff. They will also turn off if the windshieldwiper control is turned off.


Headlamps on ReminderA warning chime will sound if the exterior lampcontrol is left on in either the headlamp or parkinglamp position and the driver’s door is openedwith the ignition off. See Lights On Reminder onpage 212 for additional information.

Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) can make it easierfor others to see the front of your vehicle duringthe day. DRL can be helpful in many differentdriving conditions, but they can be especiallyhelpful in the short periods after dawn and beforesunset. Fully functional daytime running lampsare required on all vehicles first sold in Canada.

The DRL system will make the turn signal lampscome on when the following conditions are met:

• It is daylight and the ignition is in the ON orSTART position.

• The exterior lamp control is in the off or AUTOposition and the headlamps are off.

• The automatic transmission is not in PARK (P).

When DRL are on, only the front turn signal lampswill be on. No other exterior lamps will be on.The instrument panel cluster will not be litup either.


When the exterior lamp control is in AUTO and it isdark enough outside, the DRL will turn off and thelow-beam headlamps will turn on. When it is brightenough outside, the low-beam headlamps will gooff, and the DRL will turn back on. If you start thevehicle in a dark garage, the automatic headlampsystem will come on immediately. Once you leavethe garage, it will take about one minute for theautomatic headlamp system to change to DRL if itis light outside. During that delay, the instrumentpanel cluster may not be as bright as usual. Makesure the instrument panel brightness lever is in thefull bright position. See Instrument Panel Brightnesson page 181.

To drive the vehicle with the DRL off, turn theexterior lamp control off. Then turn on thefog lamps or parking lamps, and the DRL will turnoff. This will work regardless of gear positionand whether or not the parking brake is set.

As with any vehicle, you should turn on the regularheadlamp system when you need it.

Light Sensor

The light sensor for the DRL and AUTO headlampfeature is located on top of the instrument panel.If you cover the sensor, it will prevent it fromsensing light, and the exterior lamps may come onwhenever the ignition is on.


Fog LampsUse the fog lamps for better vision in foggy ormisty conditions.

The fog lamp controls are located on the turnsignal/multifunction lever.

- (Fog Lamps): The band with this symbol isused to turn the fog lamps on and off.

The parking lamps must be on for the fog lampsto work.

To turn the fog lamps on, turn the fog lamp bandon the lever up to the dot and release it. Theband will return to its original position.

To turn the fog lamps off, turn the fog lamp bandup to the dot and release it. The band willreturn to its original position, and the fog lampswill turn off. If the high-beam headlamps are turnedon, the fog lamps will also turn off. They will turnback on again when you switch back to low-beamheadlamps.

Some localities have laws that require theheadlamps to be on along with the fog lamps.

Exterior Lighting Battery SaverIf the parking lamps or headlamps have been lefton, the exterior lamps will turn off about 10 minutesafter the ignition is turned to OFF. This protectsagainst draining the battery in case the headlampsor parking lamps have been left on. The batterysaver does not work if the headlamps are turned onafter the ignition is turned to OFF.

If you need to leave the lamps on for more than10 minutes, use the exterior lamp control toturn the lamps back on.

Instrument Panel Brightness

Turn the knob clockwiseor counterclockwise tobrighten or dim theinterior lights.

To turn on the dome lamps, turn the knobcompletely clockwise as far as it will go. Thedome lamps stay on until they are turned off.


Entry LightingThe entry lighting system turns on the reading anddome lamps and the backlighting to the exteriorlamp control when a door is opened or if theRemote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter unlockbutton is pressed. If activated by the (RKE),the lighting will remain active for about 25 seconds.The entry lighting system uses the light sensoron the instrument panel; so it must be dark outsidein order for the lamps to turn on. The lamps turnoff about 25 seconds after the last door isclosed. They will dim to off if the ignition key isturned to ON, or immediately turn off if the powerlocks are used.

Parade DimmingThis feature prohibits dimming of the instrumentpanel displays and backlighting during daylighthours when the key is in the ignition and theheadlamps are on. This feature operates with thelight sensor and is fully automatic. When the lightsensor reads darkness outside and the parkinglamps are active, the instrument panel displays canbe adjusted by sliding the instrument panelbrightness lever toward the symbol to brighten oraway from the symbol to dim the lighting.

Reading LampsThe reading lamps are located on the overheadconsole. These lamps come on automatically whenany door is opened.

For manual operation, press the button next toeach lamp to turn it on or off.

If the reading lamps are left on, they automaticallyshut off 10 minutes after the ignition has beenturned off.


Electric Power ManagementThe vehicle has Electric Power Management(EPM) that estimates the battery’s temperature andstate of charge. It then adjusts the voltage forbest performance and extended life of the battery.

When the battery’s state of charge is low, thevoltage is raised slightly to quickly put the chargeback in. When the state of charge is high, thevoltage is lowered slightly to prevent overcharging.If the vehicle has a voltmeter gage or voltagedisplay on the Driver Information Center (DIC), youmay see the voltage move up or down. This isnormal. If there is a problem, an alert will bedisplayed.

The battery can be discharged at idle if theelectrical loads are very high. This is true for allvehicles. This is because the generator (alternator)may not be spinning fast enough at idle toproduce all the power that is needed for very highelectrical loads.

A high electrical load occurs when several of thefollowing loads are on: headlamps, high beams, foglamps, rear window defogger, climate control fan athigh speed, heated seats, engine cooling fans,trailer loads, and loads plugged into accessorypower outlets.

EPM works to prevent excessive discharge of thebattery. It does this by balancing the generator’soutput and the vehicle’s electrical needs. Itcan increase engine idle speed to generate morepower, whenever needed. It can temporarilyreduce the power demands of some accessories.

Normally, these actions occur in steps or levels,without being noticeable. In rare cases at thehighest levels of corrective action, this action maybe noticeable to the driver. If so, a DriverInformation Center (DIC) message might bedisplayed, such as Battery Saver Active or ServiceBattery Charging System. If this message isdisplayed, it is recommended that the driverreduce the electrical loads as much as possible.See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 220.


Ultrasonic Rear ParkingAssist (URPA)Your vehicle may have the Ultrasonic Rear ParkingAssist (URPA) system. It is designed to help youpark while the vehicle is in REVERSE (R). Itoperates only at very low speeds, less than 3 mph(5 km/h). URPA can help make parking easier andhelp you avoid colliding with objects such as parkedvehicles. The URPA system can detect objects upto 5 feet (1.5 m) behind the vehicle, and tell youhow close these objects are from your rear bumper.

{CAUTION:

The Ultrasonic Rear Park Assist (URPA)system does not replace driver vision.URPA does not:

• Operate above speeds of3 mph (5 km/h).

• Detect objects more than 5 feet(1.5 meters) behind the vehicle. Thisdistance may be less during warmeror humid weather.

• Detect objects that are below thebumper, underneath the vehicle, orthat are very close to the vehicle.

• Detect children, pedestrians,bicyclists, or pets.

So if you do not use proper care beforebacking up, you could hit a vehicle, child,pedestrian, bicyclist, or pet, resulting invehicle damage, injury, or death. Eventhough the vehicle has the URPA system,always check carefully before backing upby checking behind your vehicle.


The URPA display islocated inside thevehicle, above theliftgate glass. Ithas three color-codedlights that can beseen through therearview mirror or byturning around.

How the System WorksURPA comes on automatically when the shift leveris moved into REVERSE (R) and the vehiclespeed is less than 3 mph (5 km/h). Whenthe system turns on, the three lights on the displaywill illuminate for one and a half seconds to letyou know that the system is working. If yourvehicle is moving in REVERSE (R) at a speedgreater than 3 mph (5 km/h), the red light will flashto remind you that the system does not work ata speed greater than 3 mph (5 km/h).

If an object is detected at a REVERSE (R) speedof less than 3 mph (5 km/h), one of the followingwill occur:

Description English MetricAmber light 5 ft 1.5 m

Amber/amber lights 40 in 1.0 mAmber/amber/red lights &

continuous chime 20 in 0.5 m

Amber/amber/red lightsflashing & continuous

chime1 ft 0.3 m

A chime will sound the first time an object isdetected between 20 inches (0.5 m) and 5 feet(1.5 m) away.

URPA cannot detect objects that are above liftgatelevel. In order for the rear sensors to recognizean object, it must be within detection range behindthe vehicle.


When the System Does Not Seem to WorkProperlyThe light may flash red when the vehicle is inREVERSE (R), if the ultrasonic sensors are notkept clean. So be sure to keep your rear bumperfree of mud, dirt, snow, ice and slush. Otherconditions that may affect system performanceinclude things like the vibrations from a jackhammeror the compression of air brakes on a very largetruck. If after cleaning the rear bumper and thendriving forward at least 15 mph (25 km/h), thedisplay continues to flash red, see your dealer.

If a trailer was attached to your vehicle, or abicycle or an object was on the back of, or hangingout of your liftgate during your last drive cycle,the light may also flash red. The light will continueto flash whenever in REVERSE (R) until yourvehicle is driven forward at least 15 mph (25 km/h)without any obstructions behind the vehicle.

For cleaning instructions, see Washing YourVehicle on page 447.

Accessory Power Outlet(s)The accessory power outlets can be used to plugin electrical equipment such as a cellulartelephone, CB radio, etc.

The vehicle has one outlet in front of the centerconsole on the instrument panel and one inthe rear compartment. Your vehicle may haveone or two outlets in the rear of the center console.

There is a small cap that must be removed toaccess the accessory power outlet. Whennot using the outlet be sure to cover it with theprotective cap.

Notice: Leaving electrical equipment pluggedin for an extended period of time while thevehicle is off will drain the battery. Power isalways supplied to the outlets. Always unplugelectrical equipment when not in use anddo not plug in equipment that exceedsthe maximum 20 ampere rating.


Certain accessory power plugs may not becompatible to the accessory power outlet andcould result in blown vehicle or adapter fuses. Ifyou experience a problem, see your dealerfor additional information on the accessory poweroutlets.

Notice: Adding any electrical equipment toyour vehicle may damage it or keep othercomponents from working as they should. Therepairs would not be covered by yourwarranty. Do not use equipment exceedingmaximum amperage rating of 20 amperes.Check with your dealer before adding electricalequipment.

Follow the proper installation instructions that areincluded with any electrical equipment youinstall.

Notice: Improper use of the power outlet cancause damage not covered by your warranty.Do not hang any type of accessory oraccessory bracket from the plug because thepower outlets are designed for accessorypower plugs only.

Ashtray(s) and Cigarette LighterYour vehicle may have an ashtray and cigarettelighter.

Notice: If you put papers, pins, or otherflammable items in the ashtray, hot cigarettesor other smoking materials could ignitethem and possibly damage your vehicle. Neverput flammable items in the ashtray.

AshtrayThe ashtray is located under the climate controlpanel on the instrument panel. Press on thedoor to release the ashtray.

To empty the ashtray, remove it from theinstrument panel by gripping the edges and pullingstraight out. To reinstall, push the tray back intoplace.

There may also be ashtrays in the rear doors.


Cigarette Lighter

Notice: Holding a cigarette lighter in while itis heating does not let the lighter backaway from the heating element when it is hot.Damage from overheating can occur to thelighter or heating element, or a fuse could beblown. Do not hold a cigarette lighter in while itis heating.

The cigarette lighter is located next to the ashtray.The vehicle does not have any cigarette lightersfor the rear seat passengers.

To activate the cigarette lighter, push it into theheating element and let go. When the lighteris ready it will pop back out by itself.

Analog ClockThe analog clock is located on the instrumentpanel above the radio. The clock is not connectedwith any other vehicle system and runs byitself. To adjust the clock, do the following:

1. Locate the adjustment button directly belowthe clock face.

2. Push and hold the adjustment button toadvance the clock hands. Holding thebutton down will cause the clock to advancefaster. Release the button before you getto the desired time.

3. Push and release the button to increase thetime by one minute increments until thedesired time is reached.


Climate Controls

Dual Climate Control SystemWith this system you can control the heating,cooling, defrosting, and ventilation for the vehicle.

Automatic OperationThe climate control system automatically adjuststhe air temperature, air delivery mode, fanspeed, and air conditioning for best comfort in thevehicle.

To activate the automatic system:

AUTO (Automatic Mode):1. Turn the fan and mode controls to the AUTO

position. This also sets the recirculation modeto automatic operation on the display.

2. Press the up or down arrows to adjust thetemperature to a comfortable setting between70°F (21°C) and 80°F (27°C).

3. Allow the system time to stabilize. This mighttake several minutes in very hot or coldweather. Then adjust the temperature, asneeded for best comfort.Choosing the coldest or warmest temperaturesetting will not cause the system to heat or coolany faster. In cold weather, the system starts atreduced fan speeds to avoid blowing cold airinto the vehicle until warmer air is available.The automatic system starts out blowing air atthe floor, but changes modes automatically asthe vehicle warms up to maintain the chosentemperature setting.The length of time needed to warm the interiordepends on the outside temperature andthe amount of time that has passed since thevehicle was last driven.

Dual Climate Control System


«ª (Driver’s Temperature Controls): Pressthe up or down buttons closest to the driverto manually increase or decrease the temperatureinside the vehicle.

«ª (Passenger’s Temperature Controls):Press the up or down buttons closest to thepassenger to manually increase or decrease thetemperature for the front passenger. If thepassenger’s climate control system is off, pressingeither of these buttons turns it on.

Manual Operation

9 (Fan): Turn the left control to adjust the fanspeed manually if the automatic setting is higher orlower than desired. The fan speed remains atthis level until you return to AUTO or adjust to adifferent level. In the automatic position, the blowermight go to a lower speed during an OnStar®

session to limit the background noise.

To change the current mode, select one of thefollowing positions using the right control:

AUTO: Turn the control to this position to turn onthe automatic delivery mode operation.

F (Vent): Turn the control to this position so thatair is directed to the instrument panel outlets.

* (Bi-Level): Turn the control to this position sothat half of the air is directed to the instrumentpanel outlets and the other half goes to the flooroutlets. The temperature of the air to the floorwill be warmer than the air to the upper outlets.

7 (Floor): Turn the control to this position so thatmost of the air is directed to the floor outletswith some air directed to the outboard outlets, sidewindow outlets, and defroster outlet.

W (Defog): Turn the control to this position sothat air is directed between the windshieldand floor outlets, with some air going to theoutboard outlets and side window outlets. Moreinformation of defogging can be found later in thissection.


0 (Defrost): Turn the control to this position sothat most of the air is directed to the windshieldwith some air going to the side window outlets.More information on defrosting can be found laterin this section.

O (On/Off): Press this button to turn the climatecontrol system on or off. While off, adjustingany button or control, except recirculation and rearwindow defog turns the system back on. The airinlets default to outside air when the climatecontrol system is turned off.

PASS (Passenger’s Climate Control): Press thisbutton to turn the passenger’s climate controlsystem on or off. Then press the up or downbuttons to choose the desired setting. Pressingthe button again automatically sets the passengerstemperature to the drivers setting. Turning thepassenger’s temperature display off does not turnoff the climate control system for the passenger.

Recirculation OperationThere are three options for bringing air into theclimate control system. They are controlledby pressing the center button on the climatecontrol panel. The climate control display indicatesone of the following three modes:

9 AUTO (Auto Air Inlet): This mode lets theautomatic climate control system choose thebest air inlet position for cooling or warming thevehicle. To have full automatic climate control,the fan and mode controls must be set tothe AUTO position. Generally, recirculation willonly automatically be selected on hot days.

Your vehicle may have an optional Air QualitySensor. To activate the air quality sensor, theauto air inlet setting must be used. For moreinformation, see Air Quality Sensor found laterin this section.


? (Recirculation): This mode recirculates airinside the vehicle and keeps outside air fromcoming into the vehicle. It can be used to help coolthe vehicle more quickly or to prevent odorsfrom entering the vehicle.

Recirculation is not available in the defrost mode.It is also cancelled when floor or defog modeis selected. In some conditions using recirculationfor long periods of time can cause the air insidethe vehicle to become too dry or stuffy. To preventthis from happening, after the air in the vehiclehas cooled, select auto air inlet or outside air.

: (Outside Air): This mode pulls fresh air fromoutside the vehicle. Outside air is alwaysselected in defrost mode to prevent fogging.

Air Conditioning

# (Air Conditioning): Press this button to turnthe air conditioning on or off, and override theautomatic system. When selecting the AUTO fanor AUTO mode, the air conditioning compressorcomes on automatically, as necessary.

The air conditioning system removes moisturefrom the air, so you might notice water drippingunderneath the vehicle while idling or after turningoff the engine. This is normal.

Sensors

There is a solar sensor located on top of theinstrument panel, near the windshield.


There is also an interior temperature sensorlocated below the climate control system next tothe steering wheel.

There is also an ambient sensor located behindthe grille in front of the vehicle.

These sensors help the climate control systemautomatically control the temperature setting. Thesystem can supply cooler air to the side of thevehicle facing the sun. The recirculation mode willalso be used as needed to maintain cool outlettemperatures.

Do not cover any of the sensors or the climatecontrol system might not work properly.

Defogging and DefrostingFog on the inside of windows is a result of highhumidity (moisture) condensing on the cool windowglass. This can be minimized if the climatecontrol system is used properly. There aretwo modes to clear fog from the windshield.

W (Floor/Defog): Use this mode to clear thewindows of fog and warm the passengers.The system turns off recirculation and runs the airconditioning compressor unless the outsidetemperature is at or below freezing. If recirculationmode is selected while using the defog mode,the system recirculates air initially but returns tothe fresh air mode after 10 minutes.

0 (Defrost): Use this mode to remove fog orfrost from the windshield more quickly. Whenselected, the system turns off recirculationand runs the air conditioning compressor, unlessthe outside temperature is at or below freezing.

Do not drive the vehicle until all the windows areclear.


Rear Window DefoggerThe rear window defogger uses a warming grid toremove fog or frost from the rear window.

< (Rear Defogger): Press the center of theright control to turn the rear window defogger on oroff. Be sure to clear as much snow from therear window as possible. The rear windowdefogger turns off about 20 minutes after thebutton is first pressed if the vehicle is moving atslower speeds. At higher vehicle speeds, the reardefogger can stay on continuously. Eachadditional press runs the defogger for about10 minutes.

The heated outside rearview mirrors also heat tohelp clear fog or frost from the surface of themirror when the rear window defogger is on.

Notice: Do not use a razor blade or sharpobject to clear the inside rear window. Do notadhere anything to the defogger grid linesin the rear glass. These actions may damagethe rear defogger. Repairs would not becovered by your warranty.

Outlet AdjustmentUse the knobs located in the center of each outletto change the direction of the airflow. Use thethumbwheels to open or close the outlets.

Operation Tips• Clear away any ice, snow, or leaves from the

air inlets at the base of the windshield thatcould block the flow of air into the vehicle.

• Use of non-GM approved hood deflectors mayadversely affect the performance of thesystem.

• Keep the path under the front seats clear ofobjects to help circulate the air inside of thevehicle more effectively.

• If the airflow seems low when the fan speed isat the highest setting, the passengercompartment air filter might need to bereplaced. For more information, seePassenger Compartment Air Filter onpage 195.

• Set the climate control system to AUTO fanand mode and then adjust the temperaturesetting up or down a few degrees forbest comfort.


Rear Air Conditioning SystemIf your vehicle has the rear air conditioning systemit has two fan speed selectors. One fan speedselector is located in the front overhead consoleand the other is located in the headliner above thesecond row seats. The rear air conditioningsystem is designed to provide cooled air only.

To operate the rear system using the front control,just turn the knob to the fan position you want.

To use the rear control, first turn the front controlto AUX, then the rear control can be used toincrease and decrease the airflow.

Passenger Compartment Air FilterThe passenger compartment air filter helps removedust and pollen from the air entering the vehicle.Like the vehicle’s engine air cleaner/filter, itneeds to be changed periodically. For how oftento change the passenger compartment airfilter, see Scheduled Maintenance on page 471.

The passenger compartment air filter is locatedunderneath the hood below the windshieldwiper arm on the passenger’s side of the vehicle.See Engine Compartment Overview on page 356for more information on location.

Front Control Rear Control


Use the procedure listed below to replace thepassenger compartment air filter:

1. Open the hood to access the enginecompartment. See Hood Release on page 355for more information. Locate the passengercompartment air filter access panel door.

2. Push the two tabs on the access panel doortowards the windshield.

3. While pressing forward, lift the access panelout of the clipped position and pull towardsthe front of the vehicle. This releases the clipsand allows the panel door to be removed.

4. Remove the old filter and insert a new one.Make sure the arrow on the filter is pointingtoward the passenger compartment.See Normal Maintenance Replacement Partson page 482 for the correct part numberfor the filter.

5. Reverse Steps 1 through 3 to reinstall thecover.


Warning Lights, Gages, andIndicatorsThis part describes the warning lights and gagesthat may be on your vehicle. The pictures willhelp you locate them.

Warning lights and gages can signal that somethingis wrong before it becomes serious enough tocause an expensive repair or replacement. Payingattention to the warning lights and gages could alsosave you or others from injury.

Warning lights come on when there may be or is aproblem with one of your vehicle’s functions. Asyou will see in the details on the next fewpages, some warning lights come on briefly whenyou start the engine just to let you know theyare working. If you are familiar with this section,you should not be alarmed when this happens.

Gages can indicate when there may be or is aproblem with one of your vehicle’s functions. Oftengages and warning lights work together to letyou know when there is a problem with yourvehicle.

When one of the warning lights comes on andstays on while you are driving, or when one of thegages shows there may be a problem, checkthe section that tells you what to do aboutit. Waiting to do repairs can be costly – and evendangerous. So please get to know your warninglights and gages. They are a big help.

Your vehicle also has a Driver Information Center(DIC) that works along with the warning lightsand gages. See Driver Information Center (DIC)on page 214 for more information.


Instrument Panel ClusterThe instrument panel cluster is designed to let you know at a glance how your vehicle is running. You willknow how fast you are going, how much fuel you are using and many of the other things you will needto know to drive safely and economically.

United States version shown, Canada similar


Speedometer and OdometerThe speedometer lets you see your speedin both miles per hour (mph) and kilometersper hour (km/h). See “SPEEDOMETER” underDIC Controls and Displays on page 215 for moreinformation.

The odometer mileage can be checked without thevehicle running. Your vehicle’s odometer workstogether with the driver information center.You can set a Trip A and a Trip B odometer. See“Trip Fuel” under DIC Controls and Displays onpage 215 for more information.

If your vehicle ever needs a new odometerinstalled, the new one will be set to the correctmileage total of the old odometer.

TachometerThis gage indicates the engine speed inrevolutions per minute (rpm).

Engine Speed LimiterThis feature prevents the engine from operating attoo many revolutions per minute (rpm). Whenthe engine’s rpms are too high, the throttleis closed to reduce speed. If this is not sufficient,then the fuel supply to the engine will belimited. When the rpms return to normal, the fuelsupply will return to normal. This helps preventdamage to the engine.


Safety Belt Reminder LightWhen the key is turned to ON or START, a chimewill come on for several seconds to remindpeople to fasten their safety belts, unless thedriver’s safety belt is already buckled.

The safety belt lightwill also come onand stay on forseveral seconds,then it will flash forseveral more.

This chime and light will be repeated if the driverremains unbuckled and the vehicle is in motion.

If the driver’s belt is already buckled, neitherthe chime nor the light will come on.

Passenger Safety Belt ReminderLightSeveral seconds after the key is turned to ON orSTART, a chime will sound for several seconds toremind the front passenger to buckle their safetybelt. This would only occur if the passenger airbagis enabled. See Passenger Sensing System onpage 81 for more information. The passengersafety belt light will also come on and stay on forseveral seconds, then it will flash for several more.

This chime and light willbe repeated if thepassenger remainsunbuckled andthe vehicle is in motion.

If the passenger’s safety belt is buckled, neitherthe chime nor the light will come on.


Airbag Readiness LightThere is an airbag readiness light on theinstrument panel cluster, which shows the airbagsymbol. The system checks the airbag’selectrical system for malfunctions. The light tellsyou if there is an electrical problem. Thesystem check includes the airbag sensors, theairbag modules, the wiring and the diagnosticmodule. For more information on the airbagsystem, see Airbag System on page 70.

This light will come onwhen the ignition key isturned to ON and itwill flash for afew seconds.

Then the light should go out. This means thesystem is ready. If it does not go out, have yourvehicle serviced right away.

If the airbag readiness light stays on after youstart the vehicle or comes on while you are driving,your airbag system may not work properly.Have your vehicle serviced right away.

{CAUTION:

If the airbag readiness light stays on afteryou start your vehicle, it means the airbagsystem may not be working properly. Theairbags in your vehicle may not inflate ina crash, or they could even inflate withouta crash. To help avoid injury to yourselfor others, have your vehicle serviced rightaway if the airbag readiness light stays onafter you start your vehicle.

If there is a problem with the airbag system inyour vehicle, the SERVICE AIR BAG messagewill appear on the Driver Information Center (DIC)display. See DIC Warnings and Messages onpage 220 for more information.


Passenger Airbag Status IndicatorYour vehicle has the passenger sensing system.Your instrument panel has a passenger airbagstatus indicator.

When the ignition key is turned to ON or START,the passenger airbag status indicator will lightON and OFF, or the symbol for on and off,for several seconds as a system check. If you useremote start to start your vehicle, if you havethis feature, you may not see the system check.Then, after several more seconds, the statusindicator will light either ON or OFF, or either theon or off symbol to let you know the status ofthe right front passenger’s frontal airbag.

If the word ON or the on symbol is lit on thepassenger airbag status indicator, it means thatthe right front passenger’s frontal airbag is enabled(may inflate).

{CAUTION:

If the on indicator comes on when you havea rear-facing child restraint installed in theright front passenger’s seat, it means thatthe passenger sensing system has notturned off the passenger’s frontal airbag. Achild in a rear-facing child restraint can beseriously injured or killed if the right frontpassenger’s airbag inflates. This isbecause the back of the rear-facing childrestraint would be very close to theinflating airbag. Do not use a rear-facingchild restraint in the right front passenger’sseat if the airbag is turned on.




{CAUTION:

Even though the passenger sensingsystem is designed to turn off thepassenger’s frontal airbag if the systemdetects a rear-facing child restraint, nosystem is fail-safe, and no one canguarantee that an airbag will not deployunder some unusual circumstance, eventhough it is turned off. We recommendthat rear-facing child restraints be securedin the rear seat, even if the airbag is off.

If the word OFF or the off symbol is lit on theairbag status indicator, it means that thepassenger sensing system has turned off the rightfront passenger’s frontal airbag. See PassengerSensing System on page 81 for more on this,including important safety information.

If, after several seconds, all status indicator lightsremain on, or if there are no lights at all, theremay be a problem with the lights or the passengersensing system. See your dealer for service.

{CAUTION:

If the off indicator and the airbagreadiness light ever come on together, itmeans that something may be wrong withthe airbag system. If this ever happens,have the vehicle serviced promptly,because an adult-size person sitting in theright front passenger seat may not havethe protection of the frontal airbag. SeeAirbag Readiness Light on page 201.


Charging System Light

This light will come onbriefly when the ignitionis turned to ON toshow that it is working.

It should turn off once the engine is running. If itstays on, or comes on while you are driving,you may have a problem with the charging system.It could indicate that there is a problem with thegenerator, generator drive belt or another electricalproblem. Have is checked right away. Drivingwhile this light is on could drain your battery. If youmust drive a short distance with the light on, becertain to turn off all unnecessary accessories,such as the radio and air conditioner.

Brake System Warning LightYour vehicle’s hydraulic brake system is dividedinto two parts. If one part is not working, the otherpart can still work and stop you. For goodbraking, though, you need both parts working well.

If the warning light comes on, there is a brakeproblem. Have your brake system inspectedright away.

This light should come on briefly when you turnthe ignition key to ON. If it does not come on then,have it fixed so it will be ready to warn you ifthere is a problem.



When the ignition is on, the brake system warninglight will also come on when you set your parkingbrake. The light will stay on if your parking brakedoes not release fully. If it stays on after yourparking brake is fully released, it means you have abrake problem.

If the light comes on while you are driving, pull offthe road and stop carefully. You may noticethat the pedal is harder to push, or the pedal maygo closer to the floor. It may take longer tostop. If the light is still on, have the vehicle towedfor service. See Towing Your Vehicle onpage 328.

{CAUTION:

Your brake system may not be workingproperly if the brake system warning lightis on. Driving with the brake systemwarning light on can lead to an accident.If the light is still on after you have pulledoff the road and stopped carefully, havethe vehicle towed for service.

Anti-Lock Brake System WarningLight

With the Anti-LockBrake System (ABS),the light will come onwhen your engine isstarted and stay on forseveral seconds. This isnormal.

If the ABS warning light comes on and stays on,there may be a problem with the anti-lockportion of the brake system. If the brake systemwarning light is not on, you still have brakes,but you do not have anti-lock brakes. See BrakeSystem Warning Light on page 204 for moreinformation.

If the light stays on, turn the ignition to OFF. If thelight comes on when you are driving, stop assoon as possible and turn the ignition off. Thenstart the engine again to reset the system. Ifthe light still stays on, or comes on again whileyou are driving, your vehicle needs service.


If the regular brake system warning light is not on,you still have brakes, but you do not haveanti-lock brakes. If the regular brake systemwarning light is also on, you do not have anti-lockbrakes and there is a problem with your regularbrakes. See Brake System Warning Light onpage 204 for more information.

The ABS warning light should come on brieflywhen you turn the ignition key to ON. If the lightdoes not come on then, have it fixed so it willbe ready to warn you if there is a problem.

Traction Control System (TCS)Warning Light

Your vehicle has atraction control systemwarning light.

This light will come on when your traction controlsystem is limiting wheel spin. You may feel orhear the system working, but this is normal.

If the traction control system warning light comeson and stays on for an extended period oftime when the system is turned on, your vehicleneeds service. See Traction Control System (TCS)on page 281 for more information.

Engine Coolant TemperatureWarning Light

This light tells you thatyour engine is very hot.

This light will come on when you first start thevehicle as a check to let you know that the light isworking. It will go out after a few seconds. If thelight does not come on, the bulb may be burned out.See your dealer to have it corrected.

If the light does not go out or if the light comes onand stays on while you are driving, your vehiclemay have a problem with the cooling system.


You should stop the vehicle and turn off theengine as soon as possible to avoid damage tothe engine. A warning chime will sound when thislight is on, also.

See Engine Overheating on page 372.

Engine Coolant Temperature Gage

This gage shows theengine coolanttemperature.

It can be used to see when your engine haswarmed up and to make sure your cooling systemis operating properly. If the gage pointer moves intothe shaded area, the engine coolant is too hot andthe engine coolant temperature warning light willcome on. See Engine Overheating on page 372 formore information.

Tire Pressure Light

If your vehicle has thislight, it will come onbriefly when you turn theignition on.

This light will also come on when one or more ofyour tires are significantly underinflated.

A CHECK TIRE PRESSURE DIC message willaccompany the light, see DIC Warnings andMessages on page 220

Stop and check your tires as soon as it is safe todo so. If underinflated, inflate to the properpressure. See Tires on page 398 for moreinformation.


This light will flash for approximately 60 secondsand then turn on solid if a problem is detected withthe Tire Pressure Monitor system.

See Tire Pressure Monitor System on page 410for more information.

Malfunction Indicator Lamp

Check Engine Light

Your vehicle has acomputer whichmonitors operation of thefuel, ignition, andemission controlsystems.

This system is called OBD II (On-BoardDiagnostics-Second Generation) and is intendedto assure that emissions are at acceptablelevels for the life of the vehicle, helping to producea cleaner environment.

The check engine light comes on to indicate thatthere is a problem and service is required.Malfunctions often will be indicated by the systembefore any problem is apparent. This mayprevent more serious damage to your vehicle.This system is also designed to assist your servicetechnician in correctly diagnosing any malfunction.

Notice: If you keep driving your vehiclewith this light on, after awhile, the emissioncontrols might not work as well, your vehicle’sfuel economy might not be as good, and theengine might not run as smoothly. Thiscould lead to costly repairs that might not becovered by your warranty.

Notice: Modifications made to the engine,transmission, exhaust, intake, or fuel systemof your vehicle or the replacement of theoriginal tires with other than those of the sameTire Performance Criteria (TPC) can affectyour vehicle’s emission controls and can causethis light to come on. Modifications to thesesystems could lead to costly repairs notcovered by your warranty. This could alsoresult in a failure to pass a required EmissionInspection/Maintenance test. See Accessoriesand Modifications on page 347.


This light should come on, as a check to showyou it is working, when the ignition is on and theengine is not running. If the light does notcome on, have it repaired. This light will alsocome on during a malfunction in one of two ways:

• Light Flashing — A misfire condition hasbeen detected. A misfire increases vehicleemissions and may damage the emissioncontrol system on your vehicle. Diagnosis andservice may be required.

• Light On Steady — An emission controlsystem malfunction has been detected on yourvehicle. Diagnosis and service may berequired.

If the Light is FlashingThe following may prevent more serious damageto your vehicle:

• Reducing vehicle speed

• Avoiding hard accelerations

• Avoiding steep uphill grades

• If you are towing a trailer, reduce the amountof cargo being hauled as soon as it ispossible

If the light stops flashing and remains on steady,see “If the Light Is On Steady” following.

If the light continues to flash, when it is safe to doso, stop the vehicle. Find a safe place to parkyour vehicle. Turn the key off, wait at least10 seconds and restart the engine. If the lightremains on steady, see “If the Light Is On Steady”following. If the light is still flashing, follow theprevious steps, and see your dealer for service assoon as possible.

If the Light Is On SteadyYou may be able to correct the emission systemmalfunction by considering the following:

Did you recently put fuel into your vehicle?

If so, reinstall the fuel cap, making sure to fullyinstall the cap. See Filling the Tank on page 352.The diagnostic system can determine if thefuel cap has been left off or improperly installed.A loose or missing fuel cap will allow fuel toevaporate into the atmosphere. A few driving tripswith the cap properly installed should turn thelight off.


Did you just drive through a deep puddle of water?

If so, your electrical system may be wet. Thecondition will usually be corrected when theelectrical system dries out. A few driving tripsshould turn the light off.

Have you recently changed brands of fuel?

If so, be sure to fuel your vehicle with quality fuel.See Gasoline Octane on page 349. Poor fuelquality will cause your engine not to run asefficiently as designed. You may notice this asstalling after start-up, stalling when you putthe vehicle into gear, misfiring, hesitation onacceleration, or stumbling on acceleration. (Theseconditions may go away once the engine iswarmed up.) This will be detected by the systemand cause the light to turn on.

If you experience one or more of these conditions,change the fuel brand you use. It will require atleast one full tank of the proper fuel to turn thelight off.

If none of the above steps have made the lightturn off, your dealer can check the vehicle.Your dealer has the proper test equipment anddiagnostic tools to fix any mechanical or electricalproblems that may have developed.

Emissions Inspection and MaintenanceProgramsSome state/provincial and local governments haveor may begin programs to inspect the emissioncontrol equipment on your vehicle. Failure to passthis inspection could prevent you from getting avehicle registration.

Here are some things you need to know to helpyour vehicle pass an inspection:

Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if thecheck engine light is on or not working properly.

Your vehicle will not pass this inspection ifthe OBD (on-board diagnostic) system determinesthat critical emission control systems have notbeen completely diagnosed by the system.The vehicle would be considered not ready forinspection. This can happen if you have recentlyreplaced your battery or if your battery hasrun down. The diagnostic system is designed toevaluate critical emission control systemsduring normal driving. This may take several daysof routine driving. If you have done this andyour vehicle still does not pass the inspection forlack of OBD system readiness, your dealercan prepare the vehicle for inspection.


Oil Pressure Light

{CAUTION:

Do not keep driving if the oil pressure islow. If you do, your engine can become sohot that it catches fire. You or otherscould be burned. Check your oil as soonas possible and have your vehicleserviced.

Notice: Lack of proper engine oil maintenancemay damage the engine. The repairs wouldnot be covered by your warranty. Always followthe maintenance schedule in this manual forchanging engine oil.

If equipped, this lighttells you if there could bea problem with yourengine oil pressure.

The light goes on when you turn your key to ON orSTART. It goes off once you start your engine.That’s a check to be sure the light works. If itdoesn’t come on, be sure to have it fixed so it will bethere to warn you if something goes wrong.

When the light comes on and stays on, it meansthat oil isn’t flowing through your engine properly.You could be low on oil and you might havesome other system problem.


Security Light

For informationregarding this light, seeTheft-DeterrentSystem on page 112.

Fog Lamp Light

The fog lamps light willcome on when the foglamps are in use.

The light will go out when the fog lamps areturned off. See Fog Lamps on page 181 for moreinformation.

Lights On Reminder

This light comes onwhenever the parkinglamps are on.

See Headlamps on Reminder on page 179 formore information.

Cruise Control Light

This light comes onwhenever you set thecruise control.

The light goes out when the cruise control isturned off. See Cruise Control on page 174 formore information.


Highbeam On Light

This light comes onwhenever thehigh-beam headlampsare on.

See Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer onpage 169 for more information.

Tow/Haul Mode Light

This light comes onwhen the Tow/Haulmode has beenactivated.

For more information, see Tow/Haul Mode onpage 126.

Fuel Gage

The fuel gage showsapproximately howmuch fuel is in the fueltank. It works onlywhen the engine is on.

If the fuel supply gets low, the “FUEL LEVELLOW” message will appear on the DriverInformation Center (DIC) and a single chime willsound. See DIC Warnings and Messages onpage 220 for more information.


All of the following situations are normal and donot indicate that anything is wrong with thefuel gage:

• At the gas station the gas pump shuts offbefore the gage reads full.

• The gage may change when you turn, stopquickly or accelerate quickly.

• It takes a little more or less fuel to fill the tankthan the gage indicated. For example, the gagemay have indicated that the tank was half full,but it actually took a little more or less than halfthe tank’s capacity to fill the tank.

Driver Information Center (DIC)The Driver Information Center (DIC) gives you thestatus of many of your vehicle’s systems. The DICis also used to display warning/status messages.All messages will appear in the DIC display locatedat the bottom of the instrument panel cluster, belowthe tachometer and speedometer. The DIC buttonsare located on the instrument panel, to the left ofthe steering wheel.

The DIC comes on when the ignition is on. After ashort delay, the DIC will display the informationthat was last displayed before the engine wasturned off.

The top line of the DIC display shows the vehiclesystem information and the warning/statusmessages. The bottom line of the DIC displayshows the odometer on the left side, the outsideair temperature on the right side, and the shiftposition indicator in the center. For moreinformation on the shift position indicator, seeAutomatic Transmission Operation on page 122.


When the sport mode is active, an S will appearnext to the shift position indicator on the center ofthe DIC display. When the manual mode isactive, an M will appear on the DIC display. Whenthe normal mode is active, only the shift positionindicator will appear. While the Driver Shift Control(DSC) feature is active, the DIC will change toshow the selected gear. See ″Driver Shift Control(DSC)″ under Automatic Transmission Operationon page 122 for more information.

If a problem is detected, a warning message willappear on the display. Be sure to take anymessage that appears on the display seriouslyand remember that clearing the message will onlymake the message disappear, not correct theproblem.

DIC Controls and Displays

The Driver InformationCenter (DIC) hasdifferent displays whichcan be accessed bypressing the DICbuttons located on theinstrument panel, tothe left of the steeringwheel.

3 Trip/Fuel: Press this button to scroll throughthe trip and fuel displays. See “Trip/Fuel DisplayMenu Items” following for more informationon these displays.

T Vehicle Information: Press this button toscroll through the vehicle information displays. See“Vehicle Information Display Menu Items”following for more information on these displays.


U Customization: Press this button to scrollthrough each of the customization features. SeeDIC Vehicle Customization on page 231 formore information on the customization features.

V Set/Reset: Press this button to resetcertain DIC features and to acknowledge DICwarning messages and clear them from the DICdisplay.

yz Menu Up/Down: Press this button to scrollup and down the menu items.

Trip/Fuel Display Menu Items

3 (Trip/Fuel): The following display menuitems can be displayed by pressing the trip/fuelbutton:

TRIP A or TRIP BThese displays show the current distance traveledsince the last reset for each trip odometer ineither miles (mi) or kilometers (km). Bothodometers can be used at the same time. Eachtrip odometer can be reset to zero separatelyby pressing and holding the set/reset button for afew seconds while the desired trip odometer isdisplayed.

FUEL RANGEThis display shows the approximate number ofremaining miles (mi) or kilometers (km) youcan drive without refilling your fuel tank. Thisestimate is based on the current driving conditionsand will change if the driving conditions change.For example, if you are driving in traffic andmaking frequent stops, the display may read onenumber, but if you enter the freeway, thenumber may change even though you still havethe same amount of fuel in the fuel tank. Thisis because different driving conditions producedifferent fuel economies. Generally, freewaydriving produces better fuel economy than citydriving.

Once the range drops below about 30 miles(48 km) remaining, the display will show FUELRANGE LOW.

If your vehicle is low on fuel, the FUEL LEVELLOW message will be displayed. See “FUELLEVEL LOW” under DIC Warnings and Messageson page 220 for more information.


AVERAGE ECONOMY (AFE)This display shows the approximate averagemiles per gallon (mpg) or liters per100 kilometers (L/100 km). This number iscalculated based on the number of mpg (L/100 km)recorded since the last time this display wasreset. To reset this display, press the set/resetbutton. The display will return to zero.

INST (Instantaneous) ECONOMY (IFE)This display shows the current fuel economy ineither miles per gallon (mpg) or liters per100 kilometers (L/100 km). This number reflectsonly the fuel economy that the vehicle hasright now and will change frequently as drivingconditions change. Unlike average economy, thisdisplay cannot be reset.

FUEL USEDThis display shows the number of gallons (gal) orliters (L) of fuel used since the last reset of thisdisplay. To reset this display, press the set/resetbutton. The display will return to zero.

TIMER ON/OFFThis display can be used like a stopwatch. Youcan record the time it takes to travel from one pointto another. To access the timer, press thetrip/fuel button until 00:00:00 TIMER OFF displays.

To turn on the timer, press the set/reset buttonuntil TIMER ON displays. The timer will then start.

To turn off the timer, press the set/reset buttonagain until TIMER OFF displays. The timerwill stop and display the end timing value.

To reset the timer, press and hold the set/resetbutton after the timer has been stopped. Thedisplay will return to zero.

AVERAGE SPEEDThis display shows the average speed of thevehicle in either miles per hour (mph) or kilometersper hour (km/h). This average is calculatedbased on the various vehicle speeds recordedsince the last reset of this display. To resetthis display, press the set/reset button. The displaywill return to zero.


BATTERY VOLTAGEThis display shows the current battery voltage.Your vehicle’s charging system regulates voltagebased on the state of the battery. The batteryvoltage may fluctuate when viewing thisinformation on the DIC. This is normal.

If there is a problem with the battery chargingsystem, the charging system light will illuminateand/or the DIC will display a message. SeeCharging System Light on page 204, DICWarnings and Messages on page 220 and ElectricPower Management on page 183 for moreinformation.

Blank DisplayThis display shows no information.

Vehicle Information Display Menu Items

T (Vehicle Information): The following displaymenu items can be displayed by pressing thevehicle information button:

OIL LIFE REMAININGIf the vehicle has this display, it shows theestimated oil life remaining. If you see 99% OILLIFE REMAINING on the display, that means that99% of the current oil life remains.

When the oil life is depleted, the CHANGEENGINE OIL SOON message will appear on thedisplay. You should change your oil as soonas possible. In addition to the engine oil life systemmonitoring the oil life, additional maintenance isrecommended in the Maintenance Schedule in thismanual. See Scheduled Maintenance onpage 471 and Engine Oil on page 360.

Remember, you must reset the OIL LIFE yourselfafter each oil change. It will not reset itself.Also, be careful not to reset the OIL LIFEaccidentally at any time other than when the oilhas just been changed. It cannot be resetaccurately until the next oil change. To reset theengine oil life system, See Engine Oil Life Systemon page 363. The display will show 100% whenthe system is reset.


UNITSThis display allows you to select between Englishor Metric units of measurement. Once in thisdisplay, press the set/reset button to selectbetween ENGLISH or METRIC units.

PARKING ASSISTIf your vehicle has the Ultrasonic Rear ParkingAssist (URPA) system, this display allowsthe system to be turned on or off. Once in thisdisplay, press the set/reset button to selectbetween ON or OFF. If you choose ON, thesystem will be turned on. If you choose OFF, thesystem will be turned off. The URPA systemautomatically turns back on after each vehiclestart. When the URPA system is turned off and thevehicle is shifted out of PARK (P), the DIC willdisplay the PARKING ASSIST OFF message as areminder that the system has been turned off.See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 220and Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist (URPA)on page 184 for more information.

FRONT TIRES or REAR TIRESIf your vehicle has a Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM)system, the pressure for each tire can beviewed in the DIC. The tire pressure will be shownin either pounds per square inch (psi) orkilopascals (kPa). Press the vehicle informationbutton until the DIC shows the tire pressure for thefront tires. Press the vehicle information buttonagain to view the pressure for the rear tires.

If a low or high tire pressure condition is detectedby the system while driving, a message advisingyou to check the pressure in a specific tirewill appear in the display. See Inflation - TirePressure on page 407 and DIC Warningsand Messages on page 220 for more information.

RELEARN TIRE POSITIONSIf your vehicle has a Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM)system, after rotating the tires or after replacinga tire or sensor, the system must re-learn the tirepositions. To re-learn the tire positions, seeTire Pressure Monitor System on page 410. SeeTire Inspection and Rotation on page 414 and DICWarnings and Messages on page 220 for moreinformation.


RELEARN REMOTE KEYThis display allows you to match the remotekeyless entry transmitter to your vehicle. To matcha remote keyless entry transmitter to yourvehicle, do the following:

1. Press the vehicle information button untilPRESS V TO RELEARN REMOTE KEYdisplays.

2. Press the set/reset button.The message REMOTE KEY LEARNINGACTIVE will display.

3. Press and hold the lock and unlock buttonson the first transmitter at the same time forabout 15 seconds.A chime will sound indicating that thetransmitter is matched.

4. To match additional transmitters at this time,repeat Step 3.Each vehicle can have a maximum ofeight transmitters matched to it.

5. To exit the programming mode, you mustcycle the key to OFF.

SPEEDOMETERThis display shows a digital speedometer in theDIC. The speed will be displayed in eithermiles per hour (mph) or kilometers per hour (km/h).Press the vehicle information button until theDIC shows the digital speedometer. To changethe units from English to metric, see “UNITS”earlier in this section.

Blank DisplayThis display shows no information.

DIC Warnings and MessagesThese messages appear if there is a problemdetected in one of your vehicle’s systems.

You must acknowledge a message to clear it fromthe screen for further use. To clear a message,press the set/reset button.

Be sure to take any message that appears on thescreen seriously and remember that clearingthe message only makes the message disappear,not the problem.


AUTOMATIC LIGHT CONTROL OFFThis message displays when the automaticheadlamps are turned off.

AUTOMATIC LIGHT CONTROL ONThis message displays when the automaticheadlamps are turned on.

BATTERY SAVER ACTIVEThis message displays when the system detectsthat the battery voltage is dropping below expectedlevels. The battery saver system starts reducingcertain features of the vehicle that you may be ableto notice. At the point that the features are disabled,this message is displayed. It means that the vehicleis trying to save the charge in the battery.

Turn off all unnecessary accessories to allow thebattery to recharge.

The normal battery voltage range is11.5 to 15.5 volts. You can monitor battery voltageon the Driver Information Center (DIC) bypressing the trip/fuel button until BATTERYVOLTAGE is displayed.

CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOONWhen this message displays, it means that serviceis required for your vehicle. See your dealer.See Engine Oil on page 360 and ScheduledMaintenance on page 471 for more information.

When you reset the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOONmessage by clearing it from the display, you stillmust reset the engine oil life system separately.For more information on resetting the engine oil lifesystem, see Engine Oil Life System on page 363.

CHECK TIRE PRESSUREIf your vehicle has a Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM)system, this message displays when the tirepressure in one of the tires needs to be checked.This message also displays LEFT FRONT,RIGHT FRONT, LEFT REAR, or RIGHT REAR toindicate which tire needs to be checked. Youcan receive more than one tire pressure messageat a time. To read the other messages thatmay have been sent at the same time, press theset/reset button. If a tire pressure messageappears on the DIC, stop as soon as you can.Have the tire pressures checked and set to thoseshown on the Tire Loading Information label.


See Tires on page 398, Loading Your Vehicle onpage 322, and Inflation - Tire Pressure onpage 407. The DIC display also shows the tirepressure values for the front and rear tiresby pressing the vehicle information button. SeeDIC Controls and Displays on page 215. If the tirepressure is low, the low tire pressure warninglight comes on. See Tire Pressure Light onpage 207.

CRUISE SET TO XXX MPH (km/h)This message displays whenever the cruise controlis set. See Cruise Control on page 174 for moreinformation.

DRIVER DOOR OPENThis message displays when the driver’s door isnot closed completely. Make sure that thedriver’s door is closed completely.

ENGINE HOT – A/C(Air Conditioning) OFFThis message displays when the engine coolantbecomes hotter than the normal operatingtemperature. See Engine Coolant TemperatureGage on page 207. To avoid added strain on a hotengine, the air conditioning compressorautomatically turns off. When the coolanttemperature returns to normal, the air conditioningcompressor turns back on. You can continue todrive your vehicle.

If this message continues to appear, have thesystem repaired by your dealer as soon aspossible to avoid damage to the engine.

ENGINE OVERHEATED IDLE ENGINE

Notice: If you drive your vehicle while theengine is overheating, severe engine damagemay occur. If an overheat warning appears onthe instrument panel cluster and/or DIC, stopthe vehicle as soon as possible. Do not increasethe engine speed above normal idling speed.See Engine Overheating on page 372 for moreinformation.


This message displays when the engine coolanttemperature is too hot. Stop and allow the vehicleto idle until it cools down. See Engine CoolantTemperature Warning Light on page 206.

See Overheated Engine Protection OperatingMode on page 374 for information on driving to asafe place in an emergency.

ENGINE POWER REDUCEDThis message displays when the engine power isbeing reduced to protect the engine from damage.There could be several malfunctions that mightcause this message. Reduced engine power canaffect the vehicle’s ability to accelerate. If thismessage is on, but there is no reduction inperformance, proceed to your destination. Theperformance may be reduced the next time thevehicle is driven. The vehicle may be driven at areduced speed while this message is on, butacceleration and speed may be reduced. Anytimethis message stays on, the vehicle should be takento your dealer for service as soon as possible.

FUEL LEVEL LOW

This symbol appearswith this message.

This message displays when your vehicle is lowon fuel. Refill the fuel tank as soon as possible. Asingle chime sounds when this message isdisplayed. See Filling the Tank on page 352.

ICE POSSIBLE DRIVE WITH CAREThis message displays when the outsidetemperature is cold enough to create icy roadconditions. Adjust your driving accordingly.

LEFT REAR DOOR OPENThis message displays when the driver’s side reardoor is not closed completely. Make sure thatthe door is closed completely.


OIL PRESSURE LOW STOP ENGINE

Notice: If you drive your vehicle whilethe engine oil pressure is low, severe enginedamage may occur. If a low oil pressurewarning appears on the instrument panelcluster and/or DIC, stop the vehicle as soon aspossible. Do not drive the vehicle until thecause of the low oil pressure is corrected. SeeEngine Oil on page 360 for more information.

This message displays when the vehicle’sengine oil pressure is low. The oil pressure lightmay also appear on the instrument panelcluster. See Oil Pressure Light on page 211.

A multiple chime sounds when this message isdisplayed. See Engine Oil on page 360 formore information.

Stop the vehicle immediately, as engine damagecan result from driving a vehicle with low oilpressure. Have the vehicle serviced by your dealeras soon as possible when this message isdisplayed.

PARKING ASSIST OFFIf your vehicle has the Ultrasonic Rear ParkingAssist (URPA) system, after the vehicle has beenstarted, this message displays to reminder thedriver that the URPA system has been turned off.Press the set/reset button to acknowledge thismessage and clear it from the DIC display. To turnthe URPA system back on, see ″PARKINGASSIST″ under DIC Controls and Displays onpage 215. See Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist(URPA) on page 184 for more information.

PASSENGER DOOR OPENThis message displays when the passenger’s sidefront door is not closed completely. Make surethat the door is closed completely.

REAR ACCESS OPENThis message displays when the liftgate is notclosed completely. Make sure that the liftgate isclosed completely.


REMOTE KEY LEARNING ACTIVEThis message displays while you are matching aRemote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter toyour vehicle. See “Matching Transmitter(s) to YourVehicle” under Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System Operation on page 96 and DIC Controlsand Displays on page 215 for more information.

REPLACE BATTERY IN REMOTE KEYThis message displays when the battery inyour Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitterneeds to be replaced. To replace the battery, see“Battery Replacement” under Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) System Operation on page 96.

RIGHT REAR DOOR OPENThis message displays when the passenger’s siderear door is not closed completely. Make surethat the door is closed completely.

SERVICE AIR BAGThis message displays when there is a problemwith the airbag system. Have your vehicle servicedby your dealer immediately. See Airbag ReadinessLight on page 201 for more information.

SERVICE A/C SYSTEMThis message displays when the air delivery modedoor or the electronic sensors that control theair conditioning and heating systems are no longerworking. Have the climate control systemserviced by your dealer if you notice a drop inheating and air conditioning efficiency.

SERVICE BATTERY CHARGINGSYSTEMThis message displays when there is a problemwith the generator and battery charging systems.Driving with this problem could drain the battery.Turn off all unnecessary accessories. Stopand turn off the vehicle as soon as it is safe to doso. Have the electrical system checked by yourdealer. Under certain conditions, the chargingsystem light may also turn on in the instrumentpanel cluster. See Charging System Light onpage 204 for more information.


SERVICE BRAKE ASSISTThis message displays if there is a problem withthe brake system. The brake system warninglight and the anti-lock brake system warning lightmay also display on the instrument panelcluster. See Brake System Warning Light onpage 204 and Anti-Lock Brake System WarningLight on page 205 for more information. If thishappens, stop as soon as possible and turn off thevehicle. Restart the vehicle and check for themessage on the DIC display. If the messagedisplays or appears again when you begin driving,the brake system needs service. See yourdealer as soon as possible. See Brakes onpage 381 for more information.

SERVICE BRAKE SYSTEMThis message displays, while the ignition is on,when the brake fluid level is low. The brake systemwarning light on the instrument panel clusteralso comes on. See Brake System Warning Lighton page 204 for more information. Have thebrake system serviced by your dealer as soon aspossible.

SERVICE PARKING ASSISTIf your vehicle has the Ultrasonic Rear ParkingAssist (URPA) system, this message displaysif there is a problem with the URPA system. Donot use this system to help you park. SeeUltrasonic Rear Parking Assist (URPA) onpage 184 for more information. See your dealerfor service.

SERVICE POWER STEERINGYour vehicle may have a speed variable assiststeering system. See Steering on page 285.

This message displays if a problem is detectedwith the speed variable assist steering system.When this message is displayed, you may noticethat the effort required to steer the vehicledecreases or feels lighter, but you will still be ableto steer the vehicle.


SERVICE STABILITRAKThis message displays if there has been aproblem detected with the StabiliTrak® system.

If this message comes on while you are driving,pull off the road as soon as possible and stopcarefully. Try resetting the system by turning theignition off then back on. If this message still stayson or comes back on again while you aredriving, your vehicle needs service. Have theStabiliTrak® system inspected by your dealer assoon as possible. See StabiliTrak® Systemon page 283 for more information.

SERVICE SUSPENSION SYS (System)This message displays when the magneticride control or automatic leveling control system isnot operating properly. Have your vehicleserviced by your dealer.

SERVICE THEFT DETERRENT SYSTEMThis message displays when there is a problemwith the theft-deterrent system programmed in thekey. A fault has been detected in the systemwhich means that the system is disabled and it isnot protecting the vehicle. The vehicle usuallyrestarts; however, you may want to take thevehicle to your dealer before turning off the engine.See PASS-Key® III+ Operation on page 114 formore information.

SERVICE TIRE MONITOR SYSTEMIf your vehicle has a Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM)system, this message displays if a part on thesystem is not working properly. If you drive yourvehicle while any of the four sensors aremissing or inoperable, the warning comes on inabout 10 minutes. A sensor would be missing, forexample, if you put different wheels on yourvehicle without transferring the sensors. If thewarning comes on and stays on, there may be aproblem with the TPM. See your dealer.


SERVICE TRACTION CONTROLThis message displays when there is a problemwith the Traction Control System (TCS). When thismessage displays, the system will not limitwheel spin. Adjust your driving accordingly. Seeyour dealer for service. See Traction ControlSystem (TCS) on page 281 for more information.

SERVICE TRANSMISSIONThis message displays when there is a problemwith the vehicle’s transmission. Have your vehicleserviced by your dealer.

SERVICE VEHICLE SOONThis message displays when a non-emissionsrelated malfunction occurs. Have your vehicleserviced by your dealer as soon as possible.

SPEED LIMITED TO XXX MPH (km/h)This message displays when your vehicle speed islimited to 80 mph (128 km/h) because thevehicle detects a problem in the speed variableassist steering, magnetic ride control, or automaticleveling control systems. Have your vehicleserviced by your dealer.

STABILITRAK NOT READYThis message may display and the TractionControl System and StabiliTrak® Warning Light onthe instrument panel cluster may be on afterfirst driving the vehicle and exceeding 19 mph(30 km/h) for 30 seconds. The StabiliTrak® systemis not functional until the light has turned off.See StabiliTrak® System on page 283 for moreinformation.

STABILITRAK OFFThis message displays when you turn offStabiliTrak®, or when the stability control has beenautomatically disabled. To limit wheel spin andrealize the full benefits of the stabilityenhancement system, you should normally leaveStabiliTrak® on. However, you should turnStabiliTrak® off if your vehicle gets stuck in sand,mud, ice, or snow and you want to rock yourvehicle to attempt to free it, or if you are driving inextreme off-road conditions and require morewheel spin. See If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand,Mud, Ice, or Snow on page 321. To turn theStabiliTrak® system on or off, see StabiliTrak®

System on page 283.


There are several conditions that can cause thismessage to appear.

• One condition is overheating, which couldoccur if StabiliTrak® activates continuouslyfor an extended period of time.

• The message also displays if the brakesystem warning light is on. See Brake SystemWarning Light on page 204.

• The message could display if the stabilitysystem takes longer than usual to complete itsdiagnostic checks due to driving conditions.

• The message displays if an engine or vehiclerelated problem has been detected and thevehicle needs service. See your dealer.

The message turns off as soon as the conditionsthat caused the message to be displayed areno longer present.

STARTING DISABLED SERVICETHROTTLEThis message displays when your vehicle’s throttlesystem is not functioning properly. Have yourvehicle serviced by your dealer.

THEFT ATTEMPTED


This message displays if the theft-deterrentsystem has detected a break-in attempt while youwere away from your vehicle. See Theft-DeterrentSystem on page 112 for more information.


TIGHTEN GAS CAPThis message displays when the fuel cap has notbeen fully tightened. Recheck the fuel cap toensure that it is on and tightened properly.

TIRE LEARNING ACTIVEIf your vehicle has a Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM)system, this message displays when the systemis re-learning the tire positions on your vehicle.See Tire Pressure Monitor System on page 410.The tire positions must be re-learned after rotatingthe tires or after replacing a tire or sensor. SeeTire Inspection and Rotation on page 414and Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 407 for moreinformation.

TRACTION CONTROL OFFThis message displays when the Traction ControlSystem (TCS) is turned off. Adjust your drivingaccordingly. See Traction Control System(TCS) on page 281 for more information.

TRACTION CONTROL ONThis message displays when the Traction ControlSystem (TCS) is turned on. See TractionControl System (TCS) on page 281 for moreinformation.

TRANSMISSION HOT IDLE ENGINEThis message displays when the transmission fluidin your vehicle is too hot. Stop the vehicle andallow it to idle until the transmission cools down oruntil this message is removed.

TURN SIGNAL ONThis message displays as a reminder to turn offthe turn signal if you drive your vehicle formore than about 1 mile (1.6 km) with a turn signalon. A multiple chime sounds when this messageis displayed.


WASHER FLUID LOW ADD FLUID


This message displays when your vehicle is lowon windshield washer fluid. Refill the windshieldwasher fluid reservoir as soon as possible.See Windshield Washer Fluid on page 380 formore information.

DIC Vehicle CustomizationYour vehicle has customization capabilities thatallow you to program certain features to onepreferred setting. Customization features can onlybe programmed to one setting on the vehicleand cannot be programmed to a preferred settingfor two different drivers.

All of the customization options may not beavailable on your vehicle. Only the optionsavailable will be displayed on your DIC.

The customization features were set to the defaultsettings when your vehicle left the factory, butthey may have been changed from their defaultstate since that time.

The customization preferences are automaticallyrecalled.

To change customization preferences, use thefollowing procedure.

Entering the Feature Settings Menu1. Turn the ignition on and place the vehicle in

PARK (P).To avoid excessive drain on the battery, it isrecommended that the headlamps areturned off.

2. Press the customization button to enter thefeature settings menu.If the menu is not available, FEATURESETTINGS AVAILABLE IN PARK will display.Before entering the menu, make sure thevehicle is in PARK (P).


Feature Settings Menu ItemsThe following are customization features that allowyou to program settings to the vehicle:

DISPLAY IN ENGLISHThis feature will only display if a language otherthan English has been set. This feature allows youto change the language in which the DIC messagesappear back to English.

Press the customization button until the DISPLAYIN ENGLISH screen appears on the DICdisplay. Press the set/reset button to selectEnglish as the language in which all DICmessages will appear.

DISPLAY LANGUAGEThis feature allows you to select the language inwhich the DIC messages will appear.

Press the customization button until the DISPLAYLANGUAGE screen appears on the DIC display.Press the set/reset button to access the settingsfor this feature. Then press the menu up/downbutton to scroll through the following settings:

ENGLISH (default): All messages will appear inEnglish.

DEUTSCH (German): All messages will appear inGerman.

FRANCAIS (French): All messages will appear inFrench.

ESPANOL (Spanish): All messages will appearin Spanish.

JAPANESE: All messages will appear inJapanese.

ARABIC: All messages will appear in Arabic.

NO CHANGE: No change will be made tothis feature. The current setting will remain.

Choose one of the available settings and pressthe set/reset button while it is displayed on the DICto select it.

AUTO DOOR LOCKThis feature allows you to select when thevehicle’s doors will automatically lock. SeeProgrammable Automatic Door Locks on page 102for more information.


Press the customization button until AUTO DOORLOCK appears on the DIC display. Press theset/reset button to access the settings forthis feature. Then press the menu up/down buttonto scroll through the following settings:

SHIFT OUT OF PARK (default): The vehicle’sdoors automatically lock when the doors areclosed and the vehicle is shifted out of PARK (P).

AT VEHICLE SPEED: The vehicle’s doorsautomatically lock when the vehicle speed is above5 mph (8 km/h) for three seconds.

NO CHANGE: No change will be made to thisfeature. The current setting will remain.


AUTO DOOR UNLOCKThis feature allows you to select whether or notthe door(s) will automatically unlock. It also allowsyou to select which doors and when they willautomatically unlock. See ProgrammableAutomatic Door Locks on page 102 for moreinformation.

Press the customization button until AUTO DOORUNLOCK appears on the DIC display. Pressthe set/reset button to access the settings for thisfeature. Then press the menu up/down buttonto scroll through the following settings:

OFF: None of the doors will automatically unlock.

DRIVER AT KEY OUT: Only the driver’s doorwill unlock when the key is taken out of theignition.

DRIVER IN PARK: Only the driver’s door willunlock when the vehicle is shifted into PARK (P).

ALL AT KEY OUT: All of the doors will unlockwhen the key is taken out of the ignition.

ALL IN PARK (default): All of the doors willunlock when the vehicle is shifted into PARK (P).




REMOTE DOOR LOCKThis feature allows you to select the type offeedback you will receive when locking the vehiclewith the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter.You will not receive feedback when lockingthe vehicle with the RKE transmitter if the doorsare open. See Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System Operation on page 96 for moreinformation.

Press the customization button until REMOTEDOOR LOCK appears on the DIC display. Pressthe set/reset button to access the settings forthis feature. Then press the menu up/down buttonto scroll through the following settings:

OFF: There will be no feedback when you pressthe lock button on the RKE transmitter.

LIGHTS ONLY: The exterior lamps will flashwhen you press the lock button on the RKEtransmitter.

HORN ONLY: The horn will sound on the secondpress of the lock button on the RKE transmitter.

HORN & LIGHTS (default): The exterior lampswill flash when you press the lock button on theRKE transmitter, and the horn will sound when thelock button is pressed again within five seconds ofthe previous command.



REMOTE DOOR UNLOCKThis feature allows you to select the type offeedback you will receive when unlocking thevehicle with the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter. You will not receive feedback whenunlocking the vehicle with the RKE transmitterif the doors are open. See Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) System Operation on page 96 for moreinformation.


Press the customization button until REMOTEDOOR UNLOCK appears on the DIC display.Press the set/reset button to access the settingsfor this feature. Then press the menu up/downbutton to scroll through the following settings:

LIGHTS OFF: The exterior lamps will not flashwhen you press the unlock button on the RKEtransmitter.

LIGHTS ON (default): The exterior lamps willflash when you press the unlock button onthe RKE transmitter.



DELAY DOOR LOCKThis feature allows you to select whether or not thelocking of the vehicle’s doors will be delayed. Thelocking of the vehicle’s doors is delayed for up tofive seconds after a power door lock switch ispressed when a door is open, or after the lockbutton on the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter is pressed while a door is open. The keymust be out of the ignition for this feature to work.

Press the customization button until DELAY DOORLOCK appears on the DIC display. Press theset/reset button to access the settings forthis feature. Then press the menu up/down buttonto scroll through the following settings:

OFF: There will be no delayed locking of thevehicle’s doors.

ON (default): The locking of the vehicle’s doorswill be delayed by five seconds after a power doorlock switch is pressed when a door is open, orthe lock button on the RKE transmitter is pressedwhile a door is open.




EXIT LIGHTINGIf it is dark enough outside, this feature allows youto select the amount of time you want theexterior lamps to remain on. This happens afterthe key is turned from ON to OFF.

Press the customization button until EXITLIGHTING appears on the DIC display. Press theset/reset button to access the settings for thisfeature. Then press the menu up/down button toscroll through the following settings:

OFF: The exterior lamps will not turn on.

30 SECONDS (default): The exterior lamps willstay on for 30 seconds.

1 MINUTE: The exterior lamps will stay on forone minute.

2 MINUTES: The exterior lamps will stay on fortwo minutes.



APPROACH LIGHTINGThis feature allows you to select whether or not tohave the exterior lights turn on briefly duringlow light periods after unlocking the vehicle usingthe Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter.

Press the customization button until APPROACHLIGHTING appears on the DIC display. Pressthe set/reset button to access the settings for thisfeature. Then press the menu up/down buttonto scroll through the following settings:

OFF: The exterior lights will not turn on when youunlock the vehicle with the RKE transmitter.


ON (default): If it is dark enough outside, theexterior lights will turn on briefly when you unlockthe vehicle with the RKE transmitter.

The lights will remain on for 20 seconds or untilthe lock button on the RKE transmitter is pressed,or the vehicle is no longer off. See RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) System Operation on page 96for more information.



CHIME VOLUMEThis feature allows you to select the volume levelof the chime.

Press the customization button until CHIMEVOLUME appears on the DIC display. Press theset/reset button to access the settings for thisfeature. Then press the menu up/down button toscroll through the following settings:

NORMAL (default): The chime volume will be setto a normal level.

LOUD: The chime volume will be set to a loudlevel.



PARK TILT MIRRORSIf your vehicle has this feature, it allows you toselect whether or not the outside mirror(s)will automatically tilt down when the vehicle isshifted into REVERSE (R). See Outside Curb ViewAssist Mirror on page 138 for more information.

Press the customization button until PARKTILT MIRRORS appears on the DIC display. Pressthe set/reset button to access the settings forthis feature. Then press the menu up/down buttonto scroll through the following settings:

OFF (default): Neither outside mirror will betilted down when the vehicle is shifted intoREVERSE (R).


DRIVER MIRROR: The driver’s outside mirror willbe tilted down when the vehicle is shifted intoREVERSE (R).

PASSENGER MIRROR: The passenger’s outsidemirror will be tilted down when the vehicle isshifted into REVERSE (R).

BOTH MIRRORS: The driver’s and passenger’soutside mirrors will be tilted down when the vehicleis shifted into REVERSE (R).



EASY EXIT SEATIf the vehicle has this feature, it allows you toselect your preference for the automatic easy exitseat feature. See Memory Seat and Mirrors onpage 12 for more information.

Press the customization button until EASY EXITSEAT appears in the display. Press the set/resetbutton to access the settings for this feature.Then press the menu up/down button to scrollthrough the following settings:

OFF (default): No automatic seat exit recall willoccur.

ON: The driver’s seat will move back when thekey is removed from the ignition.

The automatic easy exit seat movement will onlyoccur one time after the key is removed fromthe ignition. If the automatic movement has alreadyoccurred, and you put the key back in theignition and remove it again, the seat will stay inthe original exit position, unless a memoryrecall took place prior to removing the key again.

NO CHANGE: No change will be made tothis feature. The current setting will remain.



MEMORY SEAT RECALLIf the vehicle has this feature, it allows you toselect your preference for the remote memory seatrecall feature. See Memory Seat and Mirrors onpage 12 for more information.

Press the customization button until MEMORYSEAT RECALL appears in the display. Press theset/reset button to access the settings for thisfeature. Then press the menu up/down button toscroll through the following settings:

OFF (default): No remote memory seat recall willoccur.

ON: The driver’s seat and outside mirrors willautomatically move to the stored driving positionwhen the unlock button on the Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) transmitter is pressed. If your vehiclehas the adjustable throttle and brake pedalfeature, the pedals will also automatically move.



FACTORY SETTINGSThis feature allows you to set all of thecustomization features back to their factory defaultsettings.

Press the customization button until FACTORYSETTINGS appears on the DIC display. Press theset/reset button to access the settings for thisfeature. Then press the menu up/down button toscroll through the following settings:

RESTORE ALL (default): The customizationfeatures will be set to their factory default settings.

DO NOT RESTORE: The customization featureswill not be set to their factory default settings.

Choose one of the available settings and press theset/reset button while it is displayed on the DICto select it.


Exiting the Feature Settings MenuThe feature settings menu will be exited when anyof the following occurs:

• The vehicle is shifted out of PARK (P).

• The ignition is no longer in ON.

• The trip/fuel or vehicle information DIC buttonsare pressed.

• The end of the feature settings menu isreached.

• A 40 second time period has elapsed with noselection made.

Audio System(s)Determine which radio your vehicle has and thenread the pages following to familiarize yourselfwith its features.

Driving without distraction is a necessity for asafer driving experience. See Defensive Driving onpage 274. By taking a few moments to read thismanual and get familiar with your vehicle’saudio system, you can use it with less effort, aswell as take advantage of its features. While yourvehicle is parked, set up your audio system bypresetting your favorite radio stations, setting thetone and adjusting the speakers. Then, whendriving conditions permit, you can tune toyour favorite stations using the presets andsteering wheel controls if the vehicle has them.


{CAUTION:

This system provides you with a far greateraccess to audio stations and song listings.Giving extended attention to entertainmenttasks while driving can cause a crash andyou or others can be injured or killed.Always keep your eyes on the road andyour mind on the drive — avoid engagingin extended searching while driving.

Keeping your mind on the drive is important forsafe driving. Here are some ways in which you canhelp avoid distraction while driving.

While your vehicle is parked:

• Familiarize yourself with all of its controls.

• Familiarize yourself with its operation.

• Set up your audio system by presetting yourfavorite radio stations, setting the tone, andadjusting the speakers. Then, when drivingconditions permit, you can tune to your favoriteradio stations using the presets and steeringwheel controls if the vehicle has them.

Notice: Before adding any sound equipmentto your vehicle, such as an audio system,CD player, CB radio, mobile telephone,or two-way radio, make sure that it can beadded by checking with your dealer. Also,check federal rules covering mobile radio andtelephone units. If sound equipment can beadded, it is very important to do it properly.Added sound equipment can interfere with theoperation of your vehicle’s engine, radio, orother systems, and even damage them.Your vehicle’s systems can interfere with theoperation of sound equipment that hasbeen added.

Your vehicle has a feature called RetainedAccessory Power (RAP). With RAP, the audiosystem can be played even after the ignitionis turned off. See Retained Accessory Power(RAP) on page 118 for more information.


Setting the Time (Radio with SingleCD Player)

Enabling/Disabling the Digital Radio ClockYour vehicle has an analog clock as well asthe digital radio clock. At the time of new vehicledelivery, the digital radio clock display shouldbe disabled. If you decide to use the digital radioclock as well as the analog clock, you canchange the setting to enable the radio clockdisplay.

Turn the radio clock display on or off by followingthese steps:

1. Turn the radio on.

2. Press the clock button until the clock and datesetting menus appear.

3. Press the pushbutton located under theforward arrow label until the menu fordefault clock and date settings appear.

4. Press the pushbutton located under thecurrently displayed status of either ON or OFF.The ON display indicates the radio clockdisplay is disabled and the OFF displayindicates the radio clock display is enabled.Press this pushbutton to toggle the radio clockdisplay on or off.If the radio clock display is turned on, thescreen displays Radio Clock ON for10 seconds, then returns to the original clockdisplay menu.If the radio clock display is turned off, thescreen displays Radio Clock OFF for10 seconds. The menus for clock and datesettings are removed, and ON displaysas a current status indicating that the clockdisplay can be turned on, if desired.

The radio clock and analog clock are notsynchronized. Occasionally you might need to setthe digital radio clock using the procedurebelow to synchronize both clocks.


Setting the Time and Date on the DigitalRadio ClockIf your vehicle has a radio with a single CD player,it has a clock button for setting the time anddate. To set the time and date, do the following:


2. Press the clock button and HR, MIN, MM, DD,YYYY (hour, minute, month, day, and year)displays.

3. Press the pushbutton located under each oneof the labels that you want to change. Everytime the pushbutton is pressed again, the timeor the date if selected, increases by one.

• Another way to increase the time or date, isto press the right SEEK arrow or the FWD(forward) button.

4. To decrease the time or date, press the leftSEEK arrow or the REV (reverse) button.You can also turn the tune knob, located onthe upper right side of the radio faceplate,to adjust the selected setting.

Changing the Time and Date DefaultSettingTo change the time and date default setting, dothe following:

1. Change the time default setting from 12 hourto 24 hour or the date default setting frommonth/day/year to day/month/year, bypressing the clock button.

2. Once the clock and date settings displayalong with the forward arrow, press thepushbutton located under the forward arrowuntil the time 12H and 24H, and the dateMM/DD/YYYY (month, day, and year)and DD/MM/YYYY (day, month, and year)displays.

3. Press the pushbutton located under thedesired option, then press the clock buttonagain to apply the selected default, or let thescreen time out.


Setting the Time (Radio withSix-Disc CD Player)

Enabling/Disabling the Digital Radio ClockYour vehicle has an analog clock as well asthe digital radio clock. At the time of new vehicledelivery, the digital radio clock display shouldbe disabled. If you decide to use the digital radioclock as well as the analog clock, you canchange the setting to enable the radio clockdisplay.

Turn the radio clock display on or off by followingthese steps:


2. Press the MENU button until the clock labeldisplay appears.

3. Press the pushbutton located under the clocklabel until the clock and date settings appear.

4. Press the pushbutton located under theforward arrow label until the menu fordefault clock and date settings appear.

5. Press the pushbutton located under thecurrently displayed status of either ON or OFF.The ON display indicates the radio clockdisplay is disabled and the OFF displayindicates the radio clock display is enabled.Press this pushbutton to toggle the radio clockdisplay on or off.If the radio clock display is turned on, thescreen displays Radio Clock ON for10 seconds, then returns to the original clockdisplay menu.If the radio clock display is turned off, thescreen displays Radio Clock OFF for10 seconds. The menus for clock and datesettings are removed, and ON displaysas a current status indicating that the clockdisplay can be turned on, if desired.

The radio clock and analog clock are notsynchronized. Occasionally you might need to setthe digital radio clock using the procedurebelow to synchronize both clocks.


Setting the Time and Date on the DigitalRadio ClockIf your vehicle has a radio with a six-disc CDplayer, it has a MENU button for setting the timeand date. To set the time and date, do thefollowing:


2. Press the MENU button until the clock optionis displayed.

3. Press the pushbutton located under the clocklabel and the HR, MIN, MM, DD, YYYY (hour,minute, month, day, and year) displays.

4. Press the pushbutton located under each oneof the labels that you want to change. Everytime the pushbutton is pressed again, the timeor the date if selected, increases by one.

• Another way to increase the time or date, isto press the right SEEK arrow or the FWD(forward) button.

5. To decrease the time or date, press the leftSEEK arrow or the REV (reverse) button.You can also turn the tune knob, located onthe upper right side of the radio faceplate,to adjust the selected setting.

Changing the Time and Date DefaultSettingTo change the time and date default setting, dothe following:

1. Change the time default setting from 12 hourto 24 hour or the date default setting frommonth/day/year to day/month/year, bypressing the MENU button.

2. Once the clock symbol displays, press thepushbutton located under that symbol untilthe time and date settings display along with aforward arrow.

3. Press the pushbutton located under theforward arrow until the time 12H and 24H, andthe date MM/DD/YYYY (month, day, andyear) and DD/MM/YYYY (day, month,and year) displays.

4. Press the pushbutton located under thedesired option, then press the MENUbutton again to apply the selected default, orlet the screen time out.


Radio with CD

Radio Data System (RDS)The audio system has a Radio Data System(RDS). The RDS feature is available for use onlyon FM stations that broadcast RDS information.This system relies upon receiving specificinformation from these stations and only workswhen the information is available.

While the radio is tuned to an FM-RDS station, thestation name or call letters display. In rarecases, a radio station could broadcast incorrectinformation that causes the radio features to workimproperly. If this happens, contact the radiostation.

XM™ Satellite Radio ServiceXM™ is a satellite radio service that is based in the48 contiguous United States and Canada. XM™offers a large variety of coast-to-coast channelsincluding music, news, sports, talk, traffic/weather(U.S. subscribers), and children’s programming.XM™ provides digital quality audio and textinformation that includes song title and artist name.A service fee is required in order to receive theXM™ service. For more information, contact XM™;In the U.S. at www.xmradio.com or call1-800-852-XMXM (9696) or in Canada atwww.xmradio.ca or call 1-877-GET-XMSR(438-9677).

Radio with CD shown, Radio with Six-Disc CD (MP3)similar


Playing the Radio

O (Power/Volume): Press this knob to turn thesystem on and off.

Turn this knob clockwise or counterclockwise toincrease or decrease the volume.

Speed Compensated Volume (SCV): The radioalso has Speed Compensated Volume (SCV).While SCV is on, the radio volume automaticallyadjusts to compensate for road and wind noise asdriving speed changes. That way, the volumelevel should sound about the same as you drive.To activate SCV:

1. Set the radio volume to the desired level.

2. Press the MENU button to display the radiosetup menu.

3. Press the pushbutton under the AUTOVOLUM (volume) label on the radio display.

4. Press the pushbutton under the desired SpeedCompensated Volume setting (OFF, Low, Med(medium), or High) to select the level of radiovolume compensation. The display times outafter approximately 10 seconds. Each highersetting allows for more radio volumecompensation at faster vehicle speeds.

Finding a Station

BAND: Press this button to switch between AM,FM, or XM™ (if equipped). The display showsthe selection.

a (Tune): Turn this knob to select radio stations.

© SEEK ¨: Press the right or left SEEKarrow to go to the next or to the previous stationand stay there.

To scan stations, press and hold either SEEKarrow for three seconds until a beep sounds. Theradio goes to a station, plays for a few seconds,then goes to the next station. Press eitherSEEK arrow again to stop scanning.

The radio only seeks and scan stations with astrong signal that are in the selected band.


4 (Information) (XM™ Satellite Radio Service,MP3, and RDS Features): Press the informationbutton to display additional text informationrelated to the current FM-RDS or XM™ station, orMP3 song. A choice of additional informationsuch as: Channel, Song, Artist, CAT (category)can appear. Continue pressing the informationbutton to highlight the desired label, or press thepushbutton positioned under any one of thelabels and the information about that labeldisplays.

When information is not available, No Infodisplays.

Storing a Radio Station as a FavoriteDrivers are encouraged to set up their radio stationfavorites while the vehicle is parked. Tune toyour favorite stations using the presets, favoritesbutton, and steering wheel controls, if your vehiclehas this feature. See Defensive Driving onpage 274.

FAV (Favorites): A maximum of 36 stations canbe programmed as favorites using thesix pushbuttons positioned below the radio stationfrequency labels and by using the radio favoritespage button (FAV button). Press the FAV button togo through up to six pages of favorites, eachhaving six favorite stations available per page.Each page of favorites can contain anycombination of AM, FM, or XM™ (if equipped)stations. To store a station as a favorite, performthe following steps:

1. Tune to the desired radio station.

2. Press the FAV button to display the pagewhere you want the station stored.

3. Press and hold one of the six pushbuttonsuntil a beep sounds. Whenever thatpushbutton is pressed and released, thestation that was set, returns.

4. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton radiostation you want stored as a favorite.


The number of favorites pages can be setup usingthe MENU button. To setup the number offavorites pages, perform the following steps:


2. Press the pushbutton located below theFAV 1-6 label.

3. Select the desired number of favorites pagesby pressing the pushbutton located below thedisplayed page numbers.

4. Press the FAV button, or let the menu timeout, to return to the original main radioscreen showing the radio station frequencylabels and to begin the process ofprogramming your favorites for the chosenamount of numbered pages.

Setting the Tone(Bass/Midrange/Treble)

BASS/MID/TREB (Bass, Midrange, or Treble):To adjust bass, midrange, or treble, press the tuneknob until the tone control labels display.Continue pressing to highlight the desired label, orpress the pushbutton positioned under thedesired label. Turn the tune knob clockwise orcounterclockwise to adjust the highlighted setting.The highlighted setting can also be adjusted bypressing either the SEEK, FWD (forward), or REV(reverse) button until the desired levels areobtained. If a station’s frequency is weak, or ifthere is static, decrease the treble.

To quickly adjust bass, midrange, or treble to themiddle position, press the tune knob for morethan two seconds. A beep sounds and the leveladjusts to the middle position. Pressing thetune knob for more than two seconds will alsocenter the fade and balance settings to the factorydefault positions.


Finding a Category (CAT) Station

CAT (Category): The CAT button is used to findXM™ stations when the radio is in the XM™mode. To find XM™ channels within a desiredcategory, perform the following:

1. Press the BAND button until the XM™frequency displays. Press the CAT button todisplay the category labels on the radiodisplay. Continue pressing the CAT buttonuntil the desired category name displays.

2. Press either of the two buttons below thedesired category label to immediately tuneto the first XM™ station associated with thatcategory.

3. Turn the tune knob, press the buttons belowthe right or left arrows displayed, or press theright or left SEEK buttons to go to the nextor previous XM™ station within the selectedcategory.

4. To exit the category search mode, press theFAV button or BAND button to display yourfavorites again.

Undesired XM™ categories can be removedthrough the setup menu. To remove an undesiredcategory, perform the following:


2. Press the pushbutton located below the XMCAT label.

3. Turn the tune knob to display the categoryyou want removed.

4. Press the pushbutton located under theRemove label until the category namealong with the word Removed displays.

5. Repeat the steps to remove more categories.

Removed categories can be restored by pressingthe pushbutton under the Add label when aremoved category displays or by pressing thepushbutton under the Restore All label.

The radio does not allow you to remove or addcategories while the vehicle is moving faster than5 mph (8 km/h).

The CAT button also toggles between compressedand uncompressed audio when a mixed disc ispresent. See “Compressed Audio” later inthis section.


Radio Message

Locked: This message displays when theTHEFTLOCK® system has locked up the radio.Take the vehicle to your dealer for service.

If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannotbe corrected, contact your dealer.

Radio Messages for XM™ OnlySee XM Radio Messages on page 264 later in thissection for further detail.

Playing a CD (Single CD Player)Insert a CD partway into the slot, label side up.The player pulls it in and the CD should beginplaying.If the ignition or radio is turned off with a CD in theplayer, it stays in the player. When the ignition orradio is turned on, the CD starts playing where itstopped, if it was the last selected audio source.When a CD is inserted, the CD symbol displays onthe CD. As each new track starts to play the tracknumber displays.

If playing a CD-R, the sound quality can be reduceddue to CD-R quality, the method of recording, thequality of the music that has been recorded, and the

way the CD-R has been handled. There can be anincrease in skipping, difficulty in finding tracks,and/or difficulty in loading and ejecting. If theseproblems occur, check the bottom surface of theCD. If the surface of the CD is damaged, such ascracked, broken, or scratched, the CD will not playproperly. If the surface of the CD is soiled, see Careof Your CDs on page 271 for more information.

If there is no apparent damage, try a knowngood CD.

Do not add any label to a CD, it could get caught inthe CD player. If a CD is recorded on a personalcomputer and a description label is needed, trylabeling the top of the recorded CD with amarking pen.

Notice: If a label is added to a CD, or more thanone CD is inserted into the slot at a time, or anattempt is made to play scratched or damagedCDs, the CD player could be damaged. Whileusing the CD player, use only CDs in goodcondition without any label, load one CD at atime, and keep the CD player and the loadingslot free of foreign materials, liquids, anddebris.

If an error displays, see “CD Messages” later inthis section.


Z (Eject): Press the CD eject button toeject the CD. If the CD is not removed, afterseveral seconds, the CD automatically pulls backinto the player.

a (Tune): Turn this knob to select tracks on theCD currently playing.

© SEEK ¨: Press the left SEEK arrow togo to the start of the current track, if more thanten seconds have played. Press the rightSEEK arrow to go to the next track. If either SEEKarrow is held or pressed multiple times, theplayer continues moving backward or forwardthrough the CD.

s REV (Reverse): Press and hold this buttonto reverse playback quickly within a track. Sound isheard at a reduced volume. Release this buttonto resume playing the track. The elapsed timeof the track displays.

\ FWD (Fast Forward): Press and hold thisbutton to advance playback quickly within a track.Sound is heard at a reduced volume. Releasethis button to resume playing the track. Theelapsed time of the track displays.

RDM (Random): With the random setting, CDtracks can be listened to in random, ratherthan sequential order. This feature is not availablein playlist mode. To use random, do the following:

1. To play tracks from the CD you are listeningto in random order, press the pushbuttonpositioned under the RDM label. The randomicon displays.

2. Press the same pushbutton again to turn offrandom play. The random icon disappearsfrom the display.

4 (Information): Press this button to switch thedisplay between the track number, elapsed time ofthe track, and the time. When the ignition is off,press this button to display the time (if theclock display is enabled).

BAND: Press this button to listen to the radiowhen a CD is playing. The CD remains inside theradio for future listening.


CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press this button to playa CD when listening to the radio. The CD icon andtrack number displays when a CD is in the player.Press this button again and the systemautomatically searches for an auxiliary input device,such as a portable audio player. If a portable audioplayer is not connected, No Aux Input Devicedisplays.

Playing a CD(s) (Six-Disc CD Player)

LOAD ^: Press this button to load CDs into theCD player. This CD player holds up to six CDs.To insert one CD, do the following:1. Press and release the load button.2. Wait for the message to insert the disc.

3. Load a CD. Insert the CD partway into the slot,label side up. The player pulls the CD in.

To insert multiple CDs, do the following:

1. Press and hold the load button forfive seconds. A beep sounds and Load AllDiscs displays.

2. Follow the displayed instruction on when toinsert the discs. The CD player takes up tosix CDs.

3. Press the Load button again to cancel loadingmore CDs.

If the ignition or radio is turned off, with a CD in theplayer, it stays in the player. When the ignition orradio is turned on, the CD starts playing where itstopped, if it was the last selected audio source.

When a CD is inserted, the CD symbol appears onthe CD. As each new track starts to play, the tracknumber displays.

If playing a CD-R, the sound quality can be reduceddue to CD-R quality, the method of recording, thequality of the music that has been recorded, and theway the CD-R has been handled. There can be anincrease in skipping, difficulty in finding tracks,and/or difficulty in loading and ejecting. If theseproblems occur, check the bottom surface of theCD. If the surface of the CD is damaged, such ascracked, broken, or scratched, the CD will not playproperly. If the surface of the CD is soiled, see Careof Your CDs on page 271 for more information.



Do not add any label to a CD, it could get caughtin the CD player. If a CD is recorded on apersonal computer and a description label isneeded, try labeling the top of the recorded CDwith a marking pen.

Notice: If a label is added to a CD, or morethan one CD is inserted into the slot at a time,or an attempt is made to play scratched ordamaged CDs, the CD player could bedamaged. While using the CD player, use onlyCDs in good condition without any label,load one CD at a time, and keep the CD playerand the loading slot free of foreign materials,liquids, and debris.


Z (Eject): Press the CD eject button to ejectCD(s). To eject the CD that is currently playing,press and release this button. A beep sounds andEjecting Disc displays. Once the disc is ejected,Remove Disc displays. The CD can be removed. Ifthe CD is not removed, after several seconds,the CD automatically pulls back into the player andbegins playing.

For the Six-Disc CD player, press and hold theeject button for two seconds to eject all discs.

a (Tune): Turn this knob to select tracks on theCD currently playing.

© SEEK ¨: Press the left SEEK arrow togo to the start of the current track, if more thanten seconds have played. Press the rightSEEK arrow to go to the next track. If either SEEKarrow is held, or pressed multiple times, theplayer continues moving backward or forwardthrough the tracks on the CD.

s REV (Reverse): Press and hold this buttonto reverse playback quickly within a track. You willhear sound at a reduced volume. Release thisbutton to resume playing the track. The elapsedtime of the track displays.

\ FWD (Fast Forward): Press and hold thisbutton to advance playback quickly within a track.You will hear sound at a reduced volume.Release this button to resume playing the track.The elapsed time of the track displays.


RDM (Random): With the random setting, thetracks can be listened to in random, rather thansequential order, on one CD or all CDs in a six-discCD player. To use random, do one of the following:

• To play the tracks from the CD you are listeningto in random order, press the pushbuttonpositioned under the RDM label untilRandomize Current Disc displays. Press thepushbutton again to turn off random play.

• To play tracks from all CDs loaded in a six-discCD player in random order, press thepushbutton positioned under the RDM labeluntil Randomize All Discs displays. Press thesame pushbutton again to turn off random play.


CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press this button to playa CD when listening to the radio. The CD iconand a message showing disc and/or track numberdisplays when a CD is in the player. Press thisbutton again and the system automaticallysearches for an auxiliary input device, such as aportable audio player. If a portable audio player isnot connected, No Aux Input Device displays.

Playing an MP3/WMA CD-R orCD-RW DiscYour vehicle’s radio system may have the MP3feature. If it has, it is capable of playing anMP3/WMA CD-R or CD-RW disc. For moreinformation on how to play an MP3/WMA CD-R orCD-RW disc, see Using an MP3 on page 257later in this section.

CD Messages

DISC ERROR: If an error message displaysand/or the CD comes out, it could be for one ofthe following reasons:

• The radio system does not support the playlistformat, the compressed audio format, or thedata file format.

• It is very hot. When the temperature returns tonormal, the CD should play.

• You are driving on a very rough road. When theroad becomes smoother, the CD should play.

• The CD is dirty, scratched, wet, orupside down.

• The air is very humid. If so, wait about an hourand try again.


• There could have been a problem while burningthe CD.

• The label could be caught in the CD player.

If the CD is not playing correctly, for any otherreason, try a known good CD.

If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannotbe corrected, contact your dealer. If the radiodisplays an error message, write it down andprovide it to your dealer when reporting theproblem.

Using the Auxiliary Input JackYour radio system has an auxiliary input jacklocated on the lower right side of the faceplate.This is not an audio output; do not plug theheadphone set into the front auxiliary input jack.You can however, connect an external audiodevice such as an iPod, laptop computer, MP3player, CD changer, or cassette tape player, etc. tothe auxiliary input jack for use as another sourcefor audio listening.

Drivers are encouraged to set up any auxiliarydevice while the vehicle is in PARK (P). SeeDefensive Driving on page 274 for moreinformation on driver distraction.

To use a portable audio player, connect a 3.5 mm(1/8 inch) cable to the radio’s front auxiliaryinput jack. When a device is connected, press theradio CD/AUX button to begin playing audiofrom the device over the vehicle speakers.

O (Power/Volume): Turn this knob clockwise orcounterclockwise to increase or decrease thevolume of the portable player. You might need to doadditional volume adjustments from the portabledevice if the volume is not loud or soft enough.

BAND: Press this button to listen to the radiowhen a portable audio device is playing. Theportable audio device continues playing, so youmight want to stop it or power it off.

CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press this button to playa CD when a portable audio device is playing.Press this button again and the system beginsplaying audio from the connected portable audioplayer. If a portable audio player is notconnected, No Aux Input Device displays.


Using an MP3

MP3/WMA CD-R or CD-RW DiscThe radio plays MP3 and WMA files that wererecorded on a CD-R or CD-RW disc. The files canbe recorded with the following fixed bit rates:32 kbps, 40 kbps, 56 kbps, 64 kbps, 80 kbps,96 kbps, 112 kbps, 128 kbps, 160 kbps, 192 kbps,224 kbps, 256 kbps, and 320 kbps or a variablebit rate. Song title, artist name, and albumcan display when files are recorded using ID3 tagsversion 1 and 2.

Compressed AudioThe radio also plays discs that contain bothstandard uncompressed CD audio and MP3/WMAcompressed audio files. By default the radioreads only the uncompressed audio and ignoresthe MP3/WMA files. Pressing the CAT (category)button toggles between compressed anduncompressed audio format.

MP3/WMA FormatIf you burn your own MP3/WMA disc on apersonal computer:

• Make sure the MP3 files are recorded on aCD-R or CD-RW disc.

• Make sure the CD does not have more than amaximum of 50 folders, 50 playlists, and255 files to read and play.

• Create a folder structure that makes it easy tofind songs while driving. Organize songs byalbums using one folder for each album.Each folder or album should contain 18 songsor less.

• Avoid subfolders. The system can support upto 8 subfolders deep, however, keep the totalnumber of folders to a minimum in order toreduce the complexity and confusion in tryingto locate a particular folder during playback.

• Make sure playlists have a .mp3 or .wplextension (other file extensions mightnot work).


• Minimize the length of the file, folder or playlistnames. Long file, folder, or playlist names, ora combination of a large number of filesand folders, or playlists can cause the playerto be unable to play up to the maximumnumber of files, folders, playlists, or sessions.If you wish to play a large number of files,folders, playlists, or sessions, minimizethe length of the file, folder, or playlist name.Long names also take up more space onthe display, potentially getting cut off.

• Finalize the audio disc before you burn it.Trying to add music to an existing disccan cause the disc not to function in theplayer.

Change playlists by using the previous and nextfolder buttons, the tuner knob, or the seek buttons.An MP3 CD-R that was recorded using no filefolders can also be played. If a CD-R containsmore than the maximum of 50 folders, 50 playlists,and 255 files, the player lets you access andnavigate up to the maximum, but all items overthe maximum cannot be accessed.

Root DirectoryThe root directory of the CD-R is treated as afolder. If the root directory has compressed audiofiles, the directory displays as F1 ROOT. Allfiles contained directly under the root directory areaccessed prior to any root directory folders.However, playlists (Px) are always accessedbefore root folders or files.

Empty Directory or FolderIf a root directory or a folder exists somewhere inthe file structure that contains onlyfolders/subfolders and no compressed files directlybeneath them, the player advances to the nextfolder in the file structure that contains compressedaudio files. The empty folder does not display.


No FolderWhen the CD-R contains only compressed files,the files are located under the root folder. The nextand previous folder functions do not display ona CD-R that was recorded without folders orplaylists. When displaying the name of the folderthe radio displays ROOT.

When the CD-R contains only playlists andcompressed audio files, but no folders, all files arelocated under the root folder. The folder downand the folder up buttons search playlists (Px) firstand then goes to the root folder. When theradio displays the name of the folder the radiodisplays ROOT.

Order of PlayTracks recorded to the CD-R play in the followingorder:

• Play begins from the first track in the firstplaylist and continues sequentially throughall tracks in each playlist. When the last trackof the last playlist has played, play continuesfrom the first track of the first playlist.

− Playlists can be changed by pressing thenext and previous folder button, the seekbuttons, or turning the tuner knob.

• Play begins from the first track in the firstfolder and continues sequentially throughall tracks in each folder. When the last track ofthe last folder has played, play continuesfrom the first track of the first folder.

When play enters a new folder, the display doesnot automatically show the new folder name unlessthe folder mode has been chosen as the defaultdisplay. The new track name displays.

File System and NamingThe song name that displays is the song namethat is contained in the ID3 tag. If the song name isnot present in the ID3 tag, then the radio displaysthe file name without the extension (suchas .mp3) as the track name.

Track names longer than 22 characters orfour pages are shortened. Parts of words on thelast page of text and the extension of the filenamedoes not display.


Preprogrammed PlaylistsPreprogrammed playlists that were created usingWinAmp™, MusicMatch™, or Windows MediaPlayer™ software can be accessed, however, theycannot be edited using the radio. These playlistsare treated as special folders containingcompressed audio song files. Playlists must havea file extension of M3U or WPL.

Playlists can be changed by using the previousand next folder buttons, the seek buttons, orturning the tuner knob. Tracks cannot be changed.Songs are played sequentially; press the REVor FWD to reverse or advance through thecurrently playing song.

Playing an MP3Insert a CD-R partway into the slot (Single CDPlayer), or press the load button and wait for themessage to insert disc (Six-Disc CD Player),label side up. The player pulls it in, and the CD-Rshould begin playing.

If the ignition or radio is turned off while a CD-R isin the player, it stays in the player. When theignition or radio is turned on, the CD-R starts toplay where it stopped, if it was the last selectedaudio source.

As each new track starts to play, the track numberand song title displays.

If playing a CD-R, the sound quality can be reduceddue to CD-R quality, the method of recording, thequality of the music that has been recorded, and theway the CD-R has been handled. There can be anincrease in skipping, difficulty in finding tracks,and/or difficulty in loading and ejecting. If theseproblems occur, check the bottom surface of theCD. If the surface of the CD is damaged, such ascracked, broken, or scratched, the CD will not playproperly. If the surface of the CD is soiled, see Careof Your CDs on page 271 for more information.


Do not add any label to a CD, it could get caughtin the CD player. If a CD is recorded on apersonal computer and a description label isneeded, try labeling the top of the recorded CDwith a marking pen.


Notice: If a label is added to a CD, or morethan one CD is inserted into the slot at a time,or an attempt is made to play scratched ordamaged CDs, the CD player could bedamaged. While using the CD player, use onlyCDs in good condition without any label,load one CD at a time, and keep the CD playerand the loading slot free of foreign materials,liquids, and debris.


Z (Eject): Press the CD eject button to ejectCD-R(s). To eject the CD-R that is currentlyplaying, press and release this button. A beepsounds and Ejecting Disc displays. Once the discis ejected, Remove Disc displays. The CD-Rcan be removed. If the CD-R is not removed, afterseveral seconds, the CD-R automatically pullsback into the player and begins playing.

For the Six-Disc CD player, press and hold theeject button for two seconds to eject all discs.

a (Tune): Turn this knob to select MP3 files onthe CD-R currently playing.

© SEEK ¨: Press the left SEEK arrow to go tothe start of the current MP3 file, if more thanten seconds have played. Press the right SEEKarrow to go to the next MP3 file. If eitherSEEK arrow is held or pressed multiple times, theplayer continues moving backward or forwardthrough MP3 files on the CD.

S c (Previous Folder): Press the pushbuttonpositioned under the Folder label to go to thefirst track in the previous folder.

c T (Next Folder): Press the pushbuttonpositioned under the Folder label to go to the firsttrack in the next folder.

s REV (Reverse): Press and hold this buttonto reverse playback quickly within an MP3file. Sound is heard at a reduced volume.

Release this button to resume playing the file. Theelapsed time of the file displays.


\ FWD (Fast Forward): Press and hold thisbutton to advance playback quickly within an MP3file. Sound is heard at a reduced volume.

Release this button to resume playing the file. Theelapsed time of the file displays.

RDM (Random): With the random setting, MP3files on the CD-R can be played in random, ratherthan sequential order, on one CD-R or all discsin a six-disc CD player. To use random, do one ofthe following:

1. To play MP3 files from the CD-R in randomorder, press the pushbutton positioned underthe RDM label until Random Current Discdisplays. Press the same pushbutton again toturn off random play.

2. To play songs from all CDs loaded in a six-discCD player in random order, press thepushbutton positioned under the RDM labeluntil Randomize All Discs displays. Press thesame pushbutton again to turn off random play.

h (Music Navigator): Use the music navigatorfeature to play MP3 files on the CD-R in order byartist or album. Press the pushbutton located belowthe music navigator label. The player scans the discto sort the files by artist and album ID3 taginformation. It could take several minutes to scanthe disc depending on the number of MP3 filesrecorded to the CD-R. The radio might beginplaying while it is scanning the disc in thebackground. When the scan is finished, the CD-Rbegins playing again.

Once the disc has scanned, the player defaults toplaying MP3 files in order by artist. The currentartist playing is shown on the second line of thedisplay between the arrows. Once all songs by thatartist have played, the player moves to the nextartist in alphabetical order on the CD-R and beginsplaying MP3 files by that artist. To listen to MP3files by another artist, press the pushbutton locatedbelow either arrow button. The CD goes to the nextor previous artist in alphabetical order. Continuepressing either button until the desired artistdisplays.


To change from playback by artist to playback byalbum, press the pushbutton located below the SortBy label. From the sort screen, push one of thebuttons below the album button. Press thepushbutton below the Back label to return to themain music navigator screen. Now the album namedisplays on the second line between the arrows andsongs from the current album begins to play. Onceall songs from that album have played, the playermoves to the next album in alphabetical order onthe CD-R and begins playing MP3 files from thatalbum.

To exit music navigator mode, press the buttonbelow the Back label to return to normal MP3playback.


CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press this button to playa CD when listening to the radio. The CD iconand a message showing disc and/or track numberdisplays when a CD is in the player. Press thisbutton again and the system automaticallysearches for an auxiliary input device such as aportable audio player. If a portable audio player isnot connected, No Aux Input Device displays.


XM Radio Messages

Radio Display Message Condition Action RequiredXL (Explicit LanguageChannels)

XL on the radio display,after the channel name,indicates content withexplicit language.

These channels, or any others, can be blocked at acustomer’s request, by calling 1-800-852-XMXM (9696).

XM Updating Updating encryption code The encryption code in the receiver is being updated, andno action is required. This process should take no longerthan 30 seconds.

No XM Signal Loss of signal The system is functioning correctly, but the vehicle is in alocation that is blocking the XM™ signal. When you moveinto an open area, the signal should return.

Loading XM Acquiring channel audio(after 4 second delay)

The audio system is acquiring and processing audio andtext data. No action is needed. This message shoulddisappear shortly.

Channel Off Air Channel not in service This channel is not currently in service. Tune to anotherchannel.

Channel Unavail Channel no longeravailable

This previously assigned channel is no longer assigned.Tune to another station. If this station was one of thepresets, choose another station for that preset button.

No Artist Info Artist Name/Feature notavailable

No artist information is available at this time on this channel.The system is working properly.

No Title Info Song/Program Title notavailable

No song title information is available at this time on thischannel. The system is working properly.


Radio Display Message Condition Action RequiredNo CAT Info Category Name not

availableNo category information is available at this time on thischannel. The system is working properly.

No Information No Text/Informationalmessage available

No text or informational messages are available at this timeon this channel. The system is working properly.

CAT Not Found No channel available forthe chosen category

There are no channels available for the selected category.The system is working properly.

XM TheftLocked Theft lock active The XM™ receiver in the vehicle could have previouslybeen in another vehicle. For security purposes, XM™receivers cannot be swapped between vehicles. If thismessage appears after having your vehicle serviced, checkwith your dealer.

XM Radio ID Radio ID label (channel 0) If tuned to channel 0, this message can alternate with theXM™ Radio eight digit radio ID label. This label is neededto activate the service.

Unknown Radio ID not known(should only be ifhardware failure)

If this message is received when tuned to channel 0, therecould be a receiver fault. Consult with your dealer.

Check XM Receivr Hardware failure If this message does not clear within a short period of time,the receiver could have a fault. Consult with your dealer.

XM Not Available XM Not Available If this message does not clear within a short period of time,the receiver could have a fault. Consult with your dealer.


Navigation/Radio SystemYour vehicle could have a navigation radio system.

The navigation system has built-in featuresintended to minimize driver distraction. Technologyalone, no matter how advanced, can neverreplace your own judgment. See the NavigationSystem manual for some tips to help youreduce distractions while driving.

Rear Seat Entertainment SystemIf your vehicle has a navigation radio system, itcould have the Rear Seat Entertainment(RSE) system. For more information on how touse the RSE system, see “Rear SeatEntertainment System” in the Navigation Systemmanual.

Rear Seat Audio (RSA)This feature lets rear seat passengers listen toand control any of the music sources: radio, CDs,DVDs, or other auxiliary sources. However, therear seat passengers can only control themusic sources the front seat passengers are notlistening to (except on some radios wheredual control is allowed). For example, rear seatpassengers can control a CD and listen to itthrough the headphones, while the driver listens tothe radio through the front speakers. The rearseat passengers have control of the volumefor each set of headphones.

You can operate the Rear Seat Audio (RSA)functions even when the main radio is off.

Audio can be heard through wired headphones(not included) plugged into the jacks on the RSA.If your vehicle has this feature, audio can alsobe heard on Channel 2 of the wirelessheadphones.

Depending on the audio system, the rear speakerscan continue to play even when the RSA audiois active through the headphones.


P (Power): Press this button to turn the RSA onor off.

Volume: Turn this knob to increase or todecrease the volume of the wired headphones.The left knob controls the left headphones and theright knob controls the right headphones.

SRCE (Source): Press this button to switchbetween the radio (AM/FM), XM™ (if equipped),CD, and if your vehicle has these features,DVD, front auxiliary, and rear auxiliary.

©¨ (Seek): When listening to FM, AM, orXM™ (if equipped), press the seek up or the seekdown arrow to go to the next or the previousstation or channels and stay there. This function isinactive, with some radios, if the front seatpassengers are listening to the radio.

Press and hold the seek up or seek down arrowuntil the display flashes, to tune to an individualstation. The display stops flashing after the buttonshave not been pushed for more than two seconds.This function is inactive, with some radios, ifthe front seat passengers are listening to the radio.

While listening to a CD, press the seek up arrow tohear the next track on the CD. Press the seek downarrow to go back to the start of the current track (ifmore than ten seconds have played). This functionis inactive, with some radios, if the front seatpassengers are listening to the radio.


When a DVD video menu is being displayed, pressthe seek up arrow or seek down arrow to perform acursor up or down on the menu. Hold the seek uparrow or seek down arrow to perform a cursor rightor left on the menu.

PROG (Program): Press this button to go to thenext preset radio station or channel set on themain radio. This function is inactive, withsome radios, if the front seat passengers arelistening to the radio.

When a CD or DVD audio is playing, press thisbutton to go to the beginning of the CD orDVD audio. This function is inactive, with someradios, if the front seat passengers are listening tothe CD or DVD audio.

When a disc is playing in the CD or DVD changer,press this button to select the next disc, ifmultiple discs are loaded. This function is inactive,with some radios, if the front seat passengersare listening to the disc.

When a DVD video menu is being displayed,press the PROG button to perform the menufunction, enter.

Theft-Deterrent FeatureTHEFTLOCK® is designed to discourage theft ofyour vehicle’s radio. The feature worksautomatically by learning a portion of the VehicleIdentification Number (VIN). If the radio ismoved to a different vehicle, it does not operate. Ifthe radio is removed from your vehicle, theoriginal VIN in the radio can be used to trace theradio back to your vehicle.

With THEFTLOCK® activated, the radio will notoperate if stolen.


Audio Steering Wheel Controls

Some audio controls can be adjusted at thesteering wheel. They include the following:

0 (Mute): Press this button to mute the system.Press this button again, or any other radiobutton, to turn the sound on.

SRCE (Source): Press this button to switchbetween AM, FM, XM™ (if equipped), CD, andauxiliary jack.

g (Voice Recognition): If your vehicle has thenavigation system, press and hold this buttonfor longer than one second to initiate voicerecognition. See “Voice Recognition” in theNavigation System manual for more information.

If your vehicle has OnStar®, press and holdthis button for longer than one second to interactwith the OnStar® system. If your vehicle alsohas the navigation system, press and hold thisbutton for longer than one second to initiate voicerecognition and say “OnStar” to enter OnStar®

mode. See the OnStar® System on page 139 inthis manual for more information.

1-6 (Preset Stations): Press this button to playstations that are programmed on the radiopreset pushbuttons. The radio seeks presetstations only with a strong signal that are in theselected band.

While a CD is playing, press this button to go tothe next track.


+u − (Volume): Press this button to increaseor to decrease the volume.

+ t u − (Seek): Press either arrow to go to thenext or the previous radio station and staythere. The radio seeks stations only with a strongsignal that are in the selected band.

While a CD is playing in a single CD player, pressthe minus button to go to the previous track orthe plus button to go to the next track on the CD.

While a CD is playing in a six-disc CD player,loaded with more than one CD, press the minusbutton to go to the previous disc or the plus buttonto go to the next disc.

If the radio has the navigation system, some ofthe audio steering wheel controls work whena DVD is playing in the navigation radio. See theNavigation System manual for more information.

Radio ReceptionFrequency interference and static can occurduring normal radio reception if items such ascellphone chargers, vehicle convenienceaccessories, and external electronic devices areplugged into the accessory power outlet. If there isinterference or static, unplug the item from theaccessory power outlet.

AMThe range for most AM stations is greater than forFM, especially at night. The longer range cancause station frequencies to interfere with eachother. For better radio reception, most AMradio stations boost the power levels during theday, and then reduces these levels duringthe night. Static can also occur when things likestorms and power lines interfere with radioreception. When this happens, try reducing thetreble on the radio.

FM StereoFM stereo gives the best sound, but FM signalsreach only about 10 to 40 miles (16 to 65 km). Tallbuildings or hills can interfere with FM signals,causing the sound to fade in and out.


XM™ Satellite Radio ServiceXM™ Satellite Radio Service gives digital radioreception from coast-to-coast in the 48 contiguousUnited States, and in Canada. Just as with FM,tall buildings or hills can interfere with satelliteradio signals, causing the sound to fade in and out.In addition, traveling or standing under heavyfoliage, bridges, garages, or tunnels may causethe loss of XM™ signal for a period of time.The radio might display NO XM SIGNAL toindicate interference.

Cellular Phone UsageCellular phone usage could cause interferencewith your vehicle’s radio. This interferencecould occur when making or receiving phone calls,charging the phone’s battery, or simply havingthe phone on. This interference is an increasedlevel of static while listening to the radio. If static isreceived while listening to the radio, unplug thecellular phone and turn it off.

Care of Your CDsHandle CDs carefully. Store them in their originalcases or other protective cases and away fromdirect sunlight and dust. The CD player scans thebottom surface of the disc. If the surface of a CD isdamaged, such as cracked, broken, or scratched,the CD will not play properly or not at all. If thesurface of a CD is soiled, take a soft, lint free clothor dampen a clean, soft cloth in a mild, neutraldetergent solution mixed with water, and clean it.Make sure the wiping process starts from the centerto the edge.

Do not touch the bottom side of a CD whilehandling it; this could damage the surface. Pick upCDs by grasping the outer edges or the edge ofthe hole and the outer edge.

Care of the CD PlayerDo not use CD lens cleaners for CD playersbecause the lens of the CD optics can becomecontaminated by lubricants.


Diversity Antenna SystemThe AM-FM antenna is integrated within the rearquarter windows. Make sure the inside surfaceof the rear quarter windows are not scratched andthe grid lines on the glass are not damaged. Ifthe inside surface is damaged, it could interferewith radio reception.

Notice: Do not apply aftermarket glass tintingwith metallic film. The metallic film in sometinting materials will interfere with or distort theincoming radio reception. Any damagecaused to your antenna due to metallic tintingmaterials will not be covered by yourwarranty.

Notice: Do not try to clear frost or othermaterial from the inside of the rear quarterwindow with a razor blade or anything else thatis sharp. This may affect your radio’s abilityto pick up stations clearly. The repairs wouldn’tbe covered by your warranty.

If static is heard on the radio, when the rearwindow defogger is turned on, it could mean thata defogger grid line has been damaged. If thisis true, the grid line must be repaired.

If adding an aftermarket cellular telephone to yourvehicle, and the antenna needs to be attachedto the glass, make sure that the grid lines for theAM-FM antennas are not damaged. Make surethe cellular telephone antenna does not touch agrid line.

XM™ Satellite Radio AntennaSystemThe XM™ Satellite Radio antenna is located onthe roof of your vehicle. Keep this antenna clear ofsnow and ice build up for clear radio reception.

A vehicle with a sunroof might not get thebest performance from the XM™ system if thesunroof is open.

Loading items onto the roof of your vehicle caninterfere with the performance of the XM™ system.Make sure the XM™ Satellite Radio antenna isnot obstructed.


Your Driving, the Road, and Your Vehicle ... 274Defensive Driving ...................................... 274Drunken Driving ........................................ 275Control of a Vehicle .................................. 278Braking ...................................................... 278Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) .................. 279Braking in Emergencies ............................. 281Traction Control System (TCS) .................. 281Magnetic Ride Control ............................... 283Limited-Slip Rear Axle ............................... 283StabiliTrak® System ................................... 283Panic Brake Assist .................................... 284All-Wheel Drive (AWD) System .................. 284Steering .................................................... 285Off-Road Recovery .................................... 287Passing ..................................................... 287Loss of Control .......................................... 289Off-Road Driving ........................................ 291

Driving at Night ......................................... 306Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads ............ 308City Driving ............................................... 311Freeway Driving ........................................ 312Before Leaving on a Long Trip .................. 313Highway Hypnosis ..................................... 314Hill and Mountain Roads ........................... 315Winter Driving ........................................... 317If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand, Mud,

Ice, or Snow .......................................... 321Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out ........... 322Loading Your Vehicle ................................ 322

Towing ........................................................ 328Towing Your Vehicle ................................. 328Recreational Vehicle Towing ...................... 328Level Control ............................................. 330Towing a Trailer ........................................ 331

Section 4 Driving Your Vehicle


Your Driving, the Road, andYour Vehicle

Defensive DrivingThe best advice anyone can give about driving is:Drive defensively.

Please start with a very important safety device inyour vehicle: Buckle up. See Safety Belts: TheyAre for Everyone on page 22.

{CAUTION:

Defensive driving really means “Be readyfor anything.” On city streets, rural roads,or expressways, it means “Always expectthe unexpected.” Assume that pedestriansor other drivers are going to be carelessand make mistakes. Anticipate what theymight do and be ready. Rear-endcollisions are about the most preventableof accidents. Yet they are common. Allowenough following distance. Defensivedriving requires that a driver concentrateon the driving task. Anything thatdistracts from the driving task makesproper defensive driving more difficultand can even cause a collision, withresulting injury. Ask a passenger to helpdo these things, or pull off the road in asafe place to do them. These simpledefensive driving techniques could saveyour life.


Drunken DrivingDeath and injury associated with drinking anddriving is a national tragedy. It is the number onecontributor to the highway death toll, claimingthousands of victims every year.

Alcohol affects four things that anyone needs todrive a vehicle:

• Judgment

• Muscular Coordination

• Vision

• Attentiveness

Police records show that almost half of all motorvehicle-related deaths involve alcohol. In mostcases, these deaths are the result of someone whowas drinking and driving. In recent years, morethan 16,000 annual motor vehicle-related deathshave been associated with the use of alcohol, withmore than 300,000 people injured.

Many adults — by some estimates, nearly half theadult population — choose never to drink alcohol,so they never drive after drinking. For personsunder 21, it is against the law in every U.S. state todrink alcohol. There are good medical,psychological, and developmental reasons forthese laws.

The obvious way to eliminate the leading highwaysafety problem is for people never to drinkalcohol and then drive. But what if people do?How much is “too much” if someone plansto drive? It is a lot less than many might think.Although it depends on each person and situation,here is some general information on the problem.

The Blood Alcohol Concentration (BAC) ofsomeone who is drinking depends uponfour things:

• The amount of alcohol consumed

• The drinker’s body weight

• The amount of food that is consumed beforeand during drinking

• The length of time it has taken the drinker toconsume the alcohol


According to the American Medical Association, a180 lb (82 kg) person who drinks three 12 ounce(355 ml) bottles of beer in an hour will end up witha BAC of about 0.06 percent. The person wouldreach the same BAC by drinking three 4 ounce(120 ml) glasses of wine or three mixed drinks ifeach had 1-1/2 ounces (45 ml) of liquors likewhiskey, gin, or vodka.

It is the amount of alcohol that counts. Forexample, if the same person drank three doublemartinis (3 ounces or 90 ml of liquor each)within an hour, the person’s BAC would be closeto 0.12 percent. A person who consumes foodjust before or during drinking will have a somewhatlower BAC level.

There is a gender difference, too. Womengenerally have a lower relative percentage of bodywater than men. Since alcohol is carried in bodywater, this means that a woman generally willreach a higher BAC level than a man of her samebody weight will when each has the samenumber of drinks.

The law in most U.S. states, and throughoutCanada, sets the legal limit at 0.08 percent. Insome other countries, the limit is even lower. Forexample, it is 0.05 percent in both France andGermany. The BAC limit for all commercial driversin the United States is 0.04 percent.

The BAC will be over 0.10 percent after three tosix drinks (in one hour). Of course, as we haveseen, it depends on how much alcohol is in thedrinks, and how quickly the person drinks them.


But the ability to drive is affected well below aBAC of 0.10 percent. Research shows thatthe driving skills of many people are impaired at aBAC approaching 0.05 percent, and that theeffects are worse at night. All drivers are impairedat BAC levels above 0.05 percent. Statisticsshow that the chance of being in a collisionincreases sharply for drivers who have a BAC of0.05 percent or above. A driver with a BAC level of0.06 percent has doubled his or her chance ofhaving a collision. At a BAC level of 0.10 percent,the chance of this driver having a collision is12 times greater; at a level of 0.15 percent, thechance is 25 times greater!

The body takes about an hour to rid itself of thealcohol in one drink. No amount of coffee ornumber of cold showers will speed that up. “I willbe careful” is not the right answer. What ifthere is an emergency, a need to take suddenaction, as when a child darts into the street?A person with even a moderate BAC might not beable to react quickly enough to avoid thecollision.

There is something else about drinking and drivingthat many people do not know. Medical researchshows that alcohol in a person’s system can makecrash injuries worse, especially injuries to thebrain, spinal cord, or heart. This means that whenanyone who has been drinking — driver orpassenger — is in a crash, that person’s chanceof being killed or permanently disabled ishigher than if the person had not been drinking.

{CAUTION:

Drinking and then driving is verydangerous. Your reflexes, perceptions,attentiveness, and judgment can beaffected by even a small amount ofalcohol. You can have a serious — oreven fatal — collision if you drive afterdrinking. Please do not drink and drive orride with a driver who has been drinking.Ride home in a cab; or if you are with agroup, designate a driver who will notdrink.


Control of a VehicleYou have three systems that make your vehicle gowhere you want it to go. They are the brakes, thesteering, and the accelerator. All three systemshave to do their work at the places where the tiresmeet the road.

Sometimes, as when you are driving on snow orice, it is easy to ask more of those control systemsthan the tires and road can provide. That meansyou can lose control of your vehicle. SeeStabiliTrak® System on page 283.

Adding non-GM accessories can affect yourvehicle’s performance. See Accessories andModifications on page 347.

BrakingSee Brake System Warning Light on page 204.

Braking action involves perception time andreaction time.

First, you have to decide to push on the brakepedal. That is perception time. Then you have tobring up your foot and do it. That is reaction time.

Average reaction time is about three-fourths of asecond. But that is only an average. It mightbe less with one driver and as long as two orthree seconds or more with another. Age, physicalcondition, alertness, coordination, and eyesightall play a part. So do alcohol, drugs, andfrustration. But even in three-fourths of a second,a vehicle moving at 60 mph (100 km/h) travels66 feet (20 m). That could be a lot of distance in anemergency, so keeping enough space betweenyour vehicle and others is important.

And, of course, actual stopping distances varygreatly with the surface of the road, whether it ispavement or gravel; the condition of the road,whether it is wet, dry, or icy; tire tread; thecondition of the brakes; the weight of the vehicle;and the amount of brake force applied.


Avoid needless heavy braking. Some people drivein spurts — heavy acceleration followed byheavy braking — rather than keeping pace withtraffic. This is a mistake. The brakes may not havetime to cool between hard stops. The brakeswill wear out much faster if you do a lot of heavybraking. If you keep pace with the traffic andallow realistic following distances, you willeliminate a lot of unnecessary braking. That meansbetter braking and longer brake life.

If your vehicle’s engine ever stops while you aredriving, brake normally but do not pump thebrakes. If you do, the pedal may get harder topush down. If the engine stops, you will still havesome power brake assist. But you will use itwhen you brake. Once the power assist is usedup, it may take longer to stop and the brake pedalwill be harder to push.


Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)Your vehicle has the Anti-Lock Brake System(ABS), an advanced electronic braking system thatwill help prevent a braking skid.

When you start your engine and begin to driveaway, ABS will check itself. You may hear amomentary motor or clicking noise while this testis going on. This is normal.

If there is a problemwith the ABS, thiswarning light will stayon. See Anti-Lock BrakeSystem Warning Lighton page 205.


Let us say the road is wet and you are drivingsafely. Suddenly, an animal jumps out in front ofyou. You slam on the brakes and continue braking.Here is what happens with ABS:

A computer senses that wheels are slowing down.If one of the wheels is about to stop rolling, thecomputer will separately work the brakes at eachfront wheel and at both rear wheels.

ABS can change the brake pressure faster thanany driver could. The computer is programmed tomake the most of available tire and roadconditions. This can help you steer around theobstacle while braking hard.

As you brake, your computer keeps receivingupdates on wheel speed and controls brakingpressure accordingly.


Remember: ABS does not change the time youneed to get your foot up to the brake pedalor always decrease stopping distance. If you gettoo close to the vehicle in front of you, you will nothave time to apply your brakes if that vehiclesuddenly slows or stops. Always leave enoughroom up ahead to stop, even though youhave ABS.

Using ABSDo not pump the brakes. Just hold the brakepedal down firmly and let anti-lock work for you.You may feel the brakes vibrate, or you may noticesome noise, but this is normal.

Braking in EmergenciesWith ABS, you can steer and brake at the sametime. In many emergencies, steering can help youmore than even the very best braking.

Traction Control System (TCS)Your vehicle has a traction control system thatlimits wheel spin. This is especially useful inslippery road conditions. On a rear-wheel-drivevehicle, the system operates if it senses thatone or both of the rear wheels are spinning orbeginning to lose traction. On an All-Wheel-Drive(AWD) vehicle, the system will operate if itsenses that any of the wheels are spinning orbeginning to lose traction. When this happens, thesystem brakes the spinning wheel(s) and/orreduces engine power to limit wheel spin.

You may feel or hear the system working, but thisis normal.

The TCS warning light will also flash to indicatethat the traction control system is active.

This warning light willcome on to let youknow if there isa problem with yourtraction control system.


See Traction Control System (TCS) Warning Lighton page 206. When this warning light is on, thesystem will not limit wheel spin. Adjust your drivingaccordingly.

The TCS automatically comes on whenever youstart your vehicle. To limit wheel spin, especially inslippery road conditions, you should alwaysleave the system on. But you can turn the tractioncontrol system off if you ever need to.

Notice: Do not repeatedly brake or accelerateheavily when the TCS is off. You coulddamage your vehicle’s driveline.

When the TCS is switched off on AWD vehicles,you may still feel the system working. This isnormal and necessary with the AWD hardware onyour vehicle.

You should turn the system off if your vehicle evergets stuck in sand, mud or snow and rockingthe vehicle is required. See Rocking Your Vehicleto Get It Out on page 322 and If Your Vehicleis Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice, or Snow on page 321for more information. See also Winter Drivingon page 317 for information on using TCS whendriving in snowy or icy conditions.

To turn the system off,press the TC (tractioncontrol) buttonlocated on the consoleunder the climatecontrols.

If you press the TC (traction control) button once,the traction control system will turn off and thetraction control system warning light will come on.Press the TC button again to turn the systemback on. If you press and hold the TC button forfive seconds, the StabiliTrak® system and thetraction control system will turn off. Press the TC(traction control) button again to turn StabiliTrak®

back on. For more information, see StabiliTrak®

System on page 283.

Adding non-GM accessories can affect yourvehicle’s performance. See Accessories andModifications on page 347 for more information.


Magnetic Ride ControlYour vehicle may have Magnetic Ride Controlthat automatically adjusts the ride of your vehicle.Automatic ride control is achieved through acomputer used to control and monitor thesuspension system. The controller receives inputfrom various sensors to determine the propersystem response. If the controller detects aproblem within the system, the DIC will display aSERVICE SUSPENSION SYS message. SeeDIC Warnings and Messages on page 220for more information. See your dealer for service.

Limited-Slip Rear AxleYour vehicle may have this feature. A limited-sliprear axle can give you additional traction onsnow, mud, ice, sand or gravel. It works like astandard axle most of the time, but when one ofthe rear wheels has no traction and the other does,this feature will allow the wheel with traction tomove the vehicle.

StabiliTrak® SystemYour vehicle is equipped with a vehicle stabilityenhancement system called StabiliTrak®. Itis an advanced computer controlled system thatassists you with directional control of the vehicle indifficult driving conditions.

StabiliTrak® activates when the computer sensesa discrepancy between your intended pathand the direction the vehicle is actually traveling.StabiliTrak® selectively applies braking pressureat any one of the vehicle’s brakes to help steer thevehicle in the direction which you are steering.

When the stability control system activates,the traction control system and StabiliTrak® lightwill flash on the instrument panel cluster. This alsooccurs when traction control is activated. Youmay also hear a noise or feel vibration in the brakepedal. This is normal. Continue to steer thevehicle in the direction you want it to go.


If there is a problem detected with StabiliTrak®, aSERVICE STABILITRAK message will bedisplayed on the Driver Information Center. SeeDIC Warnings and Messages on page 220. Whenthis message is displayed, the system is notoperational. Driving should be adjustedaccordingly.

StabiliTrak® comes on automatically whenever youstart your vehicle. To help assist you withdirectional control of the vehicle, you shouldalways leave the system on. You can turnStabiliTrak® off if you ever need to through the TC(traction control) on/off button. A STABILITRAKOFF message will appear in the DIC when it hasbeen turned off. See Traction Control System(TCS) on page 281.

If your vehicle is in cruise control when theStabiliTrak® activates, the cruise control willautomatically disengage. When road conditionsallow you to safely use it again, you may reengagethe cruise control. See Cruise Control onpage 174 for more information.

Panic Brake AssistYour vehicle has a panic brake assist system thatmonitors the intention of the driver while braking.If the system senses that the driver has appliedhard/fast pressure to the brake pedal, the systemwill generate additional pressure, making iteasier for the driver to maintain brake application.When this happens the brake pedal will feeleasier to push. Just hold the brake pedal downfirmly and let the system work for you. Youmay feel the brakes vibrate, or you may noticesome noise but this is normal. The brakeswill return to normal operation after the brakepedal has been released.

All-Wheel Drive (AWD) SystemIf your vehicle is equipped with this feature, enginepower is sent to all four wheels all the time. Thisis like four-wheel drive, but it is fully automatic.


Steering

Power SteeringIf you lose power steering assist because theengine stops or the system is not functioning, youcan steer but it will take much more effort.

Steering TipsIt is important to take curves at a reasonablespeed.

A lot of the “driver lost control” accidentsmentioned on the news happen on curves.Here is why:

Experienced driver or beginner, each of us issubject to the same laws of physics when drivingon curves. The traction of the tires against theroad surface makes it possible for the vehicle tochange its path when you turn the front wheels. Ifthere is no traction, inertia will keep the vehiclegoing in the same direction. If you have evertried to steer a vehicle on wet ice, you willunderstand this.

The traction you can get in a curve depends onthe condition of the tires and the road surface, theangle at which the curve is banked, and yourspeed. While you are in a curve, speed is theone factor you can control.

Suppose you are steering through a sharp curve.Then you suddenly accelerate. Both controlsystems — steering and acceleration — have todo their work where the tires meet the road.Adding the sudden acceleration can demand toomuch of those places. You can lose control.See StabiliTrak® System on page 283.

What should you do if this ever happens? Ease upon the accelerator pedal, steer the vehicle theway you want it to go, and slow down.

Speed limit signs near curves warn that youshould adjust your speed. Of course, the postedspeeds are based on good weather and roadconditions. Under less favorable conditions you willwant to go slower.

If you need to reduce your speed as you approacha curve, do it before you enter the curve, whilethe front wheels are straight ahead.


Try to adjust your speed so you can “drive”through the curve. Maintain a reasonable, steadyspeed. Wait to accelerate until you are out ofthe curve, and then accelerate gently intothe straightaway.


Steering in EmergenciesThere are times when steering can be moreeffective than braking. For example, you comeover a hill and find a truck stopped in your lane, ora car suddenly pulls out from nowhere, or achild darts out from between parked cars andstops right in front of you. You can avoid theseproblems by braking — if you can stop in time. Butsometimes you cannot; there is not room. Thatis the time for evasive action — steering aroundthe problem.

Your vehicle can perform very well in emergencieslike these. First, apply the brakes. See Brakingon page 278. It is better to remove as much speedas you can from a possible collision. Then steeraround the problem, to the left or right dependingon the space available.

An emergency like this requires close attentionand a quick decision. If you are holding thesteering wheel at the recommended 9 and3 o’clock positions, you can turn it a full180 degrees very quickly without removing eitherhand. But you have to act fast, steer quickly,and just as quickly straighten the wheel once youhave avoided the object.

The fact that such emergency situations arealways possible is a good reason to practicedefensive driving at all times and wear safety beltsproperly.


Off-Road RecoveryYou may find that your right wheels have droppedoff the edge of a road onto the shoulder whileyou are driving.

If the level of the shoulder is only slightly belowthe pavement, recovery should be fairly easy.Ease off the accelerator and then, if thereis nothing in the way, steer so that your vehiclestraddles the edge of the pavement.

You can turn the steering wheel up to one-quarterturn until the right front tire contacts the pavementedge. Then turn your steering wheel to gostraight down the roadway.

PassingThe driver of a vehicle about to pass another on atwo-lane highway waits for just the right moment,accelerates, moves around the vehicle ahead, thengoes back into the right lane again. A simplemaneuver?

Not necessarily! Passing another vehicle on atwo-lane highway is a potentially dangerous move,since the passing vehicle occupies the samelane as oncoming traffic for several seconds. Amiscalculation, an error in judgment, or abrief surrender to frustration or anger can suddenlyput the passing driver face to face with theworst of all traffic accidents — the head-oncollision.


So here are some tips for passing:

• Drive ahead. Look down the road, to thesides, and to crossroads for situationsthat might affect your passing patterns. If youhave any doubt whatsoever about makinga successful pass, wait for a better time.

• Watch for traffic signs, pavement markings,and lines. If you can see a sign up aheadthat might indicate a turn or an intersection,delay your pass. A broken center lineusually indicates it is all right to pass, providingthe road ahead is clear. Never cross a solidline on your side of the lane or a double solidline, even if the road seems empty ofapproaching traffic.

• Do not get too close to the vehicle you wantto pass while you are awaiting an opportunity.For one thing, following too closely reducesyour area of vision, especially if you arefollowing a larger vehicle. Also, you will nothave adequate space if the vehicle aheadsuddenly slows or stops. Keep back areasonable distance.

• When it looks like a chance to pass is comingup, start to accelerate but stay in the rightlane and do not get too close. Time your moveso you will be increasing speed as the timecomes to move into the other lane. If the wayis clear to pass, you will have a runningstart that more than makes up for the distanceyou would lose by dropping back. And ifsomething happens to cause you to cancelyour pass, you need only slow down and dropback again and wait for another opportunity.

• If other vehicles are lined up to pass a slowvehicle, wait your turn. But take care thatsomeone is not trying to pass you as you pullout to pass the slow vehicle. Remember toglance over your shoulder and check theblind spot.


• Check your vehicle’s mirrors, glance over yourshoulder, and start your left lane changesignal before moving out of the right lane topass. When you are far enough ahead ofthe passed vehicle to see its front inyour vehicle’s inside mirror, activate the rightlane change signal and move back intothe right lane. Remember that, if your vehicle’spassenger side outside mirror is convex, thevehicle you just passed may seem to befarther away from you than it really is.

• Try not to pass more than one vehicle at atime on two-lane roads. Reconsider beforepassing the next vehicle.

• Do not overtake a slowly moving vehicle toorapidly. Even though the brake lamps arenot flashing, it may be slowing down or startingto turn.

• If you are being passed, make it easy for thefollowing driver to get ahead of you. Perhapsyou can ease a little to the right.

Loss of ControlLet us review what driving experts say about whathappens when the three control systems — brakes,steering, and acceleration — do not have enoughfriction where the tires meet the road to do what thedriver has asked.

In any emergency, do not give up. Keep trying tosteer and constantly seek an escape route orarea of less danger.

SkiddingIn a skid, a driver can lose control of the vehicle.Defensive drivers avoid most skids by takingreasonable care suited to existing conditions, andby not overdriving those conditions. But skidsare always possible.

The three types of skids correspond to yourvehicle’s three control systems. In the braking skid,your wheels are not rolling. In the steering orcornering skid, too much speed or steering in acurve causes tires to slip and lose cornering force.And in the acceleration skid, too much throttlecauses the driving wheels to spin.

A cornering skid is best handled by easing yourfoot off the accelerator pedal.


Remember: Any traction control system helpsavoid only the acceleration skid. If your tractioncontrol system is off, then an accelerationskid is also best handled by easing your foot offthe accelerator pedal.

If your vehicle starts to slide, ease your foot offthe accelerator pedal and quickly steer theway you want the vehicle to go. If you startsteering quickly enough, your vehicle maystraighten out. Always be ready for a second skidif it occurs.

Of course, traction is reduced when water, snow,ice, gravel, or other material is on the road.For safety, you will want to slow down and adjustyour driving to these conditions. It is importantto slow down on slippery surfaces becausestopping distance will be longer and vehicle controlmore limited.

While driving on a surface with reduced traction, tryyour best to avoid sudden steering, acceleration, orbraking, including reducing vehicle speed byshifting to a lower gear. Any sudden changes couldcause the tires to slide. You may not realize thesurface is slippery until your vehicle is skidding.Learn to recognize warning clues — such asenough water, ice, or packed snow on the road tomake a mirrored surface — and slow down whenyou have any doubt.

Remember: Any Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)helps avoid only the braking skid.


Off-Road DrivingThis off-road guide is for vehicles that haveall-wheel drive. If your vehicle does not haveall-wheel drive, you should not drive off-road unlessyou are on a level, solid surface.

Many of the same design features that help makeyour vehicle responsive on paved roads duringpoor weather conditions — features like all-wheeldrive — help make it much better suited foroff-road use. Its higher ground clearance alsohelps your vehicle step over some off-roadobstacles. But your vehicle does not have featureslike special underbody shielding and a transfercase low gear range, things that are usuallythought necessary for extended or severe off-roadservice.

Also, see Braking on page 278.

The airbag system is designed to work properlyunder a wide range of conditions, including off-roadusage. Observe safe driving speeds, especiallyon rough terrain. As always, wear your safety belt.

Off-road driving can be great fun. But it doeshave some definite hazards. The greatest of theseis the terrain itself.

“Off-roading” means you have left the NorthAmerican road system behind. Traffic lanes arenot marked. Curves are not banked. There are noroad signs. Surfaces can be slippery, rough,uphill, or downhill. In short, you have gone rightback to nature.

Off-road driving involves some new skills. And thatis why it is very important that you read thisguide. You will find many driving tips andsuggestions. These will help make your off-roaddriving safer and more enjoyable.

Before You Go Off-RoadingThere are some things to do before you go out.For example, be sure to have all necessarymaintenance and service work done. Check tomake sure all underbody shields, if the vehicle hasthem, are properly attached. Is there enoughfuel? Is the spare tire fully inflated? Are the fluidlevels up where they should be? What arethe local laws that apply to off-roading where youwill be driving? If you do not know, you shouldcheck with law enforcement people in thearea. Will you be on someone’s private land? Ifso, be sure to get the necessary permission.


Loading Your Vehicle for Off-RoadDriving

{CAUTION:

• Cargo on the load floor piled higherthan the seatbacks can be thrownforward during a sudden stop. You oryour passengers could be injured.Keep cargo below the top of theseatbacks.

• Unsecured cargo on the load floor canbe tossed about when driving overrough terrain. You or your passengerscan be struck by flying objects.Secure the cargo properly.

• Heavy loads on the roof raise thevehicle’s center of gravity, making itmore likely to roll over. You can beseriously or fatally injured if thevehicle rolls over. Put heavy loadsinside the cargo area, not on the roof.Keep cargo in the cargo area as farforward and low as possible.

There are some important things to rememberabout how to load your vehicle.

• The heaviest things should be on the loadfloor and forward of your rear axle. Putheavier items as far forward as you can.

• Be sure the load is secured properly, sodriving on the off-road terrain does nottoss things around.

You will find other important information in thismanual. See Loading Your Vehicle on page 322,Luggage Carrier on page 154 and Tires onpage 398.


Environmental ConcernsOff-road driving can provide wholesome andsatisfying recreation. However, it also raisesenvironmental concerns. We recognize theseconcerns and urge every off-roader to follow thesebasic rules for protecting the environment:

• Always use established trails, roads, and areasthat have been specially set aside for publicoff-road recreational driving; obey allposted regulations.

• Avoid any driving practice that could damagethe environment — shrubs, flowers, trees,grasses — or disturb wildlife. This includeswheel-spinning, breaking down trees, orunnecessary driving through streams or oversoft ground.

• Always carry a litter bag — make sure allrefuse is removed from any campsitebefore leaving.

• Take extreme care with open fires wherepermitted, camp stoves, and lanterns.

• Never park your vehicle over dry grass orother combustible materials that couldcatch fire from the heat of the vehicle’sexhaust system.

Traveling to Remote AreasIt makes sense to plan your trip, especially whengoing to a remote area. Know the terrain and planyour route. You are much less likely to get badsurprises. Get accurate maps of trails and terrain.Try to learn of any blocked or closed roads.

It is also a good idea to travel with at least oneother vehicle. If something happens to oneof them, the other can help quickly.

Getting Familiar with Off-Road DrivingIt is a good idea to practice in an area that is safeand close to home before you go into thewilderness. Off-road driving does require some newand different driving skills. Here is what we mean.

Tune your senses to different kinds of signals.Your eyes, for example, need to constantly sweepthe terrain for unexpected obstacles. Your earsneed to listen for unusual tire or engine sounds.With your arms, hands, feet, and body, youwill need to respond to vibrations and vehiclebounce.


Controlling your vehicle is the key to successfuloff-road driving. One of the best ways to controlyour vehicle is to control your speed. Here aresome things to keep in mind. At higher speeds:

• You approach things faster and you have lesstime to scan the terrain for obstacles.

• You have less time to react.

• You have more vehicle bounce when you driveover obstacles.

• You will need more distance for braking,especially since you are on an unpavedsurface.

{CAUTION:

When you are driving off-road, bouncingand quick changes in direction can easilythrow you out of position. This couldcause you to lose control and crash. So,whether you are driving on or off the road,you and your passengers should wearsafety belts.

Scanning the TerrainOff-road driving can take you over many differentkinds of terrain. You need to be familiar withthe terrain and its many different features. Hereare some things to consider.

Surface Conditions: Off-roading can take youover hard-packed dirt, gravel, rocks, grass, sand,mud, snow, or ice. Each of these surfacesaffects the steering, acceleration, and braking ofyour vehicle in different ways. Depending upon thekind of surface you are on, you may experienceslipping, sliding, wheel spinning, delayedacceleration, poor traction, and longer brakingdistances.


Surface Obstacles: Unseen or hidden obstaclescan be hazardous. A rock, log, hole, rut, orbump can startle you if you are not prepared forthem. Often these obstacles are hidden bygrass, bushes, snow, or even the rise and fall ofthe terrain itself. Here are some things to consider:

• Is the path ahead clear?

• Will the surface texture change abruptly upahead?

• Does the travel take you uphill or downhill?There is more discussion of these subjectslater.

• Will you have to stop suddenly or changedirection quickly?

When you drive over obstacles or rough terrain,keep a firm grip on the steering wheel. Ruts,troughs, or other surface features can jerkthe wheel out of your hands if you are notprepared.

When you drive over bumps, rocks, or otherobstacles, your wheels can leave the ground. Ifthis happens, even with one or two wheels,you cannot control the vehicle as well or at all.

Because you will be on an unpaved surface, it isespecially important to avoid sudden acceleration,sudden turns, or sudden braking.

In a way, off-road driving requires a different kindof alertness from driving on paved roads andhighways. There are no road signs, posted speedlimits, or signal lights. You have to use yourown good judgment about what is safe and whatis not.

Drinking and driving can be very dangerous onany road. And this is certainly true for off-roaddriving. At the very time you need special alertnessand driving skills, your reflexes, perceptions,and judgment can be affected by even a smallamount of alcohol. You could have a serious — oreven fatal — accident if you drink and drive orride with a driver who has been drinking.See Drunken Driving on page 275.


Driving on Off-Road HillsOff-road driving often takes you up, down, oracross a hill. Driving safely on hills requires goodjudgment and understanding of what yourvehicle can and cannot do. There are some hillsthat simply cannot be driven, no matter howwell built the vehicle.

{CAUTION:

Many hills are simply too steep for anyvehicle. If you drive up them, you willstall. If you drive down them, you cannotcontrol your speed. If you drive acrossthem, you will roll over. You could beseriously injured or killed. If you have anydoubt about the steepness, do not drivethe hill.

Approaching a HillWhen you approach a hill, you need to decide if itis one of those hills that is just too steep toclimb, descend, or cross. Steepness can be hardto judge. On a very small hill, for example,there may be a smooth, constant incline with onlya small change in elevation where you caneasily see all the way to the top. On a large hill,the incline may get steeper as you near thetop, but you may not see this because the crest ofthe hill is hidden by bushes, grass, or shrubs.

Here are some other things to consider asyou approach a hill.

• Is there a constant incline, or does the hill getsharply steeper in places?

• Is there good traction on the hillside, or willthe surface cause tire slipping?

• Is there a straight path up or down the hill soyou will not have to make turning maneuvers?

• Are there obstructions on the hill that canblock your path, such as boulders, trees, logs,or ruts?


• What is beyond the hill? Is there a cliff, anembankment, a drop-off, a fence? Get out andwalk the hill if you do not know. It is the smartway to find out.

• Is the hill simply too rough? Steep hills oftenhave ruts, gullies, troughs, and exposed rocksbecause they are more susceptible to theeffects of erosion.

Driving UphillOnce you decide you can safely drive up the hill,you need to take some special steps.

• Use a low gear and get a firm grip on thesteering wheel.

• Get a smooth start up the hill and try tomaintain your speed. Do not use more powerthan you need, because you do not wantyour wheels to start spinning or sliding.

• Try to drive straight up the hill if at all possible.If the path twists and turns, you might want tofind another route.

{CAUTION:

Turning or driving across steep hills canbe dangerous. You could lose traction,slide sideways, and possibly roll over.You could be seriously injured or killed.When driving up hills, always try to gostraight up.

• Ease up on your speed as you approach thetop of the hill.

• Attach a flag to the vehicle to make you morevisible to approaching traffic on trails or hills.


• Sound the horn as you approach the top ofthe hill to let opposing traffic know you arethere.

• Use your headlamps, even during the day.They make you more visible to oncomingtraffic.

{CAUTION:

Driving to the top (crest) of a hill at fullspeed can cause an accident. There couldbe a drop-off, embankment, cliff, or evenanother vehicle. You could be seriouslyinjured or killed. As you near the top of ahill, slow down and stay alert.

Q: What should I do if my vehicle stalls, or isabout to stall, and I cannot make it upthe hill?

A: If this happens, there are some things youshould do, and there are some things youmust not do. First, here is what you should do:

• Push the brake pedal to stop the vehicleand keep it from rolling backwards. Also, applythe parking brake.

• If your engine is still running, shift thetransmission to REVERSE (R), release theparking brake, and slowly back down the hill inREVERSE (R).

• If your engine has stopped running, you willneed to restart it. With the brake pedalpressed and the parking brake still applied,shift the transmission to PARK (P) and restartthe engine. Then shift to REVERSE (R),release the parking brake, and slowly backdown the hill as straight as possible inREVERSE (R).


• As you are backing down the hill, put your lefthand on the steering wheel at the 12 o’clockposition. This way you will be able to tell if yourwheels are straight and maneuver as youback down. It is best that you back down thehill with your wheels straight rather than inthe left or right direction. Turning the wheel toofar to the left or right will increase thepossibility of a rollover.

Here are some things you must not do if you stall,or are about to stall, when going up a hill.

• Never attempt to prevent a stall by shiftinginto NEUTRAL (N) to rev-up the engineand regain forward momentum. This will notwork. Your vehicle will roll backwardsvery quickly and you could go out of control.Instead, apply the regular brake to stopthe vehicle. Then apply the parking brake.Shift to REVERSE (R), release the parkingbrake, and slowly back straight down.

• Never attempt to turn around if you are aboutto stall when going up a hill. If the hill is steepenough to stall your vehicle, it is steepenough to cause you to roll over if you turnaround. If you cannot make it up the hill, youmust back straight down the hill.

Q: Suppose, after stalling, I try to back downthe hill and decide I just cannot do it. Whatshould I do?

A: Set the parking brake, put the transmission inPARK (P), and turn off the engine. Leave thevehicle and go get some help. Exit on theuphill side and stay clear of the path thevehicle would take if it rolled downhill.


Driving DownhillWhen off-roading takes you downhill, you will wantto consider a number of things:

• How steep is the downhill? Will I be able tomaintain vehicle control?

• What is the surface like? Smooth? Rough?Slippery? Hard-packed dirt? Gravel?

• Are there hidden surface obstacles? Ruts?Logs? Boulders?

• What is at the bottom of the hill? Is there ahidden creek bank or even a river bottomwith large rocks?

If you decide you can go down a hill safely, thentry to keep your vehicle headed straight down, anduse a low gear. This way, engine drag can helpthe brakes and they will not have to do allthe work. Descend slowly, keeping your vehicleunder control at all times.

{CAUTION:

Heavy braking when going down a hill cancause your brakes to overheat and fade.This could cause loss of control and aserious accident. Apply the brakes lightlywhen descending a hill and use a lowgear to keep vehicle speed under control.

Q: Are there some things I should not dowhen driving down a hill?

A: Yes! These are important because, if youignore them, you could lose control and have aserious accident.

• When driving downhill, avoid turns that take youacross the incline of the hill. A hill that is not toosteep to drive down may be too steep to driveacross. You could roll over if you do not drivestraight down.

• Never go downhill with the transmission inNEUTRAL (N). This is called “free wheeling.”The brakes will have to do all the work andcould overheat and fade.


Q: Am I likely to stall when going downhill?

A: It is much more likely to happen goinguphill. But if it happens going downhill, here iswhat to do.

1. Stop your vehicle by applying the regularbrakes. Apply the parking brake.

2. Shift to PARK (P) and, while still braking,restart the engine.

3. Shift back to a low gear, release the parkingbrake, and drive straight down.

4. If the engine will not start, get out andget help.

Driving Across an InclineSooner or later, an off-road trail will probably goacross the incline of a hill. If this happens,you have to decide whether to try to drive acrossthe incline. Here are some things to consider:

• A hill that can be driven straight up or downmay be too steep to drive across. When you gostraight up or down a hill, the length of thewheel base — the distance from the frontwheels to the rear wheels — reduces thelikelihood the vehicle will tumble end over end.But when you drive across an incline, the muchmore narrow track width — the distancebetween the left and right wheels — may notprevent the vehicle from tilting and rolling over.Also, driving across an incline puts more weighton the downhill wheels. This could cause adownhill slide or a rollover.

• Surface conditions can be a problem when youdrive across a hill. Loose gravel, muddy spots,or even wet grass can cause your tires to slipsideways, downhill. If the vehicle slipssideways, it can hit something that willtrip it — a rock, a rut, etc. — and roll over.


• Hidden obstacles can make the steepness ofthe incline even worse. If you drive across arock with the uphill wheels, or if the downhillwheels drop into a rut or depression, yourvehicle can tilt even more.

For reasons like these, you need to decidecarefully whether to try to drive across an incline.Just because the trail goes across the inclinedoes not mean you have to drive it. The lastvehicle to try it might have rolled over.

{CAUTION:

Driving across an incline that is too steepwill make your vehicle roll over. You couldbe seriously injured or killed. If you haveany doubt about the steepness of theincline, do not drive across it. Findanother route instead.

Q: What if I am driving across an incline thatis not too steep, but I hit some loosegravel and start to slide downhill. Whatshould I do?

A: If you feel your vehicle starting to slidesideways, turn downhill. This should helpstraighten out the vehicle and prevent the sideslipping. However, a much better way toprevent this is to get out and “walk the course”so you know what the surface is like beforeyou drive it.


Stalling on an InclineIf your vehicle stalls when you are crossing anincline, be sure you, and any passengers, get outon the uphill side, even if the door there isharder to open. If you get out on the downhill sideand the vehicle starts to roll over, you will beright in its path.

If you have to walk down the slope, stay out of thepath the vehicle will take if it does roll over.

{CAUTION:

Getting out on the downhill (low) side of avehicle stopped across an incline isdangerous. If the vehicle rolls over, youcould be crushed or killed. Always get outon the uphill (high) side of the vehicle andstay well clear of the rollover path.


Driving in Mud, Sand, Snow, or IceWhen you drive in mud, snow, or sand, the wheelswill not get good traction. You cannot accelerateas quickly, turning is more difficult, and youwill need longer braking distances.

It is best to use a low gear when you are inmud —the deeper the mud, the lower the gear. Inreally deep mud, the idea is to keep your vehiclemoving so you do not get stuck.

When you drive on sand, you will sense a changein wheel traction. But it will depend upon howloosely packed the sand is. On loosely packedsand, such as on beaches or sand dunes, the tireswill tend to sink into the sand. This has an effecton steering, accelerating, and braking. Driveat a reduced speed and avoid sharp turnsor abrupt maneuvers.

Hard packed snow and ice offer the worst tiretraction. On these surfaces, it is very easy to losecontrol. On wet ice, for example, the traction isso poor that you will have difficulty accelerating.And, if you do get moving, poor steering anddifficult braking can cause you to slide outof control.

{CAUTION:

Driving on frozen lakes, ponds, or riverscan be dangerous. Underwater springs,currents under the ice, or sudden thawscan weaken the ice. Your vehicle couldfall through the ice and you and yourpassengers could drown. Drive yourvehicle on safe surfaces only.


Driving in WaterHeavy rain can mean flash flooding, and floodwaters demand extreme caution.

Find out how deep the water is before you drivethrough it. If it is deep enough to cover your wheelhubs, axles, or exhaust pipe, do not try it — youprobably will not get through. Also, water that deepcan damage the axle and other vehicle parts.

If the water is not too deep, drive slowly through it.At faster speeds, water splashes on yourvehicle’s ignition system and your vehicle canstall. Stalling can also occur if you get the tailpipeunder water. And, as long as the tailpipe isunder water, you will never be able to start theengine. When you go through water, rememberthat when the brakes get wet, it may take youlonger to stop.

{CAUTION:

Driving through rushing water can bedangerous. Deep water can sweep yourvehicle downstream and you and yourpassengers could drown. If it is onlyshallow water, it can still wash away theground from under your tires, and youcould lose traction and roll the vehicleover. Do not drive through rushing water.

See Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads onpage 308 for more information on driving throughwater.


After Off-Road DrivingRemove any brush or debris that has collected onthe underbody, chassis, or under the hood.These accumulations can be a fire hazard.

After operation in mud or sand, have the brakelinings cleaned and checked. These substancescan cause glazing and uneven braking. Check thebody structure, steering, suspension, wheels,tires, and exhaust system for damage. Also, checkthe fuel lines and cooling system for any leakage.

Your vehicle will require more frequent servicedue to off-road use. Refer to the MaintenanceSchedule for additional information.

Driving at NightNight driving is more dangerous than day driving.One reason is that some drivers are likely tobe impaired — by alcohol or drugs, with nightvision problems, or by fatigue.

Here are some tips on night driving.

• Drive defensively.

• Do not drink and drive.

• Adjust the inside rearview mirror to reduce theglare from headlamps behind you.

• Since you cannot see as well, you may needto slow down and keep more space betweenyou and other vehicles.

• Slow down, especially on higher speed roads.Your vehicle’s headlamps can light up only somuch road ahead.

• In remote areas, watch for animals.

• If you are tired, pull off the road in a safeplace and rest.


No one can see as well at night as in the daytime.But as we get older these differences increase.A 50-year-old driver may require at least twice asmuch light to see the same thing at night as a20-year-old.

What you do in the daytime can also affect yournight vision. For example, if you spend theday in bright sunshine you are wise to wearsunglasses. Your eyes will have less troubleadjusting to night. But if you are driving, do notwear sunglasses at night. They may cut down onglare from headlamps, but they also make alot of things invisible.

You can be temporarily blinded by approachingheadlamps. It can take a second or two, oreven several seconds, for your eyes to re-adjustto the dark. When you are faced with severe glare,as from a driver who does not lower the highbeams, or a vehicle with misaimed headlamps,slow down a little. Avoid staring directly intothe approaching headlamps.

Keep the windshield and all the glass on yourvehicle clean — inside and out. Glare at night ismade much worse by dirt on the glass. Eventhe inside of the glass can build up a film causedby dust. Dirty glass makes lights dazzle andflash more than clean glass would, making thepupils of your eyes contract repeatedly.

Remember that the headlamps light up far less of aroadway when you are in a turn or curve. Keep youreyes moving; that way, it is easier to pick out dimlylighted objects. Just as the headlamps should bechecked regularly for proper aim, so should youreyes be examined regularly. Some drivers sufferfrom night blindness — the inability to see in dimlight — and are not even aware of it.


Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads

Rain and wet roads can mean driving trouble. On awet road, you cannot stop, accelerate, or turn aswell because your tire-to-road traction is not asgood as on dry roads. And, if your tires do not havemuch tread left, you will get even less traction. It isalways wise to go slower and be cautious if rainstarts to fall while you are driving. The surface mayget wet suddenly when your reflexes are tuned fordriving on dry pavement.

The heavier the rain, the harder it is to see. Evenif your windshield wiper blades are in goodshape, a heavy rain can make it harder to seeroad signs and traffic signals, pavement markings,the edge of the road, and even people walking.

It is wise to keep your wiping equipment ingood shape and keep your windshield washer fluidreservoir filled with washer fluid. Replace yourwindshield wiper inserts when they show signs ofstreaking or missing areas on the windshield,or when strips of rubber start to separate from theinserts.


{CAUTION:

Wet brakes can cause accidents. Theymay not work as well in a quick stop andmay cause pulling to one side. You couldlose control of the vehicle.

After driving through a large puddle ofwater or a car wash, apply the brake pedallightly until the brakes work normally.

Driving too fast through large water puddles oreven going through some car washes can causeproblems, too. The water may affect your brakes.Try to avoid puddles. But if you cannot, try to slowdown before you hit them.

HydroplaningHydroplaning is dangerous. So much water canbuild up under your tires that they can actually rideon the water. This can happen if the road is wetenough and you are going fast enough. When yourvehicle is hydroplaning, it has little or no contactwith the road.

Hydroplaning does not happen often. But it can ifyour tires do not have much tread or if thepressure in one or more is low. It can happen if alot of water is standing on the road. If you cansee reflections from trees, telephone poles,or other vehicles, and raindrops dimple the water’ssurface, there could be hydroplaning.

Hydroplaning usually happens at higher speeds.There just is not a hard and fast rule abouthydroplaning. The best advice is to slow downwhen it is raining.

Driving Through Deep Standing Water

Notice: If you drive too quickly throughdeep puddles or standing water, water cancome in through the engine’s air intakeand badly damage the engine. Never drivethrough water that is slightly lower than theunderbody of your vehicle. If you cannot avoiddeep puddles or standing water, drivethrough them very slowly.


Driving Through Flowing Water

{CAUTION:

Flowing or rushing water creates strongforces. If you try to drive through flowingwater, as you might at a low watercrossing, your vehicle can be carriedaway. As little as six inches of flowingwater can carry away a smaller vehicle. Ifthis happens, you and other vehicleoccupants could drown. Do not ignorepolice warning signs, and otherwise bevery cautious about trying to drivethrough flowing water.

Some Other Rainy Weather Tips• Turn on your low-beam headlamps — not just

your parking lamps — to help make you morevisible to others.

• Besides slowing down, allow some extrafollowing distance. And be especially carefulwhen you pass another vehicle. Allow yourselfmore clear room ahead, and be prepared tohave your view restricted by road spray.

• Have good tires with proper tread depth. SeeTires on page 398.


City Driving

One of the biggest problems with city streets isthe amount of traffic on them. You will wantto watch out for what the other drivers are doingand pay attention to traffic signals.

Here are ways to increase your safety in citydriving:

• Know the best way to get to where you aregoing. Get a city map and plan your tripinto an unknown part of the city just as youwould for a cross-country trip.

• Try to use the freeways that rim and crisscrossmost large cities. You will save time andenergy. See Freeway Driving on page 312.

• Treat a green light as a warning signal. Atraffic light is there because the corner isbusy enough to need it. When a light turnsgreen, and just before you start to move,check both ways for vehicles that have notcleared the intersection or may be running thered light.


Freeway Driving

Mile for mile, freeways — also called thruways,parkways, expressways, turnpikes, orsuperhighways — are the safest of all roads. Butthey have their own special rules.

The most important advice on freeway driving is:Keep up with traffic and keep to the right.Drive at the same speed most of the other driversare driving. Too-fast or too-slow driving breaksa smooth traffic flow. Treat the left lane ona freeway as a passing lane.

At the entrance, there is usually a ramp that leadsto the freeway. If you have a clear view of thefreeway as you drive along the entrance ramp, youshould begin to check traffic. Try to determinewhere you expect to blend with the flow. Try tomerge into the gap at close to the prevailing speed.Switch on your turn signal, check your mirrors, andglance over your shoulder as often as necessary.Try to blend smoothly with the traffic flow.

Once you are on the freeway, adjust your speedto the posted limit or to the prevailing rate if itis slower. Stay in the right lane unless you wantto pass.


Before changing lanes, check your mirrors. Thenuse your turn signal.

Just before you leave the lane, glance quicklyover your shoulder to make sure there is notanother vehicle in your blind spot.

Once you are moving on the freeway, makecertain you allow a reasonable following distance.Expect to move slightly slower at night.

When you want to leave the freeway, move to theproper lane well in advance. If you miss yourexit, do not, under any circumstances, stop andback up. Drive on to the next exit.

The exit ramp can be curved, sometimes quitesharply. The exit speed is usually posted.

Reduce your speed according to yourspeedometer, not to your sense of motion. Afterdriving for any distance at higher speeds, you maytend to think you are going slower than youactually are.

Before Leaving on a Long TripMake sure you are ready. Try to be well rested. Ifyou must start when you are not fresh — suchas after a day’s work — do not plan to make toomany miles that first part of the journey. Wearcomfortable clothing and shoes you can easilydrive in.

Is your vehicle ready for a long trip? If you keep itserviced and maintained, it is ready to go. If itneeds service, have it done before starting out. Ofcourse, you will find experienced and ableservice experts in GM dealerships all across NorthAmerica. They will be ready and willing to helpif you need it.

Here are some things you can check before a trip:

• Windshield Washer Fluid: Is the reservoirfull? Are all windows clean inside and outside?

• Wiper Blades: Are they in good shape?

• Fuel, Engine Oil, Other Fluids: Have youchecked all levels?

• Lamps: Are they all working? Are the lensesclean?


• Tires: They are vitally important to a safe,trouble-free trip. Is the tread good enoughfor long-distance driving? Are the tiresall inflated to the recommended pressure?

• Weather Forecasts: What is the weatheroutlook along your route? Should youdelay your trip a short time to avoid a majorstorm system?

• Maps: Do you have up-to-date maps?

Highway HypnosisIs there actually such a condition as highwayhypnosis? Or is it just plain falling asleep at thewheel? Call it highway hypnosis, lack ofawareness, or whatever.

There is something about an easy stretch of roadwith the same scenery, along with the hum ofthe tires on the road, the drone of the engine, andthe rush of the wind against the vehicle thatcan make you sleepy. Do not let it happen to you!If it does, your vehicle can leave the road inless than a second, and you could crash and beinjured.

What can you do about highway hypnosis? First,be aware that it can happen.

Then here are some tips:

• Make sure your vehicle is well ventilated, witha comfortably cool interior.

• Keep your eyes moving. Scan the road aheadand to the sides. Check your vehicle’s mirrorsand instruments frequently.

• If you get sleepy, pull off the road into a rest,service, or parking area and take a nap, getsome exercise, or both. For safety, treatdrowsiness on the highway as an emergency.


Hill and Mountain Roads

Driving on steep hills or mountains is differentfrom driving in flat or rolling terrain.

If you drive regularly in steep country, or if you areplanning to visit there, here are some tips thatcan make your trips safer and more enjoyable. SeeOff-Road Driving on page 291 for informationabout driving off-road.

• Keep your vehicle in good shape. Check allfluid levels and also the brakes, tires,cooling system, and transmission. These partscan work hard on mountain roads.

{CAUTION:

If you do not shift down, the brakescould get so hot that they would not workwell. You would then have poor braking oreven none going down a hill. You couldcrash. Shift down to let the engine assistthe brakes on a steep downhill slope.


{CAUTION:

Coasting downhill in NEUTRAL (N) or withthe ignition off is dangerous. The brakeswill have to do all the work of slowingdown. They could get so hot that theywould not work well. You would then havepoor braking or even none going down ahill. You could crash. Always have theengine running and your vehicle in gearwhen you go downhill.

• Know how to go down hills. The most importantthing to know is this: let your engine do some ofthe slowing down. Shift to a lower gear whenyou go down a steep or long hill.

• Know how to go uphill. You may want to shiftdown to a lower gear. The lower gears helpcool your engine and transmission, and you canclimb the hill better.

• Stay in your own lane when driving on two-laneroads in hills or mountains. Do not swing wideor cut across the center of the road. Drive atspeeds that let you stay in your own lane.

• As you go over the top of a hill, be alert. Therecould be something in your lane, like a stalledcar or an accident.

• You may see highway signs on mountains thatwarn of special problems. Examples are longgrades, passing or no-passing zones, a fallingrocks area, or winding roads. Be alert to theseand take appropriate action.


Winter Driving

Here are some tips for winter driving:

• Have your vehicle in good shape for winter.

• You may want to put winter emergencysupplies in your vehicle.

Also see Tires on page 398.

Include an ice scraper, a small brush or broom, asupply of windshield washer fluid, a rag, somewinter outer clothing, a small shovel, a flashlight, ared cloth, and a couple of reflective warningtriangles. And, if you will be driving under severeconditions, include a small bag of sand, apiece of old carpet, or a couple of burlap bags tohelp provide traction. Be sure you properlysecure these items in your vehicle.

Driving on Snow or IceMost of the time, those places where the tiresmeet the road probably have good traction.

However, if there is snow or ice between the tiresand the road, you can have a very slipperysituation. You will have a lot less traction, or grip,and will need to be very careful.


What is the worst time for this? Wet ice. Very coldsnow or ice can be slick and hard to drive on.But wet ice can be even more trouble because itmay offer the least traction of all. You can getwet ice when it is about freezing, 32°F (0°C), andfreezing rain begins to fall. Try to avoid drivingon wet ice until salt and sand crews can get there.

Whatever the condition — smooth ice, packed,blowing, or loose snow — drive with caution.

Accelerate gently. Try not to break the fragiletraction. If you accelerate too fast, the drive wheelswill spin and polish the surface under the tireseven more. See StabiliTrak® System on page 283and Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out onpage 322. Also see “Winter Tires” under Tires onpage 398.


The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) improves yourvehicle’s stability when you make a hard stopon a slippery road. Even though you have ABS,you will want to begin stopping sooner thanyou would on dry pavement. See Anti-Lock BrakeSystem (ABS) on page 279.

• Allow greater following distance on anyslippery road.

• Watch for slippery spots. The road might befine until you hit a spot that is covered withice. On an otherwise clear road, ice patchesmay appear in shaded areas where thesun cannot reach, such as around clumps oftrees, behind buildings, or under bridges.Sometimes the surface of a curve or anoverpass may remain icy when thesurrounding roads are clear. If you see apatch of ice ahead of you, brake before youare on it. Try not to brake while you areactually on the ice, and avoid sudden steeringmaneuvers.

If You Are Caught in a BlizzardIf you are stopped by heavy snow, you could be ina serious situation. You should probably staywith your vehicle unless you know for sure that youare near help and you can hike through thesnow. Here are some things to do to summonhelp and keep yourself and your passengers safe:

• Turn on your hazard flashers.

• Tie a red cloth to your vehicle to alert policethat you have been stopped by the snow.

• Put on extra clothing or wrap a blanket aroundyou. If you do not have blankets or extraclothing, make body insulators fromnewspapers, burlap bags, rags, floormats — anything you can wrap around yourselfor tuck under your clothing to keep warm.


You can run the engine to keep warm, but becareful.

{CAUTION:

Snow can trap exhaust gases under yourvehicle. This can cause deadly CO(carbon monoxide) gas to get inside. COcould overcome you and kill you. Youcannot see it or smell it, so you might notknow it is in your vehicle. Clear awaysnow from around the base of yourvehicle, especially any that is blocking theexhaust pipe. And check around againfrom time to time to be sure snow doesnot collect there.

Open a window just a little on the side ofthe vehicle that is away from the wind.This will help keep CO out.

Run your engine only as long as you must. Thissaves fuel. When you run the engine, make it go alittle faster than just idle. That is, push theaccelerator slightly. This uses less fuel for theheat that you get and it keeps the battery charged.


You will need a well-charged battery to restart thevehicle, and possibly for signaling later on withyour headlamps. Let the heater run for a while.

Then, shut the engine off and close the windowalmost all the way to preserve the heat. Startthe engine again and repeat this only when youfeel really uncomfortable from the cold. But do it aslittle as possible. Preserve the fuel as long asyou can. To help keep warm, you can get out ofthe vehicle and do some fairly vigorous exercisesevery half hour or so until help comes.

If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand,Mud, Ice, or SnowIn order to free your vehicle when it is stuck, youneed to spin the wheels, but you do not want to spinthe wheels too fast. The method known as rockingcan help you get out when you are stuck, but youmust use caution.

{CAUTION:

If you let your vehicle’s tires spin at highspeed, they can explode, and you orothers could be injured. And, thetransmission or other parts of the vehiclecan overheat. That could cause an enginecompartment fire or other damage. Whenyou are stuck, spin the wheels as little aspossible. Do not spin the wheels above35 mph (55 km/h) as shown on thespeedometer.

Notice: Spinning the wheels can destroy partsof your vehicle as well as the tires. If youspin the wheels too fast while shiftingthe transmission back and forth, you candestroy the transmission.

For information about using tire chains on yourvehicle, see Tire Chains on page 422.


Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It OutFirst, turn the steering wheel left and right.That will clear the area around the front wheels.Turn the StabiliTrak® System off. See StabiliTrak®

System on page 283. Then shift back and forthbetween REVERSE (R) and a forward gear,spinning the wheels as little as possible. Releasethe accelerator pedal while you shift, and presslightly on the accelerator pedal when thetransmission is in gear. By slowly spinning thewheels in the forward and reverse directions, youwill cause a rocking motion that may free yourvehicle. If that does not get your vehicle out aftera few tries, it may need to be towed out. Or,you can use the recovery hook if your vehicle hasone. If your vehicle does need to be towed out,see Towing Your Vehicle on page 328.

Loading Your VehicleIt is very important to know how much weight yourvehicle can carry. This weight is called thevehicle capacity weight and includes the weight ofall occupants, cargo, and all nonfactory-installedoptions. Two labels on your vehicle show howmuch weight it may properly carry, the Tire andLoading Information label and the Certification/Tirelabel.

{CAUTION:

Do not load your vehicle any heavier thanthe Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR),or either the maximum front or rear GrossAxle Weight Rating (GAWR). If you do,parts on your vehicle can break, and itcan change the way your vehicle handles.These could cause you to lose controland crash. Also, overloading can shortenthe life of your vehicle.


Tire and Loading Information Label

A vehicle specific Tire and Loading Informationlabel is attached to the center pillar (B-pillar). Withthe driver’s door open, you will find the labelattached below the door lock post (striker). Thetire and loading information label shows thenumber of occupant seating positions (A), and themaximum vehicle capacity weight (B) in kilogramsand pounds.

The Tire and Loading Information label also showsthe size of the original equipment tires (C) andthe recommended cold tire inflation pressures (D).For more information on tires and inflation seeTires on page 398 and Inflation - Tire Pressure onpage 407.

There is also important loading information on thevehicle Certification/Tire label. It tells you theGross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) andthe Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) for thefront and rear axle. See “Certification/Tire Label”later in this section.

Label Example


Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit1. Locate the statement “The combined

weight of occupants and cargo should neverexceed XXX kg or XXX lbs” on yourvehicle’s placard.

2. Determine the combined weight of the driverand passengers that will be riding in yourvehicle.

3. Subtract the combined weight of the driverand passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs.

4. The resulting figure equals the availableamount of cargo and luggage load capacity.For example, if the “XXX” amount equals1400 lbs and there will be five 150 lbpassengers in your vehicle, the amount ofavailable cargo and luggage load capacity is650 lbs (1400 − 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs).

5. Determine the combined weight of luggageand cargo being loaded on the vehicle. Thatweight may not safely exceed the availablecargo and luggage load capacity calculated inStep 4.

6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, the loadfrom your trailer will be transferred to yourvehicle. Consult this manual to determine howthis reduces the available cargo and luggageload capacity of your vehicle.If your vehicle can tow a trailer, see Towing aTrailer on page 331 for important informationon towing a trailer, towing safety rules,and trailering tips.


Item Description Total

A Vehicle Capacity Weightfor Example 1 = 1,000 lbs (453 kg)

BSubtract OccupantWeight 150 lbs(68 kg) × 2 =

300 lbs (136 kg)

C Available Occupant andCargo Weight = 700 lbs (317 kg)




750 lbs (340 kg)

C Available CargoWeight = 250 lbs (113 kg)

Example 1 Example 2





1,000 lbs (453 kg)

C Available CargoWeight = 0 lbs (0 kg)

Refer to your vehicle’s Tire and LoadingInformation label for specific information aboutyour vehicle’s capacity weight and seatingpositions. The combined weight of the driver,passengers, and cargo should never exceed yourvehicle’s capacity weight.

Certification/Tire Label

A vehicle specific Certification/Tire label isattached to either the driver’s door edge or thelower center pillar on the driver’s side of thevehicle. This label shows the gross weight capacityof your vehicle and is called the Gross VehicleWeight Rating (GVWR). The GVWR includes theweight of the vehicle, all occupants, fuel, cargo,and trailer tongue weight, if pulling a trailer.

Example 3

United States version shown, Canada similar


The Certification/Tire label also tells you themaximum weights for the front and rear axles,called Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). To findout the actual loads on your front and rearaxles, you need to go to a weigh station andweigh your vehicle. Your dealer can help you withthis. Be sure to spread out your load equally onboth sides of the centerline.

Never exceed the GVWR for your vehicle, or theGAWR for either the front or rear axle.

And, if you do have a heavy load, you shouldspread it out.

Similar appearing vehicles may have differentGVWRs and payloads. Please note theCertification/Tire label on your truck or consultyour dealer for additional details.

{CAUTION:

Do not load your vehicle any heavier thanthe Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR),or either the maximum front or rear GrossAxle Weight Rating (GAWR). If you do,parts on your vehicle can break, and itcan change the way your vehicle handles.These could cause you to lose controland crash. Also, overloading can shortenthe life of your vehicle.


If you put things inside your vehicle — likesuitcases, tools, packages, or anything else — theywill go as fast as the vehicle goes. If you have tostop or turn quickly, or if there is a crash, they willkeep going.

{CAUTION:

Things you put inside your vehicle canstrike and injure people in a sudden stopor turn, or in a crash.

• Put things in the cargo area of yourvehicle. Try to spread the weightevenly.

• Never stack heavier things, likesuitcases, inside the vehicle so thatsome of them are above the tops ofthe seats.

• Do not leave an unsecured childrestraint in your vehicle.

• When you carry something inside thevehicle, secure it whenever you can.

• Do not leave a seat folded downunless you need to.

There is also important loading information foroff-road driving in this manual. See Off-RoadDriving on page 291.

Towing

Towing Your VehicleConsult your dealer or a professional towingservice if you need to have your disabled vehicletowed. See Roadside Service on page 493.

If you want to tow your vehicle behind anothervehicle for recreational purposes (such as behinda motorhome), see Recreational Vehicle Towingfollowing.

Recreational Vehicle TowingRecreational vehicle towing means towing yourvehicle behind another vehicle – such as behind amotorhome. The two most common types ofrecreational vehicle towing are known as “dinghytowing” (towing your vehicle with all four wheelson the ground) and “dolly towing” (towingyour vehicle with two wheels on the ground andtwo wheels up on a device known as a “dolly”).


With the proper preparation and equipment, manyvehicles can be towed in these ways. See“Dinghy Towing” and “Dolly Towing,” following.

Here are some important things to consider beforeyou do recreational vehicle towing:

• What’s the towing capacity of the towingvehicle? Be sure you read the tow vehiclemanufacturer’s recommendations.

• How far will you tow? Some vehicles haverestrictions on how far and how long theycan tow.

• Do you have the proper towing equipment?See your dealer or trailering professionalfor additional advice and equipmentrecommendations.

• Is your vehicle ready to be towed? Just asyou would prepare your vehicle for a longtrip, you’ll want to make sure your vehicle isprepared to be towed. See Before Leaving ona Long Trip on page 313.

Dinghy Towing

Notice: If you tow your vehicle with allfour wheels on the ground, the drivetraincomponents could be damaged. The repairswould not be covered by your warranty. Do nottow your vehicle with all four wheels on theground.

Your vehicle was not designed to be towed withall four wheels on the ground. If your vehicle mustbe towed, see “Dolly Towing” following for moreinformation.

Dolly Towing

Notice: Towing an all-wheel-drive vehicle withall four wheels on the ground, or even withonly two of its wheels on the ground, willdamage drivetrain components. Do not tow anall-wheel-drive vehicle if any of its wheelswill be on the ground.


If you have a Rear-Wheel Drive (RWD) vehicle, itcan be towed using a dolly. If you have anAll-Wheel-Drive (AWD) vehicle, it can only betowed on a flat-bed trailer. To tow your RWDvehicle using a dolly, follow these steps:

1. Put the rear wheels on the dolly.

2. Put the vehicle in PARK (P).

3. Set the parking brake and then removethe key.

4. Clamp the steering wheel in a straight-aheadposition with a clamping device designed fortowing.

5. Release the parking brake.

Level ControlThis feature keeps the rear of your vehicle levelas the load changes. It’s automatic — youdon’t need to adjust anything.


Towing a Trailer

{CAUTION:

If you do not use the correct equipmentand drive properly, you can lose controlwhen you pull a trailer. For example, if thetrailer is too heavy, the brakes may notwork well — or even at all. You and yourpassengers could be seriously injured.You may also damage your vehicle; theresulting repairs would not be covered byyour warranty. Pull a trailer only if youhave followed all the steps in this section.Ask your dealer for advice andinformation about towing a trailer withyour vehicle.

Your vehicle can tow a trailer if it is equipped withthe proper trailer towing equipment. To identifythe trailering capacity of your vehicle, you shouldread the information in “Weight of the Trailer”that appears later in this section. But trailering isdifferent than just driving your vehicle by itself.

Trailering means changes in handling, acceleration,braking, durability and fuel economy. Successful,safe trailering takes correct equipment, and it has tobe used properly.

That’s the reason for this part. In it are manytime-tested, important trailering tips and safetyrules. Many of these are important for your safetyand that of your passengers. So please readthis section carefully before you pull a trailer.

Load-pulling components such as the engine,transmission, rear axle, wheel assemblies and tiresare forced to work harder against the drag ofthe added weight. The engine is requiredto operate at relatively higher speeds and undergreater loads, generating extra heat. What’s more,the trailer adds considerably to wind resistance,increasing the pulling requirements.


If You Do Decide to Pull a TrailerIf you do, here are some important points:

• There are many different laws, including speedlimit restrictions, having to do with trailering.Make sure your rig will be legal, not only whereyou live but also where you’ll be driving. Agood source for this information can be stateor provincial police.

• Consider using a sway control. You can ask ahitch dealer about sway controls.

• Don’t tow a trailer at all during the first500 miles (805 km) your new vehicle is driven.Your engine, axle or other parts could bedamaged.

• Then, during the first 500 miles (805 km) thatyou tow a trailer, don’t drive over 50 mph(80 km/h) and don’t make starts at full throttle.This helps your engine and other parts ofyour vehicle wear in at the heavier loads.

• Obey speed limit restrictions when towing atrailer. Don’t drive faster than the maximumposted speed for trailers, or no more than55 mph (90 km/h), to save wear on yourvehicle’s parts.

Three important considerations have to do withweight:

• the weight of the trailer

• the weight of the trailer tongue

• and the total weight on your vehicle’s tires


Tow/Haul ModeTow/haul is designed to assist while your vehicleis pulling a large or heavy load or trailer.Tow/haul is most useful while pulling such a loadin rolling terrain, in stop-and-go traffic, or whenyou need improved low-speed control, suchas when parking. The purpose of the tow/haulmode is to do the following:

• Reduce the frequency and improve thepredictability of transmission shifts whenpulling a heavy trailer or a large or heavy load.

• Provide the same solid shift feel when pulling aheavy trailer or a large or heavy load as whenthe vehicle is unloaded.

• Improve control of vehicle speed whilerequiring less throttle pedal activity whenpulling a heavy trailer or a large or heavy load.

Tow/haul is designed to be most effectivewhen the vehicle and trailer combined weight is atleast 75 percent of the vehicle’s GrossCombination Weight Rating (GCWR). See “Weightof the Trailer” later in this section.

Press this button,located on the console,to enable/disable thetow/haul mode.

A light on the instrumentpanel will illuminate toindicate that tow/haulmode has beenselected.

The vehicle will automatically turn off tow/haulevery time it is started.

Driving with tow/haul activated without a heavyload or with no trailer will cause reduced fueleconomy and unpleasant engine and transmissiondriving characteristics, but will not causedamage.


Operating the vehicle in tow/haul when lightlyloaded or with no trailer at all will not causedamage. However, there is no benefit to theselection of tow/haul when the vehicle is unloaded.Such a selection when unloaded may result inunpleasant engine and transmission drivingcharacteristics and reduced fuel economy.Tow/haul is recommended only when pulling aheavy trailer or a large or heavy load.

Weight of the TrailerHow heavy can a trailer safely be?

It depends on how you plan to use your rig. Forexample, speed, altitude, road grades, outsidetemperature and how much your vehicle is used topull a trailer are all important. It can also dependon any special equipment that you have onyour vehicle, and the amount of tongue weight thevehicle can carry. See “Weight of the TrailerTongue” later in this section for more information.

Maximum trailer weight is calculated assumingonly the driver is in the tow vehicle and it has allthe required trailering equipment. The weightof additional optional equipment, passengers andcargo in the tow vehicle must be subtractedfrom the maximum trailer weight.

Look in the following chart to find the maximumtrailer weight for your vehicle.

PackageMaximum

Trailer Weight*GCWR

Base 2,000 lbs(907 kg)

6,853 lbs(3 808 kg)

V92 4,250 lbs(1 928 kg)

9,353 lbs(4 242 kg)

*The Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR) isthe total allowable weight of the completely loadedvehicle and trailer including any passengers, cargo,equipment and conversions. The GCWR for yourvehicle should not be exceeded.

You can ask your dealer for our traileringinformation or advice, or you can write us at:

Cadillac Customer Assistance CenterCadillac Motor Car DivisionP.O. Box 33169Detroit, MI 48232-5169

In Canada, write to:

General Motors of Canada LimitedCustomer Communication Centre, 163-0051908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa,Ontario L1H 8P7


Weight of the Trailer TongueThe tongue load (A) of any trailer is an importantweight to measure because it affects the totalor gross weight of your vehicle. The Gross VehicleWeight (GVW) includes the curb weight of thevehicle, any cargo you may carry in it, andthe people who will be riding in the vehicle. If youhave a lot of options, equipment, passengersor cargo in the vehicle, it will reduce the tongueweight your vehicle can carry, which will alsoreduce the trailer weight your vehicle can tow. Andif you tow a trailer, you must add the tongueload to the GVW because your vehicle willbe carrying that weight, too. See Loading YourVehicle on page 322 for more informationabout your vehicle’s maximum load capacity.

If you’re using a weight-carrying hitch or aweight-distributing hitch, the trailer tongue (A)should weigh 10-15 percent of the total loadedtrailer weight (B).After you’ve loaded your trailer, weigh the trailerand then the tongue, separately, to see if theweights are proper. If they aren’t, you may be ableto get them right simply by moving some itemsaround in the trailer.Trailering may also be limited by the vehicle’s abilityto carry tongue weight. Tongue weight cannotcause the vehicle to exceed the GVWR (GrossVehicle Weight Rating) or the RGAWR (Rear GrossAxle Weight Rating). The effect of additional weightmay reduce your trailering capacity more than thetotal of the additional weight.


Consider the following example:

A vehicle model base weight is 5,500 lbs(2 495 kg); 2,800 lbs (1 270 kg) at the front axleand 2,700 lbs (1 225 kg) at the rear axle. Ithas a GVWR of 7,200 lbs (3 266 kg), a RGAWRof 4,000 lbs (1 814 kg) and a GCWR (GrossCombination Weight Rating) of 14,000 lbs(6 350 kg). The trailer rating should be:

You can expect tongue weight to be at least10 percent of trailer weight (850 lbs (386 kg)) andbecause the weight is applied well behind the rearaxle, the effect on the rear axle will be greater thanjust the weight itself, as much as 1.5 times as much.The weight at the rear axle could be 850 lbs(386 kg) X 1.5 = 1,275 lbs (578 kg). Since the rearaxle already weighs 2,700 lbs (1 225 kg), adding1,275 lbs (578 kg) brings the total to 3,975 lbs(1 803 kg).

This is very close to, but within the limit for RGAWRas well. The vehicle is set to trailer up to 8,500 lbs(3 856 kg).

But let’s say your specific vehicle is equipped withsome of the latest options and you have a frontseat passenger and two rear seat passengers withsome luggage and gear in the vehicle as well.You may add 300 lbs (136 kg) to the frontaxle weight and 400 lbs (181 kg) to the rear axleweight. Your vehicle now weighs:

Weight is still below 7,200 lbs (3 266 kg) and youmay think that you should subtract 700 additionalpounds (318 kg) from your trailering capacity tostay within GCWR limits. Your maximum trailerwould only be 7,800 lbs (3 538 kg). You may gofurther and think you must limit tongue weight toless than 1,000 lbs (454 kg) to avoid exceedingGVWR. But, you must still consider the effect on therear axle.


Because your rear axle now weighs 3,100 lbs(1 406 kg), you can only put 900 lbs (408 kg) on therear axle without exceeding RGAWR. The effect oftongue weight is about1.5 times the actual weight. Dividing the 900 lbs(408 kg) by 1.5 leaves you with being able tohandle only 600 lbs (272 kg) of tongue weight.Since tongue weight is usually at least 10 percent oftotal loaded trailer weight, you can expect that thelargest trailer your vehicle can properly handle is6,000 lbs (2 721 kg).

It is important that you make sure your vehicledoes not exceed any of its ratings — GCWR,GVWR, RGAWR, Maximum Trailer Ratingor Tongue Weight. The only way to be sure youare not exceeding any of these ratings is to weighyour vehicle and trailer.

Total Weight on Your Vehicle’s TiresBe sure your vehicle’s tires are inflated to theupper limit for cold tires. You’ll find these numberson the Certification/Tire label. See LoadingYour Vehicle on page 322. Then be sure you don’tgo over the GVW limit for your vehicle, includingthe weight of the trailer tongue.

HitchesIt’s important to have the correct hitch equipment.Crosswinds, large trucks going by and roughroads are a few reasons why you’ll need the righthitch. Here are some rules to follow:

• The rear bumper on your vehicle is notintended for hitches. Do not attach rentalhitches or other bumper-type hitches to it. Useonly a frame-mounted hitch that does notattach to the bumper.

• Will you have to make any holes in the bodyof your vehicle when you install a trailerhitch? If you do, then be sure to seal the holeslater when you remove the hitch. If youdon’t seal them, deadly carbon monoxide (CO)from your exhaust can get into your vehicle.See Engine Exhaust on page 132. Dirtand water can, too.


Safety ChainsYou should always attach chains between yourvehicle and your trailer. Cross the safetychains under the tongue of the trailer so that thetongue will not drop to the road if it becomesseparated from the hitch. Instructions about safetychains may be provided by the hitch manufactureror by the trailer manufacturer. Follow themanufacturer’s recommendation for attachingsafety chains and do not attach them to thebumper. Always leave just enough slack so youcan turn with your rig. And, never allow safetychains to drag on the ground.

Trailer BrakesIf you tow more than 1,000 lbs (450 kg), use trailerbrakes. Because your vehicle has anti-lockbrakes, don’t try to tap into your vehicle’s hydraulicbrake system. If you do, both brake systemswon’t work well, or at all.

Be sure to read and follow the instructions for thetrailer brakes so you’ll be able to install, adjustand maintain them properly.

Driving with a TrailerTowing a trailer requires a certain amount ofexperience. Before setting out for the open road,you’ll want to get to know your rig. Acquaintyourself with the feel of handling and braking withthe added weight of the trailer. And alwayskeep in mind that the vehicle you are driving isnow a good deal longer and not nearly asresponsive as your vehicle is by itself.

Before you start, check all trailer hitch parts andattachments, safety chains, electrical connector,lamps, tires and mirror adjustment. If the trailer haselectric brakes, start your vehicle and trailermoving and then apply the trailer brake controllerby hand to be sure the brakes are working.This lets you check your electrical connection atthe same time.

During your trip, check occasionally to be surethat the load is secure, and that the lamps and anytrailer brakes are still working.


Following DistanceStay at least twice as far behind the vehicle aheadas you would when driving your vehicle withouta trailer. This can help you avoid situationsthat require heavy braking and sudden turns.

PassingYou’ll need more passing distance up ahead whenyou’re towing a trailer. And, because you’re agood deal longer, you’ll need to go much fartherbeyond the passed vehicle before you canreturn to your lane.

Backing UpHold the bottom of the steering wheel with onehand. Then, to move the trailer to the left,just move that hand to the left. To move the trailerto the right, move your hand to the right. Alwaysback up slowly and, if possible, have someoneguide you.

Making TurnsNotice: Making very sharp turns whiletrailering could cause the trailer to come incontact with the vehicle. Your vehicle could bedamaged. Avoid making very sharp turns whiletrailering.When you’re turning with a trailer, make widerturns than normal. Do this so your trailerwon’t strike soft shoulders, curbs, road signs,trees or other objects. Avoid jerky or suddenmaneuvers. Signal well in advance.

Turn Signals When Towing a TrailerWhen you tow a trailer, your vehicle may need adifferent turn signal flasher and/or extra wiring.Check with your dealer. The arrows on yourinstrument panel will flash whenever you signal aturn or lane change. Properly hooked up, thetrailer lamps will also flash, telling other driversyou’re about to turn, change lanes or stop.When towing a trailer, the arrows on yourinstrument panel will flash for turns even if the bulbson the trailer are burned out. Thus, you may thinkdrivers behind you are seeing your signal whenthey are not. It’s important to check occasionally tobe sure the trailer bulbs are still working.


Driving on GradesReduce speed and shift to a lower gear before youstart down a long or steep downgrade. If you don’tshift down, you might have to use your brakes somuch that they would get hot and no longerwork well.

On a long uphill grade, shift down and reduceyour speed to around 45 mph (70 km/h) to reducethe possibility of the engine and the transmissionoverheating.

Parking on Hills

{CAUTION:

You really should not park your vehicle,with a trailer attached, on a hill. Ifsomething goes wrong, your rig couldstart to move. People can be injured, andboth your vehicle and the trailer can bedamaged.

But if you ever have to park your rig on a hill,here’s how to do it:

1. Apply your regular brakes, but don’t shift intoPARK (P).When parking uphill, turn your wheels awayfrom the curb. When parking downhill,turn your wheels into the curb.

2. Have someone place chocks behind the trailerwheels.

3. When the chocks are in place, release theregular brakes until the chocks absorb the load.

4. Reapply the regular brakes. Then apply yourparking brake and shift into PARK (P).

5. Release the regular brakes.


When You Are Ready to Leave AfterParking on a Hill1. Apply your regular brakes and hold the pedal

down while you:

• start your engine,

• shift into a gear, and

• release the parking brake.

2. Let up on the brake pedal.

3. Drive slowly until the trailer is clear of thechocks.

4. Stop and have someone pick up and store thechocks.

Maintenance When Trailer TowingYour vehicle will need service more often whenyou’re pulling a trailer. See ScheduledMaintenance on page 471 for more information.Things that are especially important in traileroperation are automatic transmission fluid (don’toverfill), engine oil, axle lubricant, drive belt,cooling system and brake system. Each of theseis covered in this manual, and the Index willhelp you find them quickly. If you’re trailering, it’sa good idea to review this information beforeyou start your trip.

Check periodically to see that all hitch nuts andbolts are tight.

Engine Cooling When Trailer TowingYour cooling system may temporarily overheatduring severe operating conditions. See EngineOverheating on page 372.


✍ NOTES


Service ........................................................ 346Accessories and Modifications ................... 347California Proposition 65 Warning .............. 347Doing Your Own Service Work .................. 348Adding Equipment to the Outside of

Your Vehicle .......................................... 348Fuel ............................................................. 349

Gasoline Octane ........................................ 349Gasoline Specifications .............................. 350California Fuel ........................................... 350Additives ................................................... 350Fuels in Foreign Countries ........................ 351Filling the Tank ......................................... 352Filling a Portable Fuel Container ............... 354

Checking Things Under the Hood .............. 354Hood Release ........................................... 355Engine Compartment Overview .................. 356Engine Oil ................................................. 360Engine Oil Life System .............................. 363Engine Air Cleaner/Filter ............................ 365

Automatic Transmission Fluid .................... 367Engine Coolant .......................................... 368Coolant Surge Tank Pressure Cap ............ 371Engine Overheating ................................... 372Overheated Engine Protection

Operating Mode ..................................... 374Cooling System ......................................... 374Power Steering Fluid ................................. 379Windshield Washer Fluid ........................... 380Brakes ...................................................... 381Battery ...................................................... 385Jump Starting ............................................ 386

All-Wheel Drive ........................................... 392Rear Axle .................................................... 394Front Axle ................................................... 395Bulb Replacement ....................................... 396

High Intensity Discharge (HID) Lighting ..... 396Halogen Bulbs ........................................... 396

Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement ....... 397

Section 5 Service and Appearance Care


Tires ............................................................ 398Winter Tires .............................................. 400Tire Sidewall Labeling ............................... 401Tire Terminology and Definitions ............... 404Inflation - Tire Pressure ............................. 407High-Speed Operation ............................... 409Tire Pressure Monitor System ................... 410Tire Inspection and Rotation ...................... 414When It Is Time for New Tires .................. 416Buying New Tires ...................................... 416Different Size Tires and Wheels ................ 418Uniform Tire Quality Grading ..................... 419Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance ............ 420Wheel Replacement .................................. 421Tire Chains ............................................... 422If a Tire Goes Flat .................................... 423Changing a Flat Tire ................................. 424Removing the Spare Tire and Tools .......... 426Removing the Flat Tire and Installing

the Spare Tire ....................................... 429Secondary Latch System ........................... 436Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools ...... 439Compact Spare Tire .................................. 442

Appearance Care ........................................ 443Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle .......... 443Fabric/Carpet ............................................. 445Leather ...................................................... 446Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other

Plastic Surfaces ..................................... 446Wood Panels ............................................. 447Speaker Covers ........................................ 447Care of Safety Belts .................................. 447Weatherstrips ............................................ 447Washing Your Vehicle ............................... 447Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses ................ 448Finish Care ............................................... 448Windshield and Wiper Blades .................... 449Aluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheels ......... 449Tires ......................................................... 450Sheet Metal Damage ................................. 450Finish Damage .......................................... 451Underbody Maintenance ............................ 451Chemical Paint Spotting ............................ 451Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials ............ 452



Vehicle Identification .................................. 453Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) ........... 453Service Parts Identification Label ............... 453

Electrical System ........................................ 454Add-On Electrical Equipment ..................... 454Windshield Wiper Fuses ............................ 454Power Windows and Other Power

Options .................................................. 454

Fuses and Circuit Breakers ....................... 455Underhood Fuse Block .............................. 455Rear Underseat Fuse Block

(Left Side) .............................................. 460Rear Underseat Fuse Block

(Right Side) ........................................... 462Capacities and Specifications .................... 464



ServiceYour dealer knows your vehicle best and wantsyou to be happy with it. We hope you will goto your dealer for all your service needs. You willget genuine GM parts and GM-trained andsupported service people.

We hope you will want to keep your GM vehicle allGM. Genuine GM parts have one of these marks:


Accessories and ModificationsWhen you add non-GM accessories to your vehiclethey can affect your vehicle’s performance andsafety, including such things as, airbags, braking,stability, ride and handling, emissions systems,aerodynamics, durability, and electronic systemslike anti-lock brakes, traction control andstability control. Some of these accessories mayeven cause malfunction or damage not covered bywarranty.

GM Accessories are designed to complement andfunction with other systems on your vehicle.Your GM dealer can accessorize your vehicleusing genuine GM Accessories. When you go toyour GM dealer and ask for GM Accessories,you will know that GM-trained and supportedservice technicians will perform the work usinggenuine GM Accessories.

California Proposition 65 WarningMost motor vehicles, including this one, containand/or emit chemicals known to the State ofCalifornia to cause cancer and birth defects or otherreproductive harm. Engine exhaust, many parts andsystems (including some inside the vehicle), manyfluids, and some component wear by-productscontain and/or emit these chemicals.


Doing Your Own Service Work

{CAUTION:

You can be injured and your vehicle couldbe damaged if you try to do service workon a vehicle without knowing enoughabout it.

• Be sure you have sufficient knowledge,experience, the proper replacementparts, and tools before you attempt anyvehicle maintenance task.

• Be sure to use the proper nuts, bolts,and other fasteners. English and metricfasteners can be easily confused. If youuse the wrong fasteners, parts can laterbreak or fall off. You could be hurt.

If you want to do some of your own service work,you should use the proper service manual. Ittells you much more about how to service yourvehicle than this manual can. To order the properservice manual, see Service PublicationsOrdering Information on page 505.

Your vehicle has an airbag system. Beforeattempting to do your own service work, seeServicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle onpage 87.

You should keep a record with all parts receiptsand list the mileage and the date of any servicework you perform. See Maintenance Recordon page 484.

Adding Equipment to the Outsideof Your VehicleThings you might add to the outside of yourvehicle can affect the airflow around it. This maycause wind noise and affect windshield washerperformance. Check with your dealer beforeadding equipment to the outside of your vehicle.


FuelUse of the recommended fuel is an important partof the proper maintenance of your vehicle. Tohelp keep your engine clean and maintain optimumvehicle performance, GM recommends the useof gasoline advertised as TOP TIER DetergentGasoline.

The 8th digit of your Vehicle Identification Number(VIN) shows the code letter or number thatidentifies your engine. You will find the VIN at thetop left of the instrument panel. See VehicleIdentification Number (VIN) on page 453.

Gasoline OctaneIf your vehicle has the 3.6L V6 engine(VIN Code 7), use regular unleaded gasolinewith a posted octane rating of 87 or higher. For bestperformance or trailer towing, you may choose touse middle grade 89 octane unleaded gasoline.

If the octane rating is less than 87, you may noticean audible knocking noise when you drive,commonly referred to as spark knock. If this occurs,use a gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher as soonas possible. If you are using gasoline rated at87 octane or higher and you hear heavy knocking,your engine needs service.

If your vehicle has the 4.6L V8 engine (VIN CodeA), use premium unleaded gasoline with a postedoctane rating of 91 or higher. You may also useregular unleaded gasoline rated at 87 octane orhigher, but your vehicle’s acceleration may beslightly reduced, and you may notice a slightaudible knocking noise, commonly referred to asspark knock. If the octane is less than 87, you maynotice a heavy knocking noise when you drive. Ifthis occurs, use a gasoline rated at 87 octane orhigher as soon as possible. Otherwise, you mightdamage your engine. If you are using gasolinerated at 87 octane or higher and you hear heavyknocking, your engine needs service.


Gasoline SpecificationsAt a minimum, gasoline should meet ASTMspecification D 4814 in the United States orCAN/CGSB-3.5 in Canada. Some gasolines maycontain an octane-enhancing additive calledmethylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl(MMT). General Motors recommends against theuse of gasolines containing MMT. See Additiveson page 350 for additional information.

California FuelIf your vehicle is certified to meet CaliforniaEmissions Standards, it is designed to operate onfuels that meet California specifications. Seethe underhood emission control label. If this fuel isnot available in states adopting Californiaemissions standards, your vehicle will operatesatisfactorily on fuels meeting federalspecifications, but emission control systemperformance may be affected. The malfunctionindicator lamp may turn on and your vehicle mayfail a smog-check test.

See Malfunction Indicator Lamp on page 208. Ifthis occurs, return to your authorized GM dealer fordiagnosis. If it is determined that the condition iscaused by the type of fuel used, repairs maynot be covered by your warranty.

AdditivesTo provide cleaner air, all gasolines in the UnitedStates are now required to contain additivesthat will help prevent engine and fuel systemdeposits from forming, allowing your emissioncontrol system to work properly. In most cases,you should not have to add anything to your fuel.However, some gasolines contain only theminimum amount of additive required to meet U.S.Environmental Protection Agency regulations.To help keep fuel injectors and intake valves clean,or if your vehicle experiences problems due todirty injectors or valves, look for gasoline that isadvertised as TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline. Also,your dealer has additives that will help correctand prevent most deposit-related problems.


Gasolines containing oxygenates, such as ethersand ethanol, and reformulated gasolines may beavailable in your area. General Motorsrecommends that you use these gasolines if theycomply with the specifications described earlier.However, E85 (85% ethanol) and other fuelscontaining more than 10% ethanol must not beused in vehicles that were not designed forthose fuels.

Notice: Your vehicle was not designed forfuel that contains methanol. Do not usefuel containing methanol. It can corrode metalparts in the fuel system and also damageplastic and rubber parts. That damage wouldnot be covered under your warranty.

Some gasolines that are not reformulated for lowemissions may contain an octane-enhancingadditive called methylcyclopentadienyl manganesetricarbonyl (MMT); ask the attendant where youbuy gasoline whether the fuel contains MMT.

General Motors recommends against the use ofsuch gasolines. Fuels containing MMT can reducethe life of spark plugs and the performance ofthe emission control system may be affected. Themalfunction indicator lamp may turn on. If thisoccurs, return to your dealer for service.

Fuels in Foreign CountriesIf you plan on driving in another country outsidethe United States or Canada, the proper fuel mightbe hard to find. Never use leaded gasoline orany other fuel not recommended in the previoustext on fuel. Costly repairs caused by use ofimproper fuel would not be covered by yourwarranty.

To check the fuel availability, ask an auto club, orcontact a major oil company that does businessin the country where you will be driving.


Filling the Tank

{CAUTION:

Fuel vapor burns violently and a fuel firecan cause bad injuries. To help avoidinjuries to you and others, read and followall the instructions on the pump island.Turn off your engine when you arerefueling. Do not smoke if you are nearfuel or refueling your vehicle. Do not usecellular phones. Keep sparks, flames, andsmoking materials away from fuel. Do notleave the fuel pump unattended whenrefueling your vehicle. This is against thelaw in some places. Do not re-entervehicle while pumping fuel. Keep childrenaway from the fuel pump; never letchildren pump fuel.

The tethered fuel cap islocated behind a hingedfuel door on thepassenger’s side of thevehicle.

To open the fuel door, apply pressure in the centerof the rear edge of the fuel door and it will pop open.

To remove the fuel cap, turn it slowlycounterclockwise. The fuel cap has a spring in it; ifthe cap is released too soon, it will spring backto the right.

While refueling, hang the tethered fuel cap fromthe hook on the fuel door.


{CAUTION:

If you spill fuel and then somethingignites it, you could be badly burned. Fuelcan spray out on you if you open the fuelcap too quickly. This spray can happen ifyour tank is nearly full, and is more likelyin hot weather. Open the fuel cap slowlyand wait for any hiss noise to stop. Thenunscrew the cap all the way.

Be careful not to spill fuel. Do not top off or overfillthe tank, and wait a few seconds after you havefinished pumping before removing the nozzle.Clean fuel from painted surfaces as soon aspossible. See Washing Your Vehicle on page 447.

When replacing the fuel cap, turn it clockwise until itclicks. Make sure the cap is fully installed. Thediagnostic system can determine if the fuel cap hasbeen left off or improperly installed. This wouldallow fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere. SeeMalfunction Indicator Lamp on page 208.

The TIGHTEN GAS CAP message will appear onthe Driver Information Center (DIC) display ifthe fuel cap is not reinstalled properly. See DICWarnings and Messages on page 220 formore information.

{CAUTION:

If a fire starts while you are refueling,do not remove the nozzle. Shut off theflow of fuel by shutting off the pump orby notifying the station attendant. Leavethe area immediately.

Notice: If you need a new fuel cap, be sure toget the right type. Your dealer can get onefor you. If you get the wrong type, it may notfit properly. This may cause your malfunctionindicator lamp to light and may damageyour fuel tank and emissions system. SeeMalfunction Indicator Lamp on page 208.


Filling a Portable Fuel Container

{CAUTION:

Never fill a portable fuel container while itis in your vehicle. Static electricitydischarge from the container can ignite thegasoline vapor. You can be badly burnedand your vehicle damaged if this occurs.To help avoid injury to you and others:

• Dispense gasoline only into approvedcontainers.

• Do not fill a container while it is inside avehicle, in a vehicle’s trunk, pickupbed, or on any surface other than theground.

• Bring the fill nozzle in contact with theinside of the fill opening beforeoperating the nozzle. Contact shouldbe maintained until the filling iscomplete.

• Do not smoke while pumping gasoline.• Do not use a cellular phone while

pumping gasoline.

Checking Things Underthe Hood

{CAUTION:

An electric fan under the hood can start upand injure you even when the engine is notrunning. Keep hands, clothing, and toolsaway from any underhood electric fan.

{CAUTION:

Things that burn can get on hot engineparts and start a fire. These includeliquids like fuel, oil, coolant, brake fluid,windshield washer and other fluids, andplastic or rubber. You or others could beburned. Be careful not to drop or spillthings that will burn onto a hot engine.


Hood ReleaseTo open the hood, do the following:

1. Pull the hoodrelease lever withthis symbol onit. It is located insidethe vehicle on thelower left side of theinstrument panel.

2. Then go to the front of the vehicle and find thesecondary hood release lever. The lever islocated under the front edge of the grille nearthe center. Move the release lever to the sideand raise the hood.

Before closing the hood, be sure all the fillercaps are on properly. Then pull the hood downand close it firmly.


Engine Compartment OverviewWhen you open the hood on the 3.6L V6 engine, you will see the following:


A. Underhood Fuse Block. See Underhood FuseBlock on page 455.

B. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir. See“Adding Washer Fluid” under WindshieldWasher Fluid on page 380.

C. Battery. See Battery on page 385.D. Passenger Compartment Air Filter. See

Passenger Compartment Air Filter on page 195.E. Power Steering Fluid Reservoir. See Power

Steering Fluid on page 379.F. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “When to Add Engine

Oil” under Engine Oil on page 360.

G. Engine Oil Dipstick (Out of View). See“Checking Engine Oil” under Engine Oil onpage 360.

H. Brake Master Cylinder Reservoir. See “BrakeFluid” under Brakes on page 381.

I. Engine Coolant Surge Tank and Pressure Cap.See Coolant Surge Tank Pressure Cap onpage 371 and Cooling System on page 374.

J. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter. See Engine AirCleaner/Filter on page 365.


When you open the hood on the 4.6L V8 engine, you will see the following:


A. Underhood Fuse Block. See Underhood FuseBlock on page 455.

B. Battery. See Battery on page 385.C. Passenger Compartment Air Filter. See

Passenger Compartment Air Filter on page 195.D. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir. See

“Adding Washer Fluid” under WindshieldWasher Fluid on page 380.

E. Power Steering Fluid Reservoir. See PowerSteering Fluid on page 379.

F. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “When to Add EngineOil” under Engine Oil on page 360.

G. Engine Oil Dipstick (Out of View). See“Checking Engine Oil” under Engine Oil onpage 360.

H. Brake Master Cylinder Reservoir. See “BrakeFluid” under Brakes on page 381.

I. Engine Coolant Surge Tank and Pressure Cap.See Coolant Surge Tank Pressure Cap onpage 371 and Cooling System on page 374.

J. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter. See Engine AirCleaner/Filter on page 365.


Engine Oil

Your vehicle may havean oil pressure light onthe instrument cluster.

There is also an OIL PRESSURE LOW STOPENGINE message on the Driver InformationCenter (DIC). If the light and/or message appears,check the engine oil level right away. For moreinformation, see “OIL PRESSURE LOW STOPENGINE” under DIC Warnings and Messages onpage 220 and Oil Pressure Light on page 211.You should check the engine oil level regularly;this is an added reminder.

Checking Engine OilIt is a good idea to check the engine oil every timeyou get fuel. In order to get an accurate reading,the oil must be warm and the vehicle must beon level ground.

The engine oil dipstick handle is a yellow loop.See Engine Compartment Overview on page 356for the location of the engine oil dipstick.

1. Turn off the engine and give the oilseveral minutes to drain back into the oil pan.If you do not do this, the oil dipstick mightnot show the actual level.

2. Pull out the dipstick and clean it with a papertowel or cloth, then push it back in all theway. Remove it again, keeping the tip down,and check the level.


When to Add Engine Oil

If the oil is below the cross-hatched area at the tipof the dipstick, you need to add at least onequart/liter of oil. But you must use the right kind.This section explains what kind of oil to use.For engine oil crankcase capacity, see Capacitiesand Specifications on page 464.

Notice: Do not add too much oil. If the enginehas so much oil that the oil level gets abovethe cross-hatched area that shows theproper operating range, the engine could bedamaged.

See EngineCompartment Overviewon page 356 for thelocation of the engineoil fill cap.

Be sure to add enough oil to put the levelsomewhere in the proper operating range. Push thedipstick all the way back in when you are through.

3.6L V6 Engine

4.6L V8 Engine


What Kind of Engine Oil to Use

Look for two things:

• GM4718M

Your vehicle’s engine requires a special oilmeeting GM Standard GM4718M. Oils meetingthis standard may be identified as synthetic.However, not all synthetic oils will meetthis GM standard. Look for and use only an oilthat meets GM Standard GM4718M.

Notice: If you use oils that do not have theGM4718M Standard designation, you can causeengine damage not covered by your warranty.• SAE 5W-30

As shown in the viscosity chart, SAE 5W-30 isbest for your vehicle.These numbers on an oil container show itsviscosity, or thickness. Do not use otherviscosity oils such as SAE 20W-50.

Oils meeting theserequirements shouldalso have the starburstsymbol on thecontainer. This symbolindicates that the oilhas been certified by theAmerican PetroleumInstitute (API).


Look for this on the oil container, and use onlythose oils that are identified as meeting GMStandard GM4718M and have the starburst symbolon the front of the oil container.

Your vehicle’s engine is filled at the factory with aMobil 1® synthetic oil, which meets allrequirements for your vehicle.

Substitute Engine Oil: When adding oil to maintainengine oil level, oil meeting GM StandardGM4718M may not be available. You can addsubstitute oil designated SAE 5W-30 withthe starburst symbol at all temperatures. Substituteoil not meeting GM Standard GM4718M shouldnot be used for an oil change.

Engine Oil AdditivesDo not add anything to the oil. The recommendedoils with the starburst symbol that meet GMstandards are all you need for good performanceand engine protection.

Engine Oil Life System

When to Change Engine OilYour vehicle has a computer system that lets youknow when to change the engine oil and filter.This is based on engine revolutions and enginetemperature, and not on mileage. Based on drivingconditions, the mileage at which an oil changewill be indicated can vary considerably. For the oillife system to work properly, you must reset thesystem every time the oil is changed.

When the system has calculated that oil life hasbeen diminished, it will indicate that an oil changeis necessary. A CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOONmessage in the DIC will come on. Change the oilas soon as possible within the next 600 miles(1 000 km). It is possible that, if you are drivingunder the best conditions, the oil life system maynot indicate that an oil change is necessary forover a year.


However, the engine oil and filter must be changedat least once a year and at this time the systemmust be reset. Your dealer has GM-trained servicepeople who will perform this work using genuineGM parts and reset the system. It is also importantto check the oil regularly and keep it at theproper level.

If the system is ever reset accidentally, you mustchange the oil at 3,000 miles (5 000 km) sinceyour last oil change. Remember to reset the oil lifesystem whenever the oil is changed.

After the oil has been changed, the CHANGEENGINE OIL SOON message and the oillife indicator must be reset.

How to Reset the Engine Oil LifeSystemThe Engine Oil Life System calculates when tochange the engine oil and filter based on vehicleuse. Anytime your oil is changed, reset thesystem so it can calculate when the next oilchange is required. If a situation occurs where youchange your oil prior to a CHANGE ENGINEOIL SOON message coming on, reset the system.

Always reset the engine oil life to 100% afterevery oil change. It will not reset itself. To resetthe Engine Oil Life System, do the following:

1. Display the OIL LIFE REMAINING on theDIC. See DIC Warnings and Messages onpage 220.

2. Press and hold the SET/RESET button onthe DIC for more than five seconds. The oillife will change to 100%.

If the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON messagecomes back on when you start your vehicle,the Engine Oil Life System has not reset.Repeat the procedure.


What to Do with Used OilUsed engine oil contains certain elements that maybe unhealthy for your skin and could even causecancer. Do not let used oil stay on your skin for verylong. Clean your skin and nails with soap andwater, or a good hand cleaner. Wash or properlydispose of clothing or rags containing used engineoil. See the manufacturer’s warnings about the useand disposal of oil products.

Used oil can be a threat to the environment. If youchange your own oil, be sure to drain all the oil fromthe filter before disposal. Never dispose of oil byputting it in the trash, pouring it on the ground, intosewers, or into streams or bodies of water. Instead,recycle it by taking it to a place that collects usedoil. If you have a problem properly disposing ofused oil, ask your dealer, a service station, or alocal recycling center for help.

Engine Air Cleaner/Filter

The engine air cleaner/filter is in the enginecompartment on the driver’s side of the vehicle,near the front. See Engine Compartment Overviewon page 356 for more information on location.

4.6L V8 shown, 3.6L V6 similar


When to Inspect the EngineAir Cleaner/FilterInspect the air cleaner/filter at the Maintenance IIintervals and replace it at the first oil changeafter each 50,000 mile (83 000 km) interval.See Scheduled Maintenance on page 471 formore information. If you are driving in dusty/dirtyconditions, inspect the filter at each engineoil change.

How to Inspect the EngineAir Cleaner/FilterTo inspect the air cleaner/filter remove the filterfrom the vehicle and lightly shake the filter torelease loose dust and dirt. If the filter remainscaked with dirt, a new filter is required.To inspect or replace the filter, do the following:1. Remove the two screws located on the top

of the cover.2. Disconnect the coolant recovery hose so that

it is not going across the top of the engineair cleaner/filter.

3. The two sides of the airbox are hinged at thebottom. Open the airbox by pushing the top ofthe airbox cover toward the engine.

4. Remove the air filter by lifting it straight upthrough the opening in the airbox.

5. Inspect or replace the engine air cleaner/filter.See Normal Maintenance Replacement Partson page 482 for the correct part numberfor the filter.

6. Reinstall the cover by reversingSteps 1 through 4.

{CAUTION:

Operating the engine with the air cleaner/filter off can cause you or others to beburned. The air cleaner not only cleans theair; it helps to stop flames if the enginebackfires. If it is not there and the enginebackfires, you could be burned. Do notdrive with it off, and be careful working onthe engine with the air cleaner/filter off.

Notice: If the air cleaner/filter is off, a backfirecan cause a damaging engine fire. And, dirtcan easily get into your engine, which willdamage it. Always have the air cleaner/filterin place when you are driving.


Automatic Transmission Fluid

How to Check AutomaticTransmission FluidIt is not necessary to check the transmissionfluid level. A transmission fluid leak is the onlyreason for fluid loss. If a leak occurs, takethe vehicle to the dealership service departmentand have it repaired as soon as possible.

There is a special procedure for checking andchanging the transmission fluid. Becausethis procedure is difficult, you should have thisdone at the dealership service department.Contact your dealer for additional information orthe procedure can be found in the service manual.To purchase a service manual, see ServicePublications Ordering Information on page 505.

Notice: Use of the incorrect automatictransmission fluid may damage your vehicle,and the damages may not be covered byyour warranty. Always use the automatictransmission fluid listed in RecommendedFluids and Lubricants on page 480.

Change the fluid and filter at the intervals listed inAdditional Required Services on page 473, andbe sure to use the fluid listed in RecommendedFluids and Lubricants on page 480.


Engine CoolantThe cooling system in your vehicle is filled withDEX-COOL® engine coolant. This coolant isdesigned to remain in your vehicle for five years or150,000 miles (240 000 km), whichever occursfirst, if you add only DEX-COOL® extendedlife coolant.

The following explains your cooling system andhow to add coolant when it is low. If you havea problem with engine overheating, see EngineOverheating on page 372.

A 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water andDEX-COOL® coolant will:

• Give freezing protection down to−34°F (−37°C).

• Give boiling protection up to 265°F (129°C).

• Protect against rust and corrosion.

• Help keep the proper engine temperature.

• Allow the warning lights and gages to work asthey should.

Notice: Using coolant other than DEX-COOL®

may cause premature engine, heater core, orradiator corrosion. In addition, the enginecoolant may require changing sooner, at thefirst maintenance service after each30,000 miles (50 000 km) or 24 months,whichever occurs first. Any repairs would notbe covered by your warranty. Always useDEX-COOL® (silicate-free) coolant in yourvehicle.


What to UseUse a mixture of one-half clean, drinkable waterand one-half DEX-COOL® coolant which willnot damage aluminum parts. If you use this coolantmixture, you do not need to add anything else.

{CAUTION:

Adding only plain water to your coolingsystem can be dangerous. Plain water, orsome other liquid such as alcohol, canboil before the proper coolant mixture will.Your vehicle’s coolant warning system isset for the proper coolant mixture. Withplain water or the wrong mixture, yourengine could get too hot but you wouldnot get the overheat warning. Your enginecould catch fire and you or others couldbe burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,drinkable water and DEX-COOL® coolant.

Notice: If you use an improper coolantmixture, your engine could overheat and bebadly damaged. The repair cost would not becovered by your warranty. Too much waterin the mixture can freeze and crack the engine,radiator, heater core, and other parts.

If you have to add coolant more than once ortwice a year, have your dealer check yourcooling system.

Notice: If you use extra inhibitors and/oradditives in your vehicle’s cooling system, youcould damage your vehicle. Use only theproper mixture of the engine coolant listed inthis manual for the cooling system. SeeRecommended Fluids and Lubricants onpage 480 for more information.


Checking Coolant

The coolant surge tank and pressure cap arelocated on the driver’s side of the vehicle, towardthe rear of the engine compartment. SeeEngine Compartment Overview on page 356 formore information on location.

{CAUTION:

Turning the surge tank pressure cap whenthe engine and radiator are hot can allowsteam and scalding liquids to blow outand burn you badly. Never turn the surgetank pressure cap — even a little — whenthe engine and radiator are hot.

The vehicle must be on a level surface. Whenyour engine is cold, the coolant level should be atthe FULL COLD/FROID line on the side of thesurge tank. Follow the arrow from the top ofthe tank down the side to the horizontal mark.


Adding CoolantIf you need more coolant, add the properDEX-COOL® coolant mixture at the surge tank,but only when the engine is cool.

{CAUTION:

You can be burned if you spill coolant onhot engine parts. Coolant containsethylene glycol, and it will burn if theengine parts are hot enough. Do not spillcoolant on a hot engine.

When replacing the pressure cap, make sure it ishand-tight and fully seated.

Coolant Surge Tank Pressure Cap

Notice: If the pressure cap is not tightlyinstalled, coolant loss and possible enginedamage may occur. Be sure the cap is properlyand tightly secured.

The coolant surge tank pressure cap must be fullyinstalled on the coolant surge tank. See EngineCompartment Overview on page 356 for moreinformation on location.


Engine OverheatingThere are two engine hot messages that could bedisplayed in the Driver Information Center (DIC).See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 220for more information.

If the engine is overheating, then you will find acoolant temperature gage and a coolant warninglight on the instrument panel. See EngineCoolant Temperature Gage on page 207 andEngine Coolant Temperature Warning Light onpage 206 for more information.

If Steam Is Coming From Your Engine

{CAUTION:

Steam from an overheated engine canburn you badly, even if you just open thehood. Stay away from the engine if yousee or hear steam coming from it. Turnit off and get everyone away from the



vehicle until it cools down. Wait untilthere is no sign of steam or coolantbefore you open the hood.

If you keep driving when the vehiclesengine is overheated, the liquids in it cancatch fire. You or others could be badlyburned. Stop your engine if it overheats,and get out of the vehicle until theengine is cool.

See Overheated Engine ProtectionOperating Mode on page 374 forinformation on driving to a safe placein an emergency.

Notice: If your engine catches fire becauseyou keep driving with no coolant, your vehiclecan be badly damaged. The costly repairswould not be covered by your warranty. SeeOverheated Engine Protection Operating Modeon page 374 for information on driving to asafe place in an emergency.


If No Steam Is Coming From YourEngineAn overheat warning, can indicate a seriousproblem.

If you get an engine overheat warning but see orhear no steam, the problem might not be tooserious. Sometimes the engine can get a little toohot when you:

• Climb a long hill on a hot day.

• Stop after high-speed driving.

• Idle for long periods in traffic.

• Tow a trailer.

If you get the overheat warning with no sign ofsteam, try this for a minute or so:

1. In heavy traffic, let the engine idle inNEUTRAL (N) while stopped. If it is safe todo so, pull off the road, shift to PARK (P)or NEUTRAL (N) and let the engine idle.

2. Set the climate controls to the highest heatsetting and fan speed and open the windows,as necessary.

If the coolant warning light is not on or the coolanttemperature gage does not indicate the engineis overheating, you can drive. Just to be safe, driveslower for about 10 minutes. If the warnings donot come back on, drive normally.

If the warnings continue and you have not stopped,pull over, stop, and park the vehicle right away.

If there is still no sign of steam, idle the engine forthree minutes while parked. If the warnings arestill indicated, turn off the engine and get everyoneout of the vehicle until it cools down. Also, see“Overheated Engine Protection Operating Mode”later in this section.

You might decide not to lift the hood but to getservice help right away.


Overheated Engine ProtectionOperating ModeThis operating mode allows your vehicle to bedriven to a safe place in an emergency. Should anhot engine condition exist, an overheat protectionmode which alternates firing groups of cylindershelps prevent engine damage. In this mode, there isa loss in power and engine performance. Drivingextended miles (km) and/or towing a trailer in theoverheat protection mode should be avoided.

Notice: After driving in the overheated engineprotection operating mode, to avoid enginedamage, allow the engine to cool beforeattempting any repair. The engine oil will beseverely degraded. Repair the cause of coolantloss and change the oil. See Engine Oil onpage 360.

Cooling SystemWhen you decide it is safe to lift the hood, here iswhat you will see:

A. Electric Engine Cooling FansB. Coolant Surge Tank and Pressure Cap

Some vehicles may be equipped with anengine driven fan, as well as the electricpusher fans (A) which are located behind thevehicle’s grille.

3.6L V6 shown, 4.6L V8 similar


{CAUTION:

An electric engine cooling fan under thehood can start up even when the engineis not running and can injure you. Keephands, clothing, and tools away from anyunderhood electric fan.

If the coolant inside the coolant surge tank isboiling, do not do anything else until it cools down.The vehicle should be parked on a level surface.

When the engine is cold, the coolant level shouldbe at or slightly above the FULL COLD/FROID lineon the side of the coolant surge tank. If it is not, youmay have a leak at the pressure cap or in theradiator hoses, heater hoses, radiator, water pumpor somewhere else in the cooling system.

{CAUTION:

Heater and radiator hoses, and otherengine parts, can be very hot. Do nottouch them. If you do, you can be burned.

Do not run the engine if there is a leak. Ifyou run the engine, it could lose allcoolant. That could cause an engine fire,and you could be burned. Get any leakfixed before you drive the vehicle.

If there seems to be no leak, with the engine on,check to see if the electric engine cooling fansare running. If the engine is overheating, both fansshould be running. If they are not, your vehicleneeds service.

Notice: Engine damage from running yourengine without coolant is not covered by yourwarranty. See Overheated Engine ProtectionOperating Mode on page 374 for information ondriving to a safe place in an emergency.


Notice: Using coolant other than DEX-COOL®

may cause premature engine, heater core,or radiator corrosion. In addition, the enginecoolant could require changing sooner, at30,000 miles (50 000 km) or 24 months,whichever occurs first. Any repairs would notbe covered by your warranty. Always useDEX-COOL® (silicate-free) coolant in yourvehicle.

How to Add Coolant to the CoolantSurge TankIf you have not found a problem yet, check to seeif coolant is visible in the surge tank. If coolantis visible but the coolant level is not at the FULLCOLD/FROID line on the side of the coolantsurge tank, add a 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkablewater and DEX-COOL® coolant at the coolantsurge tank, but be sure the cooling system,including the coolant surge tank pressure cap, iscool before you do it. See Engine Coolant onpage 368 for more information.

{CAUTION:

Steam and scalding liquids from a hotcooling system can blow out and burnyou badly. They are under pressure, and ifyou turn the coolant surge tank pressurecap — even a little — they can come out athigh speed. Never turn the cap when thecooling system, including the coolantsurge tank pressure cap, is hot. Wait forthe cooling system and coolant surgetank pressure cap to cool if you ever haveto turn the pressure cap.


{CAUTION:

Adding only plain water to your coolingsystem can be dangerous. Plain water, orsome other liquid such as alcohol, canboil before the proper coolant mixture will.Your vehicle’s coolant warning system isset for the proper coolant mixture. Withplain water or the wrong mixture, yourengine could get too hot but you wouldnot get the overheat warning. Your enginecould catch fire and you or others couldbe burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,drinkable water and DEX-COOL® coolant.

Notice: In cold weather, water can freeze andcrack the engine, radiator, heater core andother parts. Use the recommended coolant andthe proper coolant mixture.

{CAUTION:

You can be burned if you spill coolant onhot engine parts. Coolant containsethylene glycol and it will burn if theengine parts are hot enough. Do not spillcoolant on a hot engine.

If no coolant is visible in the surge tank, addcoolant as follows:

1. You can remove the coolant surge tankpressure cap when the cooling system,including the coolant surge tank pressure capand upper radiator hose, is no longer hot.Turn the pressure cap slowly counterclockwise(left) about one-quarter turn and then stop.If you hear a hiss, wait for that to stop. A hissmeans there is still some pressure left.


2. Then keep turning the pressure cap slowly,and remove it.

3. Fill the coolant surge tank with the propermixture, to slightly above the FULLCOLD/FROID line on the side of the coolantsurge tank.


4. With the coolant surge tank pressure cap off,start the engine and let it run until you canfeel the upper radiator hose getting hot. Theupper radiator hose is the largest of thehoses which comes out of the radiator, on thepassenger’s side of the vehicle. Watch outfor the engine cooling fans.By this time, the coolant level inside thecoolant surge tank may be lower. If the levelis lower, add more of the proper mixtureto the coolant surge tank until the levelreaches the FULL COLD/FROID line on theside of the coolant surge tank.

5. Then replace the pressure cap. Be sure thepressure cap is hand-tight and fully seated.

Recheck the coolant level in the bottle next timeyou use your vehicle to insure the system isfull when cold. See Engine Coolant on page 368.

Power Steering Fluid

See EngineCompartment Overviewon page 356 forreservoir location.

When to Check Power Steering FluidIt is not necessary to regularly check powersteering fluid unless you suspect there is a leak inthe system or you hear an unusual noise. Afluid loss in this system could indicate a problem.Have the system inspected and repaired.


How to Check Power Steering FluidTo check the power steering fluid, do the following:

1. Turn the key off and let the enginecompartment cool down.

2. Wipe the cap and the top of the reservoir clean.

3. Unscrew the cap and wipe the dipstick with aclean rag.

4. Replace the cap and completely tighten it.

5. Remove the cap again and look at thefluid level on the dipstick.

The level should be within the HOT mark. Ifnecessary, add only enough fluid to bring the levelwithin the mark.

What to UseTo determine what kind of fluid to use, seeRecommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 480.Always use the proper fluid. Failure to use theproper fluid can cause leaks and damage hosesand seals.

Windshield Washer Fluid

What to UseWhen you need windshield washer fluid, be sure toread the manufacturer’s instructions before use. Ifyou will be operating your vehicle in an area wherethe temperature may fall below freezing, use a fluidthat has sufficient protection against freezing.

Adding Washer FluidThe WASHER FLUID LOW ADD FLUID messagewill appear on the Driver Information Center (DIC)when the fluid level is low. See DIC Warnings andMessages on page 220 for more information.

Open the cap with thewasher symbol on it.Add washer fluiduntil the tank is full. SeeEngine CompartmentOverview on page 356for reservoir location.


Notice:• When using concentrated washer fluid,

follow the manufacturer’s instructionsfor adding water.

• Do not mix water with ready-to-use washerfluid. Water can cause the solution tofreeze and damage your washer fluid tankand other parts of the washer system.Also, water does not clean as wellas washer fluid.

• Fill your washer fluid tank onlythree-quarters full when it is very cold.This allows for expansion if freezingoccurs, which could damage the tank if itis completely full.

• Do not use engine coolant (antifreeze) inyour windshield washer. It can damageyour washer system and paint.

Brakes

Brake Fluid

Your brake mastercylinder reservoir isfilled with DOT-3 brakefluid. See EngineCompartment Overviewon page 356 for thelocation of the reservoir.

There are only two reasons why the brake fluidlevel in the reservoir might go down. The firstis that the brake fluid goes down to an acceptablelevel during normal brake lining wear. Whennew linings are put in, the fluid level goes backup. The other reason is that fluid is leaking out ofthe brake system. If it is, you should have yourbrake system fixed, since a leak means thatsooner or later your brakes will not work well, orwill not work at all.


So, it is not a good idea to top off your brake fluid.Adding brake fluid will not correct a leak. If youadd fluid when your linings are worn, then you willhave too much fluid when you get new brakelinings. You should add or remove brake fluid, asnecessary, only when work is done on thebrake hydraulic system.

{CAUTION:

If you have too much brake fluid, it can spillon the engine. The fluid will burn if theengine is hot enough. You or others couldbe burned, and your vehicle could bedamaged. Add brake fluid only when workis done on the brake hydraulic system. See“Checking Brake Fluid” in this section.

When the brake fluid falls to a low level, the brakewarning light will come on. See Brake SystemWarning Light on page 204.

Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determinewhen to check your brake fluid. See ScheduledMaintenance on page 471.

Checking Brake FluidYou can check the brake fluid without taking offthe cap.

Look at the brake fluidreservoir. The fluid levelshould be aboveMIN. If it is not, haveyour brake systemchecked to see if thereis a leak.

After work is done on the brake hydraulic system,make sure the level is above the MIN but notover the MAX mark.


What to AddWhen you do need brake fluid, DOT-3 brake fluid isrecommended for use. DOT-4 brake fluid is alsocompatible with your vehicle’s brake system parts.However, if you choose to use DOT-4 fluid, it isrecommended that you flush your brake hydraulicsystem and refill it with new DOT-4 fluid at a regularmaintenance service every two years. SeeAdditional Required Services on page 473. Usenew brake fluid from a sealed container only. SeeRecommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 480.

Always clean the brake fluid reservoir cap and thearea around the cap before removing it. Thiswill help keep dirt from entering the reservoir.

{CAUTION:

With the wrong kind of fluid in the brakesystem, the brakes may not work well, orthey may not even work at all. This couldcause a crash. Always use the properbrake fluid.

Notice:• Using the wrong fluid can badly damage

brake system parts. For example, just afew drops of mineral-based oil, suchas engine oil, in the brake system candamage brake system parts so badly thatthey will have to be replaced. Do notlet someone put in the wrong kind of fluid.

• If you spill brake fluid on your vehicle’spainted surfaces, the paint finish canbe damaged. Be careful not to spill brakefluid on your vehicle. If you do, wash itoff immediately. See Washing Your Vehicleon page 447.


Brake WearYour vehicle has four-wheel disc brakes.

Disc brake pads have built-in wear indicators thatmake a high-pitched warning sound when thebrake pads are worn and new pads are needed.The sound may come and go or be heard allthe time your vehicle is moving, except when youare pushing on the brake pedal firmly.

{CAUTION:

The brake wear warning sound means thatsoon the brakes will not work well. Thatcould lead to an accident. When you hearthe brake wear warning sound, have yourvehicle serviced.

Notice: Continuing to drive with worn-outbrake pads could result in costly brake repair.

Some driving conditions or climates may cause abrake squeal when the brakes are first appliedor lightly applied. This does not mean somethingis wrong with your brakes.

Properly torqued wheel nuts are necessary to helpprevent brake pulsation. When tires are rotated,inspect brake pads for wear and evenly tightenwheel nuts in the proper sequence to GM torquespecifications.

Brake linings should always be replaced ascomplete axle sets.

Brake Pedal TravelSee your dealer if the brake pedal does not returnto normal height, or if there is a rapid increase inpedal travel. This could be a sign of brake trouble.

Brake AdjustmentEvery time you make a brake stop, your discbrakes adjust for wear.


Replacing Brake System PartsThe braking system on a vehicle is complex. Itsmany parts have to be of top quality and work welltogether if the vehicle is to have really goodbraking. Your vehicle was designed and tested withtop-quality GM brake parts. When you replace partsof your braking system — for example, when yourbrake linings wear down and you need new onesput in — be sure you get new approved GMreplacement parts. If you do not, your brakes mayno longer work properly. For example, if someoneputs in brake linings that are wrong for your vehicle,the balance between your front and rear brakes canchange — for the worse. The braking performanceyou have come to expect can change in many otherways if someone puts in the wrong replacementbrake parts.

BatteryYour vehicle has a maintenance free battery.When it is time for a new battery, get one that hasthe replacement number shown on the originalbattery’s label. We recommend an ACDelco®

replacement battery. See Engine CompartmentOverview on page 356 for battery location.Warning: Battery posts, terminals, and relatedaccessories contain lead and lead compounds,chemicals known to the State of Californiato cause cancer and reproductive harm. Washhands after handling.


Vehicle StorageIf you are not going to drive your vehicle for25 days or more, remove the black, negative (−)cable from the battery. This will help keep thebattery from running down.

{CAUTION:

Batteries have acid that can burn you andgas that can explode. You can be badlyhurt if you are not careful. See JumpStarting on page 386 for tips on workingaround a battery without getting hurt.

Jump StartingIf your vehicle’s battery has run down, you maywant to use another vehicle and some jumpercables to start your vehicle. Be sure to usethe following steps to do it safely.

{CAUTION:

Batteries can hurt you. They can bedangerous because:

• They contain acid that can burn you.• They contain gas that can explode or

ignite.• They contain enough electricity to

burn you.

If you do not follow these steps exactly,some or all of these things can hurt you.


Notice: Ignoring these steps could result incostly damage to your vehicle that wouldnot be covered by your warranty.

Trying to start your vehicle by pushing orpulling it will not work, and it could damageyour vehicle.

1. Check the other vehicle. It must have a12-volt battery with a negative ground system.

Notice: If the other vehicle’s system is not a12-volt system with a negative ground,both vehicles can be damaged. Only usevehicles with 12-volt systems with negativegrounds to jump start your vehicle.

2. Get the vehicles close enough so the jumpercables can reach, but be sure the vehicles arenot touching each other. If they are, it couldcause a ground connection you do notwant. You would not be able to start yourvehicle and the bad grounding could damagethe electrical systems.

To avoid the possibility of the vehicles rolling,set the parking brake firmly on both vehiclesinvolved in the jump start procedure. Putan automatic transmission in PARK (P) or amanual transmission in NEUTRAL beforesetting the parking brake.

Notice: If you leave your radio or otheraccessories on during the jump startingprocedure, they could be damaged. The repairswould not be covered by your warranty.Always turn off your radio and otheraccessories when jump starting your vehicle.

3. Turn off the ignition on both vehicles.Unplug unnecessary accessories plugged intothe cigarette lighter or the accessory poweroutlets. Turn off the radio and all lampsthat are not needed. This will avoid sparksand help save both batteries. And it couldsave the radio.


4. Open the hoods and locate the positive (+)and negative (−) terminal locations of theother vehicle, as well as the positive (+)terminal location on your vehicle’s battery.See Engine Compartment Overview onpage 356 for more information on the locationof the battery.

Your vehicle has a remote negative (−) groundlocation, as shown in the illustration. It islocated between the battery and theunderhood fuse block. You should always usethis remote ground location, instead of theterminal on the battery.


Notice: If you connect a negative cable to theECM, ECM mounting bracket, or any cablesthat attach to the ECM bracket, you maydamage the ECM. Always attach the negativecable to your vehicle’s remote negative groundlocation, instead of the ECM, ECM bracket,or any cables attached to the ECM bracket.

{CAUTION:

An electric fan can start up even when theengine is not running and can injure you.Keep hands, clothing and tools away fromany underhood electric fan.

{CAUTION:

Using a match near a battery can causebattery gas to explode. People have beenhurt doing this, and some have beenblinded. Use a flashlight if you needmore light.

Be sure the battery has enough water.You do not need to add water to thebattery installed in your new vehicle. Butif a battery has filler caps, be sure theright amount of fluid is there. If it is low,add water to take care of that first. If youdo not, explosive gas could be present.

Battery fluid contains acid that can burnyou. Do not get it on you. If youaccidentally get it in your eyes or on yourskin, flush the place with water and getmedical help immediately.


{CAUTION:

Fans or other moving engine parts caninjure you badly. Keep your hands awayfrom moving parts once the engine isrunning.

5. Check that the jumper cables do not haveloose or missing insulation. If they do, youcould get a shock. The vehicles couldbe damaged too.Before you connect the cables, here are somebasic things you should know. Positive (+)will go to positive (+) or to a remotepositive (+) terminal if the vehicle has one.Negative (−) will go to a heavy, unpaintedmetal engine part or to a remote negative (−)terminal if the vehicle has one.

Do not connect positive (+) to negative (−) oryou will get a short that would damagethe battery and maybe other parts too. And donot connect the negative (−) cable to thenegative (−) terminal on the dead batterybecause this can cause sparks.

6. Connect the red positive (+) cable to thepositive (+) terminal of the dead battery.Use a remote positive (+) terminal ifthe vehicle has one.


7. Do not let the other end touch metal. Connectit to the positive (+) terminal of the goodbattery. Use a remote positive (+) terminal ifthe vehicle has one.

8. Now connect the black negative (−) cable tothe negative terminal of the good battery. Usea remote negative (−) terminal if the vehiclehas one.Do not let the other end touch anything until thenext step. The other end of the negative (−)cable does not go to the dead battery. It goes toa heavy, unpainted metal engine part or to aremote negative (−) terminal on the vehicle withthe dead battery.

9. Connect the other end of the negative (−) cableat least 18 inches (45 cm) away from the deadbattery, but not near engine parts that move.The electrical connection is just as good there,and the chance of sparks getting back to thebattery is much less.Use a remote negative (−) terminal if thevehicle has one. Your vehicle’s remotenegative (−) ground location is for this purpose.

10. Now start the vehicle with the good batteryand run the engine for a while.

11. Try to start the vehicle that had the deadbattery. If it will not start after a few tries, itprobably needs service.


Notice: If the jumper cables are connected orremoved in the wrong order, electrical shortingmay occur and damage the vehicle. The repairswould not be covered by your warranty. Alwaysconnect and remove the jumper cables in thecorrect order, making sure that the cables donot touch each other or other metal.

A. Heavy, Unpainted Metal Engine Part orRemote Negative (−) Terminal

B. Good Battery or Remote Positive (+) andRemote Negative (−) Terminals

C. Dead Battery or Remote Positive (+) Terminal

To disconnect the jumper cables from bothvehicles, do the following:

1. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable fromthe vehicle that had the dead battery.

2. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable fromthe vehicle with the good battery.

3. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from thevehicle with the good battery.

4. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from theother vehicle.

All-Wheel DriveAll of the lubricant checks in this section apply toyour vehicle. If you have an all-wheel-drivevehicle, there is an additional system that needlubrication.

Transfer CaseWhen to Check LubricantIt is not necessary to regularly check the transfercase fluid unless you suspect there is a leakor you hear an unusual noise. A fluid loss couldindicate a problem. Have it inspected and repaired.

Jumper Cable Removal


How to Check Lubricant

A. Drain PlugB. Fill Plug

To get an accurate reading, the vehicle should beon a level surface.

If the level is below the bottom of the filler plughole, located on the transfer case, you’ll need toadd some lubricant. Add enough lubricant toraise the level to the bottom of the filler plug hole.Use care not to overtighten the plug.

What to UseRefer to the Maintenance Schedule to determinewhat kind of lubricant to use. See RecommendedFluids and Lubricants on page 480.


Rear AxleWhen to Check LubricantIt is not necessary to regularly check rear axle fluidunless you suspect there is a leak or you hear anunusual noise. A fluid loss could indicate a problem.Have it inspected and repaired.



If the level is below the bottom of the filler plughole, located on the rear axle, you’ll need to addsome lubricant. Add enough lubricant to raisethe level to the bottom of the filler plug hole.



Front AxleWhen to Check and Change LubricantIt is not necessary to regularly check the front axlefluid unless you suspect there is a leak or youhear an unusual noise. A fluid loss could indicatea problem. Have it inspected and repaired.


A. Drain PlugB. Filler Plug


If the level is below the bottom of the filler plughole, located on the front axle, you may needto add some lubricant.



Bulb ReplacementIt is recommended that all bulbs be replaced byyour dealer.

High Intensity Discharge (HID)Lighting

{CAUTION:

The low beam high intensity dischargelighting system operates at a very highvoltage. If you try to service any of thesystem components, you could beseriously injured. Have your dealer or aqualified technician service them.

Your vehicle has HID headlamps. After yourvehicle’s HID headlamp bulb has been replaced,you may notice that the beam is a slightly differentshade than it was originally. This is normal.

Halogen Bulbs

{CAUTION:

Halogen bulbs have pressurized gasinside and can burst if you drop orscratch the bulb. You or others could beinjured. Be sure to read and follow theinstructions on the bulb package.


Windshield Wiper BladeReplacementWindshield wiper blades should be inspected forwear or cracking. See Scheduled Maintenanceon page 471 for more information.

It’s a good idea to clean or replace the wiperblade assembly on a regular basis or when worn.For proper windshield wiper blade length andtype, see Normal Maintenance Replacement Partson page 482.

To replace the wiper blade assembly, do thefollowing:

1. Turn the ignition to ON with the engine off.

2. Turn on the windshield wipers and turn themoff again when the wipers are in the out-wipeposition. The driver’s side blade will bestraight up and down on the windshield.

3. Pull the windshield wiper assembly away fromthe windshield.

4. Lift the wiper blade assembly up so it is in aT-shaped position. You should be able to seea tab.

5. Squeeze the tab together and pull the wiperblade assembly down far enough to release itfrom the J-hooked end of the wiper arm. Slidethe assembly away from the arm.Allowing the wiper blade arm to touch thewindshield when no wiper blade is installedcould damage the windshield. Any damage thatoccurs would not be covered by your warranty.Do not allow the wiper blade arm to touch thewindshield.


6. Replace the blade with a new one.

7. Reinstall the wiper blade assembly by slidingit over the wiper arm to engage the J-hookedend. Pull up on the assembly to lock it intoplace.

8. Repeat the steps for the other wiper.

Rear Wiper Blade ReplacementTo replace the rear wiper blade follow the stepslisted previously.

TiresYour new vehicle comes with high-quality tiresmade by a leading tire manufacturer. If you everhave questions about your tire warranty and whereto obtain service, see your GM Warranty booklet fordetails. For additional information refer to the tiremanufacturer’s booklet included with your vehicle.


{CAUTION:

• Poorly maintained and improperly usedtires are dangerous.

• Overloading your tires can causeoverheating as a result of too muchfriction. You could have an air-out anda serious accident. See Loading YourVehicle on page 322.

• Underinflated tires pose the samedanger as overloaded tires. Theresulting accident could cause seriousinjury. Check all tires frequently tomaintain the recommended pressure.Tire pressure should be checked whenyour tires are cold. See Inflation - TirePressure on page 407.



• Overinflated tires are more likelyto be cut, punctured, or brokenby a sudden impact — such as whenyou hit a pothole. Keep tires at therecommended pressure.

• Worn, old tires can cause accidents. Ifyour tread is badly worn, or if your tireshave been damaged, replace them.

See High-Speed Operation on page 409 forinflation pressure adjustment for highspeed driving.


Low-Profile Performance TireIf your vehicle has P255/50R20 size tires, they areclassified as low-profile performance tires. Thesetires are designed for very responsive driving onwet or dry pavement. You may also notice moreroad noise with low-profile performance tires andthat they tend to wear faster.

Notice: If your vehicle has low-profile tires,they are more susceptible to damage from roadhazards or curb impact than standard profiletires. Tire and/or wheel assembly damage canoccur when coming into contact with roadhazards like, potholes, or sharp edged objects,or when sliding into a curb. Your GM warrantydoes not cover this type of damage. Keep tiresset to the correct inflation pressure and, whenpossible avoid contact with curbs, potholes,and other road hazards.

Winter TiresIf you expect to drive on snow or ice coveredroads often, you may want to get winter tires foryour vehicle. All season tires provide good overallperformance on most surfaces but they may

not offer the traction you would like or the samelevel of performance as winter tires on snow or icecovered roads.

Winter tires, in general, are designed for increasedtraction on snow and ice covered roads. Withwinter tires, there may be decreased dryroad traction, increased road noise, and shortertread life. After switching to winter tires, be alert forchanges in vehicle handling and braking.

See your dealer for details regarding winter tireavailability and proper tire selection. Also,see Buying New Tires on page 416.

If you choose to use winter tires:

• Use tires of the same brand and tread type onall four wheel positions.

• Use only radial ply tires of the same size, loadrange, and speed rating as the originalequipment tires.

Winter tires with the same speed rating as youroriginal equipment tires may not be available for H,V, W, Y, and ZR speed rated tires. If you choosewinter tires with a lower speed rating, neverexceed the tire’s maximum speed capability.


Tire Sidewall LabelingUseful information about a tire is molded into itssidewall. The examples below show a typicalpassenger vehicle tire and a compact spare tiresidewall.

(A) Tire Size: The tire size is a combination ofletters and numbers used to define a particulartire’s width, height, aspect ratio, construction type,and service description. See the “Tire Size”illustration later in this section for more detail.

(B) TPC Spec (Tire Performance CriteriaSpecification): Original equipment tires designedto GM’s specific tire performance criteria havea TPC specification code molded onto the sidewall.GM’s TPC specifications meet or exceed allfederal safety guidelines.

(C) DOT (Department of Transportation): TheDepartment of Transportation (DOT) codeindicates that the tire is in compliance with theU.S. Department of Transportation Motor VehicleSafety Standards.

Passenger (P-Metric) Tire Example


(D) Tire Identification Number (TIN): The lettersand numbers following DOT (Department ofTransportation) code is the Tire IdentificationNumber (TIN). The TIN shows the manufacturerand plant code, tire size, and date the tirewas manufactured. The TIN is molded onto bothsides of the tire, although only one side may havethe date of manufacture.

(E) Tire Ply Material: The type of cord andnumber of plies in the sidewall and under the tread.

(F) Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG): Tiremanufacturers are required to grade tires based onthree performance factors: treadwear, traction, andtemperature resistance. For more information seeUniform Tire Quality Grading on page 419.

(G) Maximum Cold Inflation Load Limit:Maximum load that can be carried and themaximum pressure needed to support that load.

(A) Temporary Use Only: The compact sparetire or temporary use tire has a tread life ofapproximately 3,000 miles (5 000 km) and shouldnot be driven at speeds over 65 mph (105 km/h).The compact spare tire is for emergency use whena regular road tire has lost air and gone flat. Ifyour vehicle has a compact spare tire, seeCompact Spare Tire on page 442 and If a TireGoes Flat on page 423.

Compact Spare Tire Example


(B) Tire Ply Material: The type of cord andnumber of plies in the sidewall and under the tread.

(C) Tire Identification Number (TIN): The lettersand numbers following the DOT (Department ofTransportation) code is the Tire IdentificationNumber (TIN). The TIN shows the manufacturerand plant code, tire size, and date the tirewas manufactured. The TIN is molded onto bothsides of the tire, although only one side may havethe date of manufacture.

(D) Maximum Cold Inflation Load Limit:Maximum load that can be carried and themaximum pressure needed to support that load.

(E) Tire Inflation: The temporary use tire orcompact spare tire should be inflated to 60 psi(420 kPa). For more information on tire pressureand inflation see Inflation - Tire Pressure onpage 407.

(F) Tire Size: A combination of letters andnumbers define a tire’s width, height, aspect ratio,construction type, and service description. Theletter T as the first character in the tire size meansthe tire is for temporary use only.

(G) TPC Spec (Tire Performance CriteriaSpecification): Original equipment tires designedto GM’s specific tire performance criteria havea TPC specification code molded onto the sidewall.GM’s TPC specifications meet or exceed allfederal safety guidelines.

Tire SizeThe following illustration shows an example of atypical passenger vehicle tire size.

(A) Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: The UnitedStates version of a metric tire sizing system. Theletter P as the first character in the tire sizemeans a passenger vehicle tire engineered tostandards set by the U.S. Tire and RimAssociation.


(B) Tire Width: The three-digit number indicatesthe tire section width in millimeters from sidewallto sidewall.

(C) Aspect Ratio: A two-digit number thatindicates the tire height-to-width measurements.For example, if the tire size aspect ratio is60, as shown in item C of the illustration, it wouldmean that the tire’s sidewall is 60 percent ashigh as it is wide.

(D) Construction Code: A letter code is used toindicate the type of ply construction in the tire.The letter R means radial ply construction;the letter D means diagonal or bias plyconstruction; and the letter B means belted-biasply construction.

(E) Rim Diameter: Diameter of the wheel ininches.

(F) Service Description: These charactersrepresent the load range and speed rating of thetire. The load index represents the load carrycapacity a tire is certified to carry. The load indexcan range from 1 to 279. The speed rating isthe maximum speed a tire is certified to carry aload. Speed ratings range from A to Z.

Tire Terminology and Definitions

Air Pressure: The amount of air inside the tirepressing outward on each square inch of thetire. Air pressure is expressed in poundsper square inch (psi) or kilopascal (kPa).

Accessory Weight: This means the combinedweight of optional accessories. Some examples ofoptional accessories are, automatictransmission/transaxle, power steering, powerbrakes, power windows, power seats, andair conditioning.

Aspect Ratio: The relationship of a tire’s heightto its width.

Belt: A rubber coated layer of cords that islocated between the plies and the tread. Cordsmay be made from steel or other reinforcingmaterials.

Bead: The tire bead contains steel wires wrappedby steel cords that hold the tire onto the rim.

Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which the pliesare laid at alternate angles less than 90 degreesto the centerline of the tread.


Cold Tire Pressure: The amount of air pressurein a tire, measured in pounds per square inch(psi) or kilopascals (kPa) before a tire has built upheat from driving. See Inflation - Tire Pressureon page 407.

Curb Weight: This means the weight of a motorvehicle with standard and optional equipmentincluding the maximum capacity of fuel, oil, andcoolant, but without passengers and cargo.

DOT Markings: A code molded into the sidewallof a tire signifying that the tire is in compliancewith the U.S. Department of Transportation (DOT)motor vehicle safety standards. The DOT codeincludes the Tire Identification Number (TIN),an alphanumeric designator which can also identifythe tire manufacturer, production plant, brand,and date of production.

GVWR: Gross Vehicle Weight Rating. SeeLoading Your Vehicle on page 322.

GAWR FRT: Gross Axle Weight Rating for thefront axle. See Loading Your Vehicle on page 322.

GAWR RR: Gross Axle Weight Rating for the rearaxle. See Loading Your Vehicle on page 322.

Intended Outboard Sidewall: The side ofan asymmetrical tire, that must always faceoutward when mounted on a vehicle.

Kilopascal (kPa): The metric unit for air pressure.

Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire: A tire used onlight duty trucks and some multipurpose passengervehicles.

Load Index: An assigned number ranging from1 to 279 that corresponds to the load carryingcapacity of a tire.

Maximum Inflation Pressure: The maximum airpressure to which a cold tire may be inflated.The maximum air pressure is molded ontothe sidewall.

Maximum Load Rating: The load rating for a tireat the maximum permissible inflation pressurefor that tire.


Maximum Loaded Vehicle Weight: The sum ofcurb weight, accessory weight, vehicle capacityweight, and production options weight.

Normal Occupant Weight: The number ofoccupants a vehicle is designed to seat multipliedby 150 lbs (68 kg). See Loading Your Vehicleon page 322.

Occupant Distribution: Designated seatingpositions.

Outward Facing Sidewall: The side of anasymmetrical tire that has a particular side thatfaces outward when mounted on a vehicle.The side of the tire that contains a whitewall, bearswhite lettering, or bears manufacturer, brand,and/or model name molding that is higheror deeper than the same moldings on the othersidewall of the tire.

Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: A tire used onpassenger cars and some light duty trucks andmultipurpose vehicles.

Recommended Inflation Pressure: Vehiclemanufacturer’s recommended tire inflationpressure as shown on the tire placard. SeeInflation - Tire Pressure on page 407 and LoadingYour Vehicle on page 322.

Radial Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which the plycords that extend to the beads are laid at 90degrees to the centerline of the tread.

Rim: A metal support for a tire and upon whichthe tire beads are seated.

Sidewall: The portion of a tire between the treadand the bead.

Speed Rating: An alphanumeric code assignedto a tire indicating the maximum speed atwhich a tire can operate.

Traction: The friction between the tire and theroad surface. The amount of grip provided.

Tread: The portion of a tire that comes intocontact with the road.


Treadwear Indicators: Narrow bands, sometimescalled wear bars, that show across the tread of atire when only 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) of tread remains.See When It Is Time for New Tires on page 416.

UTQGS (Uniform Tire Quality GradingStandards): A tire information system thatprovides consumers with ratings for a tire’straction, temperature, and treadwear. Ratings aredetermined by tire manufacturers usinggovernment testing procedures. The ratings aremolded into the sidewall of the tire. See UniformTire Quality Grading on page 419.

Vehicle Capacity Weight: The number ofdesignated seating positions multiplied by 150 lbs(68 kg) plus the rated cargo load. See LoadingYour Vehicle on page 322.

Vehicle Maximum Load on the Tire: Load on anindividual tire due to curb weight, accessoryweight, occupant weight, and cargo weight.

Vehicle Placard: A label permanently attached toa vehicle showing the vehicle’s capacity weightand the original equipment tire size andrecommended inflation pressure. See “Tire andLoading Information Label” under LoadingYour Vehicle on page 322.

Inflation - Tire PressureTires need the correct amount of air pressure tooperate effectively.

Notice: Do not let anyone tell you thatunder-inflation or over-inflation is all right. It isnot. If your tires do not have enough air(under-inflation), you can get the following:• Too much flexing

• Too much heat

• Tire overloading

• Premature or irregular wear

• Poor handling

• Reduced fuel economy

If your tires have too much air (over-inflation),you can get the following:• Unusual wear

• Poor handling

• Rough ride

• Needless damage from road hazards


A Tire and Loading Information label is attached tothe vehicle’s center pillar (B-pillar). This labelshows your vehicle’s original equipment tires andthe correct inflation pressures for your tireswhen they are cold. The recommended cold tireinflation pressure, shown on the label, is theminimum amount of air pressure needed tosupport your vehicle’s maximum load carryingcapacity.

For additional information regarding how muchweight your vehicle can carry, and an example ofthe Tire and Loading Information label, seeLoading Your Vehicle on page 322. How you loadyour vehicle affects vehicle handling and ridecomfort. Never load your vehicle with more weightthan it was designed to carry.

When to CheckCheck your tires once a month or more. Do notforget to check the compact spare tire, it should beat 60 psi (420 kPa). For additional informationregarding the compact spare tire, see CompactSpare Tire on page 442.

How to CheckUse a good quality pocket-type gage to check tirepressure. You cannot tell if your tires areproperly inflated simply by looking at them. Radialtires may look properly inflated even when theyare under-inflated. Check the tire’s inflationpressure when the tires are cold. Cold means yourvehicle has been sitting for at least three hoursor driven no more than 1 mile (1.6 km).

Remove the valve cap from the tire valve stem.Press the tire gage firmly onto the valve toget a pressure measurement. If the cold tireinflation pressure matches the recommendedpressure on the Tire and Loading Informationlabel, no further adjustment is necessary. If theinflation pressure is low, add air until you reach therecommended amount.

If you overfill the tire, release air by pushing onthe metal stem in the center of the tire valve.Re-check the tire pressure with the tire gage.

Be sure to put the valve caps back on the valvestems. They help prevent leaks by keeping out dirtand moisture.


High-Speed Operation

{CAUTION:

Driving at high speeds, 100 mph (160 km/h)or higher, puts an additional strain on tires.Sustained high-speed driving causesexcessive heat build up and can causesudden tire failure. You could have a crashand you or others could be killed. Somehigh-speed rated tires require inflationpressure adjustment for high speedoperation. When speed limits and roadconditions are such that a vehicle can bedriven at high speeds, make sure the tiresare rated for high speed operation, inexcellent condition, and set to thecorrect cold tire inflation pressure for thevehicle load.

If you will be driving at high speeds, speeds of100 mph (160 km/h) or higher, where it is legal, setthe cold inflation pressure to the maximum inflationpressure shown on the tire sidewall, or 38 psi(265 kPa), whichever is lower. See the examplefollowing. When you end this high-speed driving,return the tires to the cold inflation pressure shownon the Tire and Loading Information label. SeeLoading Your Vehicle on page 322.

Example:

You will find the maximum load and inflationpressure molded on the tire’s sidewall, in smallletters, near the rim flange. It will read somethinglike this: Maximum load 690 kg (1521 lbs)300 kPa (44 psi) Max. Press.

For this example, you would set the inflationpressure for high-speed driving at38 psi (265 kPa).


Tire Pressure Monitor SystemThe Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) usesradio and sensor technology to check tire pressurelevels. If your vehicle has this feature, sensorsare mounted on each tire and wheel assembly,except for the compact spare tire and wheel. TheTPMS sensors monitor the air pressure in yourvehicle’s tires and transmit the tire pressurereadings to a receiver located in the vehicle. TheTPMS is designed to alert the driver if a lowpressure condition exists.

Using the Driver Information Center (DIC), thedriver can also check tire pressure levels using theDIC. For additional information and details aboutthe DIC operation and displays see DIC Controlsand Displays on page 215 and DIC Warningsand Messages on page 220.

When a low tire pressure condition is detected,the TPMS illuminates the low tire pressure warningsymbol located in the instrument panel cluster,and at the same time a DIC message to check thepressure in a specific tire also appears on theDIC display. The low tire pressure warning symboland the CHECK TIRE PRESSURE message onthe DIC display appear at each ignition cycle untilthe tires are inflated to the correct inflationpressure.

You may notice, during cooler weather conditions,the low tire pressure warning light and DICwarning message may come on when the vehicleis first started, and then turn off as you start todrive. This could be an early indicator that the airpressure in the tire(s) is getting low and needsto be inflated to the proper pressure.


Each tire, including the spare (if provided), shouldbe checked monthly when cold and inflated tothe inflation pressure recommended by the vehiclemanufacturer on the vehicle placard or tireinflation pressure label. (If your vehicle has tires ofa different size than the size indicated on thevehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, youshould determine the proper tire inflationpressure for those tires.)

As an added safetyfeature, your vehiclehas been equipped witha tire pressuremonitoring system(TPMS) that illuminatesa low tire pressuretelltale when oneor more of your tires issignificantlyunder-inflated.

Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltaleilluminates, you should stop and check your tiresas soon as possible, and inflate them to theproper pressure. Driving on a significantlyunder-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat andcan lead to tire failure. Under-inflation alsoreduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and mayaffect the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.

Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute forproper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’sresponsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, evenif under-inflation has not reached the level to triggerillumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale.

Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMSmalfunction indicator to indicate when thesystem is not operating properly. The TPMSmalfunction indicator is combined with the low tirepressure telltale. When the system detects amalfunction, the telltale will flash for approximatelyone minute and then remain continuouslyilluminated. This sequence will continue uponsubsequent vehicle start-ups as long as themalfunction exists.


When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, thesystem may not be able to detect or signal lowtire pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions mayoccur for a variety of reasons, including theinstallation of replacement or alternate tires orwheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS fromfunctioning properly. Always check the TPMSmalfunction telltale after replacing one or moretires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that thereplacement or alternate tires and wheels allowthe TPMS to continue to function properly.

The Tire and Loading Information label shows thesize of your vehicle’s original tires and theirrecommended cold inflation pressures. SeeLoading Your Vehicle on page 322, for the locationof the tire and loading information label. Alsosee Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 407.

Your vehicle’s TPMS can warn you about a lowtire pressure condition but it does not replacenormal tire maintenance. See Tire Inspection andRotation on page 414 and Tires on page 398.

Notice: Do not use a tire sealant if yourvehicle has Tire Pressure Monitors. The liquidsealant can damage the tire pressure monitorsensors.

TPM Sensor Identification CodesEach TPMS sensor has a unique identificationcode. Any time you replace one or more ofthe TPMS sensors or rotate your vehicle’s tires,the identification codes need to be matched to thenew tire/wheel position. The sensors arematched to the tire/wheel positions in the followingorder: driver’s side front tire, passenger’s sidefront tire, passenger’s side rear tire, and driver’sside rear tire using a TPMS diagnostic tool.See your dealer for service.

The TPMS sensors can also be matched to eachtire/wheel position by increasing or decreasingthe tire’s air pressure. If increasing the tire’sair pressure, do not exceed the maximum inflationpressure indicated on the tire’s sidewall.

You have two minutes to match the first tire/wheelposition, and five minutes overall, to match allfour tire/wheel positions. If it takes longer than twominutes, to match the first tire and wheel, ormore than five minutes to match all four tire andwheel positions, the matching process stopsand you need to start over.


The TPM matching process is outlined below:

1. Set the parking brake.

2. Turn the ignition switch to ON with theengine off.

3. Using the DIC, press the vehicle informationbutton until the PRESS V TO RELEARNTIRE POSITIONS message displays.

4. Press the Set/Reset button. The horn soundstwice to indicate the TPMS receiver is ready,and the TIRE LEARNING ACTIVE messagedisplays. The TPMS low tire warning lightflashes throughout the matching procedure.

5. Start with the driver’s side front tire.

6. Remove the valve cap from the valve stem.Activate the TPM sensor by increasing ordecreasing the tire’s air pressure for10 seconds, or until a horn chirp sounds. Thehorn chirp, which may take up to 30 seconds tosound, confirms that the sensor identificationcode has been matched to this tire position. Todecrease the tire’s air-pressure use the pointedend of the valve cap, a pencil-style air pressuregage, or a key.

7. Proceed to the passenger’s side front tire, andrepeat the procedure in Step 6.

8. Proceed to the passenger’s side rear tire, andrepeat the procedure in Step 6.

9. Proceed to the driver’s side rear tire, andrepeat the procedure in Step 6.

10. After hearing the confirming horn chirp, forthe driver’s side rear tire, the horn soundstwo more times to signal the tire learningmodel is no longer active. Turn the ignitionswitch to OFF.

11. Set all four tires to the recommended airpressure level as indicated on the tire andloading information label.

12. Put the valve caps back on the valve stems.

The spare tire does not have a TPMS sensor.If you replace one of the road tires with the spare,the SERVICE TIRE MONITOR SYSTEMmessage displays on the DIC screen. Thismessage should go off once you re-install theroad tire containing the TPMS sensor.


Federal Communications Commission(FCC) and Industry and Science CanadaThis device complies with Part 15 of the FCCRules. Operation is subject to the followingtwo conditions:







Tire Inspection and RotationTire rotation is not recommended if your vehiclehas the following tire combinations:

• P235/65R17 size tires on the front wheels andP255/60R17 size tires on the rear wheels.

• P235/60R18 size tires on the front wheels andP255/55R18 size tires on the rear wheels.

Different tire sizes should not be rotated front torear. Each tire and wheel should only be usedin its original front or rear position.

Tire rotation is recommended if your vehicle isequipped with P255/50R20 size tires on allfour wheel positions. These tires should be rotatedevery 5,000 to 8,000 miles (8 000 to 13 000 km)

Any time you notice unusual wear, rotate your tiresas soon as possible and check wheel alignment.Also check for damaged tires or wheels. SeeWhen It Is Time for New Tires on page 416 andWheel Replacement on page 421 for moreinformation.


The purpose of regular rotation is to achieve moreuniform wear for all tires on the vehicle. Thefirst rotation is the most important. See ScheduledMaintenance on page 471.

When rotating P255/50R20 size tires, always usethe correct rotation pattern shown here.

Do not include the compact spare tire in the tirerotation.

After the tires have been rotated, adjust the frontand rear inflation pressures as shown on theTire and Loading Information label.

Vehicles that have the Tire Pressure MonitorSystem (TPMS) will need to have the TPMSsensors reset after a tire rotation, see TirePressure Monitor System on page 410.

Make certain that all wheel nuts are properlytightened. See “Wheel Nut Torque” underCapacities and Specifications on page 464.

{CAUTION:

Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the parts towhich it is fastened, can make wheel nutsbecome loose after time. The wheel couldcome off and cause an accident. Whenyou change a wheel, remove any rust ordirt from places where the wheel attachesto the vehicle. In an emergency, you canuse a cloth or a paper towel to do this;but be sure to use a scraper or wire brushlater, if needed, to get all the rust or dirtoff. See Changing a Flat Tire on page 424.


When It Is Time for New Tires

One way to tell when itis time for new tires isto check the treadwearindicators, which willappear when your tireshave only 1/16 inch(1.6 mm) or less of treadremaining. Somecommercial truck tiresmay not have treadwearindicators.

You need a new tire if any of the followingstatements are true:

• You can see the indicators at three or moreplaces around the tire.

• You can see cord or fabric showing throughthe tire’s rubber.

• The tread or sidewall is cracked, cut orsnagged deep enough to show cord or fabric.

• The tire has a bump, bulge, or split.

• The tire has a puncture, cut, or other damagethat cannot be repaired well because of thesize or location of the damage.

Buying New TiresGM has developed and matched specific tires foryour vehicle. The original equipment tiresinstalled on your vehicle, when it was new, weredesigned to meet General Motors TirePerformance Criteria Specification (TPC spec)system rating. If you need replacement tires, GMstrongly recommends that you get tires withthe same TPC Spec rating. This way, your vehiclewill continue to have tires that are designed togive the same performance and vehicle safety,during normal use, as the original tires.

GM’s exclusive TPC Spec system considers over adozen critical specifications that impact the overallperformance of your vehicle, including brakesystem performance, ride and handling, tractioncontrol, and tire pressure monitoring performance.


GM’s TPC Spec number is molded onto the tire’ssidewall by the tire manufacturer. If the tires havean all-season tread design, the TPC spec numberwill be followed by an MS for mud and snow. SeeTire Sidewall Labeling on page 401 for additionalinformation.

Winter tires with the same speed rating as youroriginal equipment tires may not be available for H,V, W and ZR speed rated tires. If you choose snowtires with a lower speed rating, never exceed thetire’s maximum speed capability.

{CAUTION:

Mixing tires could cause you to losecontrol while driving. If you mix tires ofdifferent sizes (other than those originallyinstalled on your vehicle), brands, ortypes (radial and bias-belted tires), thevehicle may not handle properly, and youcould have a crash. Using tires ofdifferent sizes (other than those originally



installed on your vehicle), brands, ortypes may also cause damage to yourvehicle. Be sure to use the correct size,brand, and type of tires on all wheels. It isall right to drive with your vehicle’scompact spare temporarily, it wasdeveloped for use on your vehicle. SeeCompact Spare Tire on page 442.

{CAUTION:

If you use bias-ply tires on your vehicle,the wheel rim flanges could developcracks after many miles of driving. A tireand/or wheel could fail suddenly, causinga crash. Use only radial-ply tires with thewheels on your vehicle.


If you must replace your vehicle’s tires with thosethat do not have a TPC Spec number, makesure they are the same size, load range, speedrating, and construction type (radial andbias-belted tires) as your vehicle’s original tires.

Vehicles that have a tire pressure monitoringsystem may give an inaccurate low-pressurewarning if non-TPC spec rated tires are installedon your vehicle. Non-TPC Spec rated tiresmay give a low-pressure warning that is higher orlower than the proper warning level you wouldget with TPC Spec rated tires. See Tire PressureMonitor System on page 410.

Your vehicle’s original equipment tires are listedon the Tire and Loading Information Label.This label is attached to the vehicle’s center pillar(B-pillar). See Loading Your Vehicle on page 322,for more information about the Tire and LoadingInformation Label and its location on your vehicle.

Different Size Tires and WheelsIf you add wheels or tires that are a different sizethan your original equipment wheels and tires,this may affect the way your vehicle performs,

including its braking, ride and handlingcharacteristics, stability, and resistance to rollover.Additionally, if your vehicle has electronicsystems such as, anti-lock brakes, traction control,and electronic stability control, the performanceof these systems can be affected.

{CAUTION:

If you add different sized wheels, yourvehicle may not provide an acceptablelevel of performance and safety if tires notrecommended for those wheels areselected. You may increase the chancethat you will crash and suffer seriousinjury. Only use GM specific wheel andtire systems developed for your vehicle,and have them properly installed by a GMcertified technician.

See Buying New Tires on page 416 andAccessories and Modifications on page 347 foradditional information.


Uniform Tire Quality GradingQuality grades can be found where applicable onthe tire sidewall between tread shoulder andmaximum section width. For example:

Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature AThe following information relates to the systemdeveloped by the United States National HighwayTraffic Safety Administration (NHTSA), whichgrades tires by treadwear, traction, andtemperature performance. This applies only tovehicles sold in the United States. The grades aremolded on the sidewalls of most passenger cartires. The Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG)system does not apply to deep tread, winter-typesnow tires, space-saver, or temporary usespare tires, tires with nominal rim diameters of10 to 12 inches (25 to 30 cm), or to somelimited-production tires.

While the tires available on General Motorspassenger cars and light trucks may vary withrespect to these grades, they must also conformto federal safety requirements and additionalGeneral Motors Tire Performance Criteria (TPC)standards.

TreadwearThe treadwear grade is a comparative ratingbased on the wear rate of the tire when testedunder controlled conditions on a specifiedgovernment test course. For example, a tiregraded 150 would wear one and a half (1.5) timesas well on the government course as a tiregraded 100. The relative performance of tiresdepends upon the actual conditions of their use,however, and may depart significantly fromthe norm due to variations in driving habits, servicepractices, and differences in road characteristicsand climate.

Traction – AA, A, B, CThe traction grades, from highest to lowest, areAA, A, B, and C. Those grades represent the tire’sability to stop on wet pavement as measuredunder controlled conditions on specifiedgovernment test surfaces of asphalt and concrete.A tire marked C may have poor tractionperformance.

Warning: The traction grade assigned to this tireis based on straight-ahead braking tractiontests, and does not include acceleration, cornering,hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.


Temperature – A, B, CThe temperature grades are A (the highest), B,and C, representing the tire’s resistance tothe generation of heat and its ability to dissipateheat when tested under controlled conditions on aspecified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustainedhigh temperature can cause the material of the tireto degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessivetemperature can lead to sudden tire failure.The grade C corresponds to a level of performancewhich all passenger car tires must meet underthe Federal Motor Vehicle Safety StandardNo. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levelsof performance on the laboratory test wheelthan the minimum required by law.

Warning: The temperature grade for this tire isestablished for a tire that is properly inflatedand not overloaded. Excessive speed,underinflation, or excessive loading, eitherseparately or in combination, can cause heatbuildup and possible tire failure.

Wheel Alignment and Tire BalanceThe tires and wheels on your vehicle were alignedand balanced carefully at the factory to give you thelongest tire life and best overall performance.Adjustments to wheel alignment and tire balancingwill not be necessary on a regular basis. However,if you notice unusual tire wear or your vehiclepulling to one side or the other, the alignment mayneed to be checked. If you notice your vehiclevibrating when driving on a smooth road, your tiresand wheels may need to be rebalanced. See yourdealer for proper diagnosis.


Wheel ReplacementReplace any wheel that is bent, cracked, or badlyrusted or corroded. If wheel nuts keep comingloose, the wheel, wheel bolts, and wheel nutsshould be replaced. If the wheel leaks air, replace it(except some aluminum wheels, which cansometimes be repaired). See your dealer if any ofthese conditions exist.

Your dealer will know the kind of wheel you need.Each new wheel should have the sameload-carrying capacity, diameter, width, offset andbe mounted the same way as the one it replaces.If you need to replace any of your wheels, wheelbolts, or wheel nuts, replace them only with newGM original equipment parts. This way, you will besure to have the right wheel, wheel bolts, and wheelnuts for your vehicle.

{CAUTION:

Using the wrong replacement wheels,wheel bolts, or wheel nuts on your vehiclecan be dangerous. It could affect thebraking and handling of your vehicle, makeyour tires lose air and make you losecontrol. You could have a collision inwhich you or others could be injured.Always use the correct wheel, wheel bolts,and wheel nuts for replacement.

Notice: The wrong wheel can also causeproblems with bearing life, brake cooling,speedometer or odometer calibration, headlampaim, bumper height, vehicle ground clearance,and tire or tire chain clearance to the body andchassis.See Changing a Flat Tire on page 424 for moreinformation.


Used Replacement Wheels

{CAUTION:

Putting a used wheel on your vehicle isdangerous. You cannot know how it hasbeen used or how far it has been driven. Itcould fail suddenly and cause a crash. Ifyou have to replace a wheel, use a newGM original equipment wheel.

Tire Chains

{CAUTION:

If your vehicle has P255/50R20 size tires,do not use tire chains. They can damageyour vehicle because there is not enoughclearance. Tire chains used on a vehicle



without the proper amount of clearancecan cause damage to the brakes,suspension, or other vehicle parts. Thearea damaged by the tire chains couldcause you to lose control of your vehicleand you or others may be injured in acrash.

Use another type of traction device only ifits manufacturer recommends it for useon your vehicle and tire size combinationand road conditions. Follow thatmanufacturer’s instructions.To help avoiddamage to your vehicle, drive slowly,readjust or remove the device if it iscontacting your vehicle, and do not spinthe vehicle’s wheels.

If you do find traction devices that will fit,install them on the rear tires.


Notice: If your vehicle has a tire size otherthan P255/50R20 use tire chains only wherelegal and only when you must. Use chains thatare the proper size for your tires. Installthem on the tires of the rear axle. Do not usechains on the tires of the front axle. Tightenthem as tightly as possible with the endssecurely fastened. Drive slowly and follow thechain manufacturer’s instructions. If youcan hear the chains contacting your vehicle,stop and retighten them. If the contactcontinues, slow down until it stops. Drivingtoo fast or spinning the wheels with chains onwill damage your vehicle.

If a Tire Goes FlatIt is unusual for a tire to blowout while you aredriving, especially if you maintain your vehicle’stires properly. If air goes out of a tire, it ismuch more likely to leak out slowly. But if youshould ever have a blowout, here are a few tipsabout what to expect and what to do:

If a front tire fails, the flat tire will create a dragthat pulls the vehicle toward that side. Take yourfoot off the accelerator pedal and grip thesteering wheel firmly. Steer to maintain laneposition, and then gently brake to a stop well outof the traffic lane.

A rear blowout, particularly on a curve, acts muchlike a skid and may require the same correctionyou would use in a skid. In any rear blowoutremove your foot from the accelerator pedal. Getthe vehicle under control by steering the wayyou want the vehicle to go. It may be very bumpyand noisy, but you can still steer. Gently braketo a stop, well off the road if possible.


{CAUTION:

Lifting a vehicle and getting under it to domaintenance or repairs is dangerouswithout the appropriate safety equipmentand training. The jack provided with yourvehicle is designed only for changing aflat tire. If it is used for anything else, youor others could be badly injured or killedif the vehicle slips off the jack. Use thejack provided with your vehicle only forchanging a flat tire.

If a tire goes flat, the next part shows how to usethe jacking equipment to change a flat tire safely.

Changing a Flat TireIf a tire goes flat, avoid further tire and wheeldamage by driving slowly to a level place. Turnon your vehicle’s hazard warning flashers.See Hazard Warning Flashers on page 166 formore information.

{CAUTION:

Changing a tire can be dangerous. Thevehicle can slip off the jack and roll overor fall on you or other people. You andthey could be badly injured or even killed.Find a level place to change your tire. Tohelp prevent the vehicle from moving:

1. Set the parking brake firmly.

2. Put the shift lever in PARK (P).




3. Turn off the engine and do not restartwhile the vehicle is raised.

4. Do not allow passengers to remain inthe vehicle.

To be even more certain the vehicle willnot move, you should put blocks at thefront and rear of the tire farthest awayfrom the one being changed. That wouldbe the tire, on the other side, at theopposite end of the vehicle.

When your vehicle has a flat tire, use the followingexample as a guide to assist you in the placementof wheel blocks.

The following information will tell you next how touse the jack and change a tire.


Removing the Spare Tire and ToolsThe equipment you will need is located in therear of the vehicle. To access the equipment, dothe following:

1. Remove the storage bin to access the jackif your vehicle has the cargo managementsystem.If your vehicle has the third row seat, removethe head rest storage tray to access the jack.

2. Turn the wing nut (A) holding the jack (B) (andstorage tray, if applicable) counterclockwiseand remove it.

3. Remove the jack and wheel wrench (C).


Removing the Spare TireThe compact spare tire is located under thevehicle, ahead of the rear bumper. See CompactSpare Tire on page 442 for more informationabout the compact spare.

To remove the spare tire from the vehicle, do thefollowing:

A. Wheel WrenchB. CableC. RetainerD. Compact Spare Tire

1. Open the liftgate. See Power Liftgate onpage 104 for more information.

2. Open the storage compartment door of thecargo management system that is nearestthe liftgate and remove the container.

3. Attach the wheel wrench (A) into the hoistshaft.

4. Turn the wheel wrench counterclockwise tolower the spare tire to the ground. Continueturning the wrench until the spare tire (D) canbe pulled out from under the vehicle.


5. Tilt the retainer (C) and slip it through thewheel opening to remove the spare tirefrom the cable (B).

6. Turn the wrench clockwise until you feel twoslips or hear two clicks after removing thespare tire to raise the cable back up.Do not store a full-size or a flat road tire underthe vehicle. See Storing a Flat or Spare Tireand Tools on page 439.

To continue changing the flat tire, see Removingthe Flat Tire and Installing the Spare Tire onpage 429.

If the spare tire will not lower, the secondary latchmay be engaged causing the tire not to lower.Do the following to check the cable:

1. Check under thevehicle to see if thecable is visible. Ifit is not visible, seeSecondary LatchSystem onpage 436.


2. If it is visible, first try to tighten the cable byturning the wheel wrench clockwise until youhear two clicks or feel it skip twice. Youcannot over-tighten the cable.

3. Loosen the cable then by turning the wrenchcounterclockwise three or four turns.

4. Tighten the cable all the way and then loosenit at least two times, if the spare tire has notlowered.If the spare tire did lower to the ground,continue with Step 4 under Removing theSpare Tire and Tools on page 426.

If you still cannot lower the spare tire to theground, see Secondary Latch System onpage 436.

Removing the Flat Tire andInstalling the Spare TireTo remove the flat tire and install the spare, dothe following:

1. Loosen the wheel nuts, but do not removethem yet, using the wheel wrench. Turn thehandle about 180 degrees, then flip the handleback to the starting position. This avoidstaking the wrench off the lug nut for each turn.


2. Find the jackinglocation using thehoisting notcheslocated in the plasticmolding. Thenotches in theplastic molding aremarked with atriangle shape tohelp you find them.

3. Attach the wheel wrench to the jack.

{CAUTION:

Getting under a vehicle when it is jackedup is dangerous. If the vehicle slips offthe jack you could be badly injured orkilled. Never get under a vehicle when it issupported only by a jack.

{CAUTION:

Raising your vehicle with the jackimproperly positioned can damage thevehicle and even make the vehicle fall.To help avoid personal injury and vehicledamage, be sure to fit the jack lift headinto the proper location before raising thevehicle.


{CAUTION:

Lifting a vehicle and getting under it to domaintenance or repairs is dangerouswithout the appropriate safety equipmentand training. The jack provided with yourvehicle is designed only for changing aflat tire. If it is used for anything else, youor others could be badly injured or killedif the vehicle slips off the jack. Use thejack provided with your vehicle only forchanging a flat tire.

4. Turn the wheel wrench clockwise to raise thejack lift head until the jack just fits under thevehicle.

5. Raise the jack by turning the wheel wrenchclockwise until the slots in the jack head fitinto the metal flange located behind thetriangle on the plastic molding as shown.

Notice: Using a jack to raise the vehiclewithout positioning it correctly could damageyour vehicle. When raising your vehicle ona jack, be sure to position it correctly under theframe and avoid contact with the plasticmolding.


6. Put the compact spare tire near you.

7. Raise the vehicle by turning the wheel wrenchclockwise. Raise the vehicle far enough offthe ground for the compact spare tire tofit under the vehicle.

8. Remove all the wheel nuts and take off theflat tire.

9. Remove any rust ordirt from the wheelbolts, mountingsurfaces and sparewheel.


{CAUTION:

Rust or dirt on the wheel, or on the partsto which it is fastened, can make thewheel nuts become loose after time. Thewheel could come off and cause anaccident. When you change a wheel,remove any rust or dirt from the placeswhere the wheel attaches to the vehicle. Inan emergency, you can use a cloth or apaper towel to do this; but be sure to usea scraper or wire brush later, if needed, toget all the rust or dirt off.

{CAUTION:

Never use oil or grease on studs or nuts.If you do, the nuts might come loose.Your wheel could fall off, causing aserious accident.

10. Install the spare tire.

11. Put the wheel nuts back on with the roundedend of the nuts toward the wheel.

12. Tighten each nut by hand until the wheel isheld against the hub.


13. Lower the vehicle by attaching the wheelwrench to the jack and turning the wrenchcounterclockwise. Lower the jack completely.

14. Tighten the wheelnuts firmly in acrisscross sequence,as shown.

Do not try to put a wheel cover on the compactspare tire. It will not fit. Store the wheel coversecurely in the rear of the vehicle until you have theflat tire repaired or replaced.


{CAUTION:

Incorrect wheel nuts or improperlytightened wheel nuts can cause the wheelto come loose and even come off. Thiscould lead to an accident.Be sure to usethe correct wheel nuts. If you have toreplace them, be sure to get new GMoriginal equipment wheel nuts. Stopsomewhere as soon as you can and havethe nuts tightened with a torque wrench tothe proper torque specification. SeeCapacities and Specifications on page 464for wheel nut torque specification.

Notice: Improperly tightened wheel nuts canlead to brake pulsation and rotor damage.To avoid expensive brake repairs, evenlytighten the wheel nuts in the proper sequenceand to the proper torque specification.

Notice: Wheel covers will not fit on yourcompact spare. If you try to put a wheel coveron the compact spare, you could damagethe cover or the spare.


Secondary Latch SystemYour vehicle has an underbody mounted tire hoistassembly equipped with a secondary latchsystem. It is designed to stop the compact sparetire from suddenly falling off your vehicle if thecable holding the spare tire is damaged. For thesecondary latch to work, the tire must bestowed with the valve stem pointing down. SeeStoring a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools on page 439for instructions on storing the spare tire correctly.

{CAUTION:

Before beginning this procedure read allthe instructions. Failure to read and followthe instructions could damage the hoistassembly and you and others could gethurt. Read and follow the instructionslisted next.

{CAUTION:

Someone standing too close during theprocedure could be injured by the jack. Ifthe spare tire does not slide off the jackcompletely, make sure no one is behindyou or on either side of you as you pullthe jack out from the under spare.


To release the spare tire from the secondary latch,do the following:

1. If the cable is not visible, start this procedureat Step 3.

2. If the cable is visible,place the wrench onthe hoist drive nutand turn the wrenchcounterclockwiseuntil approximately6 inches (15 cm) ofcable is exposed.

3. Attach the wheel wrench to the jack and raisethe jack at least 10 turns.

4. Place the jack under the vehicle, ahead of therear bumper. Position the center lift point ofthe jack under the center of the spare tire.

5. Turn the wheel wrench clockwise to raise thejack until it lifts the secondary latch spring.

6. Keep raising the jack until the spare tire stopsmoving upward and is held firmly in place, thislets you know that the secondary latch hasreleased.

7. Lower the jack by turning the wheel wrenchcounterclockwise. Keep lowering the jackuntil the spare tire is resting on the wheelwrench.


8. Grasp the spare tire with both hands and pullit out from under the vehicle.

9. Reach under the vehicle and remove thewheel wrench and jack.

10. Tilt the retainer and slip it through the wheelopening when the spare tire has beencompletely lowered.

11. Turn the wrench clockwise to raise the cableback up if the cable is hanging.

Have the hoist assembly inspected as soon asyou can. You will not be able to store a spare tireusing the hoist assembly until it has beenrepaired or replaced.


Storing a Flat or Spare Tireand Tools

{CAUTION:

Storing a jack, a tire, or other equipmentin the passenger compartment of thevehicle could cause injury. In a suddenstop or collision, loose equipment couldstrike someone. Store all these in theproper place.

Storing the Flat Tire with Third RowPassengers1. Put back all tools as they were stored in the

rear storage compartment and put thecompartment cover back on.

2. Use the power third row seat button, near theliftgate, to tilt the third row seatback forwardslightly.

3. Place the flat tire in the tire storage bag andput the tire in an upright position against thethird row seat.

4. Route the tie-down strap through the tire asshown in the graphic and attach the strap tothe cargo tie-downs in the rear of the vehicle.

5. Tighten the tie-down strap.


Storing the Flat Tire with a Flat LoadFloor1. Put back all tools as they were stored in the

rear storage compartment and put thecompartment cover back on.

2. Place the flat tire in the tire storage bag andput the tire in a horizontal position on the floorin the rear of the vehicle.

3. Route the tie-down strap through the tire asshown in the graphic and attach the strap tothe cargo tie-downs in the rear of the vehicle.

4. Tighten the tie-down strap.

Storing the Spare Tire and Tools

{CAUTION:

The underbody-mounted spare tire needsto be stored with the valve stem pointingdown. If the spare tire is stored with thevalve stem pointing upwards, itssecondary latch will not work properlyand the spare tire could loosen andsuddenly fall from your vehicle. If thishappened when your vehicle was beingdriven, the tire might contact a person oranother vehicle, causing injury and, ofcourse, damage to itself as well. Be surethe underbody-mounted spare tire isstored with its valve stem pointing down.


To store the spare tire and tools, do the following:

1. Lay the compact spare tire on the groundat the rear of the vehicle. Position thecompact spare tire so that the valve stem ispointed down facing the rear of the vehicle.

2. Lower the cable to the ground. See Removingthe Spare Tire and Tools on page 426.

3. Tilt the retainer downward and slip it throughthe center hole of the spare tire.Make sure the retainer is fully seated acrossthe underside of the wheel.

4. Attach the wheel wrench to the hoist shaft.

5. Turn the wheel wrench clockwise to liftthe spare tire.

6. When the tire is almost in the stored position,turn the tire so that the valve stem is towardsthe rear of the vehicle.This will help when you check and maintaintire pressure in the spare.

7. Raise the tire fully against the underside ofthe vehicle. Continue turning the wheelwrench until you feel more than two clicks.This indicates that the compact sparetire is secure and the cable is tight. The sparetire hoist cannot be overtightened.


8. Make sure the tire is stored securely. Push,pull (A), and then try to turn the tire (B). If thetire moves, use the wheel wrench to tightenthe cable.

Put back all tools as they were stored in the rearstorage compartment and put the compartmentcover back on.

Compact Spare TireAlthough the compact spare tire was fully inflatedwhen the vehicle was new, it can lose air aftera time. Check the inflation pressure regularly. Itshould be 60 psi (420 kPa).

After installing the compact spare on the vehicle,you should stop as soon as possible and makesure the spare tire is correctly inflated. Thecompact spare is made to perform well at speedsup to 65 mph (105 km/h) for distances up to3,000 miles (5 000 km), so you can finish your tripand have the full-size tire repaired or replacedwhere you want. You must calibrate the tireinflation monitor system after installing or removingthe compact spare. See Tire Pressure MonitorSystem on page 410. The system may notwork correctly when the compact spare is installedon the vehicle. Of course, it’s best to replacethe spare with a full-size tire as soon as you can.The spare will last longer and be in good shapein case you need it again.


Notice: When the compact spare is installed,do not take your vehicle through an automaticcar wash with guide rails. The compactspare can get caught on the rails. That candamage the tire and wheel, and maybeother parts of your vehicle.

Do not use the compact spare on other vehicles.

And do not mix the compact spare tire orwheel with other wheels or tires. They will not fit.Keep the spare tire and its wheel together.

Notice: Tire chains will not fit your compactspare. Using them can damage your vehicleand can damage the chains too. Do not use tirechains on your compact spare.

Appearance CareCleaning the Inside of Your VehicleYour vehicle’s interior will continue to look its best ifit is cleaned often. Although not always visible, dustand dirt can accumulate on your upholstery. Dirtcan damage carpet, fabric, leather, and plasticsurfaces. Regular vacuuming is recommendedto remove particles from your upholstery.

It is important to keep your upholstery frombecoming and remaining heavily soiled. Soilsshould be removed as quickly as possible. Yourvehicle’s interior may experience extremes of heatthat could cause stains to set rapidly.

Lighter colored interiors may require morefrequent cleaning. Use care because newspapersand garments that transfer color to your homefurnishings may also transfer color to yourvehicle’s interior.

When cleaning your vehicle’s interior, only usecleaners specifically designed for the surfacesbeing cleaned. Permanent damage may resultfrom using cleaners on surfaces for whichthey were not intended. Use glass cleaner only onglass. Remove any accidental over-spray fromother surfaces immediately. To prevent over-spray,apply cleaner directly to the cleaning cloth.

Notice: If you use abrasive cleaners whencleaning glass surfaces on your vehicle, youcould scratch the glass and/or cause damageto the integrated radio antenna and therear window defogger. When cleaning theglass on your vehicle, use only a soft clothand glass cleaner.


Many cleaners contain solvents that may becomeconcentrated in your vehicle’s breathing space.Before using cleaners, read and adhere to all safetyinstructions on the label. While cleaning yourvehicle’s interior, maintain adequate ventilation byopening your vehicle’s doors and windows.

Dust may be removed from small buttons andknobs using a small brush with soft bristles.

Your dealer has a product for cleaning yourvehicle’s glass. Should it become necessary, youcan also obtain a product from your dealer toremove odors from your vehicle’s upholstery.

Do not clean your vehicle using the followingcleaners or techniques:

• Never use a knife or any other sharp object toremove a soil from any interior surface.

• Never use a stiff brush. It can cause damageto your vehicle’s interior surfaces.

• Neverapply heavy pressure or rubaggressively with a cleaning cloth. Use ofheavy pressure can damage your interior anddoes not improve the effectiveness of soilremoval.

• Use only mild, neutral-pH soaps. Avoidlaundry detergents or dishwashing soaps withdegreasers. Using too much soap will leavea residue that leaves streaks and attracts dirt.For liquid cleaners, about 20 drops pergallon (3.78 L) of water is a good guide.

• Do not heavily saturate your upholstery whilecleaning.

• Damage to your vehicle’s interior may resultfrom the use of many organic solvents suchas naptha, alcohol, etc.


Fabric/CarpetUse a vacuum cleaner with a soft brushattachment frequently to remove dust and loosedirt. A canister vacuum with a beater bar inthe nozzle may only be used on floor carpet andcarpeted floor mats. For soils, always try to removethem first with plain water or club soda. Beforecleaning, gently remove as much of the soilas possible using one of the following techniques:

• For liquids: gently blot the remaining soilwith a paper towel. Allow the soil to absorb intothe paper towel until no more can beremoved.

• For solid dry soils: remove as much aspossible and then vacuum.

To clean, use the following instructions:

1. Saturate a lint-free, clean white cloth withwater or club soda.

2. Wring the cloth to remove excess moisture.

3. Start on the outside edge of the soil andgently rub toward the center. Continuecleaning, using a clean area of the cloth eachtime it becomes soiled.

4. Continue to gently rub the soiled area until thecleaning cloth remains clean.

5. If the soil is not completely removed, use amild soap solution and repeat the cleaningprocess that was used with plain water.

If any of the soil remains, a commercial fabriccleaner or spot lifter may be necessary. When acommercial upholstery cleaner or spot lifter is to beused, test a small hidden area for colorfastnessfirst. If the locally cleaned area gives anyimpression that a ring formation may result, cleanthe entire surface.

After the cleaning process has been completed, apaper towel can be used to blot excess moisturefrom the fabric or carpet.


LeatherA soft cloth dampened with water may be used toremove dust. If a more thorough cleaning isnecessary, a soft cloth dampened with a mild soapsolution can be used. Allow the leather to drynaturally. Do not use heat to dry. Never use steamto clean leather. Never use spot lifters or spotremovers on leather. Many commercial leathercleaners and coatings that are sold to preserveand protect leather may permanently changethe appearance and feel of your leather and arenot recommended. Do not use silicone orwax-based products, or those containing organicsolvents to clean your vehicle’s interior becausethey can alter the appearance by increasingthe gloss in a non-uniform manner. Never useshoe polish on your leather.

Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and OtherPlastic SurfacesA soft cloth dampened with water may be used toremove dust. If a more thorough cleaning isnecessary, a clean soft cloth dampened with amild soap solution can be used to gently removedust and dirt. Never use spot lifters or removerson plastic surfaces. Many commercial cleaners andcoatings that are sold to preserve and protectsoft plastic surfaces may permanently change theappearance and feel of your interior and arenot recommended. Do not use silicone orwax-based products, or those containing organicsolvents to clean your vehicle’s interior becausethey can alter the appearance by increasingthe gloss in a non-uniform manner.

Some commercial products may increase gloss onyour instrument panel. The increase in glossmay cause annoying reflections in the windshieldand even make it difficult to see through thewindshield under certain conditions.


Wood PanelsUse a clean cloth moistened in warm, soapy water(use mild dish washing soap). Dry the woodimmediately with a clean cloth.

Speaker CoversVacuum around a speaker cover gently, so thatthe speaker will not be damaged. Clean spots withjust water and mild soap.

Care of Safety BeltsKeep belts clean and dry.

{CAUTION:

Do not bleach or dye safety belts. If youdo, it may severely weaken them. In acrash, they might not be able to provideadequate protection. Clean safety beltsonly with mild soap and lukewarm water.

WeatherstripsSilicone grease on weatherstrips will make themlast longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak.Apply silicone grease with a clean cloth. Duringvery cold, damp weather frequent application maybe required. See Recommended Fluids andLubricants on page 480.

Washing Your VehicleThe paint finish on the vehicle provides beauty,depth of color, gloss retention, and durability.

The best way to preserve the vehicle’s finish is tokeep it clean by washing it often with lukewarmor cold water.

Do not wash the vehicle in the direct rays of thesun. Use a car washing soap. Do not usestrong soaps or chemical detergents. Be sure torinse the vehicle well, removing all soapresidue completely. Approved cleaning productscan be obtained from your dealer. See VehicleCare/Appearance Materials on page 452. Do notuse cleaning agents that are petroleum based,or that contain acid or abrasives.


All cleaning agents should be flushed promptlyand not allowed to dry on the surface, or theycould stain. Dry the finish with a soft, cleanchamois or an all-cotton towel to avoid surfacescratches and water spotting.

High pressure car washes may cause water toenter the vehicle.

Cleaning Exterior Lamps/LensesUse only lukewarm or cold water, a soft cloth anda car washing soap to clean exterior lampsand lenses. Follow instructions under WashingYour Vehicle on page 447.

Finish CareOccasional waxing or mild polishing of the vehicleby hand may be necessary to remove residuefrom the paint finish. Approved cleaning productscan be obtained from your dealer. See VehicleCare/Appearance Materials on page 452.

Notice: Machine compounding or aggressivepolishing on a basecoat/clearcoat paintfinish may damage it. Use only non-abrasivewaxes and polishes that are made for abasecoat/clearcoat paint finish on your vehicle.

The vehicle has a basecoat/clearcoat paintfinish. The clearcoat gives more depth and glossto the colored basecoat. Always use waxesand polishes that are non-abrasive and made for abasecoat/clearcoat paint finish.

Foreign materials such as calcium chloride andother salts, ice melting agents, road oil andtar, tree sap, bird droppings, chemicals fromindustrial chimneys, etc., can damage the vehicle’sfinish if they remain on painted surfaces. Washthe vehicle as soon as possible. If necessary, usenon-abrasive cleaners that are marked safe forpainted surfaces to remove foreign matter.

Exterior painted surfaces are subject to aging,weather, and chemical fallout that can take theirtoll over a period of years. To help keep thepaint finish looking new, keep the vehicle in agarage or covered whenever possible.


Windshield and Wiper BladesIf the windshield is not clear after using thewindshield washer, or if the wiper blade chatterswhen running, wax, sap, or other material maybe on the blade or windshield.

Clean the outside of the windshield with a glasscleaning liquid or powder and water solution.The windshield is clean if beads do not form whenit is rinsed with water.

Grime from the windshield will stick to the wiperblades and affect their performance. Cleanthe blade by wiping vigorously with a cloth soakedin full-strength windshield washer solvent. Thenrinse the blade with water.

Check the wiper blades and clean them asnecessary; replace blades that look worn.

Aluminum or Chrome-Plated WheelsYour vehicle may have either aluminum orchrome-plated wheels.

Keep the wheels clean using a soft clean clothwith mild soap and water. Rinse with clean water.After rinsing thoroughly, dry with a soft cleantowel. A wax may then be applied.

Notice: If you use strong soaps, chemicals,abrasive polishes, cleaners, brushes, orcleaners that contain acid on aluminum orchrome-plated wheels, you could damage thesurface of the wheel(s). The repairs wouldnot be covered by your warranty. Useonly GM-approved cleaners on aluminum orchrome-plated wheels.

The surface of these wheels is similar to thepainted surface of your vehicle. Do not use strongsoaps, chemicals, abrasive polishes, abrasivecleaners, cleaners with acid, or abrasive cleaningbrushes on them because you could damagethe surface. Do not use chrome polish onaluminum wheels.


Notice: Using chrome polish on aluminumwheels could damage the wheels. The repairswould not be covered by your warranty.Use chrome polish on chrome wheels only.

Use chrome polish only on chrome-plated wheels,but avoid any painted surface of the wheel, andbuff off immediately after application.

Notice: If you drive your vehicle through anautomatic car wash that has silicone carbidetire cleaning brushes, you could damagethe aluminum or chrome-plated wheels. Therepairs would not be covered by your warranty.Never drive a vehicle equipped with aluminumor chrome-plated wheels through anautomatic car wash that uses silicone carbidetire cleaning brushes.

Do not take your vehicle through an automatic carwash that has silicone carbide tire cleaningbrushes. These brushes can also damage thesurface of these wheels.

TiresTo clean the tires, use a stiff brush with tirecleaner.

Notice: Using petroleum-based tire dressingproducts on your vehicle may damage thepaint finish and/or tires. When applying a tiredressing, always wipe off any oversprayfrom all painted surfaces on your vehicle.

Sheet Metal DamageIf the vehicle is damaged and requires sheet metalrepair or replacement, make sure the bodyrepair shop applies anti-corrosion material to partsrepaired or replaced to restore corrosionprotection.

Original manufacturer replacement parts willprovide the corrosion protection while maintainingthe warranty.


Finish DamageAny stone chips, fractures or deep scratches inthe finish should be repaired right away. Baremetal will corrode quickly and may develop intomajor repair expense.

Minor chips and scratches can be repaired withtouch-up materials available from your dealer.Larger areas of finish damage can be corrected inyour dealer’s body and paint shop.

Underbody MaintenanceChemicals used for ice and snow removal anddust control can collect on the underbody. If theseare not removed, corrosion and rust can developon the underbody parts such as fuel lines,frame, floor pan, and exhaust system even thoughthey have corrosion protection.

At least every spring, flush these materials fromthe underbody with plain water. Clean anyareas where mud and debris can collect. Dirtpacked in close areas of the frame shouldbe loosened before being flushed. Your dealeror an underbody car washing system can dothis for you.

Chemical Paint SpottingSome weather and atmospheric conditions cancreate a chemical fallout. Airborne pollutants canfall upon and attack painted surfaces on thevehicle. This damage can take two forms: blotchy,ring-shaped discolorations, and small, irregulardark spots etched into the paint surface.

Although no defect in the paint job causes this, GMwill repair, at no charge to the owner, the surfacesof new vehicles damaged by this fallout conditionwithin 12 months or 12,000 miles (20 000 km) ofpurchase, whichever occurs first.


Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials

Description UsagePolishing ClothWax-Treated

Interior and exteriorpolishing cloth.

Tar and RoadOil Remover

Removes tar, road oil,and asphalt.

Chrome Cleanerand Polish

Use on chrome orstainless steel.

White SidewallTire Cleaner

Removes soil and blackmarks from whitewalls.

Vinyl Cleaner Cleans vinyl.

Glass Cleaner Removes dirt, grime,smoke and fingerprints.

Chrome and WireWheel Cleaner

Removes dirt and grimefrom chrome wheels andwire wheel covers.

Finish Enhancer

Removes dust,fingerprints, and surfacecontaminants. Spray onand wipe off.

Description Usage

Swirl Remover PolishRemoves swirl marks, finescratches, and other lightsurface contamination.

Cleaner Wax Removes light scratchesand protects finish.

Foaming Tire ShineLow Gloss

Cleans, shines, andprotects in one step. Nowiping necessary.

Wash Wax Concentrate

Medium foamingshampoo. Cleans andlightly waxes.Biodegradable andphosphate free.

Spot LifterQuickly removes spotsand stains from carpets,vinyl, and cloth upholstery.

Odor EliminatorOdorless spray odoreliminator used on fabrics,vinyl, leather and carpet.


Vehicle Identification

Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)

This is the legal identifier for your vehicle. Itappears on a plate in the front corner of theinstrument panel, on the driver side. You can seeit if you look through the windshield from outsideyour vehicle. The VIN also appears on the VehicleCertification and Service Parts labels and thecertificates of title and registration.

Engine IdentificationThe eighth character in the VIN is the enginecode. This code helps you identify your vehicle’sengine, specifications, and replacement parts.

Service Parts Identification LabelThis labelis in the passenger side rear storagecompartment or at the lower edge of the liftgate. Itis very helpful if you ever need to order parts.The label has the following information:

• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)

• Model designation

• Paint information

• Production options and special equipment

Do not remove this label from the vehicle.


Electrical System

Add-On Electrical Equipment

Notice: Do not add anything electrical to yourvehicle unless you check with your dealerfirst. Some electrical equipment can damageyour vehicle and the damage would notbe covered by your warranty. Some add-onelectrical equipment can keep othercomponents from working as they should.

Add-on equipment can drain your vehicle’s battery,even if your vehicle is not operating.

Your vehicle has an airbag system. Beforeattempting to add anything electrical to yourvehicle, see Servicing Your Airbag-EquippedVehicle on page 87.

Windshield Wiper FusesThe windshield wiper motor is protected by aninternal circuit breaker. If the wiper motoroverheats due to heavy snow, the wipers will stopuntil the motor cools and will then restart.

Power Windows and Other PowerOptionsCircuit breakers protect the power windows andpower seats. When the current load is tooheavy, the circuit breaker opens and closes,protecting the circuit until the problem is fixed orgoes away.


Fuses and Circuit BreakersThe wiring circuits in your vehicle are protectedfrom short circuits by a combination of fusesand circuit breakers. This greatly reducesthe chance of fires caused by electrical problems.

Look at the silver-colored band inside the fuse.If the band is broken or melted, replace the fuse.Be sure you replace a bad fuse with a newone of the identical size and rating. If a fuse blows,see your dealer for service immediately.

If you ever have a problem on the road anddon’t have a spare fuse, you can “borrow” onethat has the same amperage. Pick somefeature of your vehicle that you can get alongwithout – like the radio or cigarette lighter – anduse its fuse, if it is the correct amperage. Replaceit as soon as you can.

The fuses are located in three fuse blocks, onelocated in the engine compartment on thepassenger’s side and the other two under therear seat.

Underhood Fuse BlockThe underhood fuse block is located in the enginecompartment on the right side of the vehicle.See Engine Compartment Overview on page 356for more information on location.

To access the fuses, push in the two tabs locatedon each side of the fuse block cover. Then liftthe cover off.


Relays UsageFAN 2 HC

MICRORight Side Engine CoolingFan Motors

FAN S/P HCMICRO

Series/Parallel EngineCooling Fan

Relays UsageFRNT

WASHER SSMICRO

Front Washer Pump

FAN 1 HCMICRO

Left Side Engine CoolingFan Motors


Relays UsageFOG LAMP SS

MICRO Front Fog Lamps

SPARE SpareIGN MAIN SS

MICRO Ignition Switch (ON)

STRTR HCMICRO Starter Solenoid

PWR/TRN HCMICRO Powertrain/Engine Control Module

HI BEAM SSMICRO High-Beam Headlamps

BLWR HCMICRO Front Blower Motor Assembly

WPR HCMICRO Windshield Wiper System - On/Off

WPR HI HCMICRO

Windshield Wiper System -Low/High

HEAD LAMPWASH HC

MICROHeadlamp Washer Pump (Option)

LO BEAM-LPMICRO/HID-HC

MICROLow-Beam Headlamps

REAR WASHSS MICRO Rear Washer Pump

Relays UsageHORN SS

MICRO Horn

A/C CMPRSRCLTCH SS

MICROAir Conditioning Compressor Clutch

FUEL PUMPSS MICRO Fuel Pump

ACCY SSMICRO

Accessory Power (Rear Wipers,Inside Rearview Mirror)

J Case Fuses UsageFAN 2 Right Cooling Fan MotorSPARE SpareFAN 1 Left Cooling Fan MotorSPARE SpareSTRTR Starter Solenoid

LPDB 2 LRPDB (Left Side RearPower Distribution Box)

ABS MOTOR Anti-lock Brake System Module

LPDB 1 LRPDB (Left Side RearPower Distribution Box)

RPDB 1 RRPDB (Right Side RearPower Distribution Box)

SPARE Spare


J Case Fuses UsageBLWR Front Blower Motor Assembly

RPDB 2 RRPDB (Right Side RearPower Distribution Box)

Mini Fuses UsageFRNT

WASHER Front Washer Pump

SPARE SpareSPARE Spare

AIRBAGSensing Diagnostic Module (SDM),Occupant Sensor Display,Instrument Cluster

ABS IGN Anti-lock Braking System Ignition,Variable Effort Steering

IGN SW Ignition Switch, Immobilizer Module

ECM/TCM IGN Engine Control Module/TransmissionControl Module Ignition Power

MISC IGN Air Quality Sensor

EMISSION 1Pre 02 Sensors, Cam Phasor (V6),Canister Purge (V6), Intake ManifoldTuning Valve (V6)

SPARE Spare

Mini Fuses Usage

DISPLAYInstrument Panel Cluster, ClimateControl Module, Front Blower Relay,Diagnostic Link Connector

BCM 2 LED Instrument Panel Dimming,Overhead Lamps, Vanity Lamps

EVEN COILS Even Ignition Coils, Even FuelInjectors

BCM 6 Right Side Rear Stoplamp, TurnLamps, Key Capture Solenoid

RADIO Radio

ODD COILS Odd Ignition Coils, Odd FuelInjectors

BCM 1 Body Control Module (BCM) PowerLT HI BEAM Left Side High-Beam Headlamp

BCM 7/CLOCK Switch Dimming, Analog ClockSPARE Spare

EMISSION 2

Cooling Fan Relays, AirConditioning Clutch Relay, Post O2Sensors, Mass Airflow Sensor,Canister Purge (V8)

ECM BATT Engine Control Module (ECM)


Mini Fuses UsageRT HI BEAM Right Side High-Beam Headlamp

RVC SNSR Battery Regulated VoltageControl Sense

FOG LAMP Front Fog LampsECM 1 Engine Control Module (ECM)

BCM 5 Left Side Front Turn Lamps,Rear Stoplamps, Turn Lamps

WPR Windshield Wiper MotorSPARE Spare

BCM 4 Center High-Mounted Stoplamp(CHMSL), Back-up Lamps

CIG Instrument Panel Accessory PowerOutlet (Cigarette Lighter)

RT LO BEAM Right Side Low-Beam Headlamp

AUX OUTLET Center Console AccessoryPower Outlet

Mini Fuses UsageLT LO BEAM Left Side Low-Beam HeadlampTCM BATT Transmission Control Module (TCM)

ACCY WPR Rear Wiper Motor & Switch,Inside Rearview Mirror


REAR WASH Rear Washer PumpHORN Horn Assembly

A/C CLTCH Air Conditioning Compressor ClutchFUEL PUMP Fuel Pump

Circuit Breaker UsageHEADLAMP

WASH Headlamp Washer Pump (Optional)


Rear Underseat Fuse Block(Left Side)The left side rear fuse block is located under therear seat on the left side of the vehicle. The carpetmust be lifted up to access the rear fuse block.

To access the fuse block, push in the two tabslocated at each end of the fuse block cover.Then lift the cover off.

Relays UsageSTOP RELAY

MINI Not Used

ELC RELAYMINI

Electronic Level Control (ELC)Compressor Motor

PRK LAMPRELAY MICRO License Lamps

REAR FOGLAMP RLY

MICRONot Used

SPARE SpareR POSITION

RELAY MICRO Not Used

LH POS PRKLAMP RELAY

MICROFront & Rear Park Lamps

SPARE Not Used

Mini Fuses UsageSWC Steering Wheel Controls

RSA/RSE Rear Seat Entertainment, Rear SeatAudio

ONSTARTV/XM OnStar® Module, XM Radio

3RD ROWSW/RFA

Flip Fold Seat Switches, RemoteKeyless Entry System Module

AMP Audio Amplifier


Mini Fuses UsageRSM Rear Seat Module, Flip/Fold Motors

DRIVER DRMOD

Driver Door Module (Locks, OutsideRearview Mirror, Window Switches)

STOP LAMPS Not UsedMARKER

LAMP License Lamps

LH PRK POSLAMPS

Left Side Taillamp, Left Side FrontPark Lamps, Sidemarker Lamps

RH PRKLAMPS

Right Side Taillamp, Right SideFront Park Lamps, SidemarkerLamps

TRLR PRKLAMPS Trailer Park Lamps

SPARE SpareSPARE SpareSPARE Spare

MEMORY RPA Memory Seat Module, UltrasonicRear Parking Assist (URPA) Module

APO Rear Auxiliary Power OutletPRK LAMP LH

POS Park Lamp Relay

REAR FOGLAMP Not Used

RH POS LAMP Right Side Taillamp

J Case Fuses UsageSPARE Spare

ELC Electronic Level Control (ELC)Compressor

CircuitBreakers Usage

PWR WNDWS Power Window Motors

Misc. UsageFUSE PULLER Fuse Puller

JOINTCONNECTOR Joint Connector


Rear Underseat Fuse Block(Right Side)The right side rear fuse block is located under therear seat on the right side of the vehicle. The carpetmust be lifted up to access the rear fuse block.

To access the fuse block, push in the two tabslocated at each end of the fuse block cover.Then lift the cover off.

Relays UsageREAR DEFOGRELAY MINI Rear Window Defogger


UNLOCKRELAY MICRO Rear Door Locks

SPARE SpareLCK RELAY

MICRO Rear Door Locks

RUN RELAYHC MICRO

Rear Air Conditioning Blower Motor,Climate Control Ignition

SPARE Spare

Mini Fuses UsageWPR ISRVM

VICSRear Wiper Switch, InsideRearview Mirror

THEFTUGDO/RFA

Garage Door Opener, KeylessEntry System

SPARE SpareCANISTER

VENT Canister Vent Solenoid

PLG Power Liftgate Module


Mini Fuses UsageREAR DEFOG Rear Window Defogger

SPARE Spare

BCM 3Hush Panel Lamps, OverheadCourtesy Lamp Assembly, RightSide Front Turn Lamp

REAR A/C Rear Air Conditioning SystemRUN Climate Control Module

HDT STR WHL Not UsedSPARE SpareSPARE SpareSPARE SpareDR LCK Rear Door Locks

PDM Passenger Door Module (Locks,Outside Mirror, Window Switches)

SIR Sensing Diagnostic Module (SDM),Occupant Sensor, Roll-over Sensor

SPARE SpareMRRTD Suspension Module

ELC Electronic Leveling Compressor(ELC) Exhaust Solenoid, ELC Relay

J Case Fuses UsageSUNROOF MOD Power Sunroof Module

PWR LIFTGATE Power Liftgate Motors

CircuitBreakers Usage

PWR SEATS Power Seat Motors

Misc. UsageFUSE PULLER Fuse Puller

JOINTCONNECTOR Joint Connector


Capacities and SpecificationsThe following approximate capacities are given in English and metric conversions. See RecommendedFluids and Lubricants on page 480 for more information.

ApplicationCapacities

English Metric

Air Conditioning Refrigerant

For the air conditioning system refrigerant chargeamount, see the refrigerant caution label located

under the hood. See your dealer for moreinformation.

Automatic Transmission (Pan Removal and Replacement)

5-Speed Automatic 7.4 qt 7.0 L

6-Speed Automatic 7.3 qt 6.9 L

Cooling System

3.6L V6 11.7 qt 11.1 L

4.6L V8 12.5 qt 11.8 L

Engine Oil with Filter

3.6L V6 6.0 qt 5.7 L

4.6L V8 8.0 qt 7.6 L


ApplicationCapacities

English Metric

Fuel Tank 20.0 gal 75.7 L

Wheel Nut Torque 100 lb ft 140 Y

All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the approximate level, as recommended in thismanual. Recheck fluid level after filling.

Engine SpecificationsEngine VIN Code Transmission Spark Plug Gap

3.6L V6 7 Automatic 0.044 inches (1.1 mm)

4.6L V8 A Automatic 0.050 inches (1.27 mm)


✍ NOTES


Maintenance Schedule ................................ 468Introduction ............................................... 468Maintenance Requirements ........................ 468Your Vehicle and the Environment ............ 468Using the Maintenance Schedule ............... 469Scheduled Maintenance ............................. 471Additional Required Services ..................... 473Maintenance Footnotes .............................. 474

Owner Checks and Services ..................... 476At Each Fuel Fill ....................................... 476At Least Once a Month ............................. 477At Least Once a Year ............................... 477Recommended Fluids and Lubricants ........ 480Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts ... 482Engine Drive Belt Routing ......................... 483Maintenance Record .................................. 484

Section 6 Maintenance Schedule


Maintenance Schedule

IntroductionImportant: Keep engine oil at the proper leveland change as recommended.

Have you purchased the GM Protection Plan? ThePlan supplements your new vehicle warranties.See your Warranty and Owner Assistance bookletor your dealer for details.

Maintenance Requirements

Notice: Maintenance intervals, checks,inspections, replacement parts, andrecommended fluids and lubricants asprescribed in this manual are necessary tokeep your vehicle in good working condition.Any damage caused by failure to followscheduled maintenance might not be coveredby warranty.

Your Vehicle and the EnvironmentProper vehicle maintenance not only helps to keepyour vehicle in good working condition, but alsohelps the environment. All recommendedmaintenance is important. Improper vehiclemaintenance can even affect the quality of the airwe breathe. Improper fluid levels or the wrongtire inflation can increase the level of emissionsfrom your vehicle. To help protect our environment,and to keep your vehicle in good condition, besure to maintain your vehicle properly.


Using the Maintenance ScheduleWe at General Motors want to help you keep yourvehicle in good working condition. But we donot know exactly how you will drive it. You maydrive very short distances only a few times a week.Or you may drive long distances all the time invery hot, dusty weather. You may use your vehiclein making deliveries. Or you may drive it towork, to do errands, or in many other ways.

Because of all the different ways people use theirvehicles, maintenance needs vary. You may needmore frequent checks and replacements. So pleaseread the following and note how you drive. If youhave any questions on how to keep your vehicle ingood condition, see your GM Goodwrench® dealer.

This schedule is for vehicles that:

• carry passengers and cargo withinrecommended limits. You will find these limitson the Tire and Loading Information label.See Loading Your Vehicle on page 322.

• are driven on reasonable road surfaces withinlegal driving limits.

• are driven off-road in the recommendedmanner. See Off-Road Driving on page 291.

• use the recommended fuel. See GasolineOctane on page 349.


The services in Scheduled Maintenance onpage 471 should be performed when indicated.See Additional Required Services on page 473 andMaintenance Footnotes on page 474 for furtherinformation.

{CAUTION:

Performing maintenance work on avehicle can be dangerous. In trying to dosome jobs, you can be seriously injured.Do your own maintenance work only ifyou have the required know-how and theproper tools and equipment for the job. Ifyou have any doubt, see your GMGoodwrench® dealer to have a qualifiedtechnician do the work. See Doing YourOwn Service Work on page 348.

Some maintenance services can be complex. So,unless you are technically qualified and havethe necessary equipment, you should have yourGM Goodwrench® dealer do these jobs.

When you go to your GM Goodwrench® dealer foryour service needs, you will know that GM-trainedand supported service technicians will performthe work using genuine GM parts.

If you want to purchase service information, seeService Publications Ordering Information onpage 505.

Owner Checks and Services on page 476 tells youwhat should be checked, when to check it, andwhat you can easily do to help keep your vehicle ingood condition.

The proper replacement parts, fluids, andlubricants to use are listed in RecommendedFluids and Lubricants on page 480 and NormalMaintenance Replacement Parts on page 482.When your vehicle is serviced, make sure theseare used. All parts should be replaced and allnecessary repairs done before you or anyone elsedrives the vehicle. We recommend the use ofgenuine GM parts.


Scheduled MaintenanceWhen the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON messagecomes on, it means that service is required for yourvehicle. Have your vehicle serviced as soon aspossible within the next 600 miles (1 000 km). It ispossible that, if you are driving under the bestconditions, the engine oil life system may notindicate that vehicle service is necessary for over ayear. However, the engine oil and filter must bechanged at least once a year and at this time thesystem must be reset. Your GM Goodwrench®

dealer has GM-trained service technicians who willperform this work using genuine GM parts and resetthe system.

If the engine oil life system is ever resetaccidentally, you must service your vehicle within3,000 miles (5 000 km) since your last service.Remember to reset the oil life system wheneverthe oil is changed. See Engine Oil Life System onpage 363 for information on the Engine Oil LifeSystem and resetting the system.

When the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON messageappears, certain services, checks, and inspectionsare required. Required services are describedin the following for “Maintenance I” and“Maintenance II.” Generally, it is recommendedthat your first service be Maintenance I, yoursecond service be Maintenance II, and that youalternate Maintenance I and Maintenance IIthereafter. However, in some cases,Maintenance II may be required more often.

Maintenance I — Use Maintenance I if theCHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message comes onwithin 10 months since the vehicle was purchasedor Maintenance II was performed.

Maintenance II — Use Maintenance II if theprevious service performed was Maintenance I.Always use Maintenance II whenever the messagecomes on 10 months or more since the lastservice or if the message has not come on at allfor one year.


Scheduled MaintenanceService Maintenance I Maintenance II

Change engine oil and filter. See Engine Oil on page 360. Reset oil life system.See Engine Oil Life System on page 363. An Emission Control Service. • •

Lubricate chassis components. See footnote #. • •Visually check for any leaks or damage. See footnote (g). • •Inspect engine air cleaner filter. If necessary, replace filter. See Engine AirCleaner/Filter on page 365. See footnote (k). •

Check tires for inflation pressures and wear. See Tires on page 398. • •Inspect brake system. See footnote (a). • •Check engine coolant and windshield washer fluid levels and add fluid asneeded. • •

Perform any needed additional services. See “Additional Required Services”in this section. • •

Inspect suspension and steering components. See footnote (b). •Inspect engine cooling system. See footnote (c). •Inspect wiper blades. See footnote (d). •Inspect restraint system components. See footnote (e). •Lubricate body components. See footnote (f). •Replace passenger compartment air filter. See footnote (j). •


Additional Required ServicesThe following services should be performed at the first maintenance service (I or II) after the indicatedmiles (kilometers) shown for each item.

Additional Required Services

Service and Miles (Kilometers) 25,000(40 000)

50,000(80 000)

75,000(120 000)

100,000(160 000)

125,000(200 000)

150,000(240 000)

Inspect fuel system for damage orleaks. • • • • • •

Inspect exhaust system for loose ordamaged components. • • • • • •

Replace engine air cleaner filter. SeeEngine Air Cleaner/Filter on page 365. • • •

For vehicles used for trailer towing:Change transfer case fluid. • • •

Change automatic transmission fluidand filter (severe service).See footnote (h).

• • •

Change automatic transmission fluidand filter (normal service). •

Replace spark plugs. An EmissionControl Service. •


Additional Required Services (cont’d)

Service and Miles (Kilometers) 25,000(40 000)

50,000(80 000)

75,000(120 000)

100,000(160 000)

125,000(200 000)

150,000(240 000)

Engine cooling system service (or everyfive years, whichever occurs first).An Emission Control Service.See footnote (i).

•

Inspect engine accessory drive belt.An Emission Control Service.See footnote (l).

•

If using DOT-4 brake fluid, changebrake fluid at a regular maintenanceservice every two years.See footnote (m).

Maintenance Footnotes# Lubricate the front suspension, steering linkage,transmission shift linkage, and parking brakecable guides. Control arm ball joints requirelubrication but should not be lubricated unlesstheir temperature is 10°F (-12°C) or higher, or theycould be damaged.

(a) Visually inspect brake lines and hoses forproper hook-up, binding, leaks, cracks, chafing,etc. Inspect disc brake pads for wear and rotors forsurface condition. Inspect other brake parts,including calipers, parking brake, etc.

(b) Visually inspect front and rear suspension andsteering system for damaged, loose, or missingparts, signs of wear or lack of lubrication. Inspectpower steering lines and hoses for properhook-up, binding, leaks, cracks, chafing, etc.


(c) Visually inspect hoses and have them replacedif they are cracked, swollen, or deteriorated.Inspect all pipes, fittings and clamps; replace withgenuine GM parts as needed. To help ensureproper operation, a pressure test of the coolingsystem and pressure cap and cleaning the outsideof the radiator and air conditioning condenser isrecommended at least once a year.

(d) Visually inspect wiper blades for wear orcracking. Replace wiper blades that appear wornor damaged or that streak or miss areas ofthe windshield.

(e) Make sure the safety belt reminder light and allyour belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors, andanchorages are working properly. Look forany other loose or damaged safety belt systemparts. If you see anything that might keep a safetybelt system from doing its job, have it repaired.Have any torn or frayed safety belts replaced. Alsolook for any opened or broken airbag coverings,and have them repaired or replaced. Theairbag system does not need regular maintenance.

(f) Lubricate all key lock cylinders, hood latchassemblies, secondary latch, pivots, spring anchor,release pawl, hood hinges, body door hinges,rear compartment hinges, sunroof tracks, and anyfolding seat hardware. More frequent lubricationcould be required when exposed to a corrosiveenvironment. Applying silicone grease onweatherstrips with a clean cloth will make themlast longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak.See Weatherstrips on page 447.

(g) A fluid loss in any vehicle system couldindicate a problem. Have the system inspectedand repaired and the fluid level checked. Add fluidif needed.

(h) Change automatic transmission fluid and filterif the vehicle is mainly driven under one ormore of these conditions:

− In heavy city traffic where the outsidetemperature regularly reaches 90°F (32°C) orhigher.

− In hilly or mountainous terrain.− When doing frequent trailer towing.− Uses such as found in taxi, police, or delivery

service.


(i) Drain, flush, and refill cooling system. Thisservice can be complex; you should haveyour dealer perform this service. See EngineCoolant on page 368 for what to use. Inspecthoses. Clean radiator, condenser, pressure cap,and filler neck. Pressure test the coolingsystem and pressure cap.

(j) If you drive regularly under dusty conditions,the filter could require replacement more often.

(k) If you drive regularly under dusty conditions,inspect the filter at each engine oil change.

(l) Visually inspect belt for fraying, excessivecracks, or obvious damage. Replace belt ifnecessary.

(m) If using DOT-4 brake fluid only: Drain, flush,and refill brake hydraulic system at a regularmaintenance service (I or II) every two years. Thisservice can be complex; you should have yourdealer perform this service. See Brakes onpage 381.

Owner Checks and ServicesThese owner checks and services should beperformed at the intervals specified to help ensurethe safety, dependability, and emission controlperformance of your vehicle. Your GMGoodwrench® dealer can assist you with thesechecks and services.

Be sure any necessary repairs are completed atonce. Whenever any fluids or lubricants are addedto your vehicle, make sure they are the properones, as shown in Recommended Fluids andLubricants on page 480.

At Each Fuel FillIt is important to perform these underhood checksat each fuel fill.

Engine Oil Level CheckCheck the engine oil level and add the proper oil ifnecessary. See Engine Oil on page 360 forfurther details.


Notice: It is important to check the engine oilregularly and keep it at the proper level.Failure to keep the engine oil at the properlevel can cause damage to the engine notcovered by your warranty.

Engine Coolant Level CheckCheck the engine coolant level and addDEX-COOL® coolant mixture if necessary. SeeEngine Coolant on page 368 for further details.

Windshield Washer Fluid Level CheckCheck the windshield washer fluid level inthe windshield washer fluid reservoir and add theproper fluid if necessary.

At Least Once a Month

Tire Inflation CheckVisually inspect your vehicle’s tires and makesure they are inflated to the correct pressures.Do not forget to check the spare tire. SeeInflation - Tire Pressure on page 407. Check tomake sure the spare tire is stored securely.See Changing a Flat Tire on page 424.

At Least Once a Year

Starter Switch Check

{CAUTION:

When you are doing this inspection, thevehicle could move suddenly. If thevehicle moves, you or others could beinjured.

1. Before you start, be sure you have enoughroom around the vehicle.

2. Firmly apply both the parking brake and theregular brake. See Parking Brake onpage 127.Do not use the accelerator pedal, and beready to turn off the engine immediately ifit starts.

3. Try to start the engine in each gear. Thevehicle should start only in PARK (P) orNEUTRAL (N). If the vehicle starts in anyother position, contact your GM Goodwrench®

dealer for service.


Automatic Transmission Shift LockControl System Check

{CAUTION:

When you are doing this inspection, thevehicle could move suddenly. If thevehicle moves, you or others could beinjured.

1. Before you start, be sure you have enoughroom around the vehicle. It should be parkedon a level surface.

2. Firmly apply the parking brake. See ParkingBrake on page 127.Be ready to apply the regular brakeimmediately if the vehicle begins to move.

3. With the engine off, turn the ignition to ON,but do not start the engine. Without applyingthe regular brake, try to move the shiftlever out of PARK (P) with normal effort. If theshift lever moves out of PARK (P), contactyour GM Goodwrench® dealer for service.

Ignition Transmission Lock CheckWhile parked, and with the parking brake set, tryto turn the ignition to OFF in each shift leverposition.

• The ignition should turn to OFF only when theshift lever is in PARK (P).

• The ignition key should come out only in OFF.

Contact your GM Goodwrench® dealer if serviceis required.


Parking Brake and AutomaticTransmission Park (P) Mechanism Check

{CAUTION:

When you are doing this check, yourvehicle could begin to move. You orothers could be injured and propertycould be damaged. Make sure there isroom in front of your vehicle in case itbegins to roll. Be ready to apply theregular brake at once should the vehiclebegin to move.

Park on a fairly steep hill, with the vehicle facingdownhill. Keeping your foot on the regularbrake, set the parking brake.

• To check the parking brake’s holding ability:With the engine running and transmission inNEUTRAL (N), slowly remove foot pressurefrom the regular brake pedal. Do this until thevehicle is held by the parking brake only.

• To check the PARK (P) mechanism’s holdingability: With the engine running, shift toPARK (P). Then release the parking brakefollowed by the regular brake.

Contact your GM Goodwrench® dealer if service isrequired.

Underbody Flushing ServiceAt least every spring, use plain water to flush anycorrosive materials from the underbody. Takecare to clean thoroughly any areas where mud andother debris can collect.


Recommended Fluids andLubricantsFluids and lubricants identified below by name,part number, or specification can be obtained fromyour dealer.

Usage Fluid/Lubricant

Engine Oil

The engine requires a specialengine oil meeting GM StandardGM4718M. Oils meeting thisstandard can be identified assynthetic, and should also beidentified with the AmericanPetroleum Institute (API) Certifiedfor Gasoline Engines starburstsymbol. However, not all syntheticAPI oils with the starburst symbolwill meet this GM standard. Youshould look for and use only an oilthat meets GM Standard GM4718M.GM Goodwrench® oil meets all therequirements for your vehicle. Forthe proper viscosity, see Engine Oilon page 360.


Engine Coolant

50/50 mixture of clean, drinkablewater and use only DEX-COOL®

Coolant. See Engine Coolant onpage 368.

Hydraulic BrakeSystem

Delco® Supreme 11 Brake Fluid orequivalent DOT-3 brake fluid.

WindshieldWasher GM Optikleen® Washer Solvent.

Power SteeringSystem

GM Power Steering Fluid(GM Part No. U.S. 89021184,in Canada 89021186).

AutomaticTransmission

DEXRON®-VI AutomaticTransmission Fluid.

Key LockCylinders

Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241,in Canada 10953474).

ChassisLubrication

Chassis Lubricant(GM Part No. U.S. 12377985,in Canada 88901242) or lubricantmeeting requirements of NLGI #2,Category LB or GC-LB.



Front and RearAxle

SAE 75W-90 SyntheticAxle Lubricant(GM Part No. U.S. 12378261,in Canada 10953455) meetingGM Specification 9986115.

Transfer CaseManual Transmission Fluid(GM Part No. U.S. 88861800,in Canada 88861801).

Hood HingesMulti-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241,in Canada 10953474).

Body DoorHinge Pins,

Tailgate Hingeand Linkage,

Folding Seats,Sunroof Tracks,and Fuel Door

Hinge


Usage Fluid/LubricantOuter TailgateHandle Pivot

Points


WeatherstripConditioning

Weatherstrip Lubricant(GM Part No. U.S. 3634770,in Canada 10953518) or DielectricSilicone Grease(GM Part No. U.S. 12345579,in Canada 992887).

WeatherstripSqueaks

Synthetic Grease with Teflon,Superlube(GM Part No. U.S. 12371287,in Canada 10953437).


Normal Maintenance Replacement PartsReplacement parts identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained fromyour dealer.

Part GM Part Numbers ACDelco® PartNumbers

Engine Air Cleaner/Filter 25735595 A2944CEngine Oil Filter

3.6L V6 25177917 PF21294.6L V8 89017342 PF61

Passenger Compartment Air FilterParticle and Odor Filter 88957450 CF130CParticle Filter 25740404 CF133

Spark Plugs3.6L V6 12597464 41-9904.6L V8 12571535 41-987

Windshield Wiper Blade AssemblyDriver’s Side – 22 inches (56.5 cm) 12367281 —Passenger’s Side – 21 inches (53.3 cm) 88892785 —Rear Wiper Blade- 13 inches (33.0 cm) 15209055 —


Engine Drive Belt Routing

3.6L V6 Engine

4.6L V8 Engine


Maintenance RecordAfter the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading, who performed the service,and the type of services performed in the boxes provided. See Maintenance Requirements on page 468.Any additional information from Owner Checks and Services on page 476 can be added on the followingrecord pages. You should retain all maintenance receipts.

Maintenance Record

Date OdometerReading Serviced By Maintenance I or

Maintenance II Services Performed


Maintenance Record (cont’d)




Maintenance Record (cont’d)




Customer Assistance and Information ....... 488Customer Satisfaction Procedure ............... 488Online Owner Center ................................. 490Customer Assistance for Text

Telephone (TTY) Users .......................... 491Customer Assistance Offices ..................... 491GM Mobility Reimbursement Program ........ 492Roadside Service ...................................... 493Courtesy Transportation ............................. 496Vehicle Data Collection and Event

Data Recorders ...................................... 498Collision Damage Repair ........................... 500

Reporting Safety Defects ............................ 504Reporting Safety Defects to the

United States Government ..................... 504Reporting Safety Defects to the

Canadian Government ............................ 504Reporting Safety Defects to

General Motors ...................................... 505Service Publications Ordering Information .... 505

Section 7 Customer Assistance Information


Customer Assistance andInformation

Customer Satisfaction ProcedureYour satisfaction and goodwill are importantto your dealer and to Cadillac. Normally, anyconcerns with the sales transaction or theoperation of your vehicle will be resolved byyour dealer’s sales or service departments.Sometimes, however, despite the best intentionsof all concerned, misunderstandings can occur.If your concern has not been resolved to yoursatisfaction, the following steps should be taken:

STEP ONE: Discuss your concern with a memberof dealership management. Normally, concernscan be quickly resolved at that level. If the matterhas already been reviewed with the sales,service or parts manager, contact the owner of thedealership or the general manager.

STEP TWO: If after contacting a member ofdealership management, it appears your concerncannot be resolved by the dealership withoutfurther help, contact the Cadillac CustomerAssistance Center, 24 hours a day, by calling1-800-458-8006. In Canada, contact the CanadianCadillac Customer Communication Centre bycalling 1-888-446-2000.

We encourage you to call the toll-free number inorder to give your inquiry prompt attention. Pleasehave the following information available to givethe Customer Assistance Representative:

• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN). This isavailable from the vehicle registration ortitle, or the plate at the top left of theinstrument panel and visible through thewindshield.

• Dealership name and location.

• Vehicle delivery date and present mileage.

When contacting Cadillac, please remember thatyour concern will likely be resolved at a dealer’sfacility. That is why we suggest you followStep One first if you have a concern.


STEP THREE: Both General Motors and yourdealer are committed to making sure you arecompletely satisfied with your new vehicle.However, if you continue to remain unsatisfiedafter following the procedure outlined in Steps Oneand Two, you should file with the BBB Auto LineProgram to enforce any additional rights youmay have. Canadian owners refer to yourWarranty and Owner Assistance Informationbooklet for information on the Canadian MotorVehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP).

The BBB Auto Line Program is an out of courtprogram administered by the Council of BetterBusiness Bureaus to settle automotive disputesregarding vehicle repairs or the interpretationof the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Although youmay be required to resort to this informal disputeresolution program prior to filing a court action,use of the program is free of charge and your casewill generally be heard within 40 days. If you donot agree with the decision given in your case, youmay reject it and proceed with any other venuefor relief available to you.

You may contact the BBB Auto Line Programusing the toll-free telephone number or write themat the following address:

BBB Auto Line ProgramCouncil of Better Business Bureaus, Inc.4200 Wilson BoulevardSuite 800Arlington, VA 22203-1838

Telephone: 1-800-955-5100

This program is available in all 50 states andthe District of Columbia. Eligibility is limitedby vehicle age, mileage and other factors. GeneralMotors reserves the right to change eligibilitylimitations and/or discontinue its participation inthis program.


Online Owner Center

Online Owner Center(United States only)The Owner Center is a resource for yourGM ownership needs. Specific vehicle informationcan be found in one place.

The Online Owner Center allows you to:• Get e-mail service reminders.

• Access information about your specificvehicle, including tips and videos andan electronic version of this owner manual.

• Keep track of your vehicle’s service historyand maintenance schedule.

• Find GM dealers for service nationwide.

• Receive special promotions and privilegesonly available to members.

Refer to www.MyGMLink.com on the web forupdated information and to register your vehicle.

My GM Canada (Canada only)My GM Canada is a password-protected sectionof gmcanada.com where you can save informationon GM vehicles, get personalized offers, anduse handy tools and forms with greater ease.

Here are a few of the valuable tools and servicesyou will have access to:

− My Showroom: Find and save information onvehicles and current offers in your area.

− My Dealers/Retailers: Save details such asaddress and phone number for each ofyour preferred GM Dealers or Retailers.

− My Driveway: Receive service reminders andhelpful advice on owning and maintainingyour vehicle.

− My Preferences: Manage your profile,subscribe to E-News and use tools and formswith greater ease.

To sign up to My GM Canada, visit the My GMCanada section within www.gmcanada.com.


Customer Assistance for TextTelephone (TTY) UsersTo assist customers who are deaf, hard ofhearing, or speech-impaired and who use TextTelephones (TTYs), Cadillac has TTY equipmentavailable at its Customer Assistance Center.Any TTY user can communicate with Cadillac bydialing: 1-800-833-CMCC (2622). (TTY usersin Canada can dial 1-800-263-3830.)

Customer Assistance OfficesCadillac encourages customers to call thetoll-free number for assistance. However, if acustomer wishes to write or e-mail Cadillac, referto the addresses below.

United States — Customer AssistanceCadillac Customer Assistance CenterCadillac Motor Car DivisionP.O. Box 33169Detroit, MI 48232-5169

www.Cadillac.com1-800-458-80061-800-833-2622 (For Text Telephonedevices (TTYs))Roadside Assistance: 1-800-882-1112Fax Number: 313-381-0022

From Puerto Rico:1-800-496-9992 (English)1-800-496-9993 (Spanish)Fax Number: 313-381-0022

From U.S. Virgin Islands:1-800-496-9994Fax Number: 313-381-0022

Canada — Customer AssistanceGeneral Motors of Canada LimitedCanadian Cadillac Customer CommunicationCentre, CA1-163-0051908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7

1-888-446-20001-800-263-3830 (For Text Telephonedevices (TTYs))Roadside Assistance: 1-800-882-1112


Overseas — Customer AssistancePlease contact the local General MotorsBusiness Unit.

Mexico, Central America andCaribbean Islands/Countries(Except Puerto Rico and U.S. VirginIslands) — Customer Assistance

General Motors de Mexico, S. de R.L. de C.V.Customer Assistance CenterPaseo de la Reforma # 2740Col. Lomas de BezaresC.P. 11910, Mexico, D.F.01-800-508-0000Long Distance: 011-52-53 29 0 800

GM Mobility ReimbursementProgram

This program, available to qualified applicants,can reimburse you up to $1,000 of the costof eligible aftermarket adaptive equipment requiredfor your vehicle, such as hand controls or awheelchair/scooter lift.

The offer is available for a very limited period oftime from the date of vehicle purchase/lease.For more details, or to determine your vehicle’seligibility, visit gmmobility.com or call the GMMobility Assistance Center at 1-800-323-9935.Text telephone (TTY) users, call 1-800-833-9935.

GM of Canada also has a Mobility Program.Call 1-800-GM-DRIVE (463-7483) for details.TTY users call 1-800-263-3830.


Roadside ServiceIn the United States or Canada, call1-800-882-1112. Service is available 24 hours aday, 365 days a year.

Who Is Covered?Roadside Assistance coverage is for the vehicleoperator, regardless of ownership. A person drivingthis vehicle without the consent of the owner isnot eligible for coverage.

The following services are provided in the UnitedStates during the Bumper-to-Bumper warrantyperiod and in Canada, during the Base Warrantycoverage period of the New Vehicle LimitedWarranty, up to a maximum coverage of $100.These services are provided at a nominal chargeif the Cadillac is no longer covered by thewarranties listed previously. Roadside Service isavailable only in the United States and Canada.

Cadillac Owner Privileges™Roadside Service provides several Cadillac OwnerPrivileges™ at “no charge,” throughout yourCadillac Warranty Period — 48 months/50,000 miles (80 000 km).

Emergency Road Service is performed on site forthe following situations:

• Towing Service: Emergency towing from apublic roadway or highway to the nearestdealership for warranty service or in the eventof a vehicle-disabling accident. Winch-outassistance when the vehicle is mired in sand,mud, or snow.

• Battery Jump Starting: No-start occurrenceswhich require a battery jump start will becovered at no charge.

• Lock Out Assistance: To ensure security,the driver must present the vehicle registrationand personal ID before lock-out service isprovided. Lock-out service will be covered atno charge if you are unable to gain entryinto your vehicle. If your vehicle will not start,Roadside Service will arrange to haveyour vehicle towed to the nearest authorizeddealership. In the United States, replacementkeys made at the customer’s expense willbe delivered within 10 miles.


• Fuel Delivery: Delivery of enough fuel for thecustomer to get to the nearest service station(approximately $5 in the United States and10 litres in Canada).

• Flat Tire Change (Covers change only):Installation of your spare tire, in goodcondition, will be covered at no charge. Thecustomer is responsible for the repair orreplacement of the tire if not covered by awarrantable failure.

• Trip Interruption: If your trip is interrupteddue to a warranty failure, incidental expensesmay be reimbursed during the48 months/50,000 miles (80 000 km) warrantyperiod. Items covered are hotel, meals,and rental car.

Additional Services for CanadianCustomers• Trip Routing Service: Upon request, Cadillac

Roadside Service will send you detailed,computer-personalized maps, highlighting yourchoice of either the most direct route or themost scenic route to your destination,anywhere in North America, along with anyhelpful travel information we may havepertaining to your trip. To request this service,please call us toll-free at 1-800-268-6800.We will make every attempt to send yourpersonalized trip routing as quickly aspossible, but it is best to allow three weeksbefore your planned departure date. Triprouting requests will be limited to sixper calendar year.

• Alternative Service: There may be timeswhen Roadside Service cannot providetimely assistance. Your advisor may authorizeyou to secure local emergency road service,and you will be reimbursed up to $100upon submission of the original receipt toCadillac Roadside Service®.


Cadillac Technician Roadside Service(U.S. only)Cadillac’s exceptional Roadside Service is morethan an auto club or towing service. It providesevery Cadillac owner in the United States with theadvantage of contacting a Cadillac advisor and,where available, a Cadillac trained dealertechnician who can provide on-site service.

A dealer technician will travel to your locationwithin a 30 mile (50 km) radius of a participatingCadillac dealership. If beyond this radius, wewill arrange to have your car towed to the nearestCadillac dealership. Each technician travelswith a specially equipped service vehicle completewith the necessary Cadillac parts and toolsrequired to handle most roadside repairs.

Calling for AssistanceFor prompt and efficient assistance when calling,please provide the following to the RoadsideService Representative:

• A description of the problem

• Name, home address, home telephonenumber

• Location of your Cadillac and number you arecalling from

• The model year, Vehicle Identification Number(VIN), odometer reading, and date of delivery

While we hope you never have the occasion to useour service, it is added security while travelingfor you and your family. Remember, we are only aphone call away. In the United States or Canada,customers call Roadside Service: 1-800-882-1112.Any customer who has access to a (TTY) or aconventional teletypewriter can communicate withCadillac by dialing from the United States orCanada 1-888-889-2438 — daily, 24 hours.


Cadillac and General Motors of Canada Limitedreserve the right to limit services or reimbursementto an owner or driver when, in their sole discretion,the claims become excessive in frequency or typeof occurrence.

Roadside Service is not part of or included in thecoverage provided by the New Vehicle LimitedWarranty. Cadillac General Motors of CanadaLimited reserve the right to make any changes ordiscontinue the Roadside Service program atany time without notification.

Towing and Road Service ExclusionsSpecifically excluded from Roadside Servicecoverage are towing or services for vehiclesoperated on a non-public roadway or highway,fines, impound towing caused by a violationof local, Municipal, State, Provincial or Federallaw, and mounting, dismounting or changingof snow tires, chains, or other traction devices.

Courtesy TransportationTo enhance your ownership experience, we andour participating dealers are proud to offerCourtesy Transportation, a customer supportprogram for new vehicles.

The Courtesy Transportation program is offered tocustomers in conjunction with theBumper-to-Bumper coverage provided by the NewVehicle Limited Warranty. Several transportationoptions are available when warranty repairsare required. This will reduce your inconvenienceduring warranty repairs.

Scheduling Service AppointmentsWhen your vehicle requires warranty service, youshould contact your dealer and request anappointment. By scheduling a service appointmentand advising your service consultant of yourtransportation needs, your dealer can helpminimize your inconvenience.If your vehicle cannot be scheduled into the servicedepartment immediately, keep driving it until it canbe scheduled for service, unless, of course, theproblem is safety-related. If it is, please call yourdealership, let them know this, and ask forinstructions.

If the dealer requests that you simply drop thevehicle off for service, you are urged to do so asearly in the work day as possible to allow forthe same day repair.


Transportation OptionsWarranty service can generally be completedwhile you wait. However, if you are unable to wait,GM helps to minimize your inconvenience byproviding several transportation options.Depending on the circumstances, your dealer canoffer you one of the following:

Shuttle ServiceParticipating dealers can provide you with shuttleservice to get you to your destination withminimal interruption of your daily schedule. Thisincludes one-way or round trip shuttle service to adestination up to 10 miles (16 km) from thedealership.

Public Transportation or FuelReimbursementIf your vehicle requires warranty repairs,reimbursement of public transportation expensesmay be available, for up to a maximum of five days.In addition, should you arrange transportationthrough a friend or relative, reimbursement forreasonable fuel expenses may be available, up to afive-day maximum. Claim amounts should reflectactual costs and be supported by original receipts.

Courtesy Rental VehicleYour dealer may arrange to provide you with acourtesy rental vehicle or reimburse you fora rental vehicle that you obtain if your vehicle iskept for a warranty repair. Reimbursementwill be limited to a maximum amount per day andmust be supported by receipts. This requiresthat you sign and complete a rental agreement andmeet state, local and rental vehicle providerrequirements. Requirements vary and may includeminimum age requirements, insurance coverage,credit card, etc. You are responsible for fuel usagecharges and may also be responsible for taxes,levies, usage fees, excessive mileage or rentalusage beyond the completion of the repair.

Generally it is not possible to provide a like-vehicleas a courtesy rental.

Additional Program InformationCourtesy Transportation is available during theBumper-to-Bumper warranty coverage period, butit is not part of the New Vehicle LimitedWarranty. A separate booklet entitled Warrantyand Owner Assistance Information furnished witheach new vehicle provides detailed warrantycoverage information.


Courtesy Transportation is available only atparticipating dealers and all program options, suchas shuttle service, may not be available atevery dealer. Please contact your dealer forspecific information about availability. All CourtesyTransportation arrangements will be administeredby appropriate dealer personnel.

Canadian Vehicles: For warranty repairs duringthe Complete Vehicle Coverage period of theGeneral Motors of Canada New Vehicle LimitedWarranty, alternative transportation may beavailable under the Courtesy TransportationProgram. Please consult your dealer for details.

General Motors reserves the right to unilaterallymodify, change or discontinue CourtesyTransportation at any time and to resolve allquestions of claim eligibility pursuant to the termsand conditions described herein at its solediscretion.

Vehicle Data Collection and EventData RecordersYour vehicle, like other modern motor vehicles, hasa number of sophisticated computer systems thatmonitor and control several aspects of the vehicle’sperformance. Your vehicle uses on-board vehiclecomputers to monitor emission control componentsto optimize fuel economy, to monitor conditions forairbag deployment and, if so equipped, to provideanti-lock braking and to help the driver control thevehicle in difficult driving situations. Someinformation may be stored during regular operationsto facilitate repair of detected malfunctions; otherinformation is stored only in a crash event bycomputer systems, such as those commonly calledEvent Data Recorders (EDR).

In a crash event, computer systems, such as theairbag Sensing and Diagnostic Module (SDM)in your vehicle may record information about thecondition of the vehicle and how it was operated,such as data related to engine speed, brakeapplication, throttle position, vehicle speed, safetybelt usage, airbag readiness, airbag performance,and the severity of a collision.


If your vehicle is equipped with StabiliTrak®,steering performance, including yaw rate, steeringwheel angle, and lateral acceleration, is alsorecorded. This information has been usedto improve vehicle crash performance and may beused to improve crash performance of futurevehicles and driving safety. Unlike the datarecorders on many airplanes, these on-boardsystems do not record sounds, such asconversation of vehicle occupants.

To read this information, special equipment isneeded and access to the vehicle or the devicethat stores the data is required. GM will not accessinformation about a crash event or share it withothers other than:

• with the consent of the vehicle owner or, if thevehicle is leased, with the consent of thelessee,

• in response to an official request of police orsimilar government office,

• as part of GM’s defense of litigation throughthe discovery process, or

• as required by law.

In addition, once GM collects or receives data,GM may:

• use the data for GM research needs,

• make it available for research whereappropriate confidentiality is to be maintainedand need is shown, or

• share summary data which is not tied to aspecific vehicle with non-GM organizationsfor research purposes.

Others, such as law enforcement, may haveaccess to the special equipment that can read theinformation if they have access to the vehicleor the device that stores the data.

If your vehicle has OnStar®, please check theOnStar® subscription service agreement or manualfor information on its operations and datacollection.


Collision Damage RepairIf your vehicle is involved in a collision and it isdamaged, have the damage repaired by a qualifiedtechnician using the proper equipment andquality replacement parts. Poorly performedcollision repairs will diminish your vehicle’s resalevalue, and safety performance can becompromised in subsequent collisions.

Collision PartsGenuine GM Collision parts are new parts madewith the same materials and construction methodsas the parts with which your vehicle wasoriginally built. Genuine GM Collision parts areyour best choice to assure that your vehicle’sdesigned appearance, durability and safety arepreserved. The use of Genuine GM parts can helpmaintain your GM New Vehicle Warranty.

Recycled original equipment parts may also beused for repair. These parts are typically removedfrom vehicles that were total losses in prioraccidents. In most cases, the parts being recycledare from undamaged sections of the vehicle.

A recycled original equipment GM part, may be anacceptable choice to maintain your vehicle’soriginally designed appearance and safetyperformance, however, the history of these partsis not known. Such parts are not covered byyour GM New Vehicle Limited Warranty, and anyrelated failures are not covered by that warranty.

Aftermarket collision parts are also available. Theseare made by companies other than GM and maynot have been tested for your vehicle. As a result,these parts may fit poorly, exhibit prematuredurability/corrosion problems, and may not performproperly in subsequent collisions. Aftermarket partsare not covered by your GM New Vehicle LimitedWarranty, and any vehicle failure related to suchparts are not covered by that warranty.

Repair FacilityGM also recommends that you choose a collisionrepair facility that meets your needs before youever need collision repairs. Your GM dealermay have a collision repair center with GM-trainedtechnicians and state of the art equipment, orbe able to recommend a collision repair center thathas GM-trained technicians and comparableequipment.


Insuring Your VehicleProtect your investment in your GM vehicle withcomprehensive and collision insurance coverage.There are significant differences in the qualityof coverage afforded by various insurance policyterms. Many insurance policies provide reducedprotection to your GM vehicle by limitingcompensation for damage repairs by usingaftermarket collision parts. Some insurancecompanies will not specify aftermarket collisionparts. When purchasing insurance, we recommendthat you assure your vehicle will be repairedwith GM original equipment collision parts. If suchinsurance coverage is not available from yourcurrent insurance carrier, consider switchingto another insurance carrier.

If your vehicle is leased, the leasing company mayrequire you to have insurance that assuresrepairs with Genuine GM Original EquipmentManufacturer (OEM) parts or GenuineManufacturer replacement parts. Read your leasecarefully, as you may be charged at the end ofyour lease for poor quality repairs.

If an Accident OccursHere is what to do if you are involved in anaccident.

• Try to relax and then check to make sure youare all right. If you are uninjured, make surethat no one else in your vehicle, or theother vehicle, is injured.

• If there has been an injury, call 911 for help.Do not leave the scene of an accident untilall matters have been taken care of. Moveyour vehicle only if its position puts youin danger or you are instructed to move it by apolice officer.

• Give only the necessary and requestedinformation to police and other parties involvedin the accident. Do not discuss your personalcondition, mental frame of mind, or anythingunrelated to the accident. This will help guardagainst post-accident legal action.

• If you need roadside assistance, callGM Roadside Assistance. See RoadsideService on page 493 for more information.


• If your vehicle cannot be driven, know wherethe towing service will be taking it. Get acard from the tow truck operator or write downthe driver’s name, the service’s name, andthe phone number.

• Remove any valuables from your vehiclebefore it is towed away. Make sure thisincludes your insurance information andregistration if you keep these items in yourvehicle.

• Gather the important information you will needfrom the other driver. Things like name,address, phone number, driver’s licensenumber, vehicle license plate, vehicle make,model and model year, Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN), insurance company andpolicy number, and a general description ofthe damage to the other vehicle.

• If possible, call your insurance company fromthe scene of the accident. They will walk youthrough the information they will need. Ifthey ask for a police report, phone or go tothe police department headquarters thenext day and you can get a copy of the reportfor a nominal fee. In some states/provinceswith “no fault” insurance laws, a report may notbe necessary. This is especially true if thereare no injuries and both vehicles are driveable.

• Choose a reputable collision repair facilityfor your vehicle. Whether you select aGM dealer or a private collision repair facilityto fix the damage, make sure you arecomfortable with them. Remember, you willhave to feel comfortable with their workfor a long time.

• Once you have an estimate, read it carefullyand make sure you understand what workwill be performed on your vehicle. If you havea question, ask for an explanation. Reputableshops welcome this opportunity.


Managing the Vehicle DamageRepair ProcessIn the event that your vehicle requires damagerepairs, GM recommends that you take an activerole in its repair. If you have a pre-determinedrepair facility of choice, take your vehicle there, orhave it towed there. Specify to the facility thatany required replacement collision parts be originalequipment parts, either new Genuine GM partsor recycled original GM parts. Remember, recycledparts will not be covered by your GM vehiclewarranty.

Insurance pays the bill for the repair, but you mustlive with the repair. Depending on your policylimits, your insurance company may initially valuethe repair using aftermarket parts.

Discuss this with your repair professional, andinsist on Genuine GM parts. Remember ifyour vehicle is leased you may be obligated tohave the vehicle repaired with Genuine GM parts,even if your insurance coverage does not paythe full cost.

If another party’s insurance company is paying forthe repairs, you are not obligated to accept arepair valuation based on that insurancecompany’s collision policy repair limits, as youhave no contractual limits with that company. Insuch cases, you can have control of the repair andparts choices as long as cost stays withinreasonable limits.


Reporting Safety Defects

Reporting Safety Defects to theUnited States GovernmentIf you believe that your vehicle has a defect whichcould cause a crash or could cause injury ordeath, you should immediately inform the NationalHighway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA),in addition to notifying General Motors.

If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may openan investigation, and if it finds that a safetydefect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order arecall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSAcannot become involved in individual problemsbetween you, your dealer, or General Motors.

To contact NHTSA, you may call the VehicleSafety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY:1-800-424-9153); go to http://www.safercar.gov; orwrite to:

Administrator, NHTSA400 Seventh Street, SW.Washington, D.C. 20590

You can also obtain other information about motorvehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov.

Reporting Safety Defects tothe Canadian GovernmentIf you live in Canada, and you believe that yourvehicle has a safety defect, you shouldimmediately notify Transport Canada, in additionto notifying General Motors of Canada Limited.You may call them at 1-800-333-0510 or write to:

Transport CanadaRoad Safety Branch2780 Sheffield RoadOttawa, Ontario K1B 3V9


Reporting Safety Defects toGeneral MotorsIn addition to notifying NHTSA (or TransportCanada) in a situation like this, we certainly hopeyou will notify us. Please call us at1-800-458-8006, or write:

Cadillac Customer Assistance CenterCadillac Motor Car DivisionP.O. Box 33169Detroit, MI 48232-5169

In Canada, please call us at 1-888-446-2000. Or,write:

Canadian Cadillac Customer CommunicationCentre, CA1-163-005General Motors of Canada Limited1908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7

Service Publications OrderingInformation

Service ManualsService Manuals have the diagnosis and repairinformation on engines, transmission, axlesuspension, brakes, electrical, steering, body, etc.

Transmission, Transaxle, TransferCase Unit Repair ManualThis manual provides information on unit repairservice procedures, adjustments, andspecifications for GM transmissions, transaxles,and transfer cases.

Service BulletinsService Bulletins give technical service informationneeded to knowledgeably service GM cars andtrucks. Each bulletin contains instructions to assistin the diagnosis and service of your vehicle.

In Canada, information pertaining to ProductService Bulletins can be obtained by contactingyour General Motors dealer or by calling1-800-GM-DRIVE (1-800-463-7483).


Owner InformationOwner publications are written specifically forowners and intended to provide basic operationalinformation about the vehicle. The owner’smanual will include the Maintenance Schedule forall models.

In-Portfolio: Includes a Portfolio, Owner Manual,and Warranty Booklet.

RETAIL SELL PRICE: $35.00

Without Portfolio: Owner Manual only.

RETAIL SELL PRICE: $25.00

Current and Past Model Order FormsTechnical Service Bulletins and Manuals areavailable for current and past model GM vehicles.To request an order form, please specify yearand model name of the vehicle.

ORDER TOLL FREE: 1-800-551-4123Monday-Friday 8:00 AM - 6:00 PMEastern TimeFor Credit Card Orders Only(VISA-MasterCard-Discover), visit Helm, Inc. at:www.helminc.com

Or you can write to:

Helm, IncorporatedP.O. Box 07130Detroit, MI 48207

Prices are subject to change without notice andwithout incurring obligation. Allow ample timefor delivery.

Note to Canadian Customers: All listed prices arequoted in U.S. funds. Canadian residents areto make checks payable in U.S. funds.


AAccessories and Modifications ..................... 347Accessory Power Outlet(s) .......................... 186Adding Equipment to Your

Airbag-Equipped Vehicle ............................ 88Additives, Fuel ............................................ 350Add-On Electrical Equipment ....................... 454Adjustable Throttle and Brake Pedal ............ 120Air Cleaner/Filter, Engine ............................. 365Air Conditioning ........................................... 189Airbag

Passenger Status Indicator ....................... 202Readiness Light ....................................... 201

Airbag Sensing and DiagnosticModule (SDM) .......................................... 498

Airbag System ............................................... 70Adding Equipment to Your

Airbag-Equipped Vehicle ......................... 88How Does an Airbag Restrain? .................. 79Passenger Sensing System ....................... 81Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle ..... 87What Makes an Airbag Inflate? .................. 79What Will You See After an

Airbag Inflates? ...................................... 80

Airbag System (cont.)When Should an Airbag Inflate? ................. 77Where Are the Airbags? ............................. 73

All-Wheel Drive ........................................... 392All-Wheel-Drive (AWD) System .................... 284Analog Clock ............................................... 188Antenna, Diversity Antenna System ............. 272Antenna, XM™ Satellite Radio

Antenna System ....................................... 272Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) .................... 279Anti-Lock Brake, System Warning Light ....... 205Appearance Care

Aluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheels ........ 449Care of Safety Belts ................................ 447Chemical Paint Spotting ........................... 451Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses .............. 448Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle .......... 443Fabric/Carpet ........................................... 445Finish Care .............................................. 448Finish Damage ......................................... 451Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and

Other Plastic Surfaces .......................... 446Leather .................................................... 446Sheet Metal Damage ............................... 450Speaker Covers ....................................... 447


Appearance Care (cont.)Tires ........................................................ 450Underbody Maintenance ........................... 451Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials .......... 452Washing Your Vehicle .............................. 447Weatherstrips ........................................... 447Windshield and Wiper Blades ................... 449Wood Panels ........................................... 447

Ashtray(s) .................................................... 187Audio System(s) .......................................... 240

Audio Steering Wheel Controls ................. 269Care of Your CD Player ........................... 271Care of Your CDs .................................... 271Diversity Antenna System ......................... 272Navigation/Radio System,

see Navigation Manual ......................... 266Radio with CD ......................................... 246Rear Seat Audio (RSA) ............................ 266Setting the Time .............................. 242, 244Theft-Deterrent Feature ............................ 268Understanding Radio Reception ............... 270XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna System ...... 272

Automatic TransmissionFluid ........................................................ 367Operation ................................................. 122

BBattery ........................................................ 385

Electric Power Management ..................... 183Exterior Lighting Battery Saver ................. 181

Before Leaving on a Long Trip .................... 313Brake

Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) ................. 279Emergencies ............................................ 281Panic Assist ............................................. 284Parking .................................................... 127System Warning Light .............................. 204

Brake Pedal, Throttle ................................... 120Brakes ........................................................ 381Braking ....................................................... 278Braking in Emergencies ............................... 281Break-In, New Vehicle ................................. 116Bulb Replacement ....................................... 396

Halogen Bulbs ......................................... 396High Intensity Discharge (HID)

Lighting ................................................ 396Buying New Tires ........................................ 416


CCalibration ................................................... 134California Fuel ............................................. 350California Proposition 65 Warning ................ 347Canadian Owners ........................................... 3Capacities and Specifications ...................... 464Carbon Monoxide .............. 104, 132, 317, 331Care of

Safety Belts ............................................. 447Your CD Player ........................................ 271Your CDs ................................................. 271

Cargo Cover ............................................... 155Cargo Management System ........................ 155CD, MP3 ..................................................... 257Cell Phone Storage Area ............................. 154Center Console Storage Area ...................... 154Chains, Tire ................................................. 422Charging System Light ................................ 204Check

Engine Light ............................................ 208Checking Things Under the Hood ................ 354Chemical Paint Spotting .............................. 451

Child RestraintsChild Restraint Systems ............................. 49Infants and Young Children ........................ 46Lower Anchors and Tethers for

Children .................................................. 55Older Children ........................................... 43Securing a Child Restraint in a

Rear Seat Position ................................. 62Securing a Child Restraint in the

Right Front Seat Position ........................ 65Where to Put the Restraint ........................ 53

Cigarette Lighter .......................................... 187Cleaning

Aluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheels ........ 449Exterior Lamps/Lenses ............................. 448Fabric/Carpet ........................................... 445Finish Care .............................................. 448Inside of Your Vehicle .............................. 443Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and

Other Plastic Surfaces .......................... 446Leather .................................................... 446Speaker Covers ....................................... 447Tires ........................................................ 450


Cleaning (cont.)Underbody Maintenance ........................... 451Washing Your Vehicle .............................. 447Weatherstrips ........................................... 447Windshield and Wiper Blades ................... 449Wood Panels ........................................... 447

Climate Control SystemAir Filter, Passenger Compartment ........... 195Dual ......................................................... 189Outlet Adjustment ..................................... 194Rear Air Conditioning System ................... 195

Clock ......................................... 188, 242, 244Collision Damage Repair ............................. 500Comfort Guides, Rear Safety Belt ................. 39Compact Spare Tire .................................... 442Compass ..................................................... 134Control of a Vehicle ..................................... 278Coolant

Engine Temperature Gage ........................ 207Engine Temperature Warning Light ........... 206Heater, Engine ......................................... 121Surge Tank Pressure Cap ........................ 371

Cooling System ........................................... 374

Cruise Control ............................................. 174Cruise Control Light .................................... 212Cupholder(s) ................................................ 154Customer Assistance Information

Courtesy Transportation ........................... 496Customer Assistance for Text

Telephone (TTY) Users ......................... 491Customer Assistance Offices .................... 491Customer Satisfaction Procedure .............. 488GM Mobility Reimbursement

Program ............................................... 492Reporting Safety Defects to

General Motors ..................................... 505Reporting Safety Defects to the

Canadian Government .......................... 504Reporting Safety Defects to the

United States Government .................... 504Roadside Service ..................................... 493Service Publications Ordering

Information ........................................... 505


DDaytime Running Lamps ............................. 179Defensive Driving ........................................ 274Delayed Locking .......................................... 102Disc, MP3 ................................................... 257Diversity Antenna System ............................ 272Doing Your Own Service Work .................... 348Door

Central Door Unlocking System ................ 101Delayed Locking ...................................... 102Locks ....................................................... 100Power Door Locks ................................... 101Programmable Automatic Door Locks ....... 102Rear Door Security Locks ........................ 103

DriverPosition, Safety Belt ................................... 27

Driver Information Center (DIC) ................... 214DIC Controls and Displays ....................... 215DIC Vehicle Customization ....................... 231DIC Warnings and Messages ................... 220

DrivingAt Night ................................................... 306City .......................................................... 311Defensive ................................................. 274

Driving (cont.)Drunken ................................................... 275Freeway ................................................... 312Hill and Mountain Roads .......................... 315In Rain and on Wet Roads ...................... 308Off-Road .................................................. 291Rocking Your Vehicle to Get it Out .......... 322Winter ...................................................... 317

Dual Climate Control System ....................... 189DVD

Rear Seat Entertainment System ............. 266

EElectric Power Management ........................ 183Electrical System

Add-On Equipment ................................... 454Fuses and Circuit Breakers ...................... 455Power Windows and Other

Power Options ...................................... 454Rear Underseat Fuse Block ............ 460, 462Underhood Fuse Block ............................. 455Windshield Wiper Fuses ........................... 454


EngineAir Cleaner/Filter ...................................... 365Battery ..................................................... 385Check and Service Engine Soon Light ..... 208Coolant .................................................... 368Coolant Heater ......................................... 121Coolant Temperature Gage ...................... 207Coolant Temperature Warning Light .......... 206Drive Belt Routing .................................... 483Engine Compartment Overview ................ 356Exhaust ................................................... 132Oil ........................................................... 360Oil Life System ........................................ 363Overheated Protection Operating Mode .... 374Overheating ............................................. 372Speed Limiter .......................................... 199Starting .................................................... 119

Entry Lighting .............................................. 182Event Data Recorders (EDR) ...................... 498Extender, Safety Belt ..................................... 42Exterior Lighting Battery Saver .................... 181

FFilter

Engine Air Cleaner ................................... 365Finish Damage ............................................ 451Flashers, Hazard Warning ........................... 166Flash-to-Pass .............................................. 169Flat Tire ...................................................... 423Flat Tire, Changing ...................................... 424Flat Tire, Storing ......................................... 439Fluid

Automatic Transmission ............................ 367Power Steering ........................................ 379Windshield Washer .................................. 380

Fog Lamp Light ........................................... 212Fog Lamps .................................................. 181Front Axle ................................................... 395Fuel ............................................................ 349

Additives .................................................. 350California Fuel .......................................... 350Filling a Portable Fuel Container .............. 354Filling Your Tank ...................................... 352Fuels in Foreign Countries ....................... 351


Fuel (cont.)Gage ....................................................... 213Gasoline Octane ...................................... 349Gasoline Specifications ............................ 350

FusesFuses and Circuit Breakers ...................... 455Rear Underseat Fuse Block ............ 460, 462Underhood Fuse Block ............................. 455Windshield Wiper ..................................... 454

GGage

Engine Coolant Temperature .................... 207Fuel ......................................................... 213Speedometer ........................................... 199Tachometer .............................................. 199

Garage Door Opener ................................... 143Gasoline

Octane ..................................................... 349Specifications ........................................... 350

Glove Box ................................................... 153GM Mobility Reimbursement Program .......... 492

HHazard Warning Flashers ............................ 166Head Restraints ............................................ 17Headlamps .................................................. 178

Bulb Replacement .................................... 396Daytime Running Lamps .......................... 179Flash-to-Pass ........................................... 169Halogen Bulbs ......................................... 396High Intensity Discharge (HID) Lighting .... 396High/Low Beam Changer ......................... 169On Reminder ........................................... 179Washer .................................................... 173Wiper Activated ........................................ 178

Heated Seats ................................................ 11Heater ......................................................... 189Highbeam On Light ..................................... 213High-Speed Operation, Tires ........................ 409Highway Hypnosis ....................................... 314Hill and Mountain Roads ............................. 315Hood

Checking Things Under ............................ 354Release ................................................... 355


Horn ............................................................ 166How to Use This Manual ................................ 4How to Wear Safety Belts Properly ............... 27

IIgnition Positions ......................................... 117Infants and Young Children, Restraints .......... 46Inflation - Tire Pressure ............................... 407Instrument Panel

Overview .................................................. 164Instrument Panel (I/P)

Brightness ................................................ 181Cluster ..................................................... 198

JJump Starting .............................................. 386

KKeyless Entry System ................................... 94Keys ............................................................. 93

LLabeling, Tire Sidewall ................................. 401Lamps

Electric Power Management ..................... 183Exterior Lighting Battery Saver ................. 181Fog .......................................................... 181Reading ................................................... 182

LATCH SystemChild Restraints ......................................... 55

Level Control ............................................... 330Liftgate, Power ............................................ 104Light

Airbag Readiness ..................................... 201Anti-Lock Brake System Warning ............. 205Brake System Warning ............................. 204Charging System ..................................... 204Cruise Control .......................................... 212Engine Coolant Temperature Warning ....... 206Fog Lamp ................................................ 212Highbeam On .......................................... 213Lights On Reminder ................................. 212Malfunction Indicator ................................ 208Oil Pressure ............................................. 211Passenger Airbag Status Indicator ............ 202Passenger Safety Belt Reminder .............. 200


Light (cont.)Safety Belt Reminder ............................... 200Security ................................................... 212TCS Warning Light .................................. 206Tire Pressure ........................................... 207Tow/Haul Mode ........................................ 213Traction Control System (TCS)

Warning ................................................ 206Lighting

Entry ........................................................ 182Parade Dimming ...................................... 182

Limited-Slip Rear Axle ................................. 283Loading Your Vehicle ................................... 322Lockout Protection ....................................... 104Locks

Central Door Unlocking System ................ 101Delayed Locking ...................................... 102Door ........................................................ 100Lockout Protection ................................... 104Power Door ............................................. 101Programmable Automatic Door Locks ....... 102Rear Door Security Locks ........................ 103

Loss of Control ........................................... 289Luggage Carrier .......................................... 154Lumbar

Power Controls .......................................... 10

MMagnetic Ride Control ................................. 283Maintenance Schedule

Additional Required Services .................... 473At Each Fuel Fill ...................................... 476At Least Once a Month ............................ 477At Least Once a Year .............................. 477Introduction .............................................. 468Maintenance Footnotes ............................ 474Maintenance Record ................................ 484Maintenance Requirements ...................... 468Normal Maintenance Replacement

Parts .................................................... 482Owner Checks and Services .................... 476Recommended Fluids and Lubricants ....... 480Scheduled Maintenance ........................... 471Using ....................................................... 469Your Vehicle and the Environment ............ 468

Malfunction Indicator Light ........................... 208Manual Seats .................................................. 9Memory Seat and Mirrors .............................. 12Message

DIC Warnings and Messages ................... 220


MirrorsAutomatic Dimming Rearview

with OnStar® ........................................ 134Automatic Dimming Rearview

with OnStar® and Compass .................. 134Outside Automatic Dimming Mirror ........... 138Outside Convex Mirror ............................. 139Outside Curb View Assist Mirror ............... 138Outside Power Heated Mirrors ................. 137

MP3 ............................................................ 257MyGMLink.com ............................................ 490

NNavigation/Radio System,

see Navigation Manual ............................. 266New Vehicle Break-In .................................. 116Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts ..... 482

OOdometer .................................................... 199Off-Road Driving .......................................... 291Off-Road Recovery ...................................... 287

OilEngine ..................................................... 360Pressure Light .......................................... 211

Oil, Engine Oil Life System ......................... 363Older Children, Restraints ............................. 43Online Owner Center ................................... 490OnStar® System, see OnStar® Manual ........ 139Operation, Universal Home Remote

System ............................................ 144, 150Other Warning Devices ................................ 166Outlet Adjustment ........................................ 194Outlet(s), Accessory Power .......................... 186Outside

Automatic Dimming Mirror ........................ 138Convex Mirror .......................................... 139Curb View Assist Mirror ........................... 138Power Heated Mirrors .............................. 137

Overheated Engine ProtectionOperating Mode ....................................... 374

Owner Checks and Services ....................... 476Owners, Canadian .......................................... 3


PPaint, Damage ............................................ 451Panic Brake Assist ...................................... 284Parade Dimming .......................................... 182Park Aid ...................................................... 184Park (P)

Shifting Into ............................................. 129Shifting Out of ......................................... 131

ParkingAssist ....................................................... 184Brake ....................................................... 127Over Things That Burn ............................ 131

Passenger Airbag Status Indicator ............... 202Passenger Compartment Air Filter ............... 195Passenger Sensing System ........................... 81Passing ....................................................... 287PASS-Key® III+ ........................................... 114PASS-Key® III+ Operation ........................... 114Power

Accessory Outlet(s) .................................. 186Door Locks .............................................. 101Electrical System ..................................... 454Liftgate ..................................................... 104Lumbar Controls ........................................ 10Retained Accessory (RAP) ....................... 118Seat .......................................................... 10

Power (cont.)Steering Fluid .......................................... 379Windows .................................................. 109

Pretensioners, Safety Belt ............................. 42Programmable Automatic Door Locks .......... 102

QQuestions and Answers

About Safety Belts ..................................... 26

RRadios ........................................................ 240

Care of Your CD Player ........................... 271Care of Your CDs .................................... 271Navigation/Radio System,

see Navigation Manual ......................... 266Radio with CD ......................................... 246Rear Seat Audio ...................................... 266Setting the Time .............................. 242, 244Theft-Deterrent ......................................... 268Understanding Reception ......................... 270

Reading Lamps ........................................... 182Rear Air Conditioning System ...................... 195Rear Axle .................................................... 394

Limited-Slip .............................................. 283


Rear Door Security Locks ........................... 103Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides .................. 39Rear Seat Audio (RSA) ............................... 266Rear Seat Entertainment System ................. 266Rear Seat Operation ..................................... 18Rear Seat Passengers, Safety Belts .............. 36Rear Windshield Washer/Wiper .................... 172Rearview Mirror, Automatic Dimming

with OnStar® ............................................ 134Rearview Mirror, Automatic Dimming

with OnStar® and Compass ..................... 134Reclining Seatbacks ...................................... 14Recommended Fluids and Lubricants .......... 480Recreational Vehicle Towing ........................ 328Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System ............ 94Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System,

Operation ................................................... 96Removing the Flat Tire and Installing

the Spare Tire .......................................... 429Removing the Spare Tire and Tools ............ 426Reporting Safety Defects

Canadian Government ............................. 504General Motors ........................................ 505United States Government ....................... 504

Restraint System CheckChecking the Restraint Systems ................. 89

Restraint System Check (cont.)Replacing Restraint System Parts

After a Crash ......................................... 90Retained Accessory Power (RAP) ................ 118Right Front Passenger Position,

Safety Belts ............................................... 36Roadside

Service .................................................... 493Rocking Your Vehicle to Get it Out .............. 322Routing, Engine Drive Belt .......................... 483Running the Engine While Parked ............... 133

SSafety Belt

Passenger Reminder Light ....................... 200Pretensioners ............................................. 42Reminder Light ........................................ 200

Safety BeltsCare of .................................................... 447Driver Position ........................................... 27How to Wear Safety Belts Properly ............ 27Questions and Answers About

Safety Belts ............................................ 26Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides ............... 39


Safety Belts (cont.)Rear Seat Passengers ............................... 36Right Front Passenger Position .................. 36Safety Belt Extender .................................. 42Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy ............. 35Safety Belts Are for Everyone .................... 22

Safety Warnings and Symbols ......................... 4Scheduled Maintenance ............................... 471Seats

Head Restraints ......................................... 17Heated Seats ............................................. 11Manual ........................................................ 9Memory, Mirrors ......................................... 12Power Lumbar ........................................... 10Power Seats .............................................. 10Rear Seat Operation .................................. 18Reclining Seatbacks ................................... 14Stowable Seat ........................................... 20

Secondary Latch System ............................. 436Securing a Child Restraint

Rear Seat Position ..................................... 62Right Front Seat Position ........................... 65

Security Light .............................................. 212

Service ........................................................ 346Accessories and Modifications .................. 347Adding Equipment to the Outside

of Your Vehicle ..................................... 348California Proposition 65 Warning ............. 347Doing Your Own Work ............................. 348Engine Soon Light ................................... 208Publications Ordering Information ............. 505

Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle ......... 87Sheet Metal Damage ................................... 450Shifting Into Park (P) ................................... 129Shifting Out of Park (P) ............................... 131Signals, Turn and Lane-Change .................. 168Spare Tire

Compact .................................................. 442Installing .................................................. 429Removing ................................................ 426Storing ..................................................... 439

Specifications, Capacities ............................ 464Speedometer ............................................... 199StabiliTrak® System ..................................... 283Starting Your Engine ................................... 119Steering ...................................................... 285


Steering Wheel Controls, Audio ................... 269Steering Wheel, Tilt Wheel .......................... 166Storage Areas

Cargo Management System ..................... 155Cell Phone Storage Area ......................... 154Center Console Storage Area ................... 154Cupholder(s) ............................................ 154Glove Box ................................................ 153Luggage Carrier ....................................... 154

Stowable Seat ............................................... 20Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice, or Snow ............... 321Sun Visors .................................................. 112Sunroof .............................................. 156, 158

TTachometer ................................................. 199TCS Warning Light ...................................... 206Theft-Deterrent, Radio ................................. 268Theft-Deterrent System ................................ 112Theft-Deterrent Systems .............................. 112

PASS-Key® III+ ........................................ 114PASS-Key® III+ Operation ........................ 114

Throttle, Adjustable ...................................... 120

Tilt Wheel .................................................... 166Time, Setting ...................................... 242, 244Tire

Pressure Light .......................................... 207Tires ........................................................... 398

Aluminum or Chrome-PlatedWheels, Cleaning .................................. 449

Buying New Tires ..................................... 416Chains ..................................................... 422Changing a Flat Tire ................................ 424Cleaning .................................................. 450Compact Spare Tire ................................. 442Different Size ........................................... 418High-Speed Operation .............................. 409If a Tire Goes Flat ................................... 423Inflation - Tire Pressure ............................ 407Inspection and Rotation ............................ 414Installing the Spare Tire ........................... 429Pressure Monitor System ......................... 410Removing the Flat Tire ............................. 429Removing the Spare Tire and Tools ......... 426Secondary Latch System ......................... 436Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools ..... 439Tire Sidewall Labeling .............................. 401


Tires (cont.)Tire Terminology and Definitions ............... 404Uniform Tire Quality Grading .................... 419Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance ........... 420Wheel Replacement ................................. 421When It Is Time for New Tires ................. 416Winter Tires ............................................. 400

Tow/Haul Mode ........................................... 126Tow/Haul Mode Light ................................... 213Towing

Recreational Vehicle ................................. 328Towing a Trailer ....................................... 331Your Vehicle ............................................. 328

TractionControl System (TCS) .............................. 281Control System Warning Light .................. 206Limited-Slip Rear Axle .............................. 283Magnetic Ride Control .............................. 283StabiliTrak® System ................................. 283

TransmissionFluid, Automatic ....................................... 367

Transmission Operation, Automatic .............. 122Turn and Lane-Change Signals ................... 168Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever .................... 167

UUltrasonic Rear Parking Assist (URPA) ........ 184Understanding Radio Reception ................... 270Uniform Tire Quality Grading ....................... 419Universal Home Remote System ................. 143

Operation ........................................ 144, 150

VVehicle

Control ..................................................... 278Damage Warnings ....................................... 5Loading .................................................... 322Symbols ...................................................... 5

Vehicle Customization, DIC ......................... 231Vehicle Data Collection and Event

Data Recorders ........................................ 498Vehicle Identification

Number (VIN) .......................................... 453Service Parts Identification Label .............. 453

Ventilation Adjustment .................................. 194Visors .......................................................... 112


WWarning Lights, Gages and Indicators ......... 197Warnings

DIC Warnings and Messages ................... 220Hazard Warning Flashers ......................... 166Other Warning Devices ............................ 166Safety and Symbols ..................................... 4Vehicle Damage .......................................... 5

WheelsAlignment and Tire Balance ..................... 420Different Size ........................................... 418Replacement ............................................ 421

Where to Put the Restraint ............................ 53Windows ..................................................... 108

Power ...................................................... 109Windshield

Washer .................................................... 171Washer Fluid ........................................... 380

Windshield (cont.)Wiper Blade Replacement ........................ 397Wiper Blades, Cleaning ............................ 449Wiper Fuses ............................................ 454Wipers ..................................................... 170

Windshield, Rear Washer/Wiper ................... 172Winter Driving ............................................. 317Winter Tires ................................................. 400Wiper Activated Headlamps ......................... 178

XXM Radio Messages ................................... 264XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna System ......... 272

YYour Vehicle and the Environment ............... 468


Documents

2007 Cadillac SRX Owner Manual M - Dealer eProcesscdn.dealereprocess.com/cdn/servicemanuals/cadillac/2007...Service and Appearance Care 343 Service 346 Fuel 349 Checking Things Under